Etymological Dictionary of Proto-Nostratic Online
Allan R. Bomhard
This book is a comprehensive comparison of Proto-Indo-European, in all its stages of development and in all its aspects, with various other language families of Northern Eurasia, the Middle East, and the Indian subcontinent. It is an attempt to show that Proto-Indo-European is not genetically isolated but, rather, belongs to a larger linguistic grouping, namely, the Nostratic macrofamily. For the first time, all aspects of the putative proto-language are discussed in detail: phonology, morphology, vocabulary, syntax, and homelands. Copious references are given throughout to the relevant literature and the book ends with an English-Nostratic index. Also for the first time, a sizable amount of material has been included from Eskimo-Aleut and Chukchi-Kamchatkan. This book is, therefore, the most important contribution to Nostratic linguistics to appear to date.
See Brill.com for more information on print edition.
- Author
- Introduction, History of Research, and Methodology
- A Survey of the Nostratic Languages
- Bibliography
Reconstructing Proto-Nostratic Online; Comparative Phonology, Morphology, and Vocabulary
CHAPTER ONE
Introduction, History of Research, and Methodology
1.1. Introduction
Distant (or long-range) linguistic comparison seeks to investigate the possibility that certain languages or language families, not previously thought to be genetically related, at least not “closely” related, might indeed be part of still larger groupings, which may be called “macrofamilies”.
This book will focus on Indo-European. The purpose is to show that Indo-European is not genetically isolated but, rather, that it is distantly related to certain other language families of northern and central Eurasia, the Indian subcontinent, and the ancient Near East. Where appropriate, issues concerning the other language families with which Indo-European is most likely related will also be discussed.
1.2. History of Research
From the very earliest days of Indo-European comparative linguistics, there have been speculations about the possible genetic relationship of Indo-European to other language families. Though, in the course of study, many striking similarities were noted between Indo-European and certain other language phyla, notably Uralic and Afrasian (formerly called Hamito-Semitic, Semito-Hamitic, Afroasiatic, Erythraic, and Lisramic), truly convincing evidence of distant linguistic relationship was simply not brought forth. Indeed, much of the early work was not of high quality and did more to discredit the attempt to discover possible relatives of Indo-European than to help. Gradually, the intellectual climate, especially in the United States, became hostile to long-range comparison, and Indo-European remained an orphan with no known relatives.
In the first half of the nineteenth century, no less a figure than one of the founders of Indo-European comparative grammar, Franz Bopp, investigated possible relationship of Indo-European with Kartvelian (in 1846 and 1847) on the one hand and with Malayo-Polynesian (in 1840) on the other. In the mid-1860’s, Rudolf von Raumer (in 1863) and Graziadio Ascoli (in 1864) claimed that Indo-European and Semitic were related. At about the same time (in 1869), Vilhelm Thomsen proposed relationship between Indo-European and Finno-Ugrian. This proposal was later (in 1879) explored in depth by the Estonian Nicolai Anderson and (in 1900) by the British phonetician Henry Sweet. Unfortunately, Anderson’s work contained too many errors to be of lasting value. However, insightful and solid contributions were made concerning the possible relationship of Indo-European and Uralic during the twentieth century by the Swedish Uralicist Björn Collinder. Towards the end of the nineteenth century (1873), the Semiticist Friedrich Delitzsch investigated lexical parallels between Indo-European and Semitic. Then, at the beginning of the twentieth century, the Danish linguist Hermann Möller, in the course of several publications, attempted to show that Indo-European and Semitic might be related. Möller’s work was later continued by the French linguist Albert Cuny, whose last publications date from the mid-1940’s. Möller’s and Cuny’s efforts were generally not highly regarded by the scholarly community. One exception was Möller’s student Holger Pedersen, who not only coined the term “Nostratic” but who also expanded the definition to include Indo-European, Semitic, Samoyed and Finno-Ugrian, Turkish, Mongolian, Manchu, Yukaghir, and Eskimo. Though Pedersen never published a systematic account of his views, he did make the following insightful observations (1931:335—338):
The question of the relationship among the Indo-European and foreign families of languages came up in the first period of comparative linguistics. Relationship between Semitic and Indo-European was asserted by Rudolf von Raumer, beginning in 1863, and by Ascoli from 1864 on. But convincing proof could not be expected at that time. Resemblances in the morphology of the two families are extremely few, and proof by means of vocabulary and the laws of sounds was not then understood. Schleicher denied most positively any relationship between the two, pointing to the great dissimilarity in the forms of the roots: in Semitic the roots consist of three syllables of very simple and uniform structure, as in Arabic "atala (root form and preterite of the verb ‘to kill’), while in Indo-European the roots are monosyllabic and of widely varying — partly heavily compounded — form, as in Latin ī-re ‘to go,’ stā-re ‘to stand,’ lub-et ‘it pleases,’ vert-ō ‘I turn,’ ed-ō ‘I eat,’ and so on. At that time nobody could weaken this argument. And it might have been added, although Schleicher did not do so, that the phonetic systems of the two language families are extremely different, as may be seen from a single example: in Semitic there is an abundance of gutturals, whereas in Indo-European there is not one, not even the (to us) ordinary h. With this in view, one might feel tempted to assent to Schleicher’s exclamation: “What weight have the few similarities in roots in the two language families against these sharp contrasts?” And one might well be disposed to neglect “the few similarities” which one could not help observing.
Nothing was changed in the problem by the first step in a systematic examination of the vocabulary which Friedrich Delitzsch took in his Studien über indogermanisch-semitische Wurzelverwandtschaft (1873). But the development of Indo-European linguistics changed the problem greatly. The monosyllabic form of Indo-European roots turned out to be an entirely secondary phenomenon: in historical times the roots of the words for heaven, god, or heart may appear to be *diw- or *ʔerd-, but we have good reason to believe that in the period older than that of the Indo-European parent language these roots had forms like *däyäwä-, or *ʔärädä- …, and that the phonological system in this older period had quite a different appearance from that which we attribute to the Indo-European language.
With this background, there appeared in 1906 an extraordinarily important work by the Danish scholar Hermann Möller, Semitisch und Indogermanisch. This is a splendid attempt to discover the laws controlling the relationship between Indo-European and Semitic consonants — a successful attempt, although only the main lines of development are traced. Time alone will show how far we can advance by Möller’s method. Certain it is, however, that the comparison of the two families can never be carried out so completely and in such detail as the comparison within the fields of the individual languages of one family.
But Indo-European has been brought into connection with other families besides Semitic. Vilhelm Thomsen, as early as 1869, indicated the possibility of a relationship with Finno-Ugrian, but he did not pursue the subject very far. In 1879, the Estonian Nicolai Anderson published an extensive work on the subject, the value of which is considerably impaired by its many errors. Great interest was awakened when the English scholar Henry Sweet advocated the relationship somewhat passionately in a little popular book, The History of Language (1900). However, among the individual similarities which Sweet mentions, some are incorrect, and his space was too limited to permit of actual proof. Trustworthy studies of some length by K. B. Wiklund and H. Paasonen appeared in 1906 and 1908. After these works it seemed unnecessary to doubt the relationship further.
Moreover, the inflectional systems show much greater relationships than in the case of Semitic. The original ending of the accusative case in Finno-Ugrian was -m, which in Finnish has changed to -n. The same ending is Indo-European:
Finnish Cheremissian Latin Greek
Nominative käsi hand kit vespera evening hespérā
Accusative käde-n kið-əm vespera-m hespérā-n
The similarities in the personal endings of verbs are especially striking:
Finnish Cheremissian Greek Sanskrit
1st person sg. kuolen I die kole-m é-phero-n I carried a-bhara-m
1st person pl. kuole-mme we die e-phéromen we carried
2nd person pl. kuole-tte you die e-phére-te you carried
Furthermore, there is an unmistakable similarity between the two families in a series of pronouns and in the negation ‘not’:
Finnish Latin
minä I (Lappish mon) mē me
sinä thou (s from t; Lapp. don) tē thee
Sanskrit
tä-mä this ta-
jo-ka who, which (relative) ya-
ku-ka who? (interrogative) ka-
Hungarian Old Norse
ne not ne not
It is impossible to regard all this as the result of accident. It is noteworthy, however, that the similarities hitherto pointed out in the more concrete part of the vocabulary are very few, although some of them are as striking as Finish nimi ‘name,’ and Latin nōmen. Consideration of the problem whether sound-laws still unknown to us, or morphological developments not yet understood, have obliterated the originally more numerous points of similarity, or whether the vocabulary in one of the families was largely renewed after the period in common, we must postpone until later. But to deny relationship between the families would be overbold.
If we accept relationship, we are led yet further afield, not only to Samoyed, which cannot be separated from Finno-Ugrian, but throughout all of Northern Asia and across the Bering Strait, because similar, though fainter, resemblances like those here cited are found also in Turkish, Mongolian and Manchu, in Yukaghir, and even in Eskimo. If, on the other hand, we agree in the matter of relationship with Semitic, then we must also accept relationship with the far-flung Hamitic family, and perhaps with Basque. And squarely in the midst between our supposed Northern and Southern relatives stand the Caucasian languages, which we cannot ignore, and various extinct languages in Asia Minor and thereabout. It is not impossible that some of the non-Indo-European languages of antiquity in Asia Minor were once most closely related of all to the Indo-European family.
As a comprehensive designation for the families of languages which are related to Indo-European, we may employ the expression Nostratian Languages (from Latin nostrās ‘our countryman’). The boundaries for the Nostratian world of languages cannot yet be determined, but the area is enormous, and includes such widely divergent races that one becomes almost dizzy at the thought.
In 1969, Linus Brunner published a detailed comparison of the Indo-European and Semitic vocabularies, and this was followed in 1980 by a wider comparison of languages undertaken by Kalevi E. Koskinen. We should note also that, though the investigation of problems relating to distant linguistic comparison was generally ignored by the vast majority of mainstream linguists, the field was never completely dormant — a small but persistent group of scholars (Pentti Aalto, John Bengtson, Knut Bergsland, Václav Blažek, René Bonnerjea, Karl Bouda, Bojan Čop, Heinz Fähnrich, Joseph Greenberg, Panu Hakola, Carleton T. Hodge, Georgij A. Klimov, D. H. Koppelmann, Saul Levin, Karl H. Menges, Roy Andrew Miller, Shamil Nafiqoff, Mikolas Palmaitis, Stephen A. Tyler, Ants-Michael Uesson, C. C. Uhlenbeck, to name but a few of the many scholars working on long-range comparison) has continued to work, throughout the better part of the twentieth century and on into the twenty-first century, on binary (or, in rare cases, wider) comparisons of various languages that are currently considered to belong to the Nostratic macrofamily. For comprehensive bibliographies listing publications dealing with distant linguistic comparison, cf. Hegedűs 1992a, Landsberg 1986, Bomhard—Kerns 1994:715—864, and the list of references contained in this book.
Beginning in the mid-1960’s, the intellectual climate slowly began to turn around, and a growing number of linguists, especially in the former Soviet Union, have begun to turn attention toward investigating distant linguistic relationship. The revived interest was sparked by the work of Vladislav M. Illič-Svityč [Иллич-Свитыч] and Aaron B. Dolgopolsky [Долгополский], who first started working independently and, at a later date, through the efforts of their mutual friend Vladimir Dybo [Дыбо], cooperatively. Their work, though not without its own shortcomings, was the first successful demonstration that certain language phyla of northern and central Eurasia, the Indian subcontinent, and the ancient Near East might be genetically related. Following a proposal first made in 1903 by Holger Pedersen, they employed the name “Nostratic” to designate this grouping of languages. In particular, Illič-Svityč, in the course of several publications, culminating in his posthumous comparative Nostratic dictionary, which is still in the process of publication, included Indo-European, Kartvelian, Afrasian, Uralic, Dravidian, and Altaic in his version of the Nostratic macrofamily. From his very earliest writings, Dolgopolsky also included Chukchi-Kamchatkan and Eskimo-Aleut.
Before his tragic death in an automobile accident on 21 August 1966, Illič-Svityč had planned to prepare a comparative Nostratic dictionary listing over 600 Nostratic roots and tracing their development in detail in each of the daughter languages in which they were attested. He had published a preliminary report on his work in 1965 entitled (in English translation) “Materials for a Comparative Dictionary of the Nostratic Languages (Indo-European, Altaic, Uralic, Dravidian, Kartvelian, Hamito-Semitic)”. Working diligently, literally devoting all of his energy to the project, he had managed to prepare the entries for approximately 350 roots. After his death, Illič-Svityč’s work was prepared for publication by the dedicated efforts of Rimma Bulatova, Vladimir Dybo, and Aaron Dolgopolsky, with the result that the first volume of the dictionary appeared in 1971, containing 245 entries. A second, smaller volume appeared in 1976, listing entries 246 through 353 and ending with an index — this completed all of the material prepared by Illič-Svityč himself (by the time this volume appeared, Dolgopolsky was in the process of emigrating to Israel). Finally, the first fascicle of volume three appeared in 1984, containing entries 354 through 378, none of which was prepared by Illič-Svityč — it represents the collective efforts of a team of scholars.
In the meantime, Dolgopolsky has continued to make important contributions to Nostratic studies, especially in a 1984 paper on Nostratic pronouns, and currently has material to support the reconstruction of approximately 3,000 Nostratic roots. Unfortunately, only a small amount of this material has been published to date. Other Russian scholars have also done important research into problems affecting Nostratic — mention should be made of the work of Alexandra Y. Aikhenvald, N. D. Andrejev, M. S. Andronov, Vladimir Dybo, Eugene Helimskij, Vjačeslav V. Ivanov, G. Kornilov, Oleg Mudrak, Vitaly V. Shevoroshkin, Sergej A. Starostin, V. A. Terent'jev, Vladimir N. Toporov, and V. L. Tsymburskij, among others. Though not Russian (but clearly someone who belongs to the “Moscow School”), special recognition must be given to the Czech scholar Václav Bla²ek, who has published many important papers, most of which deal with the common Nostratic lexicon. Others who should be noted include Alexis Manaster Ramer and Irén Hegedűs — each has published a number of interesting papers on Nostratic.
Beginning with an article that appeared in Orbis in 1975, I published several studies, culminating in a 1984 book entitled Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, in which I tried to show that Indo-European and Semitic (later expanded to include all of Afrasian) might be distantly related. Reviews of this book as well as discussions with colleagues prompted me to expand the scope of my research to include other language families. This resulted in the publication in April 1994 of a joint monograph by myself and John C. Kerns entitled The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Study in Distant Linguistic Relationship. It was Kerns who prepared the chapter dealing with Nostratic morphology. This book supplies a great deal of lexical evidence from the Nostratic daughter languages to support the reconstruction of 601 Proto-Nostratic roots. In an article published in Orbis in 1995, I supplied material to support an additional 29 Proto-Nostratic roots, and another 21 etymologies were proposed in my 1996 book entitled Indo-European and the Nostratic Hypothesis. I have continued to gather lexical data, with the result that an additional two hundred Nostratic etymologies are included in this book. It should be noted that my views on Nostratic differ somewhat from those of Illič-Svityč (and others who follow his system) — the differences are discussed in §1.5 below.
The late Joseph Greenberg has prepared a two-volume work entitled Indo-European and its Closest Relatives: The Eurasiatic Language Family. The first volume, which was published at the beginning of 2000, deals with grammar, and the second, which was published at the beginning of 2002, deals with lexicon. Greenberg includes Indo-European, Uralic-Yukaghir, Altaic (Mongolian, Chuvash-Turkic, and Manchu-Tungus), Japanese-Korean (Korean, Ainu, and Japanese-Ryukyuan), Gilyak, Chukchi-Kamchatkan, and Eskimo-Aleut in his Eurasiatic language family. Unlike Illič-Svityč, Dolgopolsky, and myself, he does not include Kartvelian, Afrasian, nor Elamo-Dravidian — not because he believes that they are unrelated, but because he believes that these three language phyla are more distantly related to Indo-European than are the others, which, along with Indo-European, form a natural taxonomic subgrouping. My own opinion is close to that of Greenberg. As I see the situation, Nostratic includes Afrasian, Kartvelian, and Elamo-Dravidian as well as Eurasiatic; in other words, I view Nostratic as a higher-level taxonomic entity. Afrasian stands apart as an extremely ancient, independent branch — it was the first branch of Nostratic to separate from the rest of the Nostratic speech community. Younger are Kartvelian and Elamo-Dravidian. It is clear from an analysis of their vocabulary, pronominal stems, and morphological systems that Indo-European, Uralic-Yukaghir, Altaic, Gilyak, Chukchi-Kamchatkan, and Eskimo-Aleut are more closely related as a group than any one of them is to Afrasian, Kartvelian, and Elamo-Dravidian, and this is the reason that I follow Greenberg in setting up a distinct Eurasiatic subgroup within Nostratic. Finally, mention should be made of Sumerian, which I had investigated in previous works as a possible Nostratic daughter language. I now believe that Sumerian was not a Nostratic daughter language but that it is distantly related to Nostratic. It must be noted here that I have also changed my mind about the subgrouping of Kartvelian and Elamo-Dravidian. My present thinking is that Kartvelian is closer to Eurasiatic than what I indicated in my 1994 co-authored book and that the differences are due to the fact that Kartvelian became separated from Eurasiatic at a very early date. On the other hand, I now see Elamo-Dravidian as the second group (after Afrasian) to split from the rest of the Nostratic speech community. An attempt at subgrouping is shown in Chart 1 at the end of this chapter.
Interest in issues dealing with Nostratic has resulted in several conferences, the first of which was held in Moscow in 1972 to coincide with the publication of the first volume of Illič-Svityč’s comparative Nostratic dictionary. This was followed by a series of gatherings in Russia. Another major conference was held in Ann Arbor, Michigan, at the end of 1988. Organized by Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Benjamin Stolz, this symposium brought together scholars from East and West. A series of volumes under the editorship of Shevoroshkin has appeared as a result of this conference (published by Brockmeyer in Bochum, Germany). Shevoroshkin has also organized several smaller-scale, follow-up conferences. At the end of 1993, a workshop with the theme “The Second Workshop on Comparative Linguistics. The Status of Nostratic: Evidence and Evaluation” was organized at Eastern Michigan University, Ypsilanti, Michigan. Papers from this workshop were subsequently published in a volume co-edited by Brian Joseph and Joe Salmons (1998). Several important papers on Nostratic also appear in the recent festschrift for Vitalij Shevoroshkin (1997). In December 1997, a workshop on distant linguistic relationship was held at the Santa Fe Institute in Santa Fe, New Mexico — participants included scholars from around the world.
In early 1998, Dolgopolsky’s book entitled The Nostratic Hypothesis and Linguistic Paleontology was published. In this book, Dolgopolsky is mainly concerned with linguistic paleontology, and the focus of his attention, therefore, is on putative etyma pertaining to habitat, social organization, and material culture. Dolgopolsky’s conclusions are supported by a sample of 125 proposed cognate sets. The book ends with a reconstruction of the Proto-Nostratic phonological system and the reflexes of the consonants (but not the vowels) in the major branches of Nostratic. This book was the focus of a two-day symposium held in July 1998 under the auspices of the McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, Cambridge University, England. The proceedings of this symposium were published in mid-1999.
A major conference on “Problems in the Study of Long-Range Linguistic Comparison at the Turn of the Third Millennium” was held at the Russian State University for the Humanities in Moscow from 29 May through 2 June 2000. The conference was organized by Sergej Starostin and covered a number of topics. The first day involved papers on Indo-European. The second day was devoted to Nostratic and included papers on lexical, morphological, and phonological comparisons, as well as more theoretical considerations. There was a session on Altaic, and Starostin gave an introduction to the Altaic etymological dictionary he was then preparing in collaboration with Anna Dybo and Oleg Mudrak (this dictionary has since been published [in 2003]). Another new etymological dictionary presented at the conference was the Semitic dictionary being prepared by Yuri Militarëv and L. E. Kogan. Afrasian linguistics was also discussed in several papers at a session on comparative linguistics and ancient Near Eastern history held in memory of the late Igor M. Diakonoff. There was also a session on Sino-Tibetan and Caucasian linguistics.
In August 2003, a Nostratic Centennial Conference, marking one hundred years since the appearance of Pedersen’s bold hypothesis, was held at the University of Pécs, Hungary. The conference proceedings were published in 2004 in a volume co-edited by Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell.
The Institute of Slavistics and the Department of History and Philology of the Russian Academy of Sciences sponsored a conference in Moscow honoring the 70th birthday of V. M. Illič-Svityč on 20—22 October 2004. The conference covered problems of the comparative-historical grammar of both Indo-European and Nostratic languages, of the remote relationship of languages, and of the history of Slavic and Baltic languages and their dialects.
1.3. Methodology
Even though I have repeated the following points verbatim many times in previous works, I still read irresponsible statements being made in the literature to the effect that Nostraticists do not use “traditional methods” or that they use a “weakened form” of the Comparative Method. Nothing could be farther from the truth. Therefore, I will once again state the methodological principles used in distant linguistic comparison (this is a slightly revised and expanded version of the discussion of methodology found in my co-authored book [Bomhard—Kerns 1994:7—11]).
The founders of Indo-European comparative linguistics placed great importance on the comparison of grammatical forms, and this bias continues to the present day in Indo-European studies and has even been carried over into the study of other language families. However, this overemphasis on the comparison of grammatical forms is far too restrictive and was the reason that the Celtic languages, which have developed many unique features, were not immediately recognized as Indo-European. As noted nearly eighty years ago by Pedersen (1931:245):
That agreement in the inflectional system is an especially clear and striking proof of kinship, no one denies. But it is only an anachronism in theory, which has no significance in actual practice, when such an agreement is still designated as the only valid proof. No one doubted, after the first communication about Tocharian..., that the language was Indo-European, though at that time virtually no similarities in inflection had been pointed out. Such similarities have since been shown, but even where they are almost obliterated, proof of kinship could be adduced from the vocabulary and from sound-laws. Hardly any one will assert that it would be impossible to recognize the relationship between, say, English and Italian, even without the help of other related languages or older forms of these two languages themselves, although agreements between the inflectional systems are practically nonexistent.
From the modern point of view it must be said that proof of relationship between languages is adduced by a systematic comparison of languages in their entirety, vocabulary as well as grammar. The reason why earlier scholars felt they should disregard the vocabulary was that they knew of no method of systematic comparison in the field.
The approach to language comparison that I have followed in attempting to establish genetic relationship among the various Nostratic languages is derived, in part, from that advocated by Joseph H. Greenberg in the chapter entitled “Genetic Relationship among Languages” in his 1957 book Essays in Linguistics and, in part, from traditional methods of comparison and internal reconstruction. In my opinion, the combination of Greenberg’s methodology and more traditional methods of comparison can inform and further one another. The principles established by Greenberg are as follows:
Greenberg notes that the only way to establish hypotheses about genetic relationship is by comparing languages. However, the problem is in knowing which languages to compare and in knowing what to compare since not all aspects of language are equally relevant to comparison. To be meaningful, comparison must strive to eliminate chance resemblances and to separate borrowings from native elements. This is often easier said than done; however, Greenberg lays out two main techniques for detecting borrowed lexical items. First, he notes that borrowing is most commonly confined to certain semantic spheres (for example, cultural items) and certain grammatical categories (nouns far more often than verbs). Second, borrowed words can be distinguished from native vocabulary by expanding the range of comparison to include additional languages.
The simplest way to establish genetic relationship is by identifying a large number of similar morphs (or allomorphs), especially irregularities, in similar environments in the languages being considered. Another significant indicator of probable genetic relationship is the presence of similar rules of combinability. Unfortunately, historical processes over the passage of time tend to bring about the gradual transformation and eventual elimination of such similarities. The longer the period of separation, the lesser the chances will be that similarities of morphological forms and rules of combinability will be found.
Fortunately, there remain other factors that can be helpful in determining possible genetic relationship. One significant factor is the semantic resemblance of lexical forms. Here, it is important to be able to establish recurrent sound-meaning correspondences for a reasonably large sample of lexical material. Lexical forms with identical or similar meanings have the greatest value. Next in value come forms that, though divergent in meaning, can convincingly be derived, through widely-attested semantic shifts, from earlier forms of identical or similar meaning. The chances that lexical resemblances indicate genetic relationship increase dramatically when additional languages are brought into the comparison and when these new languages also exhibit a very large number of recurrent sound-meaning correspondences. Greenberg has termed this method “mass comparison” (more recently, he has used the term “multilateral comparison”). He considers the comparison of basic vocabulary from a large number of languages from a specific, wide geographic area to be the quickest and most certain method to determine possible genetic relationship. To Greenberg, lexical data are of paramount importance in attempting to establish genetic relationship among languages, especially in the initial stages of comparison.
The basic principles underlying the Comparative Method may be summarized as follows: The first step involves the arduous task of data gathering, placing special attention on gathering the oldest data available. Once a large amount of lexical material has been gathered, it must be carefully analyzed to try to separate what is ancient from what is an innovation and from what is a borrowing. After the native lexical elements have been reasonably identified in each phylum, the material can be compared across phyla to determine potential cognates. Once a sufficient body of potential cognates has been identified, one can begin to work out the sound correspondences. Not only must the regular sound correspondences (that is, those that occur consistently and systematically) be defined, exceptions must also be explained. Here, widely-attested sound changes (palatalization, metathesis, syncope, assimilation, dissimilation, etc.) provide the key to understanding the origin of most exceptions. In other cases, the analysis of the influence that morphology has exerted provides an understanding of how particular exceptions came into being. Some exceptions, though clearly related, simply defy explanation. All of these must be noted. The final step involves the reconstruction of ancestral forms and the formulation of the sound laws leading to the forms in the descendant languages, identifying the laws that have produced the regular sound correspondences as well as the exceptions. The same principles apply to the reconstruction of grammatical forms and rules of combinability and to the identification of the historical transformations leading to the systems found in the daughter languages. Invariably, it takes the dedicated efforts of several generations of scholars to work out all of the details. Here, we may cite the case of Indo-European — as even the most casual reading of Lehmann’s book (1993) on the Theoretical Bases of Indo-European Linguistics shows, after nearly two full centuries of investigation of what must surely be the most thoroughly-studied language family on the face of the earth, there still remain many uncertainties about the reconstruction of the Indo-European parent language. The following works are excellent introductions to Comparative-Historical Linguistics: Arlotto 1972; Bynon 1977; Campbell 1999a; Hock—Joseph 1996; Lehmann 1973 [1992]; Sihler 2000 — more advanced are: Anttila 1972 and 1989; Hock 1986 [1991].
At this point, we may note that the description of the Comparative Method and Internal Reconstruction given by Schwink (1994:9) is virtually identical to the procedure outlined in the preceding paragraph:
Let us now proceed to the nuts and bolts of reconstruction. Winter (1970:149) describes the comparative method in the following terms. First one carries out “inspection”. This is looking at a number of languages for “a sufficient number of apparently recurrent correspondences”. One should look at the oldest stages of languages, judge which languages have the most archaic features or residues (Lehmann 1990). Inspection is followed by “sorting” which involves a complete listing of the correspondences discovered although without interpretation (Winter 1970:149). Thereafter comes the reduction of the material to major correspondence classes. If there are irregularities in distribution, one looks for specific factors which may condition the difference. This is now an interpretive procedure. The label chosen for an entity of a major correspondence class should have “a maximum of similarity with the items labeled” (p. 152). In this selection, the question of archaicity of daughter languages will be taken into account. After assumption that the label represents some earlier stage of the languages being looked at, an attempt may be made to look at the labels of parts of systems.
The comparative method does not produce temporal distinctions... It produces a proto-language which is a potpourri of features. It will be the job of internal analysis to sort out this proto-language.
As noted in the first paragraph of this section, it was necessary to discuss these issues in order to address concerns that have been raised about the applicability of traditional methods of comparison to long-range comparison. It must be made perfectly clear that the same principles are just as applicable to long-range comparison as they are to any other type of linguistic comparison. The fact is, these are the only tools we have. Moreover, they work — their efficacy has been proven over and over again.
Furthermore, claims that these methodologies break down when one tries to apply them beyond a certain time limit, say 5,000 to 10,000 years ago, can be shown, without a shadow of doubt, to be false. One can cite, for example, the case of the aboriginal languages of Australia. Archaeological evidence indicates that Australia has been inhabited by human beings for at least 40,000 years, and possibly even longer. Though there remain many unsettled questions, such as exactly when a putative Proto-Australian might have been spoken (probably at least 30,000 years ago), or about how the different languages should be subgrouped, and so on, it has been suggested (though not proven) that all extant languages belong to the same family (cf. Ruhlen 1987:188), and comparative work on these languages is continuing apace (cf. Dixon 1980 and 2002). Another example that can be cited is the case of the Afrasian language family. Due to the extremely deep divisions among the six branches of Afrasian (Semitic, Egyptian, Berber, Omotic, Cushitic, and Chadic), which are far greater than those found, by way of comparison, among the earliest attested branches of Indo-European, the Afrasian parent language must be placed as far back as 10,000 BCE (cf. Diakonoff 1988:33, fn. 15), or perhaps even earlier, according to some scholars (Hodge [1993:99], for example, dates Proto-Afrasian [his Lisramic] at 13,000 BCE). This extremely ancient date notwithstanding, the major sound correspondences have been determined with great accuracy (see especially Diakonoff 1992), excellent progress is being made in reconstructing the common lexicon (two new Afrasian etymological dictionaries have recently been published, one by Vladimir E. Orël and Olga V. Stolbova [1995] and another by Christopher Ehret [1995]), and scholars are beginning to piece together the original morphological patterning, though progress here lags behind other areas. A good survey of the Afrasian languages is (in English translation): Languages in the Ancient and Modern World: Hamito-Semitic Languages, edited by David Cohen (Paris: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique, 1988). A good introduction — though now somewhat out of date — to Afrasian comparative phonology and morphology is Afrasian Languages (Moscow: Nauka, 1988) by Igor M. Diakonoff. Finally, it should be noted that Edward Lipiński brings in a lot of useful data from related Afrasian languages in his Semitic Languages: Outline of a Comparative Grammar (Leuven/Louvain: Peters Publishers and Department of Oriental Studies, 1997).
One last point needs to be made: Reconstructed languages should be thought of as real languages in every sense of the term. Of course, our reconstructions are, in a sense, purely formulaic, and one can only hope to approximate, not fully recover, all of the features of the actual proto-language. Nevertheless, our reconstructions can be surprisingly accurate, as can be seen, for instance, when reconstructed Proto-Romance is contrasted with so-called “Vulgar Latin”. When we undertake the task of trying to recover the salient features of this or that proto-language, we must be very careful not to reconstruct anything that is not characteristic of language in general: our goal should be to strive for reality in our reconstructions (cf. Labov 1994:17). The prudent use of the insights gained from linguistic typology can be extremely valuable in helping to arrive at realistic reconstructions. Now, a few more conservative linguists have questioned the propriety of using typological data in Historical-Comparative Linguistics, their main argument running somewhat along the lines: “since we cannot possibly know all of the languages that currently exist or that have ever existed, we cannot say that such and such a type was impossible, unnatural, or has never existed” — that is to say, our “database” of linguistic systems will always be incomplete. Of course, there is no arguing with this line of reasoning. However, these linguists miss an important point: from all of the data that have been collected to date — from an extremely large sample of the world’s languages — there emerge consistent, regular patterns that are repeated over and over again. There are, to be sure, rare types — typological isolates, so to speak —, but these are less important (though no less interesting) from a statistical point of view. It is the regular patterning that has emerged from the analysis of the data from a great number of languages that is most important to Historical-Comparative Linguistics. These data are important in two respects: (A) they provide a control against which our reconstructions can be evaluated and (B), when part of a system has been reconstructed, they provide a means to deduce what the rest of the system might have been like, that is to say, they can be used as a discovery procedure by making use of “implicational universals”. Concerning the consistent, regular patterning that has been observed, it should be noted that the basis for some of this patterning is human physiology, and, in such cases, we can speak of true universals. Given this regular patterning, it is disturbing when our reconstructions contradict it, as in the case of one form of the traditional reconstruction of Proto-Indo-European, for instance. To say merely that “Indo-European was a unique type” or some such statement only means that the person making such a statement chooses not to confront the issues involved. We should not hesitate to use every means at our disposal to help us arrive at realistic reconstructions. To be sure, we should be fully cognizant of the work of our predecessors and adhere closely to the time-honored methodologies — the Comparative Method and Internal Reconstruction — that have served Comparative-Historical Linguistics well since the days of Bopp, Rask, and Grimm. However, we must not stop here — we must also make full use of recent advances in phonological theory that have broadened our understanding of sound change and of new insights gained from typological studies, and our proposals must be consistent with the data. For a superb overview of the relevancy of typological studies to diachronic linguistics, cf. Schwink 1994.
In attempting to determine whether or not particular lexical items from the various language families might be related, I have made extensive use of Carl Darling Buck’s A Dictionary of Selected Synonyms in the Principal Indo-European Languages as a control for the semantic development of the proposed lexical parallels. It may be noted that, in examining the lexicons of Kartvelian, Afrasian, Uralic-Yukaghir, Elamo-Dravidian, Altaic, and Eskimo-Aleut, semantic shifts similar to those described by Buck for the Indo-European languages are found over and over again in these other language families as well. I cannot emphasize strongly enough that, in order to gain a complete understanding of how I arrived at my proposals, Buck’s dictionary must be consulted.
One final note is necessary. In recent years, several scholars (most notably, Donald Ringe and Sheila Embleton) have proposed techniques based upon statistical modeling and probability analysis as a means to help us judge the validity of our proposals concerning possible genetic relationship. Properly used, these techniques can indeed provide another valuable tool, which may be used along with, but not as a replacement for, established methodologies. Moreover, these techniques have the important advantage of introducing an objective set of criteria against which our proposals can be evaluated.
1.4. The Comparative Method
In the previous section, we discussed the methodologies used in long-range linguistic comparison and showed that these are the same methodologies used in any other type of linguistic comparison. In this section, we will explore the Comparative Method in greater detail, repeating and expanding upon what was said in the previous section and using data from the Nostratic daughter languages to illustrate the principles involved.
First, let us begin with a formal definition of the Comparative Method (cf. Kimball 1992:274):
Comparative Method examines items (e.g. phonemes, morphemes, or syntactic constructions) from two or more languages to establish genetic relationship and reconstruct ancestral forms. Unlike typological comparison, which ignores genetic affiliation, the comparative method assumes that the languages compared are (or may be) cognate languages: the descendants of a common ancestor.
Moreover, Hock (1991:567) further defines the purpose of reconstruction:
The ultimate proof of genetic relationship, and to many linguists’ minds the only real proof, lies in the successful reconstruction of the ancestral forms from which the systematically corresponding cognates can be derived. (Note that just as in courts of law, the terms ‘proof’, ‘prove’ here are used in the sense of ‘establish beyond a reasonable doubt’. In fact, the general tenet of historical linguistics is that all hypotheses, whether they concern genetic relationship, ‘language-internal’ developments like sound change or analogy, or contact-induced changes, should be established beyond a reasonable doubt. It must be admitted, however, that this tenet is often ignored in practice.)
Hock’s statement is extremely important and pinpoints the crux of the problem in attempts to establish genetic relationship, especially long-range genetic relationship — it seems that no one can agree on the threshold beyond which “reasonable doubt” has been dispelled. For some, the threshold is set so low that highly unlikely proposals can slip by, while, for others, the threshold is set so high that even well-established language families have difficulty passing.
Next, Kimball (1992:275) notes that “[t]he comparative method makes three assumptions”:
a) The relationship between sound and meaning is arbitrary; therefore, widespread similarity in form and meaning between two languages cannot be accidental.
b) Corresponding features of cognate languages continue features inherited from an ancestral stage or proto-language.
c) Completed sound changes are exceptionless.
As previously stated, the first step involves the arduous task of data gathering, placing special attention on gathering the oldest data available. Once a large amount of lexical material has been gathered, it must be carefully analyzed to try to separate what is ancient from what is an innovation and from what is a borrowing. This is not a simple task — the problem of borrowing is particularly acute within Altaic, for instance. Greenberg has addressed this problem by laying out two main techniques for detecting borrowed lexical items. First, he notes that borrowing is most commonly confined to certain semantic spheres (for example, cultural items) and certain grammatical categories (nouns far more often than verbs). Second, borrowed words can be distinguished from native vocabulary by expanding the range of comparison to include additional languages. Moreover, there are important clues that can assist us in identifying borrowings. First, a knowledge of the history or, in the case of reconstructed languages, the prehistory of a language can tell us which languages were in contact or might have been in contact with the language or languages under analysis at different stages in its history. Next, knowledge of the different levels of material culture achieved by population groups speaking these languages at particular times in their history will give us a clue about the probable direction of borrowings. Archeology can be of value here by providing us with a description of the artifacts of the material cultures in question, by giving us a glimpse of the salient characteristics of the societies using those artifacts, and by identifying probable trade routes and population movements.
Let us turn once again to Kimball (1992:275) to see what she has to say on this matter:
However, languages can resemble each other for other reasons. Onomatopoetic words, ‘baby-talk’, and words showing sound symbolism are excluded from consideration; in these, the relationship between sound and meaning is not entirely arbitrary. Similarity can result from borrowing and other effects of language contact, or even from sheer chance — factors which must be eliminated in a list of potential cognates.
Sometimes knowledge of the external history of a language allows us to exclude borrowing as a cause of similarity. For example, we know that many English words resemble French words because English has borrowed extensively from French since the 11th century. Where language contact is less well documented or prehistoric, similarity resulting from borrowing can be excluded with reasonable certainty by selecting items unlikely to have been borrowed. For instance, words referring to technology or material culture, which are often borrowed along with cultural or technological innovations, may make poor candidates for comparison. By contrast, basic vocabulary — kinship terms, numerals, pronouns, pre- and postpositions, and common verbs, adverbs, adjectives, and nouns — are less likely under most circumstances to be borrowed, and are usually more helpful to the comparativist.
After the native lexical elements have been reasonably identified in each phylum, the material can be compared across phyla to determine potential cognates. Once a sufficient body of potential cognates have been identified, one can begin to work out the sound correspondences. Let us illustrate this by looking at a few cognates from the Nostratic languages (only the reconstructed forms will be given for each language group) — I have also included data from Sumerian:
1. Proto-Indo-European *bhor-/*bh3- ‘to bore, to pierce’; Proto-Afrasian *bur- ‘to bore, to pierce’; Proto-Uralic *pura ‘borer, auger’; Proto-Dravidian *pur- ‘(vb.) to bore, to perforate; (n.) borer, gimlet’; Proto-Altaic *burV- ‘to bore through, to pierce’. Cf. Sumerian bùr ‘to bore through, to pierce’.
2. Proto-Indo-European *bher-, *bhru- ‘brown’; Proto-Afrasian *bor- ‘dark-colored’; Proto-Altaic *boryV- ‘gray, brown’ (< ‘dark-colored’).
3. Proto-Kartvelian *bur- ‘to cover, to enclose’; Proto-Afrasian *bur- ‘to cover, to wrap up’; Proto-Dravidian *pōr- ‘(vb.) to wrap around (the body), to cover, to enclose; (n.) a cover, covering, wrapping’; Proto-Altaic *būri- (~ -Ôū-, -e) ‘to cover, to enclose’.
4. Proto-Indo-European *bhek’-/*bhok’- ‘to cut or split apart, to break apart’; Proto-Afrasian *bak’- ‘to cleave, to split, to break open’; Proto-Dravidian *pak- ‘to split, to rend; to be split’; Uralic: Proto-Finno-Ugrian *pakka- ‘to burst, to rend, to split’; Eskimo-Aleut: Proto-Inuit *pakak- ‘to knock into’.
The correspondence, in initial position, of Proto-Indo-European *bh-, Proto-Kartvelian *b-, Proto-Afrasian *b-, Proto-Uralic *p-, Proto-Dravidian *p-, Proto-Altaic *b-, and Proto-Eskimo *p- allows us to reconstruct Proto-Nostratic *b-.
1. Proto-Indo-European *pher-/*phor-/*ph3- ‘to fly, to flee’; Proto-Kartvelian *par-, *pr-en- ‘to fly’; Proto-Dravidian *par- ‘to fly, to flee; to hasten, to hurry’.
2. Proto-Indo-European *pher-/*ph3- ‘to bear, to bring forth’; Proto-Afrasian *pir- ‘to bring forth, to bear fruit’; Proto-Dravidian *per- ‘to get, to beget, to bear’; Proto-Altaic *phŭri ‘seed, offspring’.
3. Proto-Indo-European *pheth-/*photh- ‘to fly, to rush, to pursue; to fall, to fall down’; Proto-Kartvelian *petk- ‘to quiver, to tremble, to vibrate, to explode’; Proto-Afrasian *pat- ‘to flutter, to quiver, to tremble; to fall down’; Proto-Dravidian *pat- ‘to hurry; to flutter, to quiver, to shake; to be flurried, impatient, overhasty’; Proto-Eskimo *pattaw- ‘to clap or slap’.
4. Proto-Indo-European *phes-/*phos- ‘penis’; Uralic: Proto-Finno-Ugrian *pasyз ‘penis’; Proto-Dravidian *p`(y)-/*pac- ‘descendant, offspring’; Proto-Altaic *ph[Ôa]s- (?) ‘male genitals’. Cf. Sumerian peš ‘sperm, semen’, peš ‘descendant, offspring, son’.
In these examples, the correspondence, in initial position, of Proto-Indo-European *ph-, Proto-Kartvelian *p-, Proto-Afrasian *p-, Proto-Uralic *p-, Proto-Dravidian *p-, Proto-Altaic *ph-, and Proto-Eskimo *p- allows us to reconstruct Proto-Nostratic *ph-.
1. Proto-Indo-European *me-/*mo- 1st person personal pronoun stem (oblique cases); Proto-Kartvelian *me-, *men- 1st person personal pronoun stem; Proto-Afrasian *m[i]- 1st person personal pronoun stem (only in Chadic, with relics in Cushitic); Proto-Uralic *me 1st person singular personal pronoun stem: ‘I, me’, *me 1st plural personal pronoun stem; Proto-Altaic (nom. sg.) (*mi >) *bi ‘I’, (oblique stem) *min-; Proto-Chukchi-Kamchatkan *(kə-)m ‘I’ (*kə- is a marker of independent pronouns); Eskimo-Aleut: West Greenlandic 1st sg. relative possessive suffix -ma. Note here also Etruscan mi ‘I’, mini ‘me’ and Sumerian (Emesal) ma(-e), me-a, me-e ‘I’, (1st pl. possessive suffix) -me ‘our’.
2. Proto-Indo-European *mo- demonstrative stem (preserved vestigially in Celtic); Proto-Kartvelian *ma- demonstrative stem: ‘this, he’; Proto-Finno-Ugrian *mu ‘other, another’; Altaic: Common-Turkic (nom. sg.) (*mū/*mō >) *bū/*bō ‘this’, (oblique stem) *mu-n-; Mongolian mön deictic word serving as a demonstrative pronoun, adjective, adverb, and copula.
3. Proto-Indo-European *me-/*mo- interrogative and relative pronoun stem (preserved in Hittite and Tocharian, with vestiges in Celtic); Proto-Kartvelian *mi-n- interrogative pronoun, *ma- ‘what’; Proto-Afrasian *ma- ~ *mi- relative and interrogative pronoun stem; Proto-Uralic *mi interrogative and relative pronoun stem; Proto-Altaic *mV interrogative stem; Proto-Eskimo enclitic particle *mi ‘what about?’. Cf. Sumerian me-na-àm ‘when?’, me-a ‘where?’, me-šè ‘where to?’.
4. Proto-Indo-European *mer-/*mor- ‘to twist, to turn’; Proto-Afrasian *mar-/ *mər- ‘to twist, to turn’; Proto-Dravidian *mur- ‘to bend, to be bent, to turn round, to twist; (n.) rope, cord; bend, curve’, *mur- ‘to twist, to twine, to tighten’; Proto-Altaic *mura- ‘(vb.) to turn, to return; (adj.) round’.
Here, the correspondence, in initial position, of Proto-Indo-European *m-, Proto-Kartvelian *m-, Proto-Afrasian *m-, Proto-Uralic *m-, Proto-Dravidian *m-, Proto-Altaic *m-, and Proto-Eskimo *m- allows us to reconstruct Proto-Nostratic *m-.
These correspondences can be summarized as follows:
PN |
PIE |
PK |
PAA |
PU |
PD |
PA |
PE |
b- |
bh- |
b- |
b- |
p- |
p- |
b- |
p- |
ph- |
ph- |
p- |
p- |
p- |
p- |
ph- |
p- |
m- |
m- |
m- |
m- |
m- |
m- |
m- |
m- |
Abbreviations: PN = Proto-Nostratic; PIE = Proto-Indo-European; PK = Proto-Kartvelian; PAA = Proto-Afrasian; PU = Proto-Uralic; PD = Proto-Dravidian; PA = Proto-Altaic; PE = Proto-Eskimo.
Not only must the regular sound correspondences (that is, those that occur consistently and systematically) be defined (a full set of Nostratic sound correspondences can be found at the end of Chapter 12), exceptions must also be explained. Here, widely-attested sound changes (palatalization, metathesis, syncope, assimilation, dissimilation, etc.) provide the key to understanding the origin of most exceptions. In other cases, the analysis of the influence that morphology has exerted provides an understanding of how particular exceptions came into being. Some exceptions, though clearly related, simply defy explanation. All of these must be noted. The final step involves the reconstruction of ancestral forms and the formulation of the sound laws leading to the forms in the descendant languages, identifying the laws that have produced the regular sound correspondences as well as the exceptions. The same principles apply to the reconstruction of grammatical forms and rules of combinability and to the identification of the historical transformations leading to the systems found in the daughter languages.
Let us now look at some exceptions to the regular sound correspondences that have been established and provide explanations for these exceptions:
1. Pre-Proto-Indo-European *khab- > (with progressive voicing assimilation) Proto-Indo-European *khaph-ro- ‘he-goat, male sheep, buck, ram’ ~ Proto-Afrasian *kab- ‘he-goat, male sheep, buck, ram’.
In this example, the correspondence of Proto-Indo-European *-ph- ~ Proto-Afrasian *-b- is irregular — instead, we would expect Proto-Indo-European *-bh- as the regular correspondence of Proto-Afrasian *-b-. Now, it is well-known that Indo-European had a root-structure constraint against the appearance of both a voiced (aspirated) stop and a voiceless (aspirated) stop in a root, that is to say, that they had to agree in voicing (cf. Benveniste 1935:170; Lehmann 1952:17) — thus, *thebh- and *bheth- were not allowed. However, comparison with the other Nostratic languages indicates that the forbidden root types must have once existed. Therefore, a rule of progressive voicing assimilation may be set up to account for the elimination of the forbidden root types. This means that *thebh- would have become *theph-, and *bheth- would have become *bhedh-. This is confirmed by other examples, such as:
2. Pre-Proto-Indo-European *dyəkwh-/*dyakwh- > (with progressive voicing assimilation and depalatalization of initial *dy) Proto-Indo-European *dhegwh-/*dhogwh- ‘to blaze, to burn’ ~ Proto-Afrasian *dyakw- ‘to blaze, to be bright’.
Another exception is found in the following examples:
1. Proto-Indo-European *(s)thek’-/*(s)thok’- ‘to cover’ ~ Proto-Kartvelian *t’q’aw- ‘skin, hide’; Proto-Afrasian *t’ak’- ‘to cover, to obscure’.
2. Proto-Indo-European *thek’-/*thok’- ‘to knock, to beat, to strike’ ~ Proto-Kartvelian *t’k’aD- ‘to hit, to strike’; Proto-Afrasian *t’uk’-, *t’ok’- ‘to knock, to beat, to strike, to pound’; Proto-Finno-Ugrian *tukз- (*tuwз-) ‘to break, to crush’; Proto-Dravidian *tuk- ‘to tread down, to trample on, to step on; to beat, to strike, to pound, to mash’, *tukk- ‘to push, to shove’. Cf. Sumerian dugú-ga ‘to strike, to beat, to hit, to smite, to kill’.
In these examples, the correspondence of Proto-Indo-European *th- ~ Proto-Kartvelian *t’- and Afrasian *t’- is irregular — instead, we would expect Proto-Indo-European *t’- as the regular correspondence of Proto-Kartvelian *t’- and Proto-Afrasian *t’-. In traditional terms, Proto-Indo-European had a constraint against the appearance of two plain voiced stops within a root (cf. Benveniste 1935:170; Lehmann 1952:17), that is to say that a root could not both begin and end with a plain voiced stop. In terms of the Glottalic Theory (see Chapter 3, §3.4, for a discussion of the Glottalic Theory), this constraint is reinterpreted as a restriction against the co-occurrence of two glottalics in a root. This means that roots of the type *t’ek’- (*deg- in traditional terms) are not allowed. It may be noted that a similar constraint is found in a number of other languages having glottalics. However, comparison with the other Nostratic languages indicates that the forbidden root types must have once existed. Therefore, a rule of regressive deglottalization may be set up to account for the elimination of the forbidden root types. This means, for example, that *t’ek’- would have become *thek’-. This rule finds a close parallel in Geers’ Law in Akkadian (for details on Geers’ Law, cf. Ungnad—Matouš 1969:27).
Now, up until this point, we have been using mostly reconstructed forms to illustrate the principles involved in the Comparative Method. However, reconstructed forms contain a sufficiently high enough margin of error by their very nature to render such comparisons suspect. This means that, ultimately, we must base our conclusions about possible genetic relationship on an examination and analysis of the actual attested forms found in each daughter language. It is my contention that a comparison based on the actual attested forms alone, without recourse to the reconstructed forms, is sufficient to demonstrate the genetic relationship of the various Nostratic daughter languages. Let us illustrate this by looking at the data which support the reconstructions given in several of the examples above — we will look at one from each set.
First, let us look again at the words for ‘to bore, to pierce’:
1. (a) Proto-Indo-European *bhor-/*bh3- ‘to bore, to pierce’; (b) Proto-Afrasian *bur- ‘to bore, to pierce’; (c) Proto-Uralic *pura ‘borer, auger’; (d) Proto-Dravidian *pur- ‘(vb.) to bore, to perforate; (n.) borer, gimlet’; (e) Proto-Altaic *burV- ‘to bore through, to pierce’. Cf. Sumerian bùr ‘to bore through, to pierce’.
Here are some of the attested data from within each language family to support this example:
a) Indo-European: Old English borian ‘to bore, to pierce’; Old High German boro ‘auger’; Latin forō ‘to bore, to pierce’ (Latin f- < *bh-); Greek öáñüù, öáñÜù ‘to plow’.
b) Afrasian: Aramaic bəraz ‘to bore, to pierce’; Tigre (reduplicated) bärabära ‘to pierce’; Geez / Ethiopic barra, barara ‘to pierce, to penetrate, to go through’; Somali burur ‘broken piece’; Saho burūr ‘broken piece’.
c) Uralic: Finnish pura ‘borer, auger, (big) awl’; Vogul / Mansi pore, porä ‘awl’; Ostyak / Xanty põr ‘borer, auger’; Hungarian fúr- ‘to bore, to drill’; Yurak Samoyed / Nenets parõ ‘borer, auger’; Selkup Samoyed pur ‘borer, auger’.
d) Dravidian: Tamil purai ‘tubular hollow, tube, pipe, windpipe’; TuJu perevuni ‘to be bored, to be perforated’, perepini ‘to bore to perforate’, burma, burmu ‘a gimlet’, berpuri ‘borer, auger’.
e) Mongolian burwui- ‘a piece of wire used to clean a smoking pipe’; Turkish bur- ‘to bore a hole’; Tatar borau ‘borer, auger’.
f) Sumerian bùr ‘to bore through, to pierce’.
The second example which we will explore in depth is the words for ‘to flee, to fly’:
2. (a) Proto-Indo-European *pher-/*phor-/*ph3- ‘to fly, to flee’; (b) Proto-Kartvelian *par-, *pr-en- ‘to fly’; (c) Proto-Dravidian *par- ‘to fly, to flee; to hasten, to hurry’.
Here are some of the attested data from within each language family to support this example:
a) Indo-European: Sanskrit parzá- ‘wing, feather’; Hittite pár-aš-zi ‘to flee’; Russian Church Slavic perC, pÞrati ‘to fly’, pero ‘feather’; Czech perchnouti ‘to flee’; Polish pierzchnaB ‘to flee’; Serbo-Croatian prhati ‘to fly up’; Russian porxát' [порхать] ‘to flit, flutter, to fly about’.
b) Kartvelian: Georgian pr-ena ‘to fly’, (m)prinveli ‘bird’; Mingrelian purin- ‘to fly’; Laz purtin- ‘to fly’.
c) Dravidian: Tamil para ‘to fly, to hover, to flutter, to move swiftly, to hasten, to be in a hurry; to be greatly agitated; to be scattered, dispersed; to disappear’, (reduplicated) parapara ‘to hasten, to hurry’, paravai ‘bird, wing, feather, bee’; Malayalam parakka ‘to fly, to flee’; KannaTa pari, paru ‘flying, running swiftly’; TuJu pāruni ‘to run, to fly, to escape’; Telugu paracu ‘to run away, to flee, to flow; to cause to escape’, pāru ‘to run, to flow’.
The final example is the words for ‘I, me’:
3. (a) Proto-Indo-European *me-/*mo- 1st person personal pronoun stem (oblique cases); (b) Proto-Kartvelian *me-, *men- 1st person personal pronoun stem; (c) Proto-Afrasian *m[i]- 1st person personal pronoun stem (only in Chadic, with relics in Cushitic); (d) Proto-Uralic *me 1st person singular personal pronoun stem: ‘I, me’, *me 1st plural personal pronoun stem; (e) Proto-Altaic (nom. sg.) (*mi >) *bi ‘I’, (oblique stem) *min-; (f) Proto-Chukchi-Kamchatkan *(kə-)m ‘I’ (*kə- is a marker of independent pronouns). Note here also Etruscan mi ‘I’, mini ‘me’ and Sumerian (Emesal) ma(-e), me-a, me-e ‘I’, (1st pl. possessive suffix) -me ‘our’.
Here are some of the attested data from within each language family to support this example:
a) Indo-European: Sanskrit (acc. sg.) mā, mZm ‘me’; Greek (acc. sg.) ìå, dìÝ ‘me’; Latin (acc.-abl. sg.) mē ‘me’; Gothic (acc. sg.) mik ‘me’; Lithuanian (acc. sg.) manę ‘me’; Old Church Slavic (acc. sg.) mę, mene ‘me’.
b) Kartvelian: Old Georgian me ‘I’; Mingrelian ma- ‘I’; Laz ma, man ‘I’; Svan mi ‘I’.
c) Afrasian: Chadic: Hausa (pl.) maa ‘we’, (indirect object pl.) manà ‘us, to us, for us’, (pl.) muu ‘we, us, our’, (past tense subj. pl.) mun ‘we’, (continuous tense subj. pl.) munàa ‘we’; (indirect object sg.) minì ‘me, to me, for me’; Kotoko mi ‘we, us’; Mandara ma ‘we, us’; Musgu mi ‘we, us’, mu ‘I, me’; Bole mu ‘we, us’.
d) Uralic: Finnish minä/minu- ‘I, me’; Lapp / Saami mon/mú- ‘I, me’; Mordvin mon ‘I, me’; Zyrian / Komi me ‘I’, (acc.) menõ ‘me’; Selkup Samoyed man, mat ‘I, me’; Kamassian man ‘I, me’; Yukaghir met ‘I, me’.
e) Altaic: Mongolian (nom. sg.) bi ‘I’, (gen. sg.) minu ‘my, of me’, (gen. pl. exclusive) manu ‘our, of us’; Manchu bi ‘I, me’, (gen. sg.) mini ‘my’; Old Turkish (nom. sg.) män (rarely bän) ‘I’, (acc. sg.) mäni ‘me’.
f) Chukchi wə-m ‘I’ (in predication: -iwəm ~ -ewəm).
g) Etruscan mi ‘I’, mini ‘me’.
h) Sumerian (Emesal) ma(-e), me-a, me-e ‘I’, (1st pl. possessive suffix) -me ‘our’.
It is thus perfectly clear that we are able to establish phonological correspondences on the basis of an analysis of the actual attested data from the individual Nostratic daughter languages alone, without recourse to reconstructions. Moreover, not only are we able to establish the regular sound correspondences by such an analysis, we are also able to identify and explain exceptions. And, it is on this basis as well that we are able to reconstruct the Proto-Nostratic forms. This is identical to what was done in Indo-European and which continues to be done in Comparative-Historical Linguistics — the Indo-European parent language was reconstructed on the basis of a direct comparison of the actual attested data from the individual Indo-European daughter languages without recourse to reconstructed Proto-Indo-Iranian, Proto-Italic, Proto-Greek, Proto-Germanic, etc. That is to say that it was not necessary to reconstruct every intermediary level before one could tackle the problems of reconstructing the Indo-European parent language. Of course, reconstruction is still both important and necessary. Reconstruction, including the reconstruction of intermediary levels, allows us to make powerful statements about the (pre)historical development of each daughter language, especially about how and why particular features came into being or became extinct. Finally, the understanding of what has taken place historically in one daughter language often provides an explanation of what has taken place in another daughter language.
In any attempt to establish genetic relationship, one is going to come across chance resemblances. By “chance resemblances”, one means unexpected, and sometimes rather striking, instances of identical or nearly identical vocabulary items or, in rare cases, even grammatical forms in two or more totally unrelated languages or in languages that, if they are related, are distant enough apart to make it otherwise unlikely that they would share such items. The example that Kimball (1992:275) gives is the word for ‘man’, wiro, in the extinct Timucua language, formerly spoken in northern Florida and southeastern Georgia, which resembles Latin vir ‘man’. Chance resemblances of this type do occur and, it goes without saying, do not indicate genetic relationship. Chance resemblances can range from a mere handful of examples up to several dozen depending upon how much latitude one is willing to allow in both forms and meanings. As noted above, one of the main assumptions of the Comparative Method is that “the relationship between sound and meaning is arbitrary; therefore, widespread similarity in form and meaning between two languages cannot be accidental”. Thus, when the languages under analysis exhibit a large number of recurrent sound-meaning correspondences, we are not dealing with chance resemblances.
1.5. Critique of Moscovite Views on Nostratic
Let me begin by stating unequivocally that I have the highest admiration for what Moscovite scholarship (especially the work of V. M. Illič-Svityč and A. B. Dolgopolsky — some of the work done by other Russian scholars is not on the same level) on Nostratic has achieved. Their research has opened up new and exciting possibilities and given Nostratic studies new respectability. However, this does not mean that I agree with everything they say. I regard their work as a pioneering effort and, as such, subject to modification in light of advances in linguistic theory, in light of new data from the Nostratic daughter languages, and in light of findings from typological studies that give us a better understanding of the kind of patterning that is found in natural languages as well as a better understanding of what is characteristic of language in general, including language change.
Let us begin by looking at phonology: In 1972 and 1973, the Georgian scholar Thomas V. Gamkrelidze and the Russian scholar Vjačeslav V. Ivanov jointly proposed a radical reinterpretation of the Proto-Indo-European stop system. According to their reinterpretation, the Proto-Indo-European stop system was characterized by the three-way contrast glottalized ~ voiceless (aspirated) ~ voiced (aspirated). In this revised interpretation, aspiration is viewed as a redundant feature, and the phonemes in question could also be realized as allophonic variants without aspiration. Paul J. Hopper made a similar proposal at about the same time (Hopper 1973). I should point out here that, even though I support the revisions proposed by Gamkrelidze, Hopper, and Ivanov, my views are not dependent upon any particular reconstruction of the Proto-Indo-European stop system — the sound correspondences I have proposed can be maintained using the traditional reconstruction as well. What the new views of Proto-Indo-European consonantism did was bring into light the implausibility of certain Nostratic sound correspondences established by Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky (see below for details). Moreover, this new interpretation opened new possibilities for comparing Proto-Indo-European with the other Nostratic daughter languages, especially Proto-Kartvelian and Proto-Afrasian, each of which had a similar three-way contrast. The simplest and most straightforward assumption would be that the glottalized stops posited by Gamkrelidze, Hopper, and Ivanov for Proto-Indo-European would correspond to glottalized stops in Proto-Kartvelian and Proto-Afrasian, while the voiceless stops would correspond to voiceless stops and voiced stops to voiced stops. This, however, is quite different from the correspondences proposed by Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky. They see the glottalized stops of Proto-Kartvelian and Proto-Afrasian as corresponding to the traditional plain voiceless stops of Proto-Indo-European, while the voiceless stops in the former two branches are seen as corresponding to the traditional plain voiced stops of Proto-Indo-European, and, finally, the voiced stops to the traditional voiced aspirates of Proto-Indo-European. Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky then reconstruct the Proto-Nostratic phonological system on the model of Kartvelian and Afrasian, with the three-way contrast glottalized ~ voiceless ~ voiced in the series of stops and affricates.
The mistake that Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky made was in trying to equate the glottalized stops of Proto-Kartvelian and Proto-Afrasian with the traditional plain voiceless stops of Proto-Indo-European. Their reconstruction would make the glottalized stops the least marked members in the Proto-Nostratic labial series and the most marked in the velar series. Such a reconstruction is thus in contradiction to typological evidence, according to which glottalized stops uniformly have the opposite frequency distribution (most marked in the labial series and least marked in the velar series [for details, cf. Gamkrelidze 1978]). The reason that Illič-Svityč’s and Dolgopolsky’s reconstruction contradicts the typological evidence is as follows: Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky posit glottalics for Proto-Nostratic on the basis of a small number of seemingly solid examples in which glottalics in Proto-Afrasian and/or Proto-Kartvelian appear to correspond to traditional plain voiceless stops in Proto-Indo-European. On the basis of these examples, they assume that, whenever there is a voiceless stop in the Proto-Indo-European examples they cite, a glottalic is to be reconstructed for Proto-Nostratic, even when there are no glottalics in the corresponding Kartvelian and Afrasian forms! This means that the Proto-Nostratic glottalics have the same frequency distribution as the Proto-Indo-European plain voiceless stops. Clearly, this cannot be correct. The main consequence of the mistaken comparison of the glottalized stops of Proto-Kartvelian and Proto-Afrasian with the traditional plain voiceless stops of Proto-Indo-European is that Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky are led to posit forms for Proto-Nostratic on the basis of theoretical considerations but for which there is absolutely no evidence in any of the daughter languages. The following examples illustrate the ad hoc nature of these reconstructions:
1. Dolgopolsky (1998:17) reconstructs a second singular personal pronoun *sü > *si ‘thou’, with an initial glottalized dental, on the basis of data from Indo-European, Afrasian, Uralic, and Mongolian. When one looks at the attested forms in the daughter languages, one cannot find a single form anywhere that begins with a glottalized consonant. Indeed, in natural languages having glottalized consonants, these sounds tend to be underrepresented in pronoun stems and inflectional affixes. What, then, is the basis for the reconstruction *sü? — nothing more than an ad hoc rule set up by Illič-Svityč.
2. Dolgopolsky (1998:17) also reconstructs an interrogative stem *"o- ‘who?’ (see also Illič-Svityč 1971— .I:355—356, no. 232, *Áo ‘who’). As in the preceding example, there is no evidence in any of the Nostratic daughter languages to support the reconstruction of an initial glottalized velar in this stem.
Do these criticisms completely invalidate the cognate sets proposed by Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky in which glottalics in Kartvelian and Afrasian appear to correspond to plain voiceless stops in Indo-European? Well, no, not exactly — it is not quite that simple. In some cases, the etymologies are correct, but the Proto-Nostratic reconstructions are wrong. This applies to the examples cited above — for the second person personal pronoun, I would reconstruct Proto-Nostratic *thi, and, in place of *"o- ‘who?’, I would reconstruct Proto-Nostratic *kwha-. Other examples adduced by Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky admit alternative explanations, while still others are questionable from a semantic point of view and should be abandoned. Once the questionable examples are removed, there is an extremely small number (no more than a handful) left over that appear to support their position. However, compared to the massive counter-evidence in which glottalized stops in Kartvelian and Afrasian correspond to similar sounds (the traditional plain voiced stops) in Proto-Indo-European, even these residual examples become suspect (they may be borrowings or simply false cognates). Finally, there are even some examples where Dolgopolsky’s and Illič-Svityč’s comparison of glottalized stops in Proto-Kartvelian and Proto-Afrasian with plain voiceless stops in Proto-Indo-European is correct. This occurs in the cases where two glottalics originally appeared in a Proto-Nostratic root: *C’VC’-. Such roots are preserved without change in Proto-Kartvelian and Proto-Afrasian, while in Proto-Indo-European, they have been subject to a rule of regressive deglottalization: *C’VC’- > *CVC’-.
Another major shortcoming is in Illič-Svityč’s reconstruction of the Proto-Nostratic vowel system, which, according to him, is essentially that of modern Finnish. It simply stretches credibility beyond reasonable bounds to assume that the Proto-Nostratic vowel system could have been preserved unchanged in Finnish, especially considering the many millennia that must have passed between the dissolution of the Nostratic parent language and the emergence of Finnish (Serebrennikov 1986:75 makes the same point). No doubt, this erroneous reconstruction came about as a result of Illič-Svityč’s failure to deal with the question of subgrouping. The Uralic-Yukaghir phylum, of which Finnish is a member, belongs to the Eurasiatic branch of Nostratic. Now, Eurasiatic is several millennia younger than Afrasian, which appears to be the oldest branch of the Nostratic macrofamily. Therefore, Afrasian must play a key role in the reconstruction of the Proto-Nostratic vowel system, and the Uralic-Yukaghir vowel system must be considered a later development that cannot possibly represent the original state of affairs.
In closing, we may note that Alexis Manaster Ramer (1997:94—96) arrived at the same conclusions reached here regarding the need to reexamine the Nostratic sound correspondences proposed by Illič-Svityč (and, by implication, Dolgopolsky as well) in light of typological considerations. Specifically, he writes:
6.1. Finally, quite recently, I decided to see what would happen if one counted up the occurrences of the different stops (voiceless vs. voiced vs. glottalized as well as labial vs. coronal vs. velar) reconstructed for Nostratic by Illich-Svitych. I only performed the experiment on root-initial stops, with the following results: (they are given as approximations because there is a problem arriving at exact figures given that there [are] some cases where it is difficult to tell whether one is dealing with a single Nostratic form or two, or whether a particular form should begin with this or that stop):
*b 50+ *d 20+ *g 40+
*p 15+ *t 15+ *k 50+
*p’ 40+ *t’ 30+ *k’ 60+
The first observation (see Manaster Ramer in press a) was that … the relative frequencies of the three phonation types (voiced, voiceless, glottalized) posited for Proto-Nostratic stops, as reflected in the sets of cognates compiled by Illich-Svitych, seem to be inconsistent with typological predictions. Specifically, at least in initial position, the series of stops reconstructed as glottalized is much more frequent at all points of articulation than the series reconstructed as (plain) voiceless.
Since one expects glottalized stops to be more marked and hence less frequent than plain voiceless, in particular, something was amiss. However, just as in the case of the clusters and affricates discussed above, the solution turned out to be quite simple. Given the markedness considerations, I would suggest that the “glottalized” series was actually plain voiceless in Proto-Nostratic, while the “voiceless” series represented some more marked phonation type, glottalized or perhaps aspirated. This is consistent with the fact that the Nostratic series Illich-Svitych wrote as “glottalized” is in fact realized as glottalized only in parts of Afro-Asiatic and in Kartvelian, and in the latter it is easy to imagine that this could be a contact-induced development.
This reinterpretation of Nostratic … naturally calls to mind the glottalic theory of Indo-European. As it happens, the stop series reconstructed by Illich-Svitych as plain voiceless and by me as glottalized (or aspirated) comes out in Proto-Indo-European as that series of stops which is traditionally reconstructed as voiced (media) but which many scholars have recently interpreted as glottalized.
Nostratic Nostratic Indo-European Indo-European
(Illich-Svitych) (Manaster Ramer) (Traditional) (Glottalic)
*t *t’ (or *th) *d *t’
*t’ *t *t *t
*d *d *dh *d
Totally unexpectedly, typological considerations provide us with arguments for reinterpreting the Nostratic stop series in a way that fits quite well with the glottalic theory of Indo-European. Of course, there is no reason in general to expect the phonetics of related languages and proto-languages to agree in this way, and such a convergence cannot be regarded as a criterion or an argument for relatedness among languages, since that would entail the “misuse of similarity” which Hamp (1992) cautions against. But it is not an unwelcome development when it occurs.
1.6. Evidence for Nostratic
The following evidence provides the basis for setting up a Nostratic macrofamily:
1. First and foremost, the descendant languages can be shown to share a large common vocabulary. In an article published in 1965, Illič-Svityč listed 607 possible common Nostratic roots, but only 378 have been published to date in his posthumous comparative Nostratic dictionary. It should be noted that there are differences between the etymologies proposed in 1965 and the items included in the later dictionary: first, some of the items listed in 1965 do not appear in the dictionary; next, minor changes have been made to several of the earlier etymologies. Dolgopolsky currently claims to have approximately 3,000 common Nostratic roots, but only a small sampling of this material has been published to date. In the joint monograph (1994) by myself and John C. Kerns, entitled The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Study in Distant Linguistic Relationship, I supply a great deal of lexical material from the Nostratic daughter languages to support 601 common Nostratic roots. It should be mentioned here as well that, in Volume 2 (2002) of his book Indo-European and Its Closest Relatives: The Eurasiatic Language Family, Greenberg also presents a substantial body of lexical material, though Greenberg’s Eurasiatic is not the same as Nostratic.
2. As is to be expected, the various branches of Nostratic investigated to date exhibit regular sound correspondences (see the table of Nostratic sound correspondences at the end of Chapter 12 for details), though, it should be mentioned, there are differences in interpretation between Illič-Svityč and Dolgopolsky on the one hand and myself on the other.
3. Finally, a substantial number of common grammatical formants have now been recovered — many of these are listed in Illič-Svityč’s comparative Nostratic dictionary; see also the chapter on Nostratic morphology by John C. Kerns in Bomhard—Kerns (1994:141—190), Volume 1 of Greenberg’s Indo-European and Its Closest Relatives: The Eurasiatic Language Family (Greenberg 2000), Dybo (2004), and Bomhard (2002a and 2004c). The grammatical formants that have been recovered to date are discussed in detail in Chapter 16 of this book, while a systematic reconstruction of Proto-Nostratic morphology is attempted in Chapter 17.
Notable among the lexical items uncovered by Illič-Svityč, Dolgopolsky, Greenberg, and myself is a solid core of common pronominal stems (these are listed below in Table 1, though only the stems represented in Indo-European are given — the Proto-Nostratic reconstructions are given according to my system; for information on other pronoun stems, cf. Dolgopolsky 1984). These pronominal stems have particular importance, since, as forcefully demonstrated by John C. Kerns (1985:9—50), pronouns, being among the most stable elements of a language, are a particularly strong indicator of genetic relationship (Ruhlen 1994a:92—93 makes the same point). Kerns (1985:48) concludes (the emphasis is his):
The results are overwhelming. We are forced to conclude that the pronominal agreements between Indo-European and Uralic, between Uralic and Altaic, and between Indo-European and Altaic, did not develop independently, but instead were CAUSED by some UNIQUE historical circumstance. In short, it is extremely unlikely that the three pronominal systems could have evolved independently.
Likewise, Collinder (1966:200):
It has been said that identical pronouns do not even give an indication of affinity, because you will find such identities anywhere, even if you compare two manifestly unrelated languages. The random checks I have made seem to indicate that this does not hold good. Outside the nostratic group, there are identities, but only a few, from one to four. Within the nostratic group the number of identities varies from, let us say, seven to ten. As the probability of mere chance decreases in geometric, not in arithmetic, proportion to the increasing number of identities, seven to ten identities means quite another level of probability than one to four.
The conclusion seems inescapable that the consistent, regular phonological correspondences that can be shown to exist among the Nostratic daughter languages as well as the agreements in vocabulary and grammatical formants that have been uncovered to date cannot be explained as due to linguistic borrowing or mere chance but can only be accounted for in terms of common origin, that is, genetic relationship. To assume any other possibility would be tantamount to denying the efficacy of the Comparative Method. This does not mean that all problems have been solved. On the contrary, there remain many issues to be investigated and many details to be worked out, but the future looks extremely exciting and extremely promising.
At this stage of research, we can confidently say that the following languages/ language families are to be included in the Nostratic macrofamily: Afrasian, Elamo-Dravidian, Kartvelian, and Eurasiatic. Eurasiatic, in turn, includes the following: Etruscan, Indo-European, Uralic-Yukaghir, Altaic, Chukchi-Kamchatkan, Gilyak, and Eskimo-Aleut. Each of these languages/language families will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 2. The Nostratic family tree may be represented as follows (note here, for comparison, the computer-generated family tree given by Starostin [1999c:66]):
Chart 1: The Nostratic Macrofamily
Table 1: The Distribution of Nostratic Pronoun Stems
A. Personal Pronoun Stems
Proto-Nostratic |
Proto-IE |
Proto-Kartvel. |
Proto-Afrasian |
Proto-Uralic |
Proto-Dravid. |
Proto-Altaic |
|
*mi-/ *me- (1st sg.) |
*me-/ *mo- |
*me-, *men- |
*m[i]- |
*me |
|
*mi (> *bi) |
ma(e), me-a, me-e |
*ma-/ *mə- (1st pl. incl.) |
*-me-/ *-mo- |
|
*ma- |
*me |
|
*ma- (> *ba-) |
-me |
*wa-/ *wə- (1st pl.) |
*we-/ *wo-; *wey- |
|
*wa- |
|
|
|
|
*na-/*nə- (1st pl.) |
*ne-/*no-; *‚-s- |
|
*na- |
|
*n`m- |
|
|
*thi-/ *the- (2nd sg.) |
*th³, *the- |
|
*ti- |
*te |
|
*thi, *tha |
za-e, -zu |
NOTES:
1. Indo-European: The 1st sg. stem *mi-/*me- is used in the oblique cases (except in the Celtic branch, where it has spread into the nominative as well); the 1st pl. inclusive stem *ma-/*mə- is preserved in 1st person plural verb endings; the 1st pl. stem *wa-/*wə- is preserved as an independent 1st person plural pronoun stem and in 1st person dual and/or plural verb endings; the 2nd sg. reconstructions *th³, *the- represent later, Post-Anatolian forms.
2. Kartvelian: The 1st pl. stem *na-/*nə- is found in Svan näj ‘we’.
3. Afrasian: The 1st sg. stem *mi-/*me- and 1st pl. inclusive stem *ma-/*mə- are found only in Chadic as independent pronouns; the 1st sg. stem *mi-/*me- serves as the basis of the 1st sg. verbal suffix in Highland East Cushitic; the 1st pl. stem *wa-/*wə- is found in Egyptian and Chadic (in Egyptian, wy means ‘I, me’).
4. Elamo-Dravidian: The 2nd sg. stem *thi-/*the- is found in Elamite in the 2nd sg. and pl. personal class marker -t(i/a) (cf. Khačikjan 1998:34) and in Dravidian in, for example, the Parji appositional marker -t of the 2nd sg. in pronominalized nouns and as a verb suffix of the 2nd sg.
5. Altaic: The 1st sg. stem *mi- has become bi ‘I’ in the Altaic daughter languages, while the 1st pl. stem *ma- has become ba in Mongolian (= 1st pl. exclusive); the initial *m- is preserved in the oblique cases, however; the 2nd sg. stem *thi- has become Di ‘you’ in Mongolian.
6. Sumerian: ma(-e), me-a, me-e ‘I’ are Emesal forms; -me is a 1st pl. possessive suffix, ‘our’; -zu is a 2nd sg. possessive suffix, ‘your’.
7. Etruscan: The 1st sg. stem *mi-/*me- is preserved in (nominative) mi ‘I’, (accusative) mini ‘me’; the 2nd sg. stem may be preserved in the pronoun stem †i, but this is uncertain since the meaning of the Etruscan form is unknown — however, the 2nd sg. stem *thi-/*the- is clearly reflected in the Etruscan verbal imperative endings -ti, -θ, -θi.
8. Chukchi-Kamchatkan: The pronouns of the 1st and 2nd persons sg. and pl. are as follows in Chukchi:
Singular Plural
1 γə-m mu-ri
2 γə-t tu-ri
9. Gilyak: The 1st pl. inclusive stem *ma-/*mə- is preserved in the 1st pl. inclusive pronoun me-r, mi-r ‘we’ (note also 1st dual me-ge, me-gi); the 1st plural stem *na-/*nə- is found in the 1st pl. exclusive pronoun ńyŋ ‘we’; the 2nd sg. stem *thi-/*the- is preserved in the 2nd sg. pronoun či ‘you’. (The forms cited are from the Amur dialect [cf. Gruzdeva 1998:25—26].)
10. Eskimo-Aleut: The 1st sg. stem *mi-/*me- is preserved in the West Greenlandic 1st sg. relative possessive suffix -ma, while the 2nd sg. stem *thi-/ *the- is preserved in the 2nd sg. absolutive possessive suffix -(i)t. The plural forms are -ma and -tit respectively.
B. Demonstrative Pronoun Stems
Proto-Nostratic |
Proto-IE |
Proto-Kartvel. |
Proto- Afrasian |
Proto- Uralic |
Proto- Dravid. |
Proto- Altaic |
Sum. |
*sa-/*sə- |
*so- |
*š- (*s₁-) |
|
*sä |
|
|
|
*tha-/ *thə- proximate |
*tho- |
|
*ta- |
*ta, *tä |
*t`n- |
*tha- (*the-) |
|
*thu-/ *tho- distant |
*tho- |
|
*tu |
*to |
|
|
|
*kha-/ *khə- |
*khe-, *kho-, *khi- |
*-k- |
*ka- |
|
|
|
|
*dyi-/ *dye- |
*-dhe |
|
*dyi- |
*tyi-/*tye- |
|
|
|
*ʔi-/*ʔe- |
*ʔe-/*ʔo-; *ʔey-/ *ʔoy-/*ʔi- |
*i-, *e- distant |
|
*e |
*ī̆- prox. |
*i-, *e- prox. |
|
*ʔa-/*ʔə- |
*ʔe-/*ʔo- |
*a-, *e- prox. |
|
|
*ā̆- distant |
*a- distant |
|
*na-/*nə-, *ni-/*ne-, *nu-/*no- |
*ne-/*no- |
|
*na- |
*na, *nä
*no |
|
|
ne-en, ne(-e) |
NOTES:
1. Indo-European: The stem *dyi-/*dye- is only preserved as a suffixed particle *-dhe; the stem *ne-/*no- has a derivative *ʔe-no-/*ʔo-no-.
2. Altaic: The stem *tha-/*thə- is used as the distant demonstrative in Altaic: Mongolian (nom. sg.) tere (< *te-r-e) ‘that’, (nom. pl.) tede ‘those’; Tungus (Solon) tari ‘that’; Manchu tere ‘that’.
3. Sumerian: The demonstrative stem *ʔi-/*ʔe- is found in e ‘hither, here’.
4. Etruscan: The proximate stem *tha-/*thə- is preserved in ita, ta ‘this’; the stem *kha-/*khə- is preserved in eca (archaic ika), ca ‘this’.
5. Gilyak: The proximate stem *tha-/*thə- is preserved in (proximate) tyd' ‘this (the nearest to the speaker, visible and available in the present situation)’; the stem *kha-/*khə- is preserved in kud' ‘that (absent in the present situation, formerly referred to in the previous discourse)’. (The forms cited are from the Amur dialect.)
6. Eskimo-Aleut: The stem *tha-/*thə- is preserved in the Inuit (also called Inupiaq) prefix ta-, which may be added to any demonstrative form whose coreferent has already been focused.
C. Relative and Interrogative Stems
Proto-Nostratic |
Proto-IE |
Proto- Kartvel. |
Proto- Afrasian |
Proto- Uralic |
Proto- Dravid. |
Proto- Altaic |
*kwhi-/ *kwhe- relative |
*kwhe-/ *kwho-/ *kwhi- |
|
|
*ki, *ke |
|
*kha(y)- |
*kwha-/ *kwhə- interrog. |
*kwhe-/ *kwho-/ *kwhi- |
|
*kwa- |
*ku, *ko |
|
(*kha[y]-) |
*mi-/ *me- interrog. |
*me-/ *mo- |
*mi-, *min- |
*mi- |
*mi
|
|
|
*ma-/ *mə- relative |
*me-/ *mo- |
*ma- |
*ma |
(*mi) |
|
|
*ʔay-, *ʔya- relative & interrog. |
*ʔyo- |
|
*ʔay(y)- |
*yo |
*yā- |
*yā- |
NOTES:
1. Kartvelian: The relative/interrogative stem *ʔya- is found in Svan (inter-rogative) jär ‘who?’, (relative) jerw\j ‘who’, (indefinite) jer ‘somebody, something’.
2. Altaic: The interrogative stem *mi-/*me- is found in the Turkish interrogative particles mi, mı, mu, mü and in the Middle Mongolian suffixed interrogative particle -mu, -mi.
3. Sumerian: The interrogative stem *mi-/*me- occurs in me-na-àm ‘when?’, me-a ‘where?’, me-šè ‘where to?’.
4. Chukchi-Kamchatkan: The interrogative stem *mi-/*me- is preserved in me-in ‘who?’.
5. Eskimo-Aleut: The interrogative stem *kwha-/*kwhə- is preserved in the Proto-Eskimo interrogative pronoun *ki(na) ‘who?’ and in *qa–a ‘when?’, *qavcit ‘how many?’, *qaku ‘when (in future)?’. The interrogative stem *mi-/*me- is preserved in the Proto-Eskimo enclitic particle *mi ‘what about?’.
Reconstructing Proto-Nostratic Online; Comparative Phonology, Morphology, and Vocabulary
CHAPTER TWO
A Survey of the Nostratic Languages
2.1. Indo-European
The Indo-European (in German, Indogermanisch — occasionally translated as “Indo-Germanic” in older works) language family includes the following branches: Anatolian (Hittite-Luwian), Italic, Celtic, Germanic, Tocharian, Greek, Baltic, Slavic, Albanian, Armenian, and Indo-Iranian. There are also a number of poorly-attested Indo-European daughter languages such as Thracian, Phrygian, Venetic, Illyrian, Ligurian, and several others. Phrygian may be the ancestor of Armenian, but this is not absolutely certain. Indo-European languages cover all of Europe except for Basque (found in northern Spain and the southwestern corner of France), Turkish (found in the Balkans), and Uralic (Finnish, Estonian, Hungarian, and several others with extremely small numbers of speakers), modern Iran, parts of Central Asia north of Iran, Afghanistan, and northern and central India. European colonization has also spread Indo-European languages to the New World, where they have mostly supplanted Native American languages, to Australia and New Zealand, and to large parts of Africa and Asia, where they are used as languages of administration and/or learning. The extinct Hittite and Luwian (along with Palaic, Hieroglyphic Luwian, Lycian, Lydian, Carian, and several other poorly-attested dialects and/or languages) were spoken in what is now Turkey, while the Tocharian dialects, which are also extinct, were spoken in what is now the Xīnjiāng (Sinkiang; formerly called Chinese Turkestan) Uighur Autonomous Region (Xīnjiāng Wéiwú’ěr Zìzhìqū) of the People’s Republic of China (Zhōnghuá Rénmín Gònghéguó).
The Indo-European language family has been subjected to thorough study for the past two centuries, and there is broad agreement among scholars on essentials, which is not to say that all problems have been resolved or that there are still not controversial issues. Several languages have extremely old records and/or literatures, such as Hittite, whose earliest records go back to around 1800 BCE, though the majority of documents date from 1500 to 1200 BCE; Mycenaean Greek, whose earliest inscriptions date from 1300 BCE; Sanskrit, with the oldest part of the Rig-Veda (composed in an archaic dialect of Old Indic) probably going back as far as 1200 BCE; Avestan, the liturgical language of Zoroastrianism, whose most ancient scriptures date from about 600 BCE; Old Persian, which begins with the Achaemenid Records from about 500 to 400 BCE; and Italic, with the oldest Latin inscription dating from the sixth century BCE, and with the earliest Oscan-Umbrian records dating from about the fifth century BCE. Records do not begin to appear for the other Indo-European daughter languages until the middle to later half of the first millennium CE.
Two large dialect groups are conventionally recognized: (A) the so-called “centum” languages and (B) the so-called “satəm” languages. This dialectal division is based upon the different treatment of the gutturals in each group. In the satəm languages, sibilants (s and z), palato-alveolar fricatives (š and ²), and affricates correspond to velars in the centum languages, while velars and affricates in the former group correspond to reflexes of earlier labiovelars in the latter group. There are other correspondences as well, found in a small number of examples, in which velars in the centum languages correspond to velars in the satəm languages. Though much attention has been devoted in the literature to this division, its significance is greatly overrated.
Morphologically, Proto-Indo-European was a highly inflected language — except for particles, conjunctions, and certain quasi-adverbial forms, all words were inflected. The basic structure of inflected words was as follows: root + suffix (one or more) + inflectional ending. A notable morphophonemic characteristic was the extensive use of a system of vocalic alternations (“Ablaut” in German) as a means to mark morphological distinctions. Verbs were strongly differentiated from nouns. For nouns and adjectives, three genders, three numbers, and as many as eight cases have been reconstructed (mainly on the basis of what is found in Classical Sanskrit), though it is doubtful that all of these features were ancient — it is indeed possible to discern several chronological layers of development. The traditional reconstruction of the Proto-Indo-European verbal system sets up two voices, four moods, and as many as six tenses. Syntactically, Proto-Indo-European seems to have had many of the characteristics of an SOV language, though there must, no doubt, have been a great deal of flexibility in basic word order patterning. Proto-Indo-European morphology is discussed at length in Chapter 18 of this book, while earlier developments are discussed in Chapter 19.
It is generally agreed that the homeland of the Indo-Europeans is to be located to the north of and between the Black and Caspian Seas (cf. Anthony 2007). Alternative proposals are far less convincing. See Chapter 13 for more information about homelands.
The subgrouping of the Indo-European daughter languages has long been controversial. Though Sturtevant (following a suggestion by Emil Forrer) attempted to show that the Anatolian languages were the first to split off from the remainder of the Indo-European speech community, up until recently, most Indo-Europeanists did not follow him on this (a notable exception being Warren Cowgill). Sturtevant renamed the parent language “Indo-Hittite” to reflect this early split. The question about whether Baltic and Slavic are two independent branches or whether they are descended from a common Balto-Slavic is still contentious, as is the question of Italo-Celtic unity. Recently, Donald Ringe and a group of linguists from the University of Pennsylvania have returned to the problem of subgrouping. By using a computational cladistic model, they have arrived at the following conclusions (Ringe—Warnow—Taylor—Michailov—Levison 1998:406—407):
The important features of this tree can be summarized as follows. The Indo-Hittite hypothesis, according to which Anatolian is one first-order subgroup of the IE family and all other branches together are the other first-order subgroup is supported — but by only one character, the presence of a thematic aorist in the verb system... The satem core emerges as an extremely robust subgoup, always with the traditional internal structure (which is not surprising). More interestingly, there is always a subgroup including Greek and Armenian, as has been suspected in the past… Most interesting of all, Italo-Celtic emerges as a robust subgroup, as suggested by Jasanoff 1994.
They further note that Tocharian also split off from the rest of the speech community at a very early date — it was the next branch to break away after Anatolian. Finally, they conclude that Germanic was originally part of the dialect continuum that included Balto-Slavic but that it later was in contact with and shared several common developments with Pre-Proto-Celtic and Pre-Proto-Italic.
The conclusions reached by Ringe and his colleagues are both sober and persuasive. Consequently, it is their views on the subgrouping of the Indo-European daughter languages that are followed in this book.
2.2. Kartvelian
Kartvelian (also referred to as South Caucasian), which is one of the three indigenous language families of the Caucasus Mountains, includes the following languages: Georgian, Mingrelian, Laz, and Svan. These languages fall into two main groupings, namely, Svan, on the one hand, and Georgian, Laz, and Mingrelian, on the other. Laz and Mingrelian, in turn, form the Zan subbranch. Svan preserves many archaic characteristics. Except for Laz, which is spoken in Turkey, and the Ingilouri dialect of Georgian, which is spoken in Azerbaijan, the Kartvelian languages are spoken in the westernmost parts of the Caucasus Mountains within the borders of the Republic of Georgia.
The Kartvelian family tree may be represented as follows (cf. Tuite 1997:4; Schmidt 1962:13; Hewitt 1995:2; Gamkrelidze—Mačavariani 1982:20; Fähnrich—Sardshweladse 1995:5):
Georgian, which has its own distinctive alphabet, has a literary tradition going back 1500 years, the earliest text being a translation of the Bible dating from the 5th century CE, only fragments of which still exist. The early literature was exclusively religious, and it was only with the so-called “Golden Age” (12th century CE) that secular literature began to appear. There are a number of distinct Georgian dialects, which differ not only in vocabulary and phonology but also in morphology and syntax.
A notable feature of Kartvelian phonology is the existence of complex consonant clusters — Georgian, for example, tolerates 740 initial clusters, which can have upwards of six members (Fähnrich 1993:20 lists eight), and 244 final clusters. In Svan, on the other hand, initial consonant clusters are far less complex than in Georgian, while final clusters can be far more complex. Old Georgian had both voiceless and glottalized uvular stops, but only the glottalized member is retained in Modern Georgian. Both are still found in Svan. Unlike Georgian, Svan does not distinguish /v/ and /w/ as distinct phonemes — it only has /w/.
Morphologically, the Kartvelian languages are all highly inflected; Georgian, for example, has six basic grammatical cases as well as eleven secondary cases. A notable characteristic of noun declension is the distinction of ergative and absolutive cases; the ergative case is used to mark the subject of transitive verbs, while the absolutive case is used to mark direct objects and the subject of intransitive verbs. It is the dative case, however, that is used to mark the subject of so-called “inverted verbs”. There are several other departures from canonical ergative-type constructions, so much so in Mingrelian, for instance, that this language no longer possesses any true ergative features. Adjectives normally precede the nouns they modify. Postpositions are the rule. Verb morphology is particularly complicated — for example, Deeters lists eleven distinctive functional elements that may be arrayed around a given verb root, though they may not all appear simultaneously; the overall scheme is as follows:
1. Preverb(s)
2. Personal prefix(es) (subjective or objective)
3. Character or version vowel
ROOT
4. Passive suffix
5. Causative suffix(es)
6. Plural suffix (for nominative-absolutive noun)
7. Present stem formant
8. Imperfect suffix
9. Mood vowel
10. Personal ending
11. Subjective plural suffix
Syntactically, the predominant word order is SOV, though SVO is not uncommon.
2.3. Afrasian
Afrasian (also called Afroasiatic, Hamito-Semitic, Semito-Hamitic, Erythraic, and Lisramic) includes the following branches: Semitic, Egyptian, (Libyco-)Berber, Cushitic, Omotic, Chadic, and Ongota (for an attempt at subgrouping, see Chapter 7 of this book). Except for Semitic, all of the Afrasian languages are found in northern and eastern Africa. In ancient times, Semitic was primarily located in the Near East, but Muslim conquests beginning in the 7th century CE have spread a single Semitic language, namely, Arabic, across the greater part of northern Africa, where it has totally replaced Egyptian (Coptic) as a spoken language and has greatly restricted, but has not totally supplanted Berber, which now exists only in isolated pockets. Though no longer spoken, Coptic is still used as the liturgical language of the Christian Coptic Church in Egypt. It is estimated that there are at least 250 languages in the family.
The following chronology may be established for the branching off of the various branches of Afrasian (cf. Ehret 1995:483—490): Omotic, which appears to contain many distinctive features, must have been the first branch to split from the rest of the Afrasian speech community. The next split was between Cushitic on the one hand and Chadic, Egyptian, Berber, and Semitic on the other. Finally, Chadic split off, followed by Egyptian and Berber. Within Semitic, Akkadian is the most archaic language as a whole, though Arabic preserves the original phonological structure better than any of the other Semitic languages. Tuareg is usually viewed as the most conservative Berber language, as are Beja (also called BeTawye) and Saho-Afar within Cushitic.
The study of Afrasian as a whole is still not far advanced. Several branches, such as Semitic and Egyptian, for example, have written records going back many millennia and have been scientifically investigated rather thoroughly, while other Afrasian languages are scarcely even known. Egyptian, whose earliest inscriptions date from about 3400 BCE, and Akkadian, whose earliest inscription dates from the reign of King Lugalzagesi of Uruk (roughly 2352 to 2327 BCE), were the languages of great civilizations of antiquity, while Hebrew and Arabic are the liturgical languages of Judaism and Islam respectively. The Semitic languages exhibit great internal consistency as a group, with fairly straightforward correspondences in morphology, with close resemblance in their phonological systems, and with a large common vocabulary. In contrast, the internal divisions in the other branches, except for Egyptian, of course, which is a single language, are far more pronounced.
Proto-Afrasian was most likely highly inflected. It is simply not possible, however, given the present level of knowledge, to reconstruct the morphological structure of the parent language in detail, though some common features (such as the distinction of grammatical gender, the existence of two verbal conjugation systems, at least one of which, namely, the prefix conjugation, probably goes back to Proto-Afrasian, and a common set of pronominal stems) have been noted. Syntactically, the classical Semitic languages, Egyptian, and the Berber languages are VSO, the majority of the Cushitic languages are SOV, and most Chadic languages are SVO.
2.4. Uralic-Yukaghir
As the name implies, Uralic-Yukaghir has two divisions, namely, Uralic and Yukaghir. Yukaghir consists of a single branch, while Uralic is divided into Finno-Ugrian and Samoyed. There are about 30 Uralic languages. The internal subgrouping of the Uralic languages is still not fully settled. Finno-Ugrian is thought to have become separated from Samoyed some time between 4,000 to 2,000 BCE. Yukaghir is located in northeastern Siberia, while Uralic languages are spread across northern Eurasia, from Scandinavia and central Europe in the west to north-central Siberia east of the Ural Mountains in the east.
Hungarian is the first Uralic language for which there are written records. Though the first printed text did not appear until 1527, Hungarian words are cited as early as the 9th and 10th centuries CE in Arabic and Byzantine documents. Finnish literature did not begin until 1548, with a translation of the Bible. An Estonian translation of the Bible first appeared in 1632. Yukaghir has no written literature.
Morphologically, the Uralic languages are predominantly agglutinating, though many of the modern languages, especially Estonian, which has innovated considerably, have deviated from the original type. Proto-Uralic nominal inflection had at least three numbers (singular, dual, and plural), two grammatical cases (accusative and genitive), and three local cases (dative, locative, and ablative). Verb morphology distinguished two conjugational types, namely, subjective and objective. A large number of suffixes existed, each with its own distinctive morphological function. The original syntactic structure seems to have been SOV, and this is fairly well preserved in the modern Samoyed and Ob-Ugric languages (Ostyak [Xanty] and Vogul [Mansi]) and Cheremis (Mari). The basic word order in the other languages is SVO, though, as a general rule, word order in all of the Uralic languages is rather flexible. Hungarian stands apart, word order being determined here more by topic-comment considerations than in the other Uralic languages, so that neither SOV nor SVO can be said to be dominant. Yukaghir is also basically agglutinating, though a certain amount of fusion has taken place in the verb. There are few prefixes but numerous suffixes. Postpositions are the rule. Syntactically, the basic word order is SOV.
2.5. Elamo-Dravidian
Dravidian has four branches: South Dravidian, South-Central Dravidian, Central Dravidian, and North Dravidian. Though the vast majority of Dravidian languages are concentrated in southern India, there are also pockets of Dravidian in northern India, in Pakistan, in Nepal, in northern and eastern Sri Lanka, and on the Maldive Islands. At least 25 Dravidian languages are spoken. There is still uncertainty over the subgrouping of several languages. Elamite, which is now extinct, was located primarily in southwestern Iran in the vicinity of the Zagros Mountains as well as the adjacent plains of Khuzistan and to the south along the coast of the Persian Gulf. There is good reason to believe that Elamite once occupied all or nearly all of the Iranian plateau. The inscriptions of the Indus Valley (Harappan) Civilization may have been written in an early Dravidian language (cf. Fairservis 1992:14—23 and Parpola 1994; but see Zide—Zvelebil [eds.] 1976 for a critical assessment of attempts to decipher the Indus Valley script).
The earliest Elamite text is the “Treaty of Narām-Sin”, which dates from before 2200 BCE. After that, only cuneiform texts composed in a slightly deviant form of Akkadian are found until around 1300 BCE, when Elamite cuneiform texts begin to appear. The literature of the Dravidian languages, especially Tamil, is enormous. In addition to Tamil, Malayalam, KannaTa, and Telugu are fully-developed literary languages, while the remaining Dravidian languages have extensive oral traditions. The oldest Tamil literature probably dates from around the 2nd or 3rd centuries CE.
Morphologically, the Dravidian languages are agglutinating. The basic root type was monosyllabic, though there is some indication that an extremely small number of bisyllabic roots may have to be reconstructed at the Proto-Dravidian level as well. This is, however, by no means certain, and it is best at present to regard Proto-Dravidian roots as exclusively monosyllabic. Inflectional categorization was achieved by means of suffixes added directly to the lexical roots or to the lexical roots extended by means of derivational suffixes. Prefixes were not used. Any vowel, long or short, could appear in a root, but only a, i, or u could appear in a suffix. Two basic parts of speech were differentiated in Proto-Dravidian: (A) nominals, which included nouns and adjectives, and (B) verbs. Nouns were inflected for case, person, number, and gender. Eight cases (nominative, accusative, sociative, dative, genitive, instrumental, locative, and ablative), two numbers (singular and plural), and two genders (animate and inanimate) are assumed to have existed in Proto-Dravidian. There were separate first person plural inclusive and exclusive pronouns. Verbs were inflected for tense and person. There were two tenses (past and non-past) and two moods (modal and indicative). Indeclinables existed as a separate stem type distinct from nouns and verbs. Syntactically, the basic word order was SOV.
Elamite was also agglutinating. Three basic parts of speech were differentiated: (A) verbs, (B) nominals, and (C) indeclinables. The basic verbal stem form was (C)VC(V). Grammatical categorization was achieved by means of suffixation. In the nominal stems, case relationships were mostly indicated by the use of postpositions. Verb morphology was extremely simple. Word order structure was SOV. Cf. Grillot-Susini 1987; Hinz—Koch 1987; Khačikjan 1998; Paper 1955; McAlpin 1981; Reiner 1969; Stolper 2004.
2.6. Altaic
Altaic has at least three branches: Mongolian, (Manchu-)Tungus, and (Chuvash-) Turkic. Mongolian languages are spoken in Mongolia proper, in northern China in the so-called “Inner Mongolian Autonomous Region”, in eastern Siberia in areas bordering on Mongolia, and (Moghol) in Afghanistan; (Manchu-)Tungus languages are spoken in eastern Siberia and (Manchu) in northeastern China in what was formerly known as Manchuria, but which is now divided between the provinces of Hēilóngjiāng, Jílín, and Liáoníng and the Inner Mongolia Autonomous Region (Něi Měngz Zìzhìqū) and is populated mostly by ethnic Chinese (Hàn); and (Chuvash-) Turkic languages are spoken in a large, discontinuous band, stretching from Turkey in the west, across Central Asia and western China in the middle, and on to northeastern Siberia in the east. Korean and Japanese-Ryukyuan are also considered by some specialists to be Altaic languages.
The oldest Turkic texts are the Orkhon inscriptions of the Kül-Tegin stele, written in a type of runic and dating from 735 CE. The earliest Mongolian inscription is only five lines long and mentions the nephew of Genghis Khan (1154-1227 CE). The longest early literary work in Mongolian is The Secret History of the Mongols, an imperial chronicle written in Uighur script and thought to date from around 1240 CE. Few documents in Mongolian have survived from the period between the composition of that chronicle and the 17th century. Beginning with the 17th century, however, a rich Buddhist and historical literature began to appear. There is an extensive literature in Manchu, but most of it is of relatively recent origin and consists mainly of translations from Chinese sources.
The phonological systems of the Altaic languages are comparatively uncomplicated. Vowel harmony is a common phonological characteristic, though, in the (Chuvash-)Turkic and Mongolian branches, it is based on a front ~ back contrast, while, in the (Manchu-)Tungus branch, it is based on a high ~ low contrast. It is difficult to reconstruct the common Altaic morphological system in detail since there are deep differences among the descendant languages (the resemblances are more observable in vocabulary and syntax), though there are indeed a few common morphological elements, and all of the Altaic languages belong to the same type. Morphologically, the Altaic languages are typically agglutinating in structure. Though all Altaic languages make extensive use of suffixes, only a few of them are common to all three branches, one notable common feature here being the use of possessive suffixes. Nouns and verbs are clearly differentiated, though not as sharply as in Indo-European. There is a common stock of pronominal stems, and all Altaic languages use postpositions. Syntactically, the original structure was SOV, and this is well preserved in the modern languages, especially the Turkic languages, which are fairly strict in this regard, while more flexibility is found in the Mongolian and (Manchu-)Tungus languages.
2.7. Chukchi-Kamchatkan
The Chukchi-Kamchatkan family includes the following languages: Chukchi, Koryak, Kerek, Alyutor, and Kamchadal (also called Itelmen or Itelmic). Koryak, Kerek, and Alyutor are extremely close as a group, and these, in turn, are close to Chukchi. Kamchadal, which is now on the verge of extinction, stands apart from the others. The Chukchi-Kamchatkan languages are found in the extreme northeast corner of Siberia in the Chukotka and Kamchatka peninsulas. Though written languages were developed for Chukchi, Koryak, and Kamchadal in the 1930’s, only Chukchi is still being used in publications and education.
Chukchi consonantism is fairly simple, there being only 14 distinct consonant phonemes, while that of Koryak is more complex than Chukchi, and that of Kamchadal is even more complex than either Chukchi or Koryak, containing both plain and glottalized stops, voiced and voiceless fricatives, and three lateral phonemes. A notable characteristic of Chukchi phonology is a system of vowel harmony based on a height contrast. In this system, vowels are classified as either “dominant” (e, a, o) or “recessive” (i, e, u) — note that the vowel e appears in both series. The presence of a dominant vowel in any morpheme in a word conditions the change of any recessive vowels in the word to their corresponding dominant counterparts. A similar system is partially preserved in Koryak.
The Chukchi-Kamchatkan languages are agglutinating. In Chukchi, however, some fusion has occurred, particularly in the verb. Chukchi nouns distinguish singular from plural. There are relatively few cases. Typical of all Chukchi-Kamchatkan languages is case marking of subjects and direct objects on the basis of an ergative-absolutive system. Chukchi and Koryak also exhibit a certain degree of incorporation, though it is not as extensively used as in Eskimo-Aleut. Verbs clearly distinguish between transitive and intransitive, with the ergative being used in conjunction with transitive verbs. Chukchi employs postpositions exclusively. Chukchi word order is rather free, with OV being slightly more predominant than VO.
2.8. Gilyak
Gilyak (also called Nivkh) is usually considered to be a single language, but the two main dialects, namely, the Amur dialect, on the one hand, and the Sakhalin (or Eastern) dialect, on the other, are not mutually intelligible. Of the two, the Sakhalin dialect is more archaic. The Gilyaks are found on the lower reaches of the Amur River and on Sakhalin Island. Though a written language was developed for the Amur dialect in the 1930’s, next to nothing has appeared in it.
Gilyak tolerates highly complex consonant clusters. Furthermore, initial consonants undergo various alternations, which are conditioned both by the final segment of the preceding word and by syntactical considerations. In contrast, the vowel system is fairly simple.
Gilyak morphology is typologically similar to that found in the Altaic languages. Noun morphology is uncomplicated. Only a few cases are distinguished, including several basic spatial cases. Singular and plural are also distinguished. A system of numeral classifiers has been developed. In the pronouns, there are separate forms for first person dual and plural, while the first person plural, in turn, has a distinction between inclusive (mer) and exclusive (~‹–). Verb morphology is also simple, though one notable feature worth mentioning is the wide range of non-finite gerunds that can occur. Gilyak possesses postpositions but no prepositions. Basic word order structure is SOV.
2.9. Eskimo-Aleut
As the name implies, Eskimo-Aleut has two branches: Eskimo and Aleut. The Aleut dialects are mutually intelligible. However, this is not the case with the Eskimo dialects. Two main Eskimo dialect groups are distinguished, namely, Yupik and Inuit (also called Inupiaq). Yupik speakers are concentrated in southwestern Alaska, beginning at Norton Sound and extending southward along the western and southern coasts and inland. An extremely small enclave of Yupik speakers is found in northeastern Siberia as well. Inuit speakers are found north of Norton Sound all the way to the northern coast of Alaska and extending eastward across all of the northernmost parts of Canada and on into Greenland. Aleut is spoken on the Aleutian Islands and the Commander Islands.
The Proto-Eskimo vowel system was relatively simple (Proto-Eskimo had only four vowels: *i, *a, *u, *‹ — phonemic length probably did not exist), while the consonant system resembled that of Proto-Uralic. The phonological systems found in the Eskimo dialects are far more complex than that of Proto-Eskimo. In contrast, Aleut phonology is less complicated. Nouns differentiate between singular, dual, and plural. The case system is reminiscent of that found in Chukchi-Kamchatkan, though it differs by using suffixes to indicate the plural. The verb makes no tense distinctions but has four moods and separate transitive and intransitive conjugations. The absolutive case is used as the subject of intransitive verbs and as the direct object of transitive verbs, while a different case is used as the subject of transitive verbs. Conjunctions and other particles are absent in most Eskimo dialects. A notable characteristic is that incorporation has been developed to such an extent that whole phrases may be expressed in a single word.
2.10. Etruscan
Etruscan was spoken in central and northern Italy. Its earliest texts date from the 7th century BCE, and it probably ceased to be a spoken language around the first half of the first century CE, being replaced by Latin. It was written in a special alphabet derived from Greek. There are about 13,000 Etruscan inscriptions currently known, most of which are found on tombs and sarcophagi or on artifacts. These inscriptions are extremely short, repetitive, and formulaic in nature. A few longer texts also exist, such as the Pyrgi quasi-bilingual (Etruscan and Phoenician) discovered in 1964. Unfortunately, no literary texts have survived. Though there still remain problems, the majority of what has survived can be read and understood.
Etruscan is now known to be related to the poorly-attested Lemnian (spoken on the island of Lemnos) and to Raetic (spoken in northeastern Italy in present-day Tyrol). Together, they form the Tyrrhenian language family.
The Etruscan phonological system was composed of plain voiceless stops, voiceless aspirates, and fricatives, as well as two nasals (m and n), two liquids (l and r), and h. There were no voiced stops. There were only four vowels (a, e, i, u).
Etruscan was an inflectional language. Though there probably was no grammatical gender, special suffixes were used to indicate females. Etruscan nouns and adjectives distinguished several cases as well as two numbers (singular and plural). Verb morphology is not as well known due to the nature of the material that has survived.
2.11. Sumerian
Sumerian, which is now extinct, was spoken in southern Iraq, extending from around Babylon in its northernmost limits to the tip of the Persian Gulf in the south. From the time of the earliest texts, several dialects can be distinguished — the two most important dialects are called eme-…ir÷ý and eme-sal (eme means ‘speech, language’) by the Sumerians themselves. Moreover, during the three thousand or so years in which Sumerian was recorded, several distinct stages of development can be discerned — Old Sumerian, Neo-Sumerian, Old Babylonian Sumerian, etc. As noted in the previous chapter, Sumerian is not a Nostratic daughter language but is distantly related to Nostratic.
The earliest Sumerian inscriptions date from around 3200 BCE, though the oldest intelligible literary texts date from about 2600 BCE, and the language was probably still spoken as late as the 3rd century BCE. The Sumerian writing system was based exclusively on the cuneiform syllabary, which exhibits several marked stages of development over the course of Sumerian literary history.
Though the Sumerian phonological system was simple, there are still many uncertainties about underlying phonemic distinctions. For example, the traditional transcription shows a voiced ~ voiceless contrast in the stops, but this may well have been a voiceless unaspirated ~ voiceless aspirated contrast instead. There is still not, even after more than a century of intensive study, widespread agreement among experts in the field on many fundamental questions of Sumerian grammar. Nevertheless, the overall structure is clear. Morphologically, Sumerian was an agglutinating language. Three word classes were distinguished: (A) nouns, (B) verbs, and (C) adjectives. Though grammatical gender in the strictest sense did not exist, nouns fell into two classes, namely, animate and inanimate, which were only differentiated in 3rd person actor verbal and possessive pronoun affixes and in the relative pronoun. Ten cases and two numbers (singular and plural) were distinguished. The plural was indicated either by means of the suffix -ene, which was used only with animate nouns, or by reduplication. In later texts, the plural could also be indicated by the form hi-a, which was used with inanimate nouns and which was originally an independent word meaning ‘mixed, various, unspecified’, or by -me-eš, which was properly the enclitic copula with plural suffix. Sumerian differentiated between ergative and absolutive in nouns. In pronouns, however, the patterning was that of a nominative-accusative system. Sumerian verbs were formed by adding various prefixes and/or affixes directly to the verbal root. Verbal constructions fell into one of two categories, namely, finite forms or non-finite forms. Finite verbal stems distinguished three conjugational types: (A) the intransitive conjugation, (B) the transitive hamsu conjugation, and (C) the transitive marû conjugation. Intransitive forms were noted by means of pronominal suffixes, while transitive forms were noted by means of either prefixes, suffixes, or both. The basic word order structure was SOV.
Reconstructing Proto-Nostratic Online; Comparative Phonology, Morphology, and Vocabulary
References
Aalto 1969a | Aalto, Pentti 1969a | “Uralisch und Altäisch” [Uralic and Altaic], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 41:323—334. (Reprinted in Aalto Pentti 1987, pp. 215—226.) |
Aalto 1969b | Aalto, Pentti 1969b | Review of Karl Menges, The Turkic Languages and Peoples, Finnisch-Ugrische Forschungen 37:170—173. |
Aalto 1970 | Aalto, Pentti 1970 | “Materialen zur vergleichenden Forschung der drawidischen Sprachen” [Materials for the Comparative Study of the Dravidian Languages], Finnisch‑Ugrische Forschungen 38: 326—329. |
Aalto 1972 | Aalto, Pentti 1972 | “The Alleged Affinity of Dravidian and Fenno‑Ugrian”, in: Proceedings of the II International Conference‑Seminar of Tamil Studies, 1968. Madras: International Association of Tamil Research, pp. 262—266. |
Aalto 1975 | Aalto, Pentti 1975 | “G. J. Ramstedt and Altaic Linguistics”, Central Asian Journal XIX.3:161—193. (Reprinted in Aalto Pentti 1987, pp. 227—259.) |
Aalto 1977 | Aalto, Pentti 1977 | “Zum Problem des ‘Nostratischen’” [Concerning the Problem of ‘Nostratic’], Finnisch‑Ugrische Forschungen 42:277—280. |
Aalto 1982 | Aalto, Pentti 1982 | “Proposals Concerning the Affinities of Korean”, Mémoires de la Société Finno‑Ougrienne 181:19—29. |
Aalto 1987 | Aalto, Pentti 1987 | Studies in Altaic and Comparative Philology. A Collection of Professor Pentti Aalto’s Essays in Honour of His 70th Birthday. Helsinki: Finnish Oriental Society. |
Aalto 1988 | Aalto, Pentti 1988 | “The Problem of ‘Nostratic’,” ΑΙΩΝ 10:49—65. |
Abondolo 1987 | Abondolo, Daniel 1987 | “Hungarian”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 577—592. |
Abondolo 1988 | Abondolo, Daniel 1988 | Hungarian Inflectional Morphology. Budapest: Akadémia Kiadó. |
Abondolo 1998a | Abondolo, Daniel 1998a | “Introduction”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 1—42. |
Abondolo 1998b | Abondolo, Daniel 1998b | “Finnish”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 149—183. |
Abondolo 1998c | Abondolo, Daniel 1998c | “Khanty”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 358—386. |
Abondolo 1998d | Abondolo, Daniel 1998d | “Hungarian”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 428—456. |
Abondolo 1998 | Abondolo, Daniel (ed.) 1998 | The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Adams 1978 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1978 | “On the Development of the Tocharian Verb System”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 98.1:277—288. |
Adams 1980 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1980 | “Towards a History of PIE n-Stems in Tocharian”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 100:439—443. |
Adams 1981 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1981 | “The Pre-History of Tocharian Preterite Participles”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 17—24. |
Adams 1984 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1984 | “The Position of Tocharian among the Other Indo-European Languages”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 104:395—402. |
Adams 1988 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1988 | Tocharian Historical Phonology and Morphology. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Adams 1990 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1990 | “Some Reflexes of PIE Neuter n-Stems in Tocharian”, Tocharian and Indo-European Studies 4:65—78. |
Adams 1991 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1991 | “The Dual in Proto-Indo-European and Tocharian”, Tocharian and Indo-European Studies 5:11—44. |
Adams 1999 | Adams, Douglas Q. 1999 | A Dictionary of Tocharian B. Amsterdam and Atlanta, GA: Editions Rodopi B.V. |
Adams 2005 | Adams, Douglas Q. 2005 | “Tocharian B traksiṃ ‘Grains’ and an Indo-European Word for ‘Berry’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 33.3/4:219—225. |
Adrados 1961 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1961 | Estudios sobre las laringales indoeuropeas [Studies on the Indo-European Laryngeals]. (= Manuales y anejos de “Emerita”, vol. 19.) Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientificas (C.S.I.C.). |
Adrados 1963 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1963 | Evolución y estructura del verbo indoeuropeo [Evolution and Structure of the Indo-European Verb]. Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientificas (C.S.I.C.). |
Adrados [1974] | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] [1974] | [2nd edition. 2 vols. Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientificas (C.S.I.C.).] |
Adrados 1975 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1975 | Lingüística indoeuropea [Indo-European Linguistics]. 2 vols. Madrid: Gredos. |
Adrados 1981a | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1981a | “Perfect, Middle Voice, and Indo-European Verbal Endings”, Emerita XLIX.1:27—58. |
Adrados 1981b | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1981b | “Further Considerations on the Phonetics and Morphologization of Hü and Hß in Indo-European”, Emerita XLIX.1:231—271. |
Adrados 1981c | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1981c | “More on Laryngeals with Labial and Palatal Appendices”, Folia Linguistica Historica 2.2:191—235. |
Adrados 1981d | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1981d | “Indo-European -s-Stems”, Indogermanische Forschungen 86: 96—122. |
Adrados 1982 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1982 | “The Archaic Structure of Hittite: The Crux of the Problem”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 10.1/2:1—35. |
Adrados 1987 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1987 | “Ideas on the Typology of Proto-Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:97—119. |
Adrados 1988a | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1988a | Nuevos estudios de lingüística indoeuropea [New Studies in Indo-European Linguistics]. Madrid: Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientificas (C.S.I.C.). |
Adrados 1988b | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1988b | “Archaisms in Anatolian Nominal Inflexion”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), A Linguistic Happening in Memory of Ben Schwartz: Studies in Anatolian, Italic, and Other Indo-European Languages. Louvain-la-Neuve: Peeters, pp. 13—40. |
Adrados 1989a | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1989a | “Etruscan as an IE Anatolian (but not Hittite) Language”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 17.3/4:363—383. |
Adrados 1989b | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1989b | “Agglutination, Suffixation or Adaptation? For the History of Indo-european Nominal Inflection”, Indogermanische Forschungen 97:21—44. |
Adrados 1989c | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1989c | “¿Sincretismo de casos en micénio?” [Syncretism of Cases in Mycenaean?], Minos XXIV:169—185. |
Adrados 1992 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 1992 | “The New Image of Indoeuropean: The History of a Revolution”, Indogermanische Forschungen 97:1—28. |
Adrados 2000 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 2000 | “Towards a Syntax of Proto-Indo-European”, Indogermanische Forschungen 105:60—67. |
Adrados 2005 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 2005 | “El etrusco como indoeuropeo anatolio: viejos y nuevos argumentos” [Etruscan as Anatolian Indo-European: Old and New Arguments], Emerita 78:45—56. |
Adrados 2007 | Adrados, Francisco R[odríguez] 2007 | “A Panorama of Indo-European Linguistics since the Middle of the Twentieth Century: Advances and Immobilism”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 35.1/2:129—153. |
Adrados—Bernabé—Mendoza 1995—1998 | Adrados, Francisco R., Alberto Bernabé, and Julia Mendoza 1995—1998 | Manual de lingüística indoeuropea [Handbook of Indo-European Linguistics]. 3 vols. Madrid: Ediciones Clásicas. |
Agostiniani 1992 | Agostiniani, L. 1992 | “Contribution à l’étude de l’épigraphie et de la linguistique étrusques” [Contribution to the Study of Etruscan Epigraphy and Linguistics], Lalies 11:37—74. |
Ahlqvist 1982 | Ahlqvist, Anders (ed.) 1982 | Papers from the 5th International Conference on Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Aistleitner 1967 | Aistleitner, Joseph 1967 | Wörterbuch der ugaritischen Sprache [Dictionary of the Ugaritic Language]. Berlin: Akademie Verlag. |
Aitchison 1991 | Aitchison, Jean 1991 | Language Change: Progress or Decay? 2nd edition. Cambridge and New York, NY: Cambridge University Press. |
Ajello 1998 | Ajello, Roberto 1998 | “Armenian”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 197—227. |
Akmajian—Demers—Harnish 1984 | Akmajian, Adrian, Richard A. Demers, and Robert M. Harnish 1984 | Linguistics: An Introduction to Language and Communica-tions. 2nd edition. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
Al-Ani 1970 | Al-Ani, Salman 1970 | Arabic Phonology. The Hague: Mouton. |
Albright 1934 | Albright, William F. 1934 | The Vocalization of the Egyptian Syllabic Orthography. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Albright 1969 | Albright, William F. 1969 | The Proto-Sinaitic Inscriptions and their Decipherment. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Alcalay 1959 | Alcalay, Reuben 1959 | The Complete English-Hebrew Dictionary. 2 vols. Jerusalem: Massada. |
Alcalay 1969 | Alcalay, Reuben 1969 | The Complete Hebrew-English Dictionary. Jerusalem: Massada. |
Alderson—İz 1959 | Alderson, A. D., and Fahir İz (eds.) 1959 | The Concise Oxford Turkish Dictionary. Reprinted 1984. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Alhoniemi 1988 | Alhoniemi, Alho 1988 | “Das Tscheremissische” [Cheremis], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 84—95. |
Allen 1967 | Allen, W. Sidney 1967 | “Correlations of Tone and Stress in Ancient Greek”, in: To Honor Roman Jakobson. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 46—62. |
Allen 1972 | Allen, W. Sidney 1972 | Sandhi. The Hague: Mouton. |
Allen 1973 | Allen, W. Sidney 1973 | Accent and Rhythm, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Allen 1974 | Allen, W. Sidney 1974 | Vox Graeca. 2nd edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Allen 1976 | Allen, W. Sidney 1976 | “The PIE Aspirates: Phonetic and Typological Factors in Reconstruction”, in: Aphonse Juilland (ed.), Linguistic Studies Offered to Joseph Greenberg. Saratoga, CA: Anma Libri, vol. 2, pp. 237—247. |
Allen 1978 | Allen, W. Sidney 1978 | Vox Latina. 2nd edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Ambrazas 1996 | Ambrazas, Saulius 1996 | “The Ancient Relationship of the Baltic and Germanic Languages from the Standpoint of Word Formation”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 126—132. |
Ambros 1977 | Ambros, Arne 1977 | Damascus Arabic. Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Ambrosini 1991 | Ambrosini, Riccardo 1991 | Le lingue indo-europee [The Indo-European Languages]. Pisa: Edizioni ETS. |
Ambrosini 1998 | Ambrosini, Riccardo 1998 | Introduzione alla glottologia indo-europea [Introduction to Indo-European Linguistics]. Pisa: Edizioni ETS. |
Anderson 1972 | Anderson, Henning 1972 | “Diphthongization”, Language 48:11—50. |
Anderson 1998 | Anderson, Henning 1998 | “Slavic”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 415—453. |
Anderson 2003 | Anderson, Henning (ed.) 2003 | Language Contacts in Prehistory: Studies in Linguistic Stratigraphy. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Anderson 1971 | Anderson, John M. 1971 | The Grammar of Case: Towards a Localistic Theory. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Anderson 1980 | Anderson, Paul Kent 1980 | “On the Reconstruction of the Syntax of Comparison in PIE”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax: Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1970. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 225—236. |
Anderson 1974 | Anderson, Stephen R. 1974 | The Organization of Phonology. New York, NY: Academic Press. |
Andersson 1994 | Andersson, Erik 1994 | “Swedish”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 271—312. |
Andronov 1970 | Andronov, Mikhail S. 1970 | The Dravidian Languages. Moscow: Nauka. |
Andronov 1996 | Andronov, Mikhail S. 1996 | A Grammar of the Malayalam Language in Historical Treatment. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Andronov 2003 | Andronov, Mikhail S. 2003 | A Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian Languages. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Andronov 2004 | Andronov, Mikhail S. 2004 | A Reference Grammar of the Tamil Language. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Annamalai—Steever 1998 | Annamalai, E., and Stanford B. Steever 1998 | “Modern Tamil”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 100—128. |
Anreiter 1984 | Anreiter, Peter P. 1984 | Bemerkungen zu den Reflexen indogermanischer Dentale im Tocharischen [Remarks on the Reflexes of the Indo-European Dentals in Tocharian]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissen-schaft. |
Anthony 1991 | Anthony, David W. 1991 | “The Archeology of Indo-European Origins”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 19.3/4:193—222. |
Anthony 1995 | Anthony, David W. 1995 | “Horse, Wagon, and Chariot: Indo-European Languages and Archaeology”, Antiquity 69:554—565. |
Anthony 2007 | Anthony, David W. 2007 | The Horse, the Wheel, and Language: How Bronze-Age Riders from the Eurasian Steppes Shaped the Modern World. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
Antonsen 1972 | Antonsen, Elmer H. 1972 | “The Proto-Germanic Syllabics (Vowels)”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 117—140. |
Antonsen 1975 | Antonsen, Elmer H. 1975 | A Concise Grammar of the Older Runic Inscriptions. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer. |
Anttila 1969 | Anttila, Raimo 1969 | Proto-Indo-European Schwebeablaut. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Anttila 1972 | Anttila, Raimo 1972 | An Introduction to Historical and Comparative Linguistics. New York, NY: Macmillan. |
Anttila 1989 | Anttila, Raimo 1989 | Historical and Comparative Linguistics. 2nd edition. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Anttila—Embleton 1988 | Anttila, Raimo, and Sheila Embleton 1988 | Review of Vitalij Shevoroshkin and Thomas L. Markey (eds.), Typology, Relationship and Time, The Canadian Journal of Linguistics 33.1:79—89. |
Applegate 1971 | Applegate, Joseph R. 1971 | “The Berber Languages”, in: Carleton T. Hodge (ed.), Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 96—118. |
Appleyard 1977 | Appleyard, D[avid] L. 1977 | A Comparative Approach to the Amharic Lexicon. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics 5.2.) Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Appleyard 1984 | Appleyard, D[avid] L. 1984 | “Internal Classification of the Agaw Languages”, in: James Bynon (ed.), Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Linguistics: Papers from the Third International Hamito-Semitic Congress. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 33—67. |
Appleyard 1999 | Appleyard, D[avid] L. 1999 | “Afroasiatic and the Nostratic Hypothesis”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 289—314. |
Arbeitman 1973 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1973 | “The Hittite Multifarious Brood of *dhē-”, Revue Hittite et Asianique XXXI:101—109. |
Arbeitman 1974 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1974 | “Why Two Preverbs (and only These Two) Became Inseparable in Hittite”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.1:70—76. |
Arbeitman 1976a | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1976a | “Cuneiform and Hieroglyphic Luwian -za”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 90.1/2:145—148. |
Arbeitman 1976b | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1976b | “Anatolian piya- ‘give’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 4.1:79—80. |
Arbeitman 1978 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1978 | “An Addendum to ‘Why Two Preverbs (and only These Two) Became Inseparable in Hittite’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 6.1/2:143—145. |
Arbeitman 1979 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1979 | “The Basis of the ‘Vulgarism’ He Don’t”, Orbis XXXVIII.1:111—114. |
Arbeitman 1980a | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1980a | “Look Ma What’s Become of the Sacred Tongues”, Maledicta IV:71—88. |
Arbeitman 1980b | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1980b | “The Recovery of and IE Collocation”, in: John A. C. Greppin (ed.), First International Conference on Armenian Linguistics: Proceedings. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books, pp. 225—231. |
Arbeitman 1980c | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1980c | “The Suffix of Iscariot”, Journal of Biblical Literature 99.1:122—124. |
Arbeitman 1980d | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1980d | “E Luvia Lux”, The Journal of the Ancient Near Eastern Society of Columbia University 12:9—11. |
Arbeitman 1981 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1981 | “The Hittite is Thy Mother: An Anatolian Approach to Genesis 23 (Ex Indo-Europea Lux)”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 889—1026. |
Arbeitman 1982 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1982 | “Luwio-Semitic and Hurrio/Mitannio-Semitic Mischname-Theophores in the Bible, on Crete, and at Troy”, Scripta Mediterranea 3:5—53. |
Arbeitman 1986 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1986 | “Trojan, Luwian, and the Mass Media, 1985 (C.E.)”, Diachronica III.2:283—291. |
Arbeitman 1987 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1987 | “Hittite pai-, Why no *wai-: An Anatolian/Indo-European Heterogloss”, in: George Cardona and Norman H. Zide (eds.), Festschrift for Henry Hoenigswald on the Occasion of his Seventieth Birthday. Tübingen: Gunter Narr Verlag, pp. 19—31. |
Arbeitman 1988a | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1988a | “Iranian ‘Scribe’, Anatolian ‘Ruler’, or Neither: A City’s Rare Chances for ‘Leadership’ (Reflections on Recording and Learning)”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), FUCUS: A Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 1—101. |
Arbeitman 1988b | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1988b | “Minos, the Ὀαριστής of Great Zeus: ἁ-, ἀ- and ὀ-Copulative, the Knossan Royal Titulary and the Hellenization of Crete”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), A Linguistic Happening in Memory of Ben Schwartz: Studies in Anatolian, Italic, and Other Indo-European Languages. Louvain: Peeters, pp. 411—462. |
Arbeitman 1991 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 1991 | “Ugaritic Pronominals in the Light of Morphophonemic Economy”, in: Alan S. Kaye (ed.), Semitic Studies in Honor of Wolf Leslau on the Occasion of his Eighty-Fifth Birthday, November 14th, 1991. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, vol. I, pp. 82—106. |
Arbeitman 2000 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. 2000 | “Luwian ziti- and Radical Cognates”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 1—17. |
Arbeitman 1988a | Arbeitman, Yoël L. (ed.) 1988a | FUCUS: A Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 58.) Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Arbeitman 1988b | Arbeitman, Yoël L. (ed.) 1988b | A Linguistic Happening in Memory of Ben Schwartz: Studies in Anatolian, Italic, and Other Indo-European Languages. Louvain: Peeters. |
Arbeitman 2000 | Arbeitman, Yoël L. (ed.) 2000 | The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters. |
Arbeitman—Ayala 1981 | Arbeitman, Yoël L., and Gilbert-James Ayala 1981 | “Rhotacism in Hieroglyphic Luwian”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 25—28. |
Arbeitman—Bomhard 1981 | Arbeitman, Yoël L., and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.) 1981 | Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 16, parts I and II.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Arbeitman—Rendsburg 1981 | Arbeitman, Yoël L., and Gary Rendsburg 1981 | “Adana Revisited: 30 Years Later”, Archív Orientální 49:145—157. |
Ard 1980 | Ard, Josh 1980 | “A Sketch of Vowel Harmony in the Tungus Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), Studies in the Languages of the USSR. (= International Review of Slavic Linguistics, 5.) Edmonton: Linguistic Research, pp. 23—43. |
Ariste 1968 | Ariste, Paul 1968 | A Grammar of the Votic Language. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 68.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Arlotto 1972 | Arlotto, Anthony 1972 | Introduction to Historical Linguistics. Reprinted 1981. Lanham, MD: University Press of America, Inc. |
Arumaa 1964— | Arumaa, Peter 1964— | Urslavische Grammatik [Proto-Slavic Grammar]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Asher 1981 | Asher, R. E. 1981 | Tamil. Amsterdam: North-Holland Publishing Co. |
Asher 1994 | Asher, R. E. (ed.) 1994 | The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. Oxford: Pergamon Press. (Second edition edited by Keith Brown [Amsterdam, London, New York, NY: Elsevier, 2005].) |
Askedal 1994 | Askedal, John Ole 1994 | “Norwegian”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 219—270. |
Assadian—Hakola 2003 | Assadian, Hodjjat, and Hannu Panu Aukusti Hakola 2003 | Sumerian and Proto-Duraljan: A Lexical Comparison concerning the Suduraljan Hypothesis. Kuopio: Kuopio University Printing Office. |
Austefjord 1988 | Austefjord, Anders 1988 | “On the Oldest Type of Aorists in Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 16.1/2:23—32. |
Austerlitz 1968 | Austerlitz, Robert 1968 | “L’ouralien” [Uralic], in: André Martinet (ed.), Le langage [Language]. Paris: Éditions Gallimard, pp. 1331—1387. |
Austerlitz 1983 | Austerlitz, Robert 1983 | “Genetic Affiliation among Proto-Languages”, Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 185:51—57. |
Austerlitz 1986 | Austerlitz, Robert 1986 | “Areal Phonetic Typology in Time: North and East Asia”, in: Winfred P. Lehmann (ed.), Language Typology 1985. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 27—42. |
Austerlitz 1987 | Austerlitz, Robert 1987 | “Uralic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 567—576. |
Austerlitz 1991 | Austerlitz, Robert 1991 | “Alternatives in Long-Range Comparison”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (ed.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 353—364. |
Austin 1941 | Austin, William A. 1941 | “The Prothetic Vowel in Greek”, Language 17:83—92. |
Austin 1942 | Austin, William A. 1942 | “Is Armenian an Anatolian Language?”, Language 18:22—25. |
Austin 1946 | Austin, William A. 1946 | “A Corollary to the Germanic Verschärfung”, Language 17:83—92. |
Austin 1962 | Austin, William A. 1962 | “The Phonemics and Morphophonemics of Manchu”, in: Nicholas Poppe (ed.), American Studies in Altaic Linguistics. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press, pp. 15—22. |
Austin—Smith 1937 | Austin, William, and Henry Lee Smith 1937 | “The Etymology of Hittite yukas”, Language 13:104—106. |
Azevedo 2005 | Azevedo, Milton M. 2005 | Portuguese: A Linguistic Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Back 1979a | Back, Michael 1979a | “Die Rekonstruktion des idg. Verschlusslautsystems im Lichte der einzelsprachlichen Veränderungen” [The Reconstruction of the Indo-European Consonant System in Light of the Changes in the Individual Languages], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachwissenschaft (KZ) 93:179—195. |
Back 1979b | Back, Michael 1979b | “Sonorität und Lautwandel” [Sonority and Sound Change], in: Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic, and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, vol. I, pp. 53—69. |
Back 1981 | Back, Michael 1981 | “Die mittelpersische Lautverschiebung: ein Stilwandel” [The Middle Persian Sound Shift: A Manner-change], Die Sprache 27.2:178—186. |
Bader 1971 | Bader, Françoise 1971 | “Réflexions sur le verbe indo-européen” [Thoughts on the Indo-European Verb], Revue de Philologie, de Littérature, et d’Histoire Anciennes 45:304—317. |
Bader 1981 | Bader, Françoise 1981 | “Anaphoriques du type νιν en hittite” [Anaphora of the Type νιν in Hittite], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 31—45. |
Bader 1987 | Bader, Françoise 1987 | “Hittite Duratives and the Problem of I.E. Present — Forma-tions with Infix and Suffix”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:121—156. |
Bader 1988 | Bader, Françoise 1988 | “Noms de parenté anatoliens et formations à laryngale” [Anatolian Names of Relationship and Laryngeal Formations], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 17—48. |
Bader 1990 | Bader, Françoise 1990 | “Traitements de laryngales en groupe: allongement compensatoire, assimilation, anaptyxe” [The Treatments of Laryngeals in Group: Compensatory Lengthening, Assimilation, Anaptyxis], in: Jean Kellens (ed.), La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”, pp. 1—47. |
Bader 1994a | Bader, Françoise 1994a | “Introduction”, in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 7—23. |
Bader 1994b | Bader, Françoise 1994b | “Les noms des Aryens: ethniques et expansion” [The Names of the Aryans: Ethnic and Expansion], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 7—23. |
Bader 2000 | Bader, Françoise 2000 | “On Pronouns”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 19—33. |
Bader 1994 | Bader, Françoise (ed.) 1994 | Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions. |
Baker 2003 | Baker, Peter 2003 | Introduction to Old English. Oxford: Blackwell. |
Bakró-Nagy 1992 | Bakró-Nagy, Marianne Sz. 1992 | Proto-Phonotactics. Phonotactic Investigations of the PU and PFU Consonant System. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Baldi 1974 | Baldi, Philip 1974 | “Indo-European *sekw-”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.1:77—88. |
Baldi 1979 | Baldi, Philip 1979 | “Typology and Indo-European Prepositions”, Indogermanische Forschungen 84:49—61. |
Baldi 1983 | Baldi, Philip 1983 | An Introduction to the Indo-European Languages. Carbondale and Edwardsville, IL: Southern Illinois University Press. |
Baldi 1987 | Baldi, Philip 1987 | “Indo-European Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 31—67. |
Baldi 1990 | Baldi, Philip 1990 | “Introduction: The Comparative Method”, in: Philip Baldi (ed.), Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology. The Hague, Paris, and New York, NY: Mouton, pp. 1—13. |
Baldi 1999 | Baldi, Philip 1999 | The Foundations of Latin. (= Trends in Linguistics, Studies and Monographs 117.) Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Baldi 1990 | Baldi, Philip (ed.) 1990 | Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology. The Hague, Paris, and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Baldi—Johnston-Staver 1989 | Baldi, Philip, and Ruth Johnston-Staver 1989 | “Historical Italic Phonology in Typological Perspective”, in Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 85—101. |
Baldi—Werth 1978 | Baldi, Philip, and Ronald N. Werth (eds.) 1978 | Readings in Historical Phonology. University Park, PA: Pennsylvania University Press. |
Baldi—Dini 2004 | Baldi, Philip, and Pietro U. Dini (eds.) 2004 | Studies in Baltic and Indo-European Linguistics in Honor of William R. Schmalstieg. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Ball—Fife 2002 | Ball, Martin J., and James Fife (eds.) 2002 | The Celtic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Bammesberger 1982 | Bammesberger, Alfred 1982 | “On the Ablaut of Athematic Verbs in Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 10.1/2:43—51. |
Bammesberger 1984 | Bammesberger, Alfred 1984 | Studien zur Laryngaltheorie [Studies on the Laryngeal Theory]. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Bammesberger 1989 | Bammesberger, Alfred 1989 | “The Laryngeal Theory and the Phonology of Prehistoric Greek”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 35—41. |
Bammesberger 1988 | Bammesberger, Alfred (ed.) 1988 | Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Bammesberger—Vennemann 2003 | Bammesberger, Alfred, and Theo Vennemann (eds.) 2003 | Languages in Prehistoric Europe. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Bańczerowski 1981 | Bańczerowski, Jerzy 1981 | “A Contribution to the Theory of Uralic Apophony”, in: Congressus Quartus Internationalis Fenno-Ugristarum, Pars III. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó, pp. 195—201. |
Baravykas 1967 | Baravykas, V. 1967 | Anglų-Lietuvių Kalbų Žodynas [English-Lithuanian Dictionary]. JAV. |
Barber 2001 | Barber, E. J. W. 2001 | “The Clues in the Clothes: Some Independent Evidence for the Movement of Families”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 1—14. |
Barbujani—Pilastro—Domenico—Renfrew 1994 | Barbujani, Guido, Andrea Pilastro, Silvia de Domenico, and Colin Renfrew 1994 | “Genetic Variation in North Africa and Eurasia: Neolithic Demic Diffusion vs. Paleolithic Colonisation”, American Journal of Physical Anthropology 95:137—154. |
Barker—Rasmussen 1998 | Barker, Graeme, and Tom Rasmussen 1998 | The Etruscans. Oxford and Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers, Ltd. |
Barnes—Weyhe 1994 | Barnes, Michael P., with Eivind Weyhe 1994 | “Faroese”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 190—218. |
Barth 1894 | Barth, Jacob 1894 | Die Nominalbildung in den semitischen Sprachen [The Formation of Nouns in the Semitic Languages]. 2nd edition, reprinted 1967. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Barth 1913 | Barth, Jacob 1913 | Die Pronominal-Bildung in den semitischen Sprachen [The Formation of Pronouns in the Semitic Languages]. Reprinted 1967. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Barton 1988 | Barton, Charles 1988 | “Gk. ‘esa, Arm. agay and PIE *h÷”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 49—58. |
Bartonek 2003 | Bartonek, Antonin 2003 | Handbuch des mykenischen Griechischen [Manual of Mycenaean Greek]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Battistella 1990 | Battistella, Edwin L. 1990 | Markedness: The Evaluative Superstructure of Language. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press. |
Bauer 1998 | Bauer, Brigitte L. M. 1998 | “Impersonal Verbs in Italic: Their Development from an Indo-European Perspective”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 26.1/2:91—120. |
Bauer—Leander 1918—1922 | Bauer, Hans, and Pontus Leander 1918—1922 | Historische Grammatik der hebräischen Sprache des Alten Testamentes [Historical Grammar of the Hebrew Language of the Old Testament]. 2nd reprint 1975. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Baxter 1998 | Baxter, William H. 1998 | “Response to Oswalt and Ringe”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 217—236. |
Beard 1981 | Beard, Robert 1981 | The Indo-European Lexicon. Amsterdam: North-Holland Publishing Co. |
Bednarczuk 1980 | Bednarczuk, Leszek 1980 | “Origin of Indo-European Parataxis”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 145—154. |
Beekes 1969 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1969 | The Development of the Proto-Indo-European Laryngeals in Greek. The Hague: Mouton. |
Beekes 1981 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1981 | “Intervocalic Laryngeal in Gatha-Avestan”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 47—64. |
Beekes 1985 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1985 | The Origins of the Indo-European Nominal Inflection. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Beekes 1987 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1987 | “The Word for ‘Four’ in Proto-Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:215—219. |
Beekes 1988a | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1988a | A Grammar of Gatha-Avestan. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Beekes 1988b | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1988b | “Laryngeal Developments: A Survey”, in: Alfred Bammes-berger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 59—105. |
Beekes 1989 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1989 | “The Nature of the Proto-Indo-European Laryngeals”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 23—33. |
Beekes 1990 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1990 | “Le type gotique bandi” [The Gothic Type bandi], in: Jean Kellens (ed.), La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”, pp. 49—58. |
Beekes 1995 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1995 | Comparative Indo-European Linguistics: An Introduction. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Beekes 1997 | Beekes, Robert S. P. 1997 | “Historical Phonology of Iranian”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 25.1/2:1—26. |
Beeler 1966 | Beeler, Madison S. 1966 | “Interrelationships with Italic”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 51—58. |
Beeler 1981 | Beeler, Madison S. 1981 | “Venetic Revisited”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 65—71. |
Beeston 1962 | Beeston, A. F. L. 1962 | “Arabian Sibilants”, Journal of Semitic Studies 3:222—231. |
Beeston 1970 | Beeston, A. F. L. 1970 | The Arabic Language Today. London: Hutchinson University Library. |
Beeston—Ghul—Müller—Ryckman 1982 | Beeston, A. F. L., M. A. Ghul, W. W. Müller, and J. Ryckman 1982 | Sabaic Dictionary. Leuven: Éditions Peeters. |
Bělíček 2004 | Bělíček, Pavel 2004 | Prehistoric Dialects: An Enquiry into the Origin of Human Languages. 2 vols. 2nd edition. Prague: Urania Publishers. |
Bell 1978 | Bell, Alan 1978 | “Syllabic Consonants”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, vol. 2, pp. 153—201. |
Bellwood—Renfrew 2002 | Bellwood, Peter, and Colin Renfrew (eds.) 2002 | Examining the Farming/Language Dispersal Hypothesis. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research. |
Bender 1971 | Bender, M. Lionel 1971 | “The Languages of Ethiopia: A New Lexicostatistic Classification and Some Problems of Diffusion”, Anthropological Linguistics 13.5:165—288. |
Bender 1975 | Bender, M. Lionel 1975 | Omotic: A New Afroasiatic Language Family. Cabondale, IL: University Museum, Southern Illinois University. |
Bender 1990 | Bender, M. Lionel 1990 | “Gender in Omotic”, Journal of Afroasiatic Linguistics 2.2: 203—226. |
Bender 1991 | Bender, M. Lionel 1991 | “Comparative Aroid (South Omotic) Syntax and Morphosyntax”, Afrika und Übersee 74.1:87—110. |
Bender 2000 | Bender, M. Lionel 2000 | Comparative Morphology of the Omotic Languages. (= LINCOM Studies in African Linguistics 19.) Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Bender 1976 | Bender, M. Lionel (ed.) 1976 | The Non-Semitic Languages of Ethiopia. East Lansing, MI: African Studies Center, Michigan State University. |
Bender—Takács—Appleyard 2003 | Bender, M. Lionel, Gábor Takács, and David L. Appleyard (eds.) 2003 | Selected Comparative-Historical Afrasian Linguistic Studies in Memory of Igor M. Diakonoff. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Benedict 1972 | Benedict, Paul K. 1972 | Sino-Tibetan: A Conspectus. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Benedict 1990 | Benedict, Paul K. 1990 | Japanese/Austro-Tai. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers. |
Bengtson 1987 | Bengtson, John D. 1987 | “Notes on Indo-European ‘10’, ‘100’, and ‘1000’,” Diachronica IV.1/2:257—262. |
Benkő—Imre 1972 | Benkő, Loránd, and Samu Imre (eds.) 1972 | The Hungarian Language. The Hague: Mouton. |
Bennett 1964 | Bennett, Emmett L. (ed.) 1964 | Mycenaean Studies. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. |
Bennett 1998 | Bennett, Patrick R. 1998 | Comparative Semitic Linguistics: A Manual. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns. |
Bennett 1972 | Bennett, William H. 1972 | “Prosodic Features in Proto-Germanic”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 99—116. |
Bennett 1980 | Bennett, William H. 1980 | An Introduction to the Gothic Language. New York, NY: The Modern Language Association of America. |
Benveniste 1935 | Benveniste, Émile 1935 | Origines de la formation des noms en indo-européen [Origins of the Formation of Nouns in Indo-European]. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Benveniste 1948 | Benveniste, Émile 1948 | Noms d’agent et noms d’action en indo-européen [Agent Nouns and Action Nouns in Indo-European]. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Benveniste 1949 | Benveniste, Émile 1949 | “Sur quelques développements du parfait indo-européen” [On Some Developments of the Indo-European Perfect], Archivum Linguisticum 1.1:16—22. |
Benveniste 1952 | Benveniste, Émile 1952 | “Lycien” [Lycian], in: Antoine Meillet and Marcel Cohen (eds.), Les langues du monde [The Languages of the World]. Paris: Honoré Champion, vol. I, pp. 205—208. |
Benveniste 1954 | Benveniste, Émile 1954 | “Études hittites et indo-européennes” [Hittite and Indo-European Studies], Bulletin de la Société Linguistique 50:29—43. |
Benveniste 1962 | Benveniste, Émile 1962 | Hittite et indo-européen [Hittite and Indo-European]. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Benveniste 1966—1974 | Benveniste, Émile 1966—1974 | Problèmes de linguistique générale [Problems of General Linguistics]. 2 vols. Paris: Gallimard. |
Benveniste 1969 | Benveniste, Émile 1969 | Le vocabulaire des institutions indo-européennes [The Vocabulary of Indo-European Institutions]. 2 vols. Paris: Les Éditions de Minuit. |
Benveniste 1970 | Benveniste, Émile 1970 | “Les valeurs économiques dans le vocabulaire indo-européen” [The Economic Values in the Indo-European Vocabulary], in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 307—320. |
Benveniste 1973 | Benveniste, Émile 1973 | Indo-European Language and Society. English translation by Elizabeth Palmer. Coral Gables, FL: University of Miami Press. |
Benzing 1953 | Benzing, Johannes 1953 | Einführung in das Studium des altäischen Philologie und die Türkologie [Introduction to the Study of Altaic Philology and Turkology]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Benzing 1955 | Benzing, Johannes 1955 | Lamutische Grammatik mit Bibliographie, Sprachproben und Glossar [Lamut Grammar with Bibliography, Language Specimens and Glossary]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Benzing 1959 | Benzing, Johannes 1959 | Die tungusischen Sprachen: Versuch einer vergleichenden Grammatik [The Tungus Languages: An Attempt at a Comparative Grammar]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Bereczki 1988 | Bereczki, Gábor 1988 | “Geschichte der wolgafinnischen Sprachen” [History of the Volgaic Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 314—350. |
Bergsträsser 1918—1929 | Bergsträsser, Gotthelf 1918—1929 | Hebräische Grammatik [Hebrew Grammar]. Reprinted 1986. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Bergsträsser 1928 | Bergsträsser, Gotthelf 1928 | Einführung in die semitischen Sprachen [Introduction to the Semitic Languages]. Reprinted 1977. Munich: Max Hueber. |
Bergsträsser 1983 | Bergsträsser, Gotthelf 1983 | Introduction to the Semitic Languages. Text Specimens and Grammatical Sketches. Translated with notes and Bibliography and an Appendix on Scripts by Peter T. Daniels. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns. |
Bergsland 1980 | Bergsland, Knut 1980 | “Reflections on the Comparison of Eskimo and Uralic”, Tartu Riikliku Ülikooli Toimetised 455:131—138. |
Berman 1997 | Berman, Ruth A. 1997 | “Modern Hebrew”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 312—333. |
Bernal 1980 | Bernal, Martin 1980 | “Speculations on the Disintegration of Afroasiatic”. Paper presented at the 8th conference of the North American Conference on Afroasiatic Linguistics, San Francisco, April 1980, and at the 1st International Conference of Somali Studies, Mogadishu, July 1980. |
Berta 1998a | Berta, Árpád 1998a | “Middle Kipchak”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 158—165. |
Berta 1998b | Berta, Árpád 1998b | “Tatar and Bashkir”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 283—300. |
Berta 1998c | Berta, Árpád 1998c | “West Kipchak Languages”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 301—317. |
Bese 1961 | Bese, L. 1961 | “Remarks on a Western Khalkha Dialect”, Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 13.3:279—294. |
Bhaskararao 1998 | Bhaskararao, Peri 1998 | “Gadaba”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 328—355. |
Bhat 1978 | Bhat, D. N. S. 1978 | “A General Study of Palatalization”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, vol. 2, pp. 47—92. |
Bhat 1998 | Bhat, D. N. S. 1998 | “Tulu”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 158—177. |
Bickerton 1990 | Bickerton, Derek 1990 | Language and Species. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Bidwell 1963 | Bidwell, Charles E. 1963 | Slavic Historical Phonology in Tabular Form. The Hague: Mouton. |
Bidwell 1969 | Bidwell, Charles E. 1969 | The Structure of Russian in Outline. Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pittsburgh Press. |
Biella 1982 | Biella, Joan Copeland 1982 | Dictionary of Old South Arabic. Chico, CA: Scholars Press. |
Bielmeier—Stempel 1994 | Bielmeier, Roland, and Reinhard Stempel (with the collaboration of René Lanszweert) (eds.) 1994 | Indogermanica et Caucasica: Festschrift für Karl Horst Schmidt zum 65. Geburtstag [Indo-European and Caucasian: Commemorative Volume for Karl Horst Schmidt on his 65th Birthday]. Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter. |
Billigmeier 1969 | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1969 | “An Inquiry into the Non-Greek Names on the Linear B Tablets from Knossos and their Relationship to the Languages of Asia Minor”, Minos X.2:177—183. |
Billigmeier 1974 | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1974 | “Does Minoan KU-NI-SU Mean ‘Grain’?”, Kadmos XIII.1: 79—81. |
Billigmeier 1975 | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1975 | “The Origin of the Greek Word λέων”, TALANTA VI:1—6. |
Billigmeier 1976 | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1976 | “The Value of Certain Hittite Hieroglyphic Signs”, Journal of Near Eastern Studies 35:189—193. |
Billigmeier 1977a | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1977a | “Origin of the Greek Word Phoinix”, TALANTA VIII/IX:1—4. |
Billigmeier 1977b | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1977b | “Troy, Taruiša, and the Etruscans”, TALANTA VIII/IX:5—10. |
Billigmeier 1979 | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1979 | “A Contribution toward Identification of the Language Contained in the Cypro-Minoan II Inscriptions from Enkomi”, in: Colloquium Mycenaeum: Actes du sixième colloque international sur les textes mycéniens et égéens tenu à Chaumont sur Neuchâtel du 7 au 13 septembre 1975 [Mycenaean Colloquium: Proceedings of the Sixth International Colloquium on the Mycenaean and Aegean Texts Held at Chaumont sur Neuchâtel from 7 to 13 September 1975]. Neuchâtel: Université du Neuchâtel, pp. 419—424. |
Billigmeier 1981 | Billigmeier, Jon-Christian 1981 | “Santas and Kupapa on Crete”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 751—760. |
Binchy 1970 | Binchy, D. A. 1970 | “Celtic Suretyship, A Fossilized Indo-European Institution?”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 355—367. |
Bird 1982 | Bird, Norman 1982 | The Distribution of Indo-European Root Morphemes. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Bird 1993 | Bird, Norman 1993 | The Roots and Non-Roots of Indo-European: A Lexico-statistical Survey. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Birnbaum 1966 | Birnbaum, Henrik 1966 | “The Dialects of Common Slavic”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 153—197. |
Birnbaum 1974 | Birnbaum, Henrik 1974 | “Pre-Greek Indo-Europeans in the Southern Balkans and Aegean”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.4:361—383. |
Birnbaum 1975a | Birnbaum, Henrik 1975a | “Typology, Genealogy, and Linguistic Universals”, Linguistics 144:5—26. |
Birnbaum 1975b | Birnbaum, Henrik 1975b | Common Slavic: Progress and Problems in its Reconstruction. Reprinted 1979. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
Birnbaum 1975c | Birnbaum, Henrik 1975c | “Typology, Genetic, and Areal Linguistics”, Foundations of Language 13:267—291. |
Birnbaum 1977 | Birnbaum, Henrik 1977 | Linguistic Reconstruction: Its Potentials and Limitations in New Perspective. Washington, DC: Journal of Indo-European Studies. |
Birnbaum 1979 | Birnbaum, Henrik 1979 | “Weiteres zu den ‘Urslaven’ und ihrer (Aus-)Sprache” [More on the ‘Proto-Slavs’ and their (Pronunciation/)Speech], Anzeiger für slavische Philologie X.XI:201—210. |
Birnbaum 1980 | Birnbaum, Henrik 1980 | “On Protolanguages, Diachrony and ‘Preprotolanguages’ (Toward a Typology of Linguistic Reconstruction)”, in: Studia Linguistica in Honorem Vladimir I. Georgiev [Linguistic Studies in Honor of Vladimir I. Georgiev]. Sofia: Academia Litterarum Bulgarica, pp. 121—129. |
Birnbaum 1984 | Birnbaum, Henrik 1984 | “Indo-Europeans between the Baltic and Black Sea”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 12.3/4:235—259. |
Birnbaum 1992 | Birnbaum, Henrik 1992 | “Genetic and Typological Approaches to External Comparison of Languages”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Nostratic, Dene-Caucasian, Austric and Amerind. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 10—33. |
Birnbaum—Puhvel 1966 | Birnbaum, Henrik, and Jaan Puhvel (eds.) 1966 | Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Birtalan 2003 | Birtalan, Ágnes 2003 | “Oirot”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 210—228. |
Black—George—Postgate 1999 | Black, Jeremy, Andrew George, and Nicholas Postgate (eds.) 1999 | A Concise Dictionary of Akkadian. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Bläsing 2003 | Bläsing, Uwe 2003 | “Kalmuck”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 229—247. |
Blau 1978 | Blau, Joshua 1978 | “Hebrew and Northwest Semitic: Reflections on the Classification of the Semitic Languages”, Hebrew Annual Review 2:21—44. |
Blažek 1982 | Blažek, Václav 1982 | “Supplements to the First 20 Etymologies”, Linguistica XXII:239—248. |
Blažek 1983 | Blažek, Václav 1983 | “Současný stav nostratické hypotézy (fonologie a grammatika)” [The Present State of the Nostratic Hypothesis (Phonology and Grammar)], Slovo a Slovesnost 44:235—247. |
Blažek 1984 | Blažek, Václav 1984 | “Finský přípĕvek k nostratické hypotéze” [A Finnish Contribution to the Nostratic Hypothesis], Slovo a slovesnost 44:235—247. |
Blažek 1986 | Blažek, Václav 1986 | “Genetická klasifikace jazyků sveta ve svétle rekonstruovaných prajazyků neolitických až paleolitických jazykových jednot” [The Genetic Classification of the World’s Languages in Light of the Reconstructed Proto-Language of the Neolithic and Paleolithic Language Communities], Jazykovédné Aktuality 23.1/2:41—44. |
Blažek 1987 | Blažek, Václav 1987 | “Some Notes about New Korean Etymologies of G. J. Ramstedt”, Archív Orientální 55:156—161. |
Blažek 1988a | Blažek, Václav 1988a | “Problémy a perspektivy nostratické hypotézy (fonologie)” [Problems and Perspectives of the Nostratic Hypothesis (Phonology)], Slovo a Slovesnost XLIX:39—52. |
Blažek 1988b | Blažek, Václav 1988b | “Tocharian Linguistics during Last 25 Years”, Archív Orientální 56:77—81. |
Blažek 1989a | Blažek, Václav 1989a | “The New Dravidian-Afroasiatic Parallels”. Manuscript. |
Blažek 1989b | Blažek, Václav 1989b | “Lexica Nostratica: Addenda et Corrigenda I” [Nostratic Vocabulary: Additions and Corrections I], Archív Orientální 57.3:201—210. |
Blažek 1989c | Blažek, Václav 1989c | “Paralelní procesy ve vývoji indoevropského a afrasijského kořene” [Parallel Processes in the Development of the Indo-European and Afroasiatic Roots], Jazykovédné Aktuality 26.1/2:28—33. |
Blažek 1990a | Blažek, Václav 1990a | “Lexica Nostratica: Addenda et Corrigenda II” [Nostratic Vocabulary: Additions and Corrections II], Archív Orientální 58.3:205—218. |
Blažek 1990b | Blažek, Václav 1990b | “A Comparative Approach to Afrasian Numerals”, in: Hans G. Mukarovsky (ed.), Proceedings of the 5th International Hamito-Semitic Congress. Wien: Afro-Pub, pp. 20—44. |
Blažek 1991a | Blažek, Václav 1991a | “Kartvelian Material in Nostratic Lexicon: New Etymologies”, Archív Orientální 59:360—369. (Reprinted in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin [ed.], Nostratic, Dene-Caucasian, Austric and Amerind. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 112—128 [1992].) |
Blažek 1991b | Blažek, Václav 1991b | “The Microsystems of Personal Pronouns in Chadic, Compared with Afroasiatic”. Manuscript. |
Blažek 1992a | Blažek, Václav 1992a | “Kartvelian Material in Nostratic Lexicon: New Etymologies II”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Nostratic, Dene-Caucasian, Austric and Amerind. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 129—148. |
Blažek 1992b | Blažek, Václav 1992b | “Some Nostratic Etymologies”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Nostratic, Dene-Caucasian, Austric and Amerind. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 245—265. |
Blažek 1996 | Blažek, Václav 1996 | “The Semitic Divine Name *‘attar(-at-) and its Possible Afroasiatic Cognates”, in: Petr Zemánek (ed.), Studies in Near Eastern Languages and Literatures: Memorial Volume for Karel Petráček. Prague: Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic Oriental Institute, pp. 133—141. |
Blažek 1999a | Blažek, Václav 1999a | “Elam: A Bridge between the Ancient Near East and Dravidian India?”, in: Roger Blench and Matthew Spriggs (eds.), Archaeology and Language IV: Language Change and Cultural Transformation. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 48—78. (Revised version published in Mother Tongue VII:123—143 [2002].) |
Blažek 1999b | Blažek, Václav 1999b | Numerals. Comparative-Etymological Analysis and their Implications. Brno: Masarykova Univerzita v Brně. |
Blažek 2002 | Blažek, Václav 2002 | “Some New Dravidian-Afroasiatic Parallels”, Mother Tongue VII:171—198. |
Blažek 2003 | Blažek, Václav 2003 | “Lexica Nostratica Addenda” [Additions to Nostratic Vocabulary], Mother Tongue VIII:11—22. |
Blažek 2004 | Blažek, Václav 2004 | “Indo-European and Afroasiatic Prepositions and Related Words: Common Heritage or a Result of Convergence?”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 1—25. |
Bloch 1946 | Bloch, Jules 1946 | Structure grammaticale des langues dravidiennes [Grammatical Structure of the Dravidian Languages]. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Bloch 1954 | Bloch, Jules 1954 | The Grammatical Structure of the Dravidian Languages. (= Deccan College Handbook Series: 3.) English translation by Ramkrishna Ganesh Harshé. Poona: Deccan College. |
Bloch 1965 | Bloch, Jules 1965 | Indo-Aryan from the Vedas to Modern Times. English edition largely revised by the author and translated by Alfred Master. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Bloomfield 1914 | Bloomfield, Leonard 1914 | An Introduction to the Study of Language. New edition (1983) with an Introduction by Joseph F. Kess. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Bloomfield 1933 | Bloomfield, Leonard 1933 | Language. New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. |
Bocquet-Appel 2002 | Bocquet-Appel, Jean-Pierre 2002 | “Paleoanthropological Traces of a Neolithic Demographic Transition”, Current Anthropology 43.4:637—650. |
Boeder 1980 | Boeder, Winfred 1980 | “Zur Rekonstruktion von Infinitivkonstruktionen im Indogermanischen” [On the Reconstruction of Infinitive Constructions in Indo-European], in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 207—224. |
Boeschoten 1998 | Boeschoten, Hendrik 1998 | “Uzbek”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 357—378. |
Boeschoten—Vandamme 1998 | Boeschoten, Hendrik, and Marc Vandamme 1998 | “Chaghatay”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 166—178. |
Boisacq 1950 | Boisacq, Émile 1950 | Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue grecque: étudiée dans ses rapports avec les autres langues indo-européennes [Etymological Dictionary of the Greek Language: Studied in its Relationships with the Other Indo-European Languages]. 4th edition, with an index by Helmut Rix (1st edition 1916). Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Boisson 1987a | Boisson, Claude 1987a | “Quelques ressemblances lexicales entre sumérien et dravidien” [Some Lexical Resemblances between Sumerian and Dravidian]. Manuscript. |
Boisson 1987b | Boisson, Claude 1987b | “A Conjecture on the Linguistic Affiliation of Sumerian”. Manuscript. |
Boisson 1988a | Boisson, Claude 1988a | “The Sumerian Pronominal System in a Nostratic Perspective”. Manuscript (see below, Boisson 1992). |
Boisson 1988b | Boisson, Claude 1988b | “Some Sumerian Grammatical Elements in a Nostratic Perspective”. Manuscript (see below, Boisson 2002a). |
Boisson 1988c | Boisson, Claude 1988c | “Notes méthodologiques sur les racines pré-celtiques” [Methodological Notes on the Pre-Celtic Roots]. Manuscript. |
Boisson 1988d | Boisson, Claude 1988d | “Sumerian Terms for Canines and Antelopes”. Manuscript (see below, Boisson 2002b). |
Boisson 1989a | Boisson, Claude 1989a | “Brief Notes on Sumerian, Uralic, Altaic, and Burushaski”. Manuscript. |
Boisson 1989b | Boisson, Claude 1989b | “Contraintes typologiques sur le système phonologique du sumérien” [Typological Constraints on the Phonological System of Sumerian], Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique LXXXIV.1:201—233. |
Boisson 1991 | Boisson, Claude 1991 | “Note typologique sur le système des occlusives en étrusque” [Typological Note on the System of Occlusives in Etruscan], Studi Etruschi 56:175—187. |
Boisson 1992 | Boisson, Claude 1992 | “The Sumerian Pronominal System in a Nostratic Perspective”. Nostratic, Dene-Caucasian, Austric and Amerind, ed. by Vitaly Shevoroshkin. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 433—461. |
Boisson 2002a | Boisson, Claude 2002a | “Some Sumerian Grammatical Elements in a Nostratic Perspective”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 19—41. |
Boisson 2002b | Boisson, Claude 2002b | “Sumerian Terms for Canines and Antelopes”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 235—257. |
Bökönyi 1987 | Bökönyi, Sándor 1987 | “Horses and Sheep in East Europe in the Copper and Bronze Ages”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 136—144. |
Boley 1992a | Boley, Jacqueline 1992a | “The ‘Local’ Sentence Particles in Hittite”, in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 1—31. |
Boley 1992b | Boley, Jacqueline 1992b | “The Hittite Periphrastic Constructions”, in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 33—59. |
Boley 2004 | Boley, Jacqueline 2004 | Tmesis and Proto-Indo-European Syntax. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Bomhard 1973 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1973 | “Some Anatolian Etymologies”, Revue Hittite et Asianique XXXI:111—113. |
Bomhard 1975 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1975 | “An Outline of the Historical Phonology of Indo-European”, Orbis XXIV.2:354—390. |
Bomhard 1976 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1976 | “The Placing of the Anatolian Languages”, Orbis XXV.2:199—239. |
Bomhard 1977 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1977 | “The Indo-European/Semitic Hypothesis Re-examined”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.1:55—99. |
Bomhard 1979a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1979a | “The Indo-European Phonological System: New Thoughts about its Reconstruction and Development”, Orbis XXVIII.1:66—110. |
Bomhard 1979b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1979b | “Typological Studies and the Identification of the Indo-European Laryngeals”, in Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 127—137. |
Bomhard 1981a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1981a | “Implications of ‘Rhotacism in Hieroglyphic Luwian’,” in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, p. 29. |
Bomhard 1981b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1981b | “Indo-European and Afroasiatic: New Evidence for the Connection”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 351—474. |
Bomhard 1981c | Bomhard, Allan R. 1981c | “A New Look at Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 9.3/4:332—337. |
Bomhard 1981d | Bomhard, Allan R. 1981d | “Speculations on the Prehistoric Development of the Indo-European Vowel System”. General Linguistics 21.3:164—193. |
Bomhard 1982 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1982 | Review of Kenneth Shields, Jr., Indo-European Noun Inflection: A Developmental History, General Linguistics 22.4:269—272. |
Bomhard 1984a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1984a | Review of Kenneth Shields, Jr., Indo-European Noun Inflection: A Developmental History, Diachronica I.1:137—141 (expanded version of Bomhard 1982). |
Bomhard 1984b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1984b | Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 27.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Bomhard 1986a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1986a | “The Aspirated Stops of Proto-Indo-European”, Diachronica III.1:67—80. |
Bomhard 1986b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1986b | Review of Vitalij V. Shevoroshkin and Thomas L. Markey (eds.), Typology, Relationship, and Time, Diachronica III.2:269—282. (A revised version of this review appeared in Mother Tongue, issue 10, April 1990.) |
Bomhard 1986c | Bomhard, Allan R. 1986c | “An Etymological Note: PIE *Hs-ter- ‘star’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 14.1/2:191—192. |
Bomhard 1986d | Bomhard, Allan R. 1986d | “Common Indo-European/Afroasiatic Roots: Supplement 1”, General Linguistics 26.4:225—257. |
Bomhard 1988a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1988a | “Recent Trends in the Reconstruction of the Proto-Indo-European Consonant System”, Historische Sprachforschung (formerly KZ) 101:2—25. |
Bomhard 1988b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1988b | “The Reconstruction of the Proto-Semitic Consonant System”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), FUCUS: A Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 113—140. |
Bomhard 1988c | Bomhard, Allan R. 1988c | “The Prehistoric Development of the Athematic Verbal Endings in Proto-Indo-European”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), A Linguistic Happening in Memory of Benjamin Schwartz: Studies in Anatolian, Italic, and Other Indo-European Languages. Louvain: Peeters, pp. 475—488. |
Bomhard 1988d | Bomhard, Allan R. 1988d | “Современные направления реконструкции праиндо-европейского консонантизма” [Recent Trends in the Reconstruction of the Proto-Indo-European Consonant System], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1988.2:5—22. (Russian version of 1988a.) |
Bomhard 1988e | Bomhard, Allan R. 1988e | “Реконструкция прасемитской системы согласных” [The Reconstruction of the Proto-Semitic Consonant System], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1988.5:50—65. (Russian version of 1988b.) |
Bomhard 1989 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1989 | “Очерк сравнительной фонологии так называемых ‘ностратических’ яазыков” [A Survey of the Comparative Phonology of the So-Called ‘Nostratic’ Languages], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1989.3:33—50. (Russian version of 1990.) |
Bomhard 1990 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1990 | “A Survey of the Comparative Phonology of the So-Called ‘Nostratic Languages’,” in: Philip Baldi (ed.), Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology. The Hague, Paris, and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 331—358. |
Bomhard 1991 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1991 | “Lexical Parallels between Proto-Indo-European and Other Languages”, in L. Isebaërt (ed.), Studia Etymologica Indoeuropaea: Memoriae A. J. Van Windekens (1915—1989) Dicata. Leuven: Peeters, pp. 47—106. |
Bomhard 1992a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1992a | “Distant Linguistic Comparison and the Nostratic Hypothesis”, FAIES Newsletter II.1 (March 1992). |
Bomhard 1992b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1992b | “The Nostratic Macrofamily (with Special Reference to Indo-European)”, Word 43.1:61—83. |
Bomhard 1992c | Bomhard, Allan R. 1992c | “Придыхательные смычные в праиндоевропейском” [The Aspirated Stops of Proto-Indo-European], Вопросы Языкоз-нания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1992.2:48—58. (Russian version of 1986a.) |
Bomhard 1992d | Bomhard, Allan R. 1992d | “‘Закон Стертеванта’ в хеттском: реинтерпретацня” [Sturtevant’s Law in Hittite: A Reassessment], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1992.4:5—11. |
Bomhard 1993a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1993a | “Развитие личных показателей атематических глаголов в праиндоевропейском” [The Prehistoric Development of the Athematic Verbal Endings in Proto-Indo-European], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1993.2:42—49. (Russian version of 1988c.) |
Bomhard 1993b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1993b | “Linguistic Methodology and Distant Linguistic Comparison”, Mother Tongue 20:1—4. |
Bomhard 1994 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1994 | “Comments on Colarusso’s Paper ‘Phyletic Links between Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Northwest Caucasian’,” Mother Tongue 22:1—10. |
Bomhard 1995 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1995 | “Some Nostratic Etymologies: Supplement I”, Orbis XXXVIII.2:1—57. |
Bomhard 1996a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1996a | Indo-European and the Nostratic Hypothesis. Charleston, SC: SIGNUM Desktop Publishing. |
Bomhard 1996b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1996b | “The Root in Indo-European and Afroasiatic”, in: Petr Zemánek (ed.), Studies in Near Eastern Languages and Literatures: Memorial Volume of Karel Petráček. Prague: Academy of Sciences of the Czech Republic, Oriental Institute, pp. 161—170. |
Bomhard 1997a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1997a | Review of Saul Levin, Semitic and Indo-European: The Principal Etymologies, Diachronica XIV.1:131—136. |
Bomhard 1997b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1997b | “On the Origin of Sumerian”, Mother Tongue III:75—92. |
Bomhard 1998 | Bomhard, Allan R. 1998 | “Nostratic, Eurasiatic, and Indo-European”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 17—49. |
Bomhard 1999a | Bomhard, Allan R. 1999a | Review of Aaron Dolgopolsky, The Nostratic Macrofamily and Linguistic Palaeontology, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 47—74. |
Bomhard 1999b | Bomhard, Allan R. 1999b | “Next of Kin: The Search for Relatives of Indo-European”, in: Sheila Embleton, John E. Joseph, and Hans-Josef Niederehe (eds.), The Emergence of the Modern Language Sciences: Studies on the Transition from Historical-Comparative to Structural Linguistics in Honour of E. F. K. Koerner. Vol. 2: Metholodological Perspectives and Applications. Philadelphia, PA, and Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 397—404. |
Bomhard 2000 | Bomhard, Allan R. 2000 | “Sturtevant’s Law in Hittite: A Reassessment”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 35—46. (Revised and expanded version of 1992d.) |
Bomhard 2002a | Bomhard, Allan R. 2002a | “Reflections on Greenberg’s Indo-European and its Closest Relatives”, Mother Tongue VII:85—114. |
Bomhard 2002b | Bomhard, Allan R. 2002b | “Etruscan, Indo-European, and Nostratic”, in: Fabrice Cavoto (ed.), The Linguist’s Linguist: A Collection of Papers in Honour of Alexis Manaster Ramer. 2 vols. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Bomhard 2004a | Bomhard, Allan R. 2004a | “Indo-European *men- and *tel-”, in: Philip Baldi and Pietro U. Dini (eds.), Studies in Baltic and Indo-European Linguistics in Honor of William R. Schmalstieg. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 33—36. |
Bomhard 2004b | Bomhard, Allan R. 2004b | “The Proto-Indo-European Laryngeals”, in: Adam Hyllested, Anders Richardt Jørgensen, Jenny Helena Larsson, and Thomas Olander (eds.), Per Aspera ad Asteriscos. Studia Indo-germanica in honorem Jens Elmegård Rasmussen sexagenarii Idibus Martiis anno MMIV [Through Hardship to the Stars: Indo-European Studies in Honor of Jens Elmegård Rasmussen on His Sixtieth Birthday, the Ides of March 2004]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft, pp. 69—79. |
Bomhard 2004c | Bomhard, Allan R. 2004c | “Preliminary Thoughts on Nostratic Morphology”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 27—50. |
Bomhard 2005 | Bomhard, Allan R. 2005 | Review of Winfred P. Lehmann, Pre-Indo-European, Mother Tongue X: 145—150. |
Bomhard 2006a | Bomhard, Allan R. 2006a | “Do All Languages Come from the Same Source?”. The Five-Minute Linguist, ed. by E. M. Rickerson and Barry Hilton. London: Equinox Publishing, pp. 25—28. |
Bomhard 2006b | Bomhard, Allan R. 2006b | “The Nostratic Hypothesis and Nostratic Kinship Terminology”. Алгебра Родства (Kinship Algebra) 11:5—41. |
Bomhard 2007 | Bomhard, Allan R. 2007 | “The Glottalic Theory of Proto-Indo-European Consonantism and Its Implications for Nostratic Sound Correspondences”. Mother Tongue XII. |
Bomhard To appear/a | Bomhard, Allan R. To appear/a | “A Sketch of Proto-Afrasian Phonology”, in: Gábor Takács (ed.), Festschrift for Aharon Dolgopolsky and Hermann Jungraithmayr. |
Bomhard To appear/b | Bomhard, Allan R. To appear/b | “Some Thoughts on the Proto-Indo-European Cardinal Numbers”, in: John Bengtson (ed.), Festschrift for Harold C. Fleming. |
Bomhard To appear/c | Bomhard, Allan R. To appear/c | “A Brief History of the Reconstruction of the Proto-Altaic Phonological System”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Harald Sverdrup (eds.), Gedenkschrift for Sergej Starostin. |
Bomhard—Kerns 1994 | Bomhard, Allan R., and John C. Kerns 1994 | The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Study in Distant Linguistic Relationship. Berlin, New York, NY, and Amsterdam: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Bonfante 1987 | Bonfante, Giuliano 1987 | “The Relative Position of the Indo-European Languages”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:77—80. |
Bonfante—Bonfante 1983 | Bonfante, Giuliano, and Larissa Bonfante 1983 | The Etruscan Language: An Introduction. New York, NY: New York University Press. |
Bonfante—Bonfante [2002] | Bonfante, Giuliano, and Larissa Bonfante [2002] | [Revised edition. Manchester: Manchester University Press.] |
Bonfante 1990 | Bonfante, Larissa 1990 | Etruscan. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. |
Bonfante 1998 | Bonfante, Larissa 1998 | “Etruscan”, in: J. T. Hooker (ed.), Reading the Past: Ancient Writing from Cuneiform to the Alphabet. New York, NY: Barnes & Noble Books, pp. 321—378. |
Bonnerjea 1971 | Bonnerjea, René 1971 | “Is there any Relationship between Eskimo-Aleut and Ural-Altaic?”, Acta Linguistica Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 21:401—407. |
Bonnerjea 1975 | Bonnerjea, René 1975 | “Some Probable Phonological Connections between Ural-Altaic and Eskimo-Aleut”, Orbis 24:251—275. |
Bonnerjea 1978 | Bonnerjea, René 1978 | “A Comparison between Eskimo-Aleut and Ural-Altaic Demonstrative Elements, Numerals, and Other Related Semantic Problems”, International Journal of American Linguistics 44:40—55. |
Bonnerjea 1979 | Bonnerjea, René 1979 | “Some Probable Phonological Connections between Ural-Altaic and Eskimo-Aleut II”, Orbis 28:27—44. |
Bonnerjea 1984 | Bonnerjea, René 1984 | “Some Probable Phonological Connections between Ural-Altaic and Eskimo-Aleut III”, Orbis 33:256—272. |
Bopp 1816 | Bopp, Franz 1816 | Über das Conjugationssystem der Sanskritsprache in Vergleichung mit jenem der griechischen, lateinischen, persischen, und germanischen Sprache [Concerning the Conjugational System of the Sanskrit Language in Comparison with those of the Greek, Latin, Persian, and Germanic Languages]. Reprinted 1975. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Bopp 1845—1853 | Bopp, Franz 1845—1853 | A Comparative Grammar of the Sanskrit, Zend, Greek, Latin, Lithuanian, Gothic, German, and Sclavonic Languages. English translation by Edward Backhouse Eastwick. Edited by Horace Hayman Wilson. Reprinted 1985. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Bopp 1989 | Bopp, Franz 1989 | Analytical Comparison of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and Teutonic Languages, Shewing the Original Identity of their Grammatical Structure. English translation originally published in 1820. Newly edited (1974), together with a bio-bibliographical account of Bopp by Joseph Daniel Guigniaut (1877), an introduction to Analytical Comparison by Friedrich Techmer (1889), and a letter (4 January 1821) to Bopp by Wilhelm von Humbolt by Konrad Koerner, with a new foreword, a select bibliography, and an index of authors. 2nd printing (1989). Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Boretzky 1984 | Boretzky, Norbert 1984 | “The Indo-Europeanist Model of Sound Change and Genetic Affinity and its Application to Exotic Languages”, Diachronica I.1:1—51. |
Boson 1964 | Boson, J. E. 1964 | Modern Mongolian. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 38.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications. |
Bouda 1956 | Bouda, Karl 1956 | “Dravidisch und Uralaltäisch” [Dravidian and Ural-Altaic], Lingua 5:129—144. |
Bouda 1960 | Bouda, Karl 1960 | “Die Verwandtschaftsverhältnisse des Giljakischen” [The External Relationships of Gilyak], Anthropos 55:355—415. |
Bouda 1961 | Bouda, Karl 1961 | “Tschuktschisch und Uralisch I” [Chukchi and Uralic I], Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 111:335—360. |
Bouda 1965 | Bouda, Karl 1965 | “Die Verwandtschaftverhältnisse des tschuktschischen Sprachgruppe II” [The External Relationships of the Chukchi Language Group II], ΑΙΩΝ 6:161—185. |
Bouda 1968 | Bouda, Karl 1968 | “Giljakisch und Uralisch” [Gilyak and Uralic], Orbis 17:459—466. |
Bouda 1969 | Bouda, Karl 1969 | “Die Verwandtschaftverhältnisse des tschuktschischen Sprachgruppe” [The External Relationships of the Chukchi Language Group], Orbis 19:130—136. |
Bouda 1970a | Bouda, Karl 1970a | “Die Verwandtschaftverhältnisse des tschuktschischen Sprach-gruppe III” [The External Relationships of the Chukchi Language Group III], Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgen-ländischen Gesellschaft 119:60—85. |
Bouda 1970b | Bouda, Karl 1970b | “Die Verwandtschaftverhältnisse des tschuktschischen Sprachgruppe IV” [The External Relationships of the Chukchi Language Group IV], Orbis 19:130—136. |
Bouda 1972 | Bouda, Karl 1972 | “Giljakisch und Uralisch” [Gilyak and Uralic], Études Finno-Ougriennes 9:41—43. |
Bouda 1976 | Bouda, Karl 1976 | “Giljakisch, Tschuktschisch und Uralisch” [Gilyak, Chukchi, and Uralic], Orbis 25:240—248. |
Bouda 1980 | Bouda, Karl 1980 | “Tschuktschisch und Uralisch III” [Chukchi and Uralic III], Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 130:393—396. |
Boyarin 1981 | Boyarin, Daniel 1981 | “An Inquiry into the Formation of the Middle Aramaic Dialects”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 613—649. |
Brakel 1983 | Brakel, Arthur 1983 | Phonological Markedness and Distinctive Features. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Brame 1972 | Brame, Michael K. (ed.) 1972 | Contributions to Generative Phonology. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press. |
Branch 1987 | Branch, Michael 1987 | “Finnish”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 593—617. |
Bräuer 1961—1969 | Bräuer, Herbert 1961—1969 | Slavische Sprachwissenschaft [Slavic Linguistics]. 3 vols. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Braune 1964 | Braune, Wilhelm 1964 | Abriß der althochdeutschen Grammatik [Outline of Old High German Grammar]. 12th edition revised by Ernst A. Ebbing-haus. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer Verlag. |
Braune—Ebbinghaus 1966 | Braune, Wilhelm, and Ernst A. Ebbinghaus 1966 | Gotische Grammatik [Gothic Grammar]. 17th edition. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer Verlag. |
Braune—Mitzka 1967 | Braune, Wilhelm, and Walther Mitzka 1967 | Althochdeutsche Grammatik [Old High German Grammar]. 12th edition. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer Verlag. |
Brendemoen 1998 | Brendemoen, Bernt 1998 | “Turkish Dialects”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 236—241. |
Brereton 2002 | Brereton, Joel P. and Stephanie W. Jamison (eds.) 2002 | Indic and Iranian Studies in Honor of Stanley Insler on His Sixty-fifth Birthday. (= Journal of the American Oriental Society, 122.2.) Ann Arbor, MI: American Oriental Society. |
Bright 1976 | Bright, William 1976 | Variation and Change in Language. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Bright 1971 | Bright, William (ed.) 1971 | Sociolinguistics. The Hague: Mouton. |
Bright 1992 | Bright, William (ed.) 1992 | International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. 4 vols. New York, NY, and Oxford: Oxford University Press. (Second edition edited by William J. Frawley [2003].) |
Briquel 1994 | Briquel, Dominique 1994 | “Étrusque et indo-européen” [Etruscan and Indo-European], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 319—330. |
Brixhe 1990 | Brixhe, Claude 1990 | “Comparaison et langues faiblement documentées: l’exemple du phrygien et ses voyelles longues” [Comparison and Poorly Documented Languages: The Example of Phrygian and Its Long Vowels], in: Jean Kellens (ed.), La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”, pp. 59—99. |
Brixhe 1994 | Brixhe, Claude 1994 | “Le phrygien” [Phrygian], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 165—178. |
Brixhe 2004 | Brixhe, Claude 2004 | “Phrygian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 777—788. |
Brixhe—Panayotou 1994a | Brixhe, Claude, and Anna Panayotou 1994a | “Le thrace” [Thracian], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 179—203. |
Brixhe—Panayotou 1994b | Brixhe, Claude, and Anna Panayotou 1994b | “Le macédonien” [Macedonian], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 205—220. |
Brockelmann 1908 | Brockelmann, Carl 1908 | Kurzgefaßte vergleichende Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen [Concise Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages]. 2 vols. Berlin: Reuther and Reichard. |
Brockelmann 1908—1913 | Brockelmann, Carl 1908—1913 | Grundriß der vergleichenden Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen [Elements of the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages]. 2 vols. Reprinted 1966. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Brogyanyí 1979 | Brogyanyí, Bela (ed.) 1979 | Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 11, parts I and II.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Brook 1958 | Brook, G. L. 1958 | A History of the English Language. Fair Lawn, NJ: Essential Books. |
Brosman—Jr. 1982 | Brosman, Paul W., Jr. 1982 | “The Development of the PIE Feminine”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 10.3/4:253—272. |
Brosman—Jr. 1984 | Brosman, Paul W., Jr. 1984 | “The IE Cognates of Hittite ai- and au-stems”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 12.3/4:345—365. |
Brosman—Jr. 1987 | Brosman, Paul W., Jr. 1987 | “The Latin Fifth-Declension Nouns with Nom. Sg. -iēs”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.3/4:327—340. |
Brosman—Jr. 1992 | Brosman, Paul W., Jr. 1992 | The Greek Nouns in -ω”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 20.3/4:317—338. |
Brosman—Jr. 2001 | Brosman, Paul W., Jr. 2001 | “The Latin Feminine o-Stems”, Indogermanische Forschungen 106:204—215. |
Brosman—Jr. 2003 | Brosman, Paul W., Jr. 2003 | “The Cognates of the Latin ti-Abstracts”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 31.1/2:1—19. |
Brosman—Jr. 2004 | Brosman, Paul W., Jr. 2004 | “The Latin Feminine u-Stems”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 32.3/4:249—265. |
Brosnahan—Malmberg 1970 | Brosnahan, L. F., and Bertil Malmberg 1970 | Introduction to Phonetics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Brown—Driver—Briggs 1906 | Brown, Francis, S. R. Driver, and Charles A. Briggs 1906 | A Hebrew and English Lexicon of the Old Testament. Reprinted 1978. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Brown 2005 | Brown, Keith (ed.) 2005 | The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. 2nd edition. Amsterdam, London, New York, NY: Elsevier. (First edition edited by R. E. Asher [Oxford: Pergamon Press, 1994].) |
Browne 1993 | Browne, Wayles 1993 | “Serbo-Croat”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 306—387. |
Browning 1969 | Browning, Robert 1969 | Medieval and Modern Greek. London: Hutchinson University Library. |
Bruck—Fox—La Galy 1974 | Bruck, Anthony, Robert A. Fox, and Michael W. La Galy (eds.) 1974 | Papers from the Parasession on Natural Phonology. Chicago, IL: Chicago Linguistic Society. |
Brugmann 1888—1895 | Brugmann, Karl 1888—1895 | Elements of the Comparative Grammar of the Indo-Germanic Languages. English translation by Joseph Wright, R. Seymour Conway, and W. H. D. Rouse. 5 vols. New York, NY: B. Westermann and Co. |
Brugmann 1904 | Brugmann, Karl 1904 | Kurze vergleichende Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen. Auf Grund des fünfbändigen “Grundriß der vergleichenden Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen von K. Brugmann und B. Delbrück” [Concise Comparative Grammar of the Indo-European Languages. Based upon the Five Volume “Elements of the Comparative Grammar of the Indo-European Languages by K. Brugmann and B. Delbrück”]. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. Reprinted 1970. |
Brugmann—Delbrück 1897—1916 | Brugmann, Karl, and Berthold Delbrück 1897—1916 | Grundriß der vergleichenden Grammatik der indoger-manischen Sprachen [Elements of the Comparative Grammar of the Indo-European Languages]. 2nd edition. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. Reprinted 1967. |
Brunner 1969 | Brunner, Linus 1969 | Die gemeinsamen Wurzeln des semitisches und indogermanisches Wortschatzes [The Common Roots of the Semitic and Indo-European Vocabularies]. Bern: Francke Verlag. |
Bubenik 1979 | Bubenik, Vit 1979 | “Historical Development of the Ancient Greek Accent System”, Indogermanische Forschungen 84:90—106. |
Buccellati 1996 | Buccellati, Giorgio 1996 | A Structural Grammar of Babylonian. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Buccellati 1997 | Buccellati, Giorgio 1997 | “Akkadian”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 69—99. |
Buck 1928 | Buck, Carl Darling 1928 | A Grammar of Oscan and Umbrian. 2nd edition reprinted 1974. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Buck 1933 | Buck, Carl Darling 1933 | Comparative Grammar of Greek and Latin. 10th impression 1966. Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press. |
Buck 1949 | Buck, Carl Darling 1949 | A Dictionary of Selected Synonyms in the Principal Indo-European Languages. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Buck [1988] | Buck, Carl Darling [1988] | [Paperback edition.] |
Buck 1955 | Buck, Carl Darling 1955 | The Greek Dialects: Grammar, Selected Inscriptions, Glossary. 3rd impression (corrected) 1965. Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press. |
Buck—Hale 1903 | Buck, Carl D., and William Gardner Hale 1903 | A Latin Grammar. Reprinted 1966. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. |
Buck 1955 | Buck, F. H. 1955 | Comparative Study of Postpositions in Mongolian Dialects and the Written Language. (= Harvard Yenching Institute Studies XII.) Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Bulatova—Grenoble 1998 | Bulatova, Nadezhda, and Lenore Grenoble 1998 | Evenki. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Burenhult 1993 | Burenhult, Göran (ed.) 1993 | People of the Stone Age: Hunter-Gatherers and Early Farmers. Foreword by Colin Renfrew. New York, NY: Harper Collins. |
Burney 1990 | Burney, Charles 1990 | “The Indo-European Impact on the Hurrian World”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 45—52. |
Burrow 1946 | Burrow, Thomas 1946 | “Dravidian Studies IV: The Body in Dravidian and Uralian”, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 11.2:328—356. |
Burrow 1973 | Burrow, Thomas 1973 | The Sanskrit Language. 3rd edition. London: Faber & Faber. |
Burrow 1979 | Burrow, Thomas 1979 | The Problem of Shwa in Sanskrit. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Burrow—Emeneau 1984 | Burrow, Thomas, and Murray B. Emeneau 1984 | Dravidian Etymological Dictionary. 2nd edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Bynon 1984 | Bynon, James (ed.) 1984 | Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Languages: Papers from the Third International Hamito-Semitic Congress. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 28.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Bynon—Bynon 1975 | Bynon, James, and Theodora Bynon (eds.) 1975 | Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton. |
Bynon 1977 | Bynon, Theodora 1977 | Historical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Calboli 1997 | Calboli, Gualtiero 1997 | Über das Lateinische: vom Indogermanischen zu den romanischen Sprachen [On Latin: From Indo-European to the Romance Languages]. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer. |
Caldwell 1913 | Caldwell, Robert 1913 | A Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian or South Indian Family of Languages. 3rd edition revised and edited by J. L. Wyatt and T. Ramakrishna Pillai. Reprinted 1974. New Delhi: Oriental Reprint Corporation. |
Callender 1975 | Callender, John B. 1975 | Middle Egyptian. Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Camaj 1984 | Camaj, Martin 1984 | Albanian Grammar with Exercises, Chrestomathy and Glossaries. Collaborated on and translated by Leonard Fox. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Campanile 1990 | Campanile, Enrico 1990 | La ricostruzione della cultura indoeuropea [The Recon-struction of Indo-European Culture]. Pisa: Giardini. |
Campanile 1994a | Campanile, Enrico 1994a | “Reconstruction culturelle et reconstruction linguistique” [Cultural Reconstruction and Linguistic Reconstruction], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 25—41. |
Campanile 1994b | Campanile, Enrico 1994b | “L’italique” [Italic], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 281—296. |
Campanile 1994c | Campanile, Enrico 1994c | “Le celtique” [Celtic], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 297—318. |
Campanile 1998 | Campanile, Enrico 1998 | “The Proto-Indo-Europeans: Origins and Culture”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 1—24. |
Campbell 1991 | Campbell, George 1991 | Compendium of the World’s Languages. 2 vols. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Campbell 1990 | Campbell, Lyle 1990 | “Indo-European and Uralic Tree Names”, Diachronica VII.2:149—180. (Reprinted in Mother Tongue May 1994, pp. 16—31.) |
Campbell 1992 | Campbell, Lyle 1992 | Review of Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source: Investigations into the Prehistory of Language, American Anthropologist 94:1019—1020. |
Campbell 1996 | Campbell, Lyle 1996 | Review of Allan R. Bomhard and John C. Kerns, The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Study in Distant Linguistic Relationship, Language 72:656—657. |
Campbell 1997 | Campbell, Lyle 1997 | American Indian Languages: The Historical Linguistics of Native America. Oxford and New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Campbell 1998 | Campbell, Lyle 1998 | “Nostratic: A Personal Assessment”, in: Joseph C. Salmons and Brian D. Joseph (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 107—152. |
Campbell 1999a | Campbell, Lyle 1999a | Historical Linguistics: An Introduction. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
Campbell [2004] | Campbell, Lyle [2004] | [2nd edition.] |
Campbell 1999b | Campbell, Lyle 1999b | “Nostratic and Linguistic Palaeontology in Methodological Perspective”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 179—230. |
Campbell—Garrett 1993 | Campbell, Lyle, and Andrew Garrett 1993 | Review of Jorma Koivulehto, Uralische Evidenz für die Laryngaltheorie [Uralic Evidence for the Laryngeal Theory], Language 69:832—836. |
Cannon 1991 | Cannon, Garland 1991 | “Jones’s ‘Sprung from Some Common Source’: 1786—1986”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source: Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 23—47. |
Cantineau 1952 | Cantineau, Jean 1952 | “La consonantisme du sémitique” [The Consonantism of Semitic], Semitica IV:79—94. |
Cantineau 1960 | Cantineau, Jean 1960 | Cours de phonétique arabe [Course in Arabic Phonetics]. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Caprile—Jungraithmayr 1978 | Caprile, Jean-Pierre, and Hermann Jungraithmayr 1978 | Préalables à la reconstruction du proto-tchadique [Prelimin-aries to the Reconstruction of Proto-Chadic]. Paris: Selaf. |
Cardona 1968 | Cardona, George 1968 | On Haplology in Indo-European. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press. |
Cardona 1987a | Cardona, George 1987a | “Indo-Aryan Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 440—447. |
Cardona 1987b | Cardona, George 1987b | “Sanskrit”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 448—469. |
Cardona 1992 | Cardona, George 1992 | “Indian Grammatical Traditions and Historical Linguistics”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 239—259. |
Cardona 2002 | Cardona, George 2002 | “The Old Indo-Aryan Tense System”, in: Joel P. Brereton and Stephanie Jamison (eds.), Indic and Iranian Studies in Honor of Stanley Insler on His Sixty-fifth Birthday. (= Journal of the American Oriental Society, 122.2.) Ann Arbor, MI: American Oriental Society, pp. 235—243. |
Cardona—Hoenigswald—Senn 1970 | Cardona, George, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.) 1970 | Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press. |
Cardona—Jain 2003 | Cardona, George, and Dhanesh Jain (eds.) 2003 | The Indo-Aryan Languages. London: Routledge. |
Cardona—Zide 1987 | Cardona, George, and Norman H. Zide (eds.) 1987 | Festschrift for Henry Hoenigswald on the Occasion of his Seventieth Birthday. Tübingen: Gunter Narr Verlag. |
Carling 2000 | Carling, Gerd 2000 | Die Funktionen der lokalen Kasus im Tokharischen [The Function of the Local Cases in Tocharian]. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Carlton 1991 | Carlton, Terence R. 1991 | Introduction to the Phonological History of the Slavic Languages. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
Carnochan 1975 | Carnochan, Jack 1975 | “Bachama and Chadic”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 459—468. |
Carpelan—Parpola—Koskikallio 2002 | Carpelan, Christian, Asko Parpola, and Petteri Koskikallio (eds.) 2002 | Early Contacts between Uralic and Indo-European: Linguistic and Archaeological Considerations. Papers Presented at an International Symposium Held at the Tvärminne Research Station of the University of Helsinki, 8—10 January 1999. Helsinki: Finno-Ugrian Society. |
Carruba 1970 | Carruba, Onofrio 1970 | Das Paläische: Texte, Grammatik, Lexikon [Palaic: Texts, Grammar, Lexicon]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Carruba 1979 | Carruba, Onofrio 1979 | “Sui numerali da ‘1’ a ‘5’ in anatolico e indoeuropea” [On the Numerals from ‘1’ to ‘5’ in Anatolian and Indo-European], in: Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 191—205. |
Carruba 1991 | Carruba, Onofrio 1991 | “Searching for Woman in Anatolian and Indo-European”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 155—181. |
Carruba 1992 | Carruba, Onofrio 1992 | “La notazioni dell’agente animato nelle lingue anatoliche (e l’ergitivo)” [The Notation of the Animate Agent in the Anatolian Languages (and the Ergative)], in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 61—98. |
Carruba 2000 | Carruba, Onofrio 2000 | “Indo-European *sem-/sm- in the Pronouns: ‘singulative’ Plurals”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 28.3/4:341—357. |
Carruba 1992 | Carruba, Onofrio (ed.) 1992 | Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore. |
Catford 1968 | Catford, John C. 1968 | “The Articulatory Possibilities of Man”, in: Bertil Malmberg (ed.), Manual of Phonetics. Amsterdam: North-Holland Publishing Co., pp. 309—333. |
Catford 1972 | Catford, John C. 1972 | “Labialization in Caucasian Languages, with Special Reference to Abkhaz”, in: André Rigault and René Charbonneau (eds.), Proceedings of the Seventh International Congress of Phonetic Sciences. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 679—682. |
Catford 1974a | Catford, John C. 1974a | “Phonetic Fieldwork”, in: Thomas A. Sebeok (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 12, Linguistics and Adjacent Arts and Sciences. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 2489—2505. |
Catford 1974b | Catford, John C. 1974b | “Natural Sound Changes: Some Questions of Directionality in Diachronic Linguistics”, in: Anthony Bruck, Robert A. Fox, and Michael W. LaGaly (eds.), Papers from the Parasession on Natural Phonology. Chicago, IL: Chicago Linguistic Society, pp. 21—29. |
Catford 1976 | Catford, John C. 1976 | “Ergativity in Caucasian Languages”, in: Alan Ford, John Reighard, and Rajendra Singh (eds.), Papers from the Sixth Meeting of the North Eastern Linguistic Society. Montreal: McGill University, Université de Montréal, and Université du Québec à Montréal, pp. 37—48. |
Catford 1977a | Catford, John C. 1977a | “Mountain of Tongues: The Languages of the Caucasus”, Annual Review of Anthropology 6:283—314. |
Catford 1977b | Catford, John C. 1977b | Fundamental Problems in Phonetics. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Catford 1988 | Catford, John C. 1988 | A Practical Introduction to Phonetics. Oxford, New York, NY, Toronto: Oxford University Press. |
Catford 1991 | Catford, John C. 1991 | “The Classification of the Caucasian Languages”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source: Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 232—268. |
Cavalli-Sforza 2001 | Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi Luca 2001 | Genes, Peoples, and Languages. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Cavalli-Sforza—Menozzi—Piazza 1994 | Cavalli-Sforza, L[uigi] Luca, Paolo Menozzi, and Alberto Piazza 1994 | History and Geography of Human Genes. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
Cavalli-Sforza—Cavalli-Sforza 1995 | Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi Luca, and Francesco Cavalli-Sforza 1995 | The Great Human Diasporas: The History of Diversity and Evolution. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. |
Cavoto 2003 | Cavoto, Fabrice 2003 | “Supplétion et récurrence des thèmes pronominaux nostratiques” [Suppletion and Recurrence of Nostratic Pronominal Stems], Diachronica XX.2:229—258. |
Cavoto 2004 | Cavoto, Fabrice 2004 | Les désinences personnelles en indo-européen [The Personal Endings in Indo-European]. Ph.D. dissertation, University of California, Los Angeles, CA. |
Cavoto 2002 | Cavoto, Fabrice (ed.) 2002 | The Linguist’s Linguist: A Collection of Papers in Honour of Alexis Manaster Ramer. 2 vols. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Černý 1976 | Černý, J. 1976 | Coptic Etymological Dictionary. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Chadwick 1998 | Chadwick, John 1998 | “Linear B”, in: J. T. Hooker (ed.), Reading the Past: Ancient Writing from Cuneiform to the Alphabet. New York, NY: Barnes & Noble Books, pp. 137—195. |
Chambers—Wilke 1970 | Chambers, W. Walker, and John R. Wilke 1970 | A Short History of the German Language. London: Methuen and Co., Ltd. |
Channon 1972 | Channon, Robert 1972 | On the Place of the Progressive Palatalization of Velars in the Relative Chronology of Slavic. The Hague: Mouton. |
Chantraine 1927 | Chantraine, Pierre 1927 | Histoire du parfait grec [History of the Greek Perfect]. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Chantraine 1933 | Chantraine, Pierre 1933 | La formation des noms en grec ancien [The Formation of Nouns in Ancient Greek]. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Chantraine 1953—1958 | Chantraine, Pierre 1953—1958 | Grammaire homérique [Homeric Grammar]. 3rd edition, 2 vols. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Chantraine 1964 | Chantraine, Pierre 1964 | Morphologie historique du grec [Greek Historical Morphology]. 2nd edition. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Chantraine 1968—1980 | Chantraine, Pierre 1968—1980 | Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue grecque. Histoire des mots. [Etymological Dictionary of the Greek Language. History of Words]. 2 vols. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Chase—Phillips, Jr. 1961 | Chase, Alston Hurd, and Henry Phillips, Jr. 1961 | A New Introduction to Greek. 3rd edition. Tenth printing 1977. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Chatterji 1926 | Chatterji, Suniti Kumar 1926 | The Origin and Development of the Bengali Language. 3 vols. Reprinted 1970. London: George Allen and Unwin, Ltd. |
Chen—Wang 1975 | Chen, Matthew, and William S-Y. Wang 1975 | “Sound Change: Actualization and Implementation”, Language 51:255—281. |
Cherchi 1999 | Cherchi, Marcello 1999 | Georgian. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Childe 1926 | Childe, V. Gordon 1926 | The Aryans: A Study of Indo-European Origins. Reprinted 1987. New York, NY: Dorset Press. |
Chomsky—Halle 1968 | Chomsky, Noam, and Morris Halle 1968 | The Sound Pattern of English. New York, NY: Harper and Row. |
Christol 1990 | Christol, Alain 1990 | “Les laryngales entre phonétique et phonologie” [The Laryngeals between Phonetics and Phonology], in: Jean Kellens (ed.), La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”, pp. 101—127. |
Clackson 1994 | Clackson, James P. T. 1994 | The Linguistic Relationship between Armenian and Greek. Oxford and Cambridge: Blackwell. |
Clackson 2004a | Clackson, James P. T. 2004a | “Latin”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 789—811. |
Clackson 2004b | Clackson, James P. T. 2004b | “Classical Armenian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 922—942. |
Clark 1980 | Clark, Grahame 1980 | The Mesolithic Prelude. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. |
Clark 1998 | Clark, Larry 1998 | “Chuvash”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 434—452. |
Clark Hall 1984 | Clark Hall, J. R. 1984 | A Concise Anglo-Saxon Dictionary. 4th edition. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. |
Clauson 1956 | Clauson, Gerard 1956 | “The Case Against the Altaic Theory”, Central Asiatic Journal 2:181—187. |
Clauson 1972 | Clauson, Gerard 1972 | An Etymological Dictionary of Pre-Thirteenth Century Turkish. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Clauson 1973a | Clauson, Gerard 1973a | “Nostratic”, Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society 1973.1:46—55. |
Clauson 1973b | Clauson, Gerard 1973b | “On the Idea of Sumerian-Uralic-Altaic”, Current Anthro-pology 14.4:493—495. |
Clauson 2002 | Clauson, Gerard 2002 | Studies in Turkic and Mongolic Linguistics. 2nd edition. London: Routledge/Curzon. (1st edition 1962.) |
Cleasby—Vigfusson 1957 | Cleasby, Richard, and Gudbrand Vigfusson 1957 | An Icelandic-English Dictionary. 2nd edition by William A. Craigie. Reprinted 1969. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Coetsem 1994 | Coetsem, Frans van 1994 | The Vocalism of the Germanic Parent Language. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Cohen 1968 | Cohen, David 1968 | “Langues chamito-sémitiques” [Hamito-Semitic Languages], in: André Martinet (ed.), Le langage [Language]. Paris: Éditions Gallimard, pp. 1288—1330. |
Cohen 1970— | Cohen, David 1970— | Dictionnaire des racines sémitiques [Dictionary of Semitic Roots]. The Hague: Mouton, and Leuven: Peeters. |
Cohen 1988 | Cohen, David (ed.) 1988 | Les langues dans le monde ancien et moderne: langues chamito-sémitiques [Languages in the Ancient and Modern World: Hamito-Semitic Languages]. Paris: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique. |
Cohen 2005 | Cohen, Eran 2005 | The Modal System of Old Babylonian. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns. |
Cohen 1921 | Cohen, Marcel 1921 | “La pronunciation traditionnelle du guèze (éthiopien classique)” [The Traditional Pronunciation of Geez (Classical Ethiopic)], Journal Asiatique 11.17:217—269. |
Cohen 1947 | Cohen, Marcel 1947 | Essai comparatif sur le vocabulaire et la phonétique du chamito-sémitique [An Attempt at the Comparison of the Vocabulary and Phonology of Hamito-Semitic]. Reprinted 1969. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Cohen 1952 | Cohen, Marcel 1952 | “Langues chamito-sémitiques” [Hamito-Semitic Languages], in: Antoine Meillet and Marcel Cohen (eds.), Les langues du monde [The Languages of the World]. 2nd edition. Paris: Honoré Champion, vol. I, pp. 82—181. |
Cohen 1953 | Cohen, Marcel 1953 | “Sémitique, égyptien, libyco-berbère, couchitique, et méthode comparative” [Semitic, Egyptian, Libyco-Berber, Cushitic, and the Comparative Method], Bibliotheca Orientalis 10:88—90. |
Colarusso 1975 | Colarusso, John 1975 | The Northwest Caucasian Languages: A Phonological Survey. Ph.D. dissertation, Harvard University, Cambridge, MA. |
Colarusso 1981 | Colarusso, John 1981 | “Typological Parallels between Proto-Indo-European and the Northwest Caucasian Languages”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 475—557. |
Colarusso 1992 | Colarusso, John 1992 | “Phyletic Links between Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Northwest Caucasian”, in: Howard I. Aronson (ed.), The Non-Slavic Languages of the USSR: Linguistic Studies (Second Series). Chicago, IL: Chicago Linguistic Society, pp. 19—54. Reprinted in Mother Tongue 21:8—20 (1994). |
Colarusso 1997 | Colarusso, John 1997 | “Proto-Pontic: Phyletic Links between Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Northwest Caucasian”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 25.1/2:119—151. |
Coleman 2004 | Coleman, Ronald A. 2004 | “Nostratic, Quo Vadis?”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 63—83. |
Coleman 1987 | Coleman, R[obert] G. G. 1987 | “Latin and the Italic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 180—202. |
Coleman 1999 | Coleman, R[obert] G. G. 1999 | “Reflections on a Distant Prospect of Nostratic”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 113—126. |
Collinder 1934 | Collinder, Björn 1934 | Indo-uralisches Sprachgut: Die Urverwandtschaft zwischen der indoeuropäischen und der uralischen (finnisch-ugrisch-samojedischen) Sprachfamilie [Common Indo-Uralic Linguistic Possessions: The Primitive Relationship between the Indo-European and Uralic (Finno-Ugrian-Samoyed) Language Families]. (= Uppsala Universitets Årsskrift 1934, Filosofi, Språkvetenskap och Historiska Vetenskaper 1.) Uppsala: A.-B. Lundequistska Bokhandeln, pp. 1—116. |
Collinder 1954 | Collinder, Björn 1954 | “Zur indo-uralische Frage” [Concerning the Indo-Uralic Question]. Acta Universitatis Upsaliensis 10:79—91. |
Collinder 1955 | Collinder, Björn 1955 | Fenno-Ugric Vocabulary. An Etymological Dictionary of the Uralic Languages. Uppsala: Almqvist and Wiksells. |
Collinder [1977] | Collinder, Björn [1977] | [2nd revised edition.] |
Collinder 1957 | Collinder, Björn 1957 | A Survey of the Uralic Languages. Uppsala: Almqvist and Wiksells. |
Collinder 1960 | Collinder, Björn 1960 | A Comparative Grammar of the Uralic Languages. Uppsala: Almqvist and Wiksells. |
Collinder 1964 | Collinder, Björn 1964 | Sprachverwandtschaft und Wahrscheinlichkeit [Linguistic Relationship and Plausibility]. Uppsala: Almqvist and Wiksells. |
Collinder 1965 | Collinder, Björn 1965 | An Introduction to the Uralic Languages. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Collinder 1966 | Collinder, Björn 1966 | “Distant Linguistic Affinity”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 199—200. |
Collinder 1967 | Collinder, Björn 1967 | “Die indouralische Sprachvergleichung und die Laryngal-theorie” [The Indo-Uralic Linguistic Comparison and the Laryngeal Theory], Die Sprache 13:179—190. |
Collinder 1970 | Collinder, Björn 1970 | “Nachtrag zum Aufsatz ‘Die indouralische Sprachvergleichung und die Laryngaltheorie’” [Addenda to the Article “The Indo-Uralic Linguistic Comparison and the Laryngeal Theory”], Die Sprache 16:174—175. |
Collinder 1977b | Collinder, Björn 1977b | “Pro hypothesi Uralo-Altaica” [In Favor of the Ural-Altaic Hypothesis], Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 158:67—73. |
Collinge 1970a | Collinge, N. E. 1970a | Collectanea Linguistica: Essays in General and Genetic Linguistics. The Hague: Mouton. |
Collinge 1970b | Collinge, N. E. 1970b | “The Indo-European Laryngeal”, in: N. E. Collinge, Collectanea Linguistica: Essays in General and Genetic Linguistics. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 67—101. |
Collinge 1970c | Collinge, N. E. 1970c | “Patterns in Linguistics”, in: N. E. Collinge, Collectanea Linguistica: Essays in General and Genetic Linguistics. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 13—45. |
Collinge 1970d | Collinge, N. E. 1970d | “Prehistory via Language: Some Guidelines”, in: N. E. Collinge, Collectanea Linguistica: Essays in General and Genetic Linguistics. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 49—66. |
Collinge 1970e | Collinge, N. E. 1970e | “Reflexions on Comparative Historical Syntax”, in: N. E. Collinge, Collectanea Linguistica: Essays in General and Genetic Linguistics. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 102—127. |
Collinge 1985 | Collinge, N. E. 1985 | The Laws of Indo-European. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Commons—Mayer 2005 | Commons, Geoffrey, and Harvey E. Mayer 2005 | “The Nostratic Homeland, Where?”, Eurasian Studies Year-book 77:119—124. |
Comrie 1976 | Comrie, Bernard 1976 | Aspect. Reprinted 1978. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Comrie 1979 | Comrie, Bernard 1979 | “Ergativity”, in: Winfred P. Lehmann (ed.), Syntactic Typology. Austin: University of Texas Press, pp. 329—394. |
Comrie 1980 | Comrie, Bernard 1980 | “The Genetic Affiliation of Kamchadal: Some Morphological Evidence”, International Review of Slavic Linguistics 5:109—120. |
Comrie 1981 | Comrie, Bernard 1981 | Language Universals and Language Typology. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Comrie 1985 | Comrie, Bernard 1985 | Tense. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Comrie 1987a | Comrie, Bernard 1987a | “Slavonic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 322—328. |
Comrie 1987b | Comrie, Bernard 1987b | “Russian”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 329—347. |
Comrie 1988 | Comrie, Bernard 1988 | “General Features of the Uralic Languages”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 451—477. |
Comrie 1993 | Comrie, Bernard 1993 | Review of Sergej A. Starostin, Алтайская проблема и происхождение японского языка [The Altaic Problem and the Origin of the Japanese Language], Language 69.4:828—832. |
Comrie 1994a | Comrie, Bernard 1994a | “Was Proto-Indo-European Ergative?”, Bulletin of the Language Institute of Gakushuin University 17:3—14. |
Comrie 1994b | Comrie, Bernard 1994b | “An Evaluation of Chukchee Orthography”, in: Howard I. Aronson (ed.), Linguistic Studies in the Non-Slavic Languages of the Commonwealth of Independent States and the Baltic Republics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press, pp. 55—64. |
Comrie 1998a | Comrie, Bernard 1998a | “The Indo-European Linguistic Family: Genetic and Typological Perspectives”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 74—97. |
Comrie 1998b | Comrie, Bernard 1998b | “Regular Sound Correspondences and Long-Distance Genetic Comparison”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 271—276. |
Comrie 1999 | Comrie, Bernard 1999 | “Nostratic Language and Culture: Some Methodological Reflections”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 243—255. |
Comrie 1981 | Comrie, Bernard (ed.) 1981 | The Languages of the Soviet Union. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Comrie 1987 | Comrie, Bernard (ed.) 1987 | The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Comrie—Corbett 1993 | Comrie, Bernard, and Greville G. Corbett 1993 | “Introduction”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 1—19. |
Comrie—Corbett 1993 | Comrie, Bernard, and Greville G. Corbett (eds.) 1993 | The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Connolly 1989 | Connolly, Leo A. 1989 | “Laryngeal Metathesis: An Aryan Peculiarity?”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 43—51. |
Conway 1897 | Conway, R[obert] S[eymour] 1897 | The Italic Dialects. 2 vols. Reprinted 1967. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Conway—Whatmough—Johnson 1933 | Conway, Robert Seymour, Joshua Whatmough, and Sarah Elizabeth Johnson 1933 | The Prae-Italic Dialects of Italy. 3 vols. Reprinted 1968. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Cook 1998 | Cook, B. F. 1998 | “Greek Inscriptions”, in: J. T. Hooker (ed.), Reading the Past: Ancient Writing from Cuneiform to the Alphabet. New York, NY: Barnes & Noble Books, pp. 259—319. |
Čop 1970a | Čop, Bojan 1970a | “Die indouralische Sprachverwandtschaft und die indogermanische Laryngaltheorie” [The Indo-Uralic Linguistic Comparison and the Indo-European Laryngeal Theory], Slovenska Akademija Znanosti in Umetnosti VII.5:185—229. |
Čop 1970b | Čop, Bojan 1970b | “Indouralica XIV”, Orbis 19.2:282—323. |
Čop 1970c | Čop, Bojan 1970c | “Indouralica VII”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 84:151—174. |
Čop 1972 | Čop, Bojan 1972 | “Indouralica II”, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 44:162—178. |
Čop 1973a | Čop, Bojan 1973a | “Indouralica XVI”, Orbis 22:5—42. |
Čop 1973b | Čop, Bojan 1973b | “Indouralica IV”, Linguistica 13:116—190. |
Čop 1974a | Čop, Bojan 1974a | “Indouralica I”, Slovenska Akademija Znanosti in Umetnosti 30.1. |
Čop 1974b | Čop, Bojan 1974b | “Indouralica VIII”, Acta Linguistica Academiae Scientarum Hungaricae 24:87—116. |
Čop 1974c | Čop, Bojan 1974c | “Indouralica XV”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 88:41—58. |
Čop 1975 | Čop, Bojan 1975 | Die indogermanische Deklination im Lichte der indo-uralischen vergleichenden Grammatik [Indo-European Declension in Light of Indo-Uralic Comparative Grammar]. (= Slovenska Akademija Znanosti im Umetnosti 31.) Ljubljana: Slovenian Academy. |
Čop 1976 | Čop, Bojan 1976 | “Méditerranéen et indo-ouraléen” [Mediterranean and Indo-Uralic], Linguistica 16:13—33. |
Čop 1979 | Čop, Bojan 1979 | “Indogermanisch-Anatolisch und Uralisch” [Indo-European/Anatolian and Uralic], in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 9—24. |
Čop 1981 | Čop, Bojan 1981 | “Sur l’origine des thèmes pronominaux sigmatiques des langues indo-européennes” [On the Origin of the Sigmatic Pronominal Stems of the Indo-European Languages], Linguistica 21:73—103. |
Čop 1987 | Čop, Bojan 1987 | “Indouralica XII”, Linguistica 27:135—161. |
Čop 1989 | Čop, Bojan 1989 | “Indouralica IX”, Linguistica 29:13—56. |
Corbett 1987 | Corbett, Greville 1987 | “Serbo-Croat”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 391—409. |
Costello 1982 | Costello, John R. 1982 | “The Absolute Construction in Indo-European: A Syntagmatic Reconstruction”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 10.3/4: 235—252. |
Cotticelli-Kurras 1991 | Cotticelli-Kurras, Paola 1991 | Das hettitische Verbum “sein”: Syntaktische Untersuchungen [The Hittite Verb “to be”: Syntactic Investigations]. Heidel-berg: Carl Winter Verlag. |
Cotticelli-Kurras 1992 | Cotticelli-Kurras, Paola 1992 | “Die hethitischen Nominalsätze” [The Hittite Nominal Sentences], in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 99—135. |
Couvreur 1935 | Couvreur, Walter 1935 | De Hittitische ḫ [Hittite ḫ]. Leuven: Katholieke Universiteit te Leuven. |
Couvreur 1937 | Couvreur, Walter 1937 | De Hettitische Ḫ: Een Bijdrage tot de Studie van het Indo-Europeesche Vocalisme [Hittite Ḫ: A Contribution to the Study of Indo-European Vocalism]. Louvain: Bibliothèque du Muséon. |
Couvreur 1950 | Couvreur, Walter 1950 | “B-Tocharische Etymologien” [Tocharian B Etymologies], Archív Orientální 18:126—130. |
Cowell 1964 | Cowell, Mark W. 1964 | A Reference Grammar of Syrian Arabic. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Cowgill 1965 | Cowgill, Warren 1965 | “Greek Evidence”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 142—180. |
Cowgill 1966 | Cowgill, Warren 1966 | “Ancient Greek Dialectology in the Light of Mycenaean”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 77—95. |
Cowgill 1967 | Cowgill, Warren 1967 | “Ablaut, Accent, and Umlaut in the Tocharian Subjunctive”, in: Werner P. Friedrich (ed.), Studies in Historical Linguistics in Honor of George Sherman Lane. Chapel Hill, NC: University of North Carolina Press, pp. 171—181. |
Cowgill 1968 | Cowgill, Warren 1968 | “The First Person Singular Mediopassive of Indo-European”, in: J. C. Heesterman, G. H. Schokker, and V. I. Subramoniam (eds.), Pratidānam: Indian, Iranian and Indo-European Studies Presented to Franciscus Bernardus Kuipers on his Sixtieth Birthday. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 24—31. |
Cowgill 1970 | Cowgill, Warren 1970 | “Italic and Celtic Superlatives and the Dialects of Indo-European”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 113—153. |
Cowgill 1973 | Cowgill, Warren 1973 | “The Source of Latin stāre, with Notes on Comparable Forms elsewhere in Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.3:271—303. |
Cowgill 1975 | Cowgill, Warren 1975 | “More Evidence for Indo-Hittite: The Tense-Aspect Systems”, in: Luigi Heilmann (ed.), Proceedings of the Eleventh International Congress of Linguists. Bologna: Società Editrice il Mulino, part II, pp. 557—570. |
Cowgill 1979 | Cowgill, Warren 1979 | “Anatolian ḫi-conjugation and Indo-European Perfect: Instalment II”, in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 25—39. |
Cowgill—Mayrhofer 1986 | Cowgill, Warren, and Manfred Mayrhofer 1986 | Indogermanische Grammatik I: 1. Einleitung. 2. Lautlehre [Indo-European Grammar I: 1. Introduction. 2. Phonology]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Crawford 1991 | Crawford, Harriet 1991 | Sumer and the Sumerians. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Cristofani 1991 | Cristofani, Mauro 1991 | Introduzione allo studio dell’etrusco [Introduction to the Study of Etruscan]. Leo S. Olschki Editore. |
Croft 1990 | Croft, William 1990 | Typology and Universals. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Croft [2003] | Croft, William [2003] | [2nd edition.] |
Croft 2000 | Croft, William 2000 | Explaining Language Change: An Evolutionary Approach. London: Longman. |
Crosby—Schaefer 1990 | Crosby, Henry Lamar, and John Nevin Schaefer 1990 | An Introduction to Greek. Boston, MA: Allyn and Bacon, Inc. |
Crothers 1978 | Crothers, John 1978 | “Typology and Universals of Vowel Systems”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, vol. 2, pp. 93—152. |
Crystal 1980 | Crystal, David 1980 | A First Dictionary of Linguistics and Phonetics. Boulder, CO: Westview Press. |
Crystal 1992 | Crystal, David 1992 | An Encyclopedic Dictionary of Language and Languages. Oxford: Blackwell. |
Crystal 2003 | Crystal, David 2003 | A Dictionary of Linguistics and Phonetics. 5th edition. Oxford: Blackwell. |
Csató—Johanson 1998 | Csató, Éva Ágnes, and Lars Johanson 1998 | “Turkish”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 203—235. |
Csató—Karakoç 1998 | Csató, Éva Ágnes, and Birsel Karakoç 1998 | “Noghay”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 333—343. |
Csúcs 1988 | Csúcs, Sándor 1988 | “Die wotjakische Sprache” [The Votyak Language], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 131—146. |
Csúcs 1998 | Csúcs, Sándor 1998 | “Udmurt”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 276—304. |
Cubberley 1993 | Cubberley, Paul 1993 | “Alphabets and Transliteration”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 20—59. |
Cunliffe 1994 | Cunliffe, Barry (ed.) 1994 | The Oxford Illustrated Prehistory of Europe. Oxford and New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Cuny 1912 | Cuny, Albert 1912 | “Notes de phonétique historique: Indo-européen et sémitique” [Notes on Historical Phonology: Indo-European and Semitic], Revue de Phonétique 2:101—132. |
Cuny 1924 | Cuny, Albert 1924 | Études prégrammaticales sur le domaine des langues indo-européennes et chamito-sémitiques [Pregrammatical Studies in the Domain of the Indo-European and Hamito-Semitic Languages]. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Cuny 1931 | Cuny, Albert 1931 | “Contribution à la phonétique comparée de l’indo-européen et du chamito-sémitique” [Contribution to the Comparative Phonology of Indo-European and Hamito-Semitic], Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique 32:29—53. |
Cuny 1943 | Cuny, Albert 1943 | Recherches sur le vocalisme, le consonantisme et la formation des racines en «nostratique», ancêtre de l’indo-européen et du chamito-sémitique [Investigations into the Vocalism, Consonantism, and Formation of Roots in “Nostratic”, Ancestor of Indo-European and Hamito-Semitic]. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Cuny 1946 | Cuny, Albert 1946 | Invitation à l’étude comparative des langues indo-européennes et des langues chamito-sémitiques [An Invitation to the Comparative Study of the Indo-European and Hamito-Semitic Languages]. Bordeaux: Editions Bière. |
D’Aversa 1994 | D’Aversa, Arnaldo 1994 | Dizionario della lingua etrusca [Dictionary of the Etruscan Language]. Bescia: Paideia Editrice. |
Dallet 1982 | Dallet, J.-M. 1982 | Dictionnaire kabyle-français [Kabyle-French Dictionary]. Paris: Selaf. |
Dambriunas—Klimas—Schmalstieg 1972 | Dambriunas, Leonardus, Antanas Klimas, and William R. Schmalstieg 1972 | Introduction to Modern Lithuanian. 2nd edition. Brooklyn, NY: Franciscan Fathers. |
Dani—Masson 1992 | Dani, A. H., and V. M. Masson (eds.) 1992 | History of Civilizations of Central Asia. Vol. I: The Dawn of Civilization: Earliest Times to 700 B.C. Paris: UNESCO. |
Daniels—Bright 1996 | Daniels, Peter T., and William Bright (eds.) 1996 | The World’s Writing Systems. Oxford and New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Darden 2001 | Darden, Bill 2001 | “On the Question of the Anatolian Origin of Indo-Hittite”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 184—228. |
Davidowitz 1973 | Davidowitz, Gilbert 1973 | “Cognate Afro-Asiatic and Indo-European Affixes: Conjuga-tional Person-markers”. Manuscript. |
Davies 1998 | Davies, W. V. 1998 | “Egyptian Hieroglyphs”, in: J. T. Hooker (ed.), Reading the Past: Ancient Writing from Cuneiform to the Alphabet. New York, NY: Barnes & Noble Books, pp. 75—135. |
Davis 1973 | Davis, Philip W. 1973 | Modern Theories of Language. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc. |
Day 2001 | Day, John V. 2001 | Indo-European Origins: The Anthropological Evidence. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
De Bray 1969 | De Bray, R. G. A. 1969 | Guide to the Slavonic Languages. Revised edition. London: J. M. Dent and Sons, Ltd. |
De Bray 1980a | De Bray, R. G. A. 1980a | Guide to the South Slavonic Languages. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
De Bray 1980b | De Bray, R. G. A. 1980b | Guide to the West Slavonic Languages. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
De Bray 1980c | De Bray, R. G. A. 1980c | Guide to the East Slavonic Languages. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
De Chene—Anderson 1979 | De Chene, Brent, and Stephen R. Anderson 1979 | “Compensatory Lengthening”, Language 55:505—535. |
De Lamberterie 1994 | De Lamberterie, Charles 1994 | “L’arménien” [Armenian], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 137—163. |
De Saussure 1878 | De Saussure, Ferdinand 1878 | Mémoire sur le système primitif des voyelles dans les langues indo-européennes [An Essay on the Primitive System of Vowels in the Indo-European Languages]. Reprinted 1978. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
De Saussure 1892 | De Saussure, Ferdinand 1892 | “Contribution à l’histoire des aspirées sourdes” [A Contribution to the History of the Voiceless Aspirates], Bulletin de la Société Linguistique 7.3:cxviii (summary of a paper read at a meeting of the Société de Linguistique de Paris held on 6 June 1891). Reprinted 1922 (see below), p. 603. |
De Saussure 1915 | De Saussure, Ferdinand 1915 | Cours de linguistique générale [Course in General Linguistics]. Reprinted 1967. Paris: Payot. |
De Saussure 1922 | De Saussure, Ferdinand 1922 | Recueil des publications scientifiques de Ferdinand de Saussure [Collection of the Scientific Publications of Ferdinand de Saussure]. Edited by Charles Bally and L. Gautier. Reprinted 1984. Geneva: Société Anonyme des Éditions Sonor. |
De Saussure 1959 | De Saussure, Ferdinand 1959 | Course in General Linguistics. English translation by Wade Baskin. New York, NY: Philosophical Library. |
De Saussure 2006 | De Saussure, Ferdinand 2006 | Writings in General Linguistics. English translation by Carol Sanders and Matthew Pires. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
De Schutter 1994 | De Schutter, Georges 1994 | “Dutch”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 439—477. |
De Vaan 2003 | De Vaan, Michiel 2003 | The Avestan Vowels. Amsterdam and New York, NY: Editions Rodopi. |
De Vries 1960 | De Vries, Jan 1960 | Kelten und Germanen [Celts and Germans]. Bern: Francke Verlag. |
De Vries 1962 | De Vries, Jan 1962 | Altnordisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Old Norse Etymological Dictionary]. 2nd edition. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
De Vries [1977] | De Vries, Jan [1977] | [Reprinted.] |
De Vries 1971 | De Vries, Jan 1971 | Nederlands Etymologisch Woordenboek [Dutch Etymological Dictionary]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Debrunner 1938 | Debrunner, Albert 1938 | Review of Jerzy Kuryłowicz, Études indoeuropéennes I [Indo-European Studies I], Indogermanische Forschungen 56:55—58. |
Décsy 1965 | Décsy, Gyula 1965 | Einführung in die finnisch-ugrische Sprachwissenschaft [Introduction to Finno-Ugrian Linguistics]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Décsy 1966 | Décsy, Gyula 1966 | Yurak Chrestomathy. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 50.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Décsy 1980 | Décsy, Gyula 1980 | “Neue Aspekte zum Sprachverhältnis Uralisch-Indoger-manisch” [New Aspects on the Uralic/Indo-European Relationship], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 52:11—20. |
Décsy 1988a | Décsy, Gyula 1988a | A Select Catalog of Language Universals. Bloomington, IN: Eurolingua. |
Décsy 1988b | Décsy, Gyula 1988b | “Slawischer Einfluß auf die uralischen Sprachen” [Slavic Influence on the Uralic Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 616—637. |
Décsy 1990 | Décsy, Gyula 1990 | The Uralic Protolanguage: A Comprehensive Reconstruction. Bloomington, IN: Eurolingua. |
Décsy 1991 | Décsy, Gyula 1991 | The Indo-European Protolanguage: A Computational Reconstruction. Bloomington, IN: Eurolingua. |
Décsy 1998 | Décsy, Gyula 1998 | The Turkic Protolanguage: A Computational Reconstruction. Bloomington, IN: Eurolingua. |
Décsy 1999 | Décsy, Gyula 1999 | “Beyond Nostratic in Time and Space”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 127—135. |
Décsy 2002 | Décsy, Gyula 2002 | The Afroasiatic Protolanguage. An Attempt at a Combined Phylogenetic and Historical-Comparative Reconstruction with Anthropological Objectives. Bloomington, IN: Eurolingua. |
Décsy 1983 | Décsy, Gyula (ed.) 1983 | Global Linguistic Connections. Bloomington, IN: Eurolingua. |
Dehoux 1992 | Dehoux, Yves 1992 | Le verbe grec ancien: élements de morphologie et de syntaxe historiques [The Ancient Greek Verb: Elements of Historical Morphology and Syntax]. Louvain-la-Neuve: Peeters. |
Del Olmo Lete 2003 | Del Olmo Lete, Gregorio 2003 | Questions de linguistique sémitique: racine et lexème: histoire de la recherche 1940—2000 [Questions of Semitic Linguistics: Root and Lexeme: History of Research 1940—2000]. Paris: Jean Maisonneuve. |
Del Olmo Lete—Sanmartín 2003 | Del Olmo Lete, G., and J. Sanmartín 2003 | A Dictionary of the Ugaritic Language in the Alphabetic Tradition. 2 vols. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Delamarre 1984 | Delamarre, X[avier] 1984 | Le vocabulaire indo-européen. Lexique étymologique thématique [The Indo-European Vocabulary: Thematic Etymological Lexicon]. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Delamarre 2001 | Delamarre, X[avier] 2001 | Dictionnaire de la langue gauloise [Dictionary of the Gaulish Language]. Paris: Éditions Errance. |
Delancey 1987 | Delancey, Scott 1987 | “Sino-Tibetan Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 799—810. |
Delbrück 1919 | Delbrück, Berthold 1919 | Einleitung in das Studium der indogermanischen Sprachen [Introduction to the Study of the Indo-European Languages]. 6th edition reprinted 1976. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Delbrück 1974 | Delbrück, Berthold 1974 | Introduction to the Study of Language. English translation (1881) by E. Channing. New edition prepared with a Foreword and a Selected Bibliography by E. F. K. Koerner. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Della Volpe 1996 | Della Volpe, Angela 1996 | “Indo-European Architectural Terms and the Pre-Indo-Europeans”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 148—165. |
Demiraj 1997 | Demiraj, Bardhyl 1997 | Albanische Etymologien (Untersuchungen zum albanischen Erbwortschatz) [Albanian Etymologies (Investigations into the Inherited Vocabulary of Albanian)]. Amsterdam and Atlanta, GA: Editions Rodopi. |
Demiraj 1994 | Demiraj, Shaban 1994 | “L’albanais” [Albanian], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 221—232. |
Demiraj 1998 | Demiraj, Shaban 1998 | “Albanian”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 480—501. |
Denning—Kemmer 1990 | Denning, Keith, and Suzanne Kemmer (eds.) 1990 | On Language: Selected Writings of Joseph Greenberg. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Derghachev 2000 | Derghachev, V. 2000 | “The Migration Theory of Marija Gimbutas”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 28.3/4:257—339. |
Deroy 1949 | Deroy, Louis 1949 | “La racine indo-européenne *ə3egw- ‘nourir, se nourir’” [The Indo-European Root *ə3egw- ‘to nourish, to be nourished’], Studia Linguistica 3:18—31. |
Devoto 1962 | Devoto, Giacomo 1962 | Origini indeuropee [Indo-European Origins]. Florence: Sansoni. |
Devoto 1978 | Devoto, Giacomo 1978 | The Languages of Italy. English translation by V. Louise Katainen. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Dezső 1980 | Dezső, László 1980 | “Grammatical Typology and Proto-Languages”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 17—26. |
Diakonoff 1965 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1965 | Semito-Hamitic Languages. Moscow: Nauka. |
Diakonoff 1970 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1970 | “Problems of Root Structure in Proto-Semitic”, Archív Orientální 38:453—480. |
Diakonoff 1974 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1974 | “Hamito-Semitic Languages”, in: Encyclopaedia Britannica. 15th edition. Vol. 8, pp. 589—598. |
Diakonoff 1975 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1975 | “On Root Structure in Proto-Semitic”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 133—153. |
Diakonoff 1984 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1984 | Letter to the Conference regarding recent work in the USSR on the comparative historical vocabulary of Afrasian, in James Bynon (ed.), Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Linguistics: Papers from the Third International Hamito-Semitic Congress. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 1—10. |
Diakonoff 1985 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1985 | “On the Original Home of the Speakers of Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 13.1/2:92—174. |
Diakonoff 1988 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1988 | Afrasian Languages. Moscow: Nauka. |
Diakonoff 1990 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1990 | “Language Contacts in the Caucasus and the Near East”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-European and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 53—65. |
Diakonoff 1992 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 1992 | Proto-Afrasian and Old Akkadian: A Study in Historical Phonetics. (= Journal of Afroasiatic Languages 4.1/2.) Princeton, NJ: Institute of Semitic Studies. |
Diakonoff 2000 | Diakonoff, Igor M. 2000 | “Sacrifices in the City of Teišebâ (UKN 448): Lights on the Social History of Urartu”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 47—60. |
Diakonoff 1991 | Diakonoff, Igor M. (ed.) 1991 | Early Antiquity. English translation by Alexander Kirjanov. Foreword by Philip L. Kohl, Project Editor. Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press. |
Diakonoff—Militarëv—Porxomovsky—Stolbova 1987 | Diakonoff, I. M., A. Yu. Militarëv, V. Ya. Porxomovsky, and O. V. Stolbova 1987 | “Общеафразийская фонологическая система [Common Afrasian Phonological System], in: V. Ya. Porxomovsky (ed.), Африканское историческое языкознание: проблемы реконструкции [African Historical Linguistics: Problems of Reconstruction]. Moscow: Nauka, pp. 9—29. |
Diakonoff—Neroznak 1985 | Diakonoff, Igor M., and V. P. Neroznak 1985 | Phrygian. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books. |
Diakonoff—Starostin 1986 | Diakonoff, Igor M., and Sergej A. Starostin 1986 | Hurro-Urartian as an Eastern Caucasian Language. Munich: R. Kitzinger. |
Diebold—Jr. 1987 | Diebold, A. Richard, Jr. 1987 | “Linguistic Ways to Prehistory”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 19—71. |
Diebold—Jr. 1992 | Diebold, A. Richard, Jr. 1992 | “The Traditional View of the Indo-European Paleoeconomy: Contradictory Evidence from Anthropology and Linguistics”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 317—367. |
Dillmann 1907 | Dillmann, August 1907 | Ethiopic Grammar. 2nd edition enlarged and improved by Carl Bezold. English translation, with additions, by James A. Crichton. Reprinted 1974. Amsterdam: Philo Press. |
Dinneen 1967 | Dinneen, Francis P. 1967 | An Introduction to General Linguistics. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Dinnsen 1979 | Dinnsen, Daniel A. (ed.) 1979 | Current Approaches to Phonological Theory. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Disterheft 1980 | Disterheft, Dorothy 1980 | The Syntactic Development of the Infinitive in Indo-European. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
Diver 1959 | Diver, William 1959 | “Palatal Quality and Vowel Length in Indo-European”, Word 15:110—122. |
Dixit 1987a | Dixit, R. Prakash 1987a | “Mechanisms for Voicing and Aspiration: Hindi and Other Languages Compared”, in: UCLA Working Papers in Phonetics 67. Los Angeles, CA: UCLA Department of Linguistics, pp. 49—102. |
Dixit 1987b | Dixit, R. Prakash 1987b | “In Defense of the Phonetic Adequacy of the Traditional Term ‘Voiced Aspirate’,” in: UCLA Working Papers in Phonetics 67. Los Angeles, CA: UCLA Department of Linguistics, pp. 103—111. |
Dixon 1980 | Dixon, R. M. W. 1980 | The Languages of Australia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Dixon 1994 | Dixon, R. M. W. 1994 | Ergativity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Dixon 1997 | Dixon, R. M. W. 1997 | The Rise and Fall of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Dixon 2002 | Dixon, R. M. W. 2002 | Australian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Djahukyan 1961 | Djahukyan, Gevork B. 1961 | “The Hayaša Language and its Relation to the Indo-European Languages”, Archív Orientální 29:353—405. |
Djahukyan 1967 | Djahukyan, Gevork B. 1967 | Взаимоотношение индоевропейских хурритско-урартских и кавказских языков [Interrelations of the Indo-European, Hurrian-Urartian, and Caucasian Languages]. Yerevan: Academy of Sciences of the Armenian SSR. |
Djahukyan 1975 | Djahukyan, Gevork B. 1975 | “Die Bedeutung der ersten (indogermanischen) und der zweiten (inner-armenischen) Palatalisierung für die Konstituierung des armenischen Konsonanten-Systems” [The Meaning of the First (Indo-European) and the Second (Inner-Armenian) Palataliza-tion for the Establishment of the Armenian Consonant System], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 89.1:31—42. |
Djahukyan 1980 | Djahukyan, Gevork B. 1980 | “On the Position of Armenian in the Indo-European Languages (On the Areal Characteristics of the Armenian Language)”, in: John A. C. Greppin (ed.), First International Conference on Armenian Linguistics: Proceedings. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books, pp. 3—16. |
Djahukyan 1990 | Djahukyan, Gevork B. 1990 | “A Variational Model of the Indoeuropean Consonant System”. Historische Sprachforschung 103:1—16. |
Doerfer 1971 | Doerfer, Gerhard 1971 | “Bemerkungen zur linguistischen Klassifikation” [Remarks on Linguistic Classification], Indogermanische Forschungen 76:1—14. |
Doerfer 1974 | Doerfer, Gerhard 1974 | “Ist das Japanische mit den altäischen Sprachen verwandt? [Is Japanese Related to the Altaic Languages?], Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 124:103—142. |
Doerfer 1984 | Doerfer, Gerhard 1984 | “Prolegomena zu einer Untersuchung der dem Tungusischen und Mongolischen gemeinsamen Wörter” [Preliminaries to an Investigation into Tungus and Mongolian Common Words], Journal de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 79:65—85. |
Doerfer 1985 | Doerfer, Gerhard 1985 | “The Mongol-Tungus Connections”, Language Research 21:135—144. |
Doerfer 1998 | Doerfer, Gerhard 1998 | “Turkic Languages of Iran”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 273—282. |
Dolgopolsky 1964 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1964 | “Гипотеза древнейшего родства языковых семей северной евразии c вероятностной точки зрения” [The Hypothesis of the Ancient Relationship of the Language Families in Northern Eurasia from a Probabilistic Point of View], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1964:53—63. English translation published in: Vitalij V. Shevoroshkin and Thomas L. Markey (eds.), Typology, Relationship, and Time (1986), pp. 27—50. |
Dolgopolsky 1965 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1965 | “Методы реконструкции общиндоевропейского яазыка и сибироевропейская гипотеза” [Methods in the Reconstruction of Proto-Indo-European and the Sibero-European Hypothesis], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1965:259—270. |
Dolgopolsky 1967 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1967 | “Ностратические основы с сочетанием шумных согласных” [Nostratic Roots with Sibilant Clusters], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1967:296—313. |
Dolgopolsky 1968 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1968 | “Ностратические этимологии и происхождение глагольных формантов” [Nostratic Etymologies and the Origin of Verb Formatives], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1968:237—242. |
Dolgopolsky 1970 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1970 | “Ностратические корни с сочетанием латерального и звонкого ларингала” [Nostratic Roots with a Cluster of Lateral and Voiced Laryngeals], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1970: 356—369. |
Dolgopolsky 1972 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1972 | “О ностратической системе аффрикат и сибилянтов: корни c фонемой *ʒ” [On the System of Nostratic Affricates and Sibilants: Roots with the Phoneme *ʒ], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1972:163—175. |
Dolgopolsky 1973 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1973 | Сравнительно-историческая фонетика кушитских языков [An Historical-Comparative Phonology of the Cushitic Languages]. Moscow: Nauka. |
Dolgopolsky 1975 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1975 | Review of Dell Hymes (ed.), Pidginization and Creolization of Languages, Language in Society 4:243—247. |
Dolgopolsky 1977 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1977 | “Emphatic Consonants in Semitic”, Israel Oriental Studies VII:1—13. |
Dolgopolsky 1978 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1978 | “On Phonemic Stress in Proto-Semitic”, Israel Oriental Studies VIII:1—12. |
Dolgopolsky 1982 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1982 | “Chadic-Semitic-Cushitic: Epenthetic -ɣ- in Sura in the Light of Hamito-Semitic Comparative Linguistics”, in: Hermann Jungraithmayr (ed.), The Chad Languages in the Hamitosemitic-Nigritic Border Area. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer, pp. 32—46. |
Dolgopolsky 1984 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1984 | “On Personal Pronouns in the Nostratic Languages”, in: Otto Gschwantler, Károly Rédei, and Hermann Reichert (eds.), Linguistica et Philologica. Gedenkschrift für Björn Collinder (1894—1983) [Linguistics and Philology. Memorial Volume for Björn Collinder (1894—1983)]. Vienna: Wilhelm Braumüller, pp. 65—112. |
Dolgopolsky 1986 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1986 | Review of Bomhard 1984b. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique LXXXI:91—97. |
Dolgopolsky 1988a | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1988a | “The Indo-European Homeland and Lexical Contacts of Proto-Indo-European with Other Languages”, Mediterranean Language Review 3:7—31. |
Dolgopolsky 1988b | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1988b | “On Etymology of Pronouns and Classification of the Chadic Languages”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), FUCUS: A Semitic/Afrasian Gathering in Remembrance of Albert Ehrman. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 201—220. |
Dolgopolsky 1989a | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1989a | “Cultural Contacts of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Indo-Iranian with Neighboring Languages”, Folia Linguistica Historica 8.1/2:3—36. |
Dolgopolsky 1989b | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1989b | “Problems of Nostratic Comparative Phonology (Preliminary Report)”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 90—98. |
Dolgopolsky 1992 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1992 | “The Nostratic Vowels in Indo-European”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Nostratic, Dene-Caucasian, Austric and Amerind. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 298—331. |
Dolgopolsky 1994 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1994 | “Nostratic”, in: R. E. Asher (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. Oxford: Pergamon Press, vol. 5, p. 2838. |
Dolgopolsky 1998 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1998 | The Nostratic Hypothesis and Linguistic Paleontology. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research. |
Dolgopolsky 1999 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 1999 | “The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Short Introduction”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 19—44. |
Dolgopolsky 2002 | Dolgopolsky, Aaron 2002 | “Three Entries from the ‘Nostratic Dictionary’,” in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 45—50. |
Dolgopolsky To appear | Dolgopolsky, Aaron To appear | Nostratic Dictionary. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Achaeological Research. |
Donaldson 1994 | Donaldson, Bruce 1994 | “Afrikaans”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 478—504. |
Dressler 1985 | Dressler, Wolfgang 1985 | Morphonology: The Dynamics of Derivation. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, Inc. |
Drews 1988 | Drews, Robert 1988 | The Coming of the Greeks: Indo-European Conquests in the Aegean and the Near East. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
Drews 1993 | Drews, Robert 1993 | The End of the Bronze Age: Changes in Warfare and the Catastrophe ca. 1200 B.C. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
Drews 1997 | Drews, Robert 1997 | “PIE Speakers and PA Speakers”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 25.1/2:153—177. |
Drews 2001 | Drews, Robert 2001 | “Greater Anatolia: Proto-Anatolian, Proto-Indo-Hittite, and Beyond”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 248—283. |
Drews 2001 | Drews, Robert (ed.) 2001 | Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Drinka 1995 | Drinka, Bridget 1995 | The Sigmatic Aorist in Indo-European: Evidence for the Space-Time Hypothesis. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Drinka 2003 | Drinka, Bridget 2003 | “The Development of the Perfect in Indo-European: Stratigraphic Evidence for Prehistoric Areal Influence”, in: Henning Anderson (ed.), Language Contacts in Prehistory: Studies in Stratigraphy. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 77—105. |
Dubnov 2003 | Dubnov, Helena 2003 | A Grammatical Sketch of Somali. Köln: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag. |
Dunkel 1988 | Dunkel, George E. 1988 | “Laryngeals and Particles: *høu, *u, and *awo”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 107—121. |
Durie—Ross 1996 | Durie, Mark, and Malcolm Ross (eds.) 1996 | The Comparative Method Reviewed: Regularity and Irregularity in Language Change. New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Dybo 2004 | Dybo, Anna 2004 | “Some Peculiarities of Altaic Reflexes of Nostratic Sibilants”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 85—114. |
Dybo—Kullanda 2005 | Dybo, A[nna], and S. V. Kullanda 2005 | “Ностратическая терминология родства и свойства” [Nostratic Terminology of Kinship and Affinity], Алгебра Родства (Algebra Rodstva) 9:5—31. |
Dybo 1989a | Dybo, Vladimir 1989a | “Indo-European and East Nostratic Velar Stops”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 41—46. |
Dybo 1989b | Dybo, Vladimir 1989b | “V. M. Illič-Svityč and the Development of Uralic and Dravidian Linguistics (Preliminary Report)”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Explorations in Language Macrofamilies. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 20—27. |
Dybo 1990 | Dybo, Vladimir 1990 | “Comparative-Phonetic Tables for Nostratic Reconstructions”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Proto-Languages and Proto-Cultures. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 168—175. |
Dybo 2004 | Dybo, Vladimir 2004 | “On Illič-Svityč’s Study ‘Basic Features of the Proto-Language of the Nostratic Language Family’,” in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 115—119. |
Ebeling 1967 | Ebeling, C. L. 1967 | “Historical Laws of Slavic Accentuation”, in: To Honor Roman Jakobson. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 577—593. |
Eckardt 1966 | Eckardt, André 1966 | Koreanisch und Indogermanisch. Untersuchungen über die Zugehorigkeit des Koreanischen zur indogermanischen Sprachfamilie [Korean and Indo-European: Inquiries into the Relationship of the Korean and Indo-European Language Families]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos Verlag. |
Edgerton 1943 | Edgerton, Franklin 1943 | “The Indo-European Semi-vowels”, Language 19:83—123. |
Edgerton 1946 | Edgerton, Franklin 1946 | Sanskrit Historical Phonology: A Simplified Outline for the Use of Beginners in Sanskrit. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Edgerton 1962 | Edgerton, Franklin 1962 | “The Semi-vowel Phonemes in Indo-European: A Reconsideration”, Language 38:352—360. |
Edgerton 1970 | Edgerton, Franklin 1970 | Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 3 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass. |
Edzard 2003 | Edzard, Dietz Otto 2003 | Sumerian Grammar. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Egerod 1991 | Egerod, Søren 1991 | “Far Eastern Languages”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (ed.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 205—231. |
Ehret 1980 | Ehret, Christopher 1980 | The Historical Reconstruction of Southern Cushitic Phonology and Vocabulary. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag. |
Ehret 1985 | Ehret, Christopher 1985 | Proto-Cushitic Reconstruction. Manuscript. |
Ehret 1988 | Ehret, Christopher 1988 | “Language Change and the Material Correlates of Language and Ethnic Split”, Antiquity 62:564—574. |
Ehret 1989 | Ehret, Christopher 1989 | “The Origin of Third Consonants in Semitic Roots: An Internal Reconstruction (Applied to Arabic)”, Journal of Afroasiatic Languages 2.2:109—202. |
Ehret 1995 | Ehret, Christopher 1995 | Reconstructing Proto-Afroasiatic (Proto-Afrasian): Vowels, Tone, Consonants, and Vocabulary. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Ehret 1999 | Ehret, Christopher 1999 | “Nostratic — or Proto-Human”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 93—112. |
Ehrich 1970 | Ehrich, Robert W. 1970 | “Some Indo-European Speaking Groups of the Middle Danube and the Balkans: Their Boundaries as Related to Cultural Geography through Time”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 217—251. |
Eichner 1988 | Eichner, Heiner 1988 | “Anatolisch und Trilaryngalismus” [Anatolian and Three Laryngeals], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngal-theorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 123—151. |
Eisenberg 1994 | Eisenberg, Peter 1994 | “German”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 349—387. |
Elcock 1960 | Elcock, W. O. 1960 | The Romance Languages. London: Faber and Faber. |
Elfenbein 1998 | Elfenbein, Josef 1998 | “Brahui”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 388—414. |
Elizarenkova—Toporov 1976 | Elizarenkova, T. Y., and V. N. Toporov 1976 | The Pali Language. Moscow: Nauka. |
Ellis 1953 | Ellis, Jeffrey 1953 | An Elementary Old High German Grammar: Descriptive and Comparative. Reprinted 1966. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Embleton 1986 | Embleton, Sheila M. 1986 | Statistics in Historical Linguistics. Bochum: Brockmeyer. |
Embleton 1991 | Embleton, Sheila M. 1991 | “Mathematical Methods of Genetic Classification”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 365—388. |
Embleton 2005 | Embleton, Sheila M. 2005 | Review of Brett Kessler, The Significance of Word Lists, Diachronica XXII.2:429—438. |
Embleton—Joseph—Niederehe 1999 | Embleton, Sheila, John E. Joseph, and Hans-Josef Niederehe (eds.) 1999 | The Emergence of the Modern Language Sciences: Studies on the Transition from Historical-Comparative to Structural Linguistics in Honour of E. F. K. Koerner. 2 vols. Philadelphia, PA, and Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Emeneau 1962 | Emeneau, Murray B. 1962 | Brahui and Dravidian Comparative Grammar. (University of California Publications in Linguistics 27.) Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. |
Emeneau 1966 | Emeneau, Murray B. 1966 | “The Dialects of Old Indo-Aryan”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 128—138. |
Emeneau 1970 | Emeneau, Murray B. 1970 | Dravidian Comparative Phonology: A Sketch. Annamalainagar: Annamalai University Press. |
Emeneau 1980 | Emeneau, Murray B. 1980 | Language and Linguistic Area. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Emeneau 1984 | Emeneau, Murray B. 1984 | Toda Grammar and Texts. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society. |
Emeneau 1988 | Emeneau, Murray B. 1988 | “Proto-Dravidian *c- and its Development”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 108.2:239—268. |
Emonds 1972 | Emonds, Joseph 1972 | “A Reformulation of Grimm’s Law”, in: Michael K. Brame (ed.), Contributions to Generative Phonology. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press, pp. 108—122. |
Endzelins 1922 | Endzelins, Janis 1922 | Lettisches Lesebuch [Latvian Reader]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Endzelins 1944 | Endzelins, Janis 1944 | Altpreussische Grammatik [Old Prussian Grammar]. Reprinted 1974. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Endzelins 1971 | Endzelins, Janis 1971 | Comparative Phonology and Morphology of the Baltic Languages. Translated by William R. Schmalstieg and Benjaminš Jegers. The Hague: Mouton. |
Entwistle 1962 | Entwistle, William J. 1962 | The Spanish Language together with Portuguese, Catalan, and Basque. 2nd edition reprinted 1969. London: Faber and Faber. |
Entwistle—Morison 1964 | Entwistle, William J., and W. A. Morison 1964 | Russian and the Slavonic Languages. 2nd edition. London: Faber and Faber. |
Erdal 1991 | Erdal, Marcel 1991 | Old Turkic Word Formation. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. |
Erdal 1998 | Erdal, Marcel 1998 | “Old Turkic”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 138—157. |
Erhart 1982 | Erhart, Adolf 1982 | Indoevropské jazyky: Srovnávací fonologie a morfologie [Indo-European Languages: Comparative Phonology and Morphology]. Praha: Akademia. |
Erman—Grapow 1921 | Erman, Adolf, and Hermann Grapow 1921 | Ägyptisches Handwörterbuch [Egyptian Pocket Dictionary]. Reprinted 1981. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Erman—Grapow 1926—1963 | Erman, Adolf, and Hermann Grapow 1926—1963 | Wörterbuch der ägyptischen Sprache [Dictionary of the Egyptian Language]. 7 vols. in 13 parts. Reprinted 1992. Berlin: Akademie Verlag. |
Ernout 1961 | Ernout, Alfred 1961 | Le dialecte ombrien. Lexique du vocabulaire des “Tables Eugubines” et des inscriptions [The Umbrian Dialect. Lexicon of the Vocabulary of the “Iguvium Tablets” and of the Inscriptions]. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Ernout—Meillet 1979 | Ernout, Alfred, and Antoine Meillet 1979 | Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue latine: Histoire des mots [Etymological Dictionary of the Latin Language: History of Words]. 4th edition. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Erwin 1962 | Erwin, Wallace M. 1962 | A Short Reference Grammar of Iraqi Arabic. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Eska 2004 | Eska, Joseph F. 2004 | “Continental Celtic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 857—880. |
Evans 1964 | Evans, D. Simon 1964 | A Grammar of Middle Welsh. Reprinted 1976. Dublin: The Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies. |
Ewert 1943 | Ewert, Alfred 1943 | The French Language. 2nd edition reprinted 1969. London: Faber and Faber. |
Faarlund 1994 | Faarlund, Jan Terje 1994 | “Old and Middle Scandinavian”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 38—71. |
Faarlund 2004 | Faarlund, Jan Terje 2004 | “Ancient Nordic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 907—921. |
Faber 1981 | Faber, Alice 1981 | “Phonetic Reconstruction”, Glossa 15:233—262. |
Faber 1984 | Faber, Alice 1984 | “Semitic Sibilants in an Afro-Asiatic Context”, Journal of Semitic Studies 29.2:189—224. |
Faber 1986 | Faber, Alice 1986 | “On the Actuation of a Sound Change: A Semitic Case Study”, Diachronica III.2:163—184. |
Faber 1989 | Faber, Alice 1989 | “On the Nature of Proto-Semitic *l”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 109.1:33—36. |
Faber 1997 | Faber, Alice 1997 | “Genetic Subgrouping of the Semitic Languages”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 3—15. |
Facchetti 2005 | Facchetti, Giulio M. 2005 | “The Interpretation of Etruscan Texts and Its Limits”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 33.3/4:359—388. |
Fagan 1990 | Fagan, Brian M. 1990 | The Journey from Eden: The Peopling of our World. New York, NY: Thames and Hudson, Inc. |
Fähnrich 1971 | Fähnrich, Heinz 1971 | “Kriterien zum Nachweis genetischer Sprachverwandtschaft” [Criteria for the Proof of Genetic Relationship], Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Ernst Moritz Arndt Universität Greifswald 20.5:99—136. |
Fähnrich 1981 | Fähnrich, Heinz 1981 | “Das Sumerische und Kartwelsprachen” [The Sumerian and Kartvelian Languages], Georgica 4:89—101. |
Fähnrich 1988 | Fähnrich, Heinz 1988 | “Lexikalische Parallelen zwischen indoeuropäischen und kartwelischen Sprachen” [Lexical Parallels between Indo-European and Kartvelian Languages], Papiere zur Linguistik 39:49—54. |
Fähnrich 1993 | Fähnrich, Heinz 1993 | Kurze Grammatik der georgischen Sprache [Short Grammar of the Georgian Language]. Third Edition. Leipzig, Berlin, Munich: Langenscheidt. |
Fähnrich 1994 | Fähnrich, Heinz 1994 | Grammatik der altgeorgischen Sprache [Grammar of the Old Georgian Language]. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Fähnrich—Sardshweladse 1995 | Fähnrich, Heinz, and Surab Sardshweladse 1995 | Etymologisches Wörterbuch der Kartwel-Sprachen [Etymological Dictionary of the Kartvelian Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Fairbanks 1977 | Fairbanks, Gordon H. 1977 | “Case Inflection in Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.2:101—131. |
Fairservis 1992 | Fairservis, Walter A. 1992 | The Harappan Civilization and Its Writing. A Model for the Decipherment of the Indus Script. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Falkenstein 1959 | Falkenstein, Adam 1959 | Das Sumerische [Sumerian]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Fallon 2002 | Fallon, Paul D. 2002 | The Synchronic and Diachronic Phonology of Ejectives. New York, NY: Routledge. |
Fane 1990 | Fane, H. 1990 | “Sumerian-Dravidian Interconnections: The Linguistic, Archeological, and Textual Evidence”, International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 9:286—305. |
Faucounau 2000 | Faucounau, Jean 2000 | “Cilicie et Canaan dans les documents chyprominoens” [Cilicia and Canaan in the Cypro-Minoan Documents], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 61—75. |
Faulkner 1962 | Faulkner, Raymond O. 1962 | A Concise Dictionary of Middle Egyptian. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Feist 1939 | Feist, Sigmund 1939 | Vergleichendes Wörterbuch der gotischen Sprache [Comparative Dictionary of the Gothic Language]. 3rd edition. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Ferguson 1971 | Ferguson, Charles A. 1971 | Language Structure and Language Use. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Finegan 1987 | Finegan, Edward 1987 | “English”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 77—109. |
Finkelberg 2001 | Finkelberg, Margalit 2001 | “The Language of Linear A: Greek, Semitic, or Anatolian?”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 81—105. |
Fischer 1972 | Fischer, Wolfdietrich 1972 | Grammatik der klassischen Arabisch [Grammar of Classical Arabic]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Fischer 1997 | Fischer, Wolfdietrich 1997 | “Classical Arabic”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 187—219. |
Fisiak 1978 | Fisiak, Jacek (ed.) 1978 | Recent Developments in Historical Phonology. The Hague: Mouton. |
Fleisch 1956 | Fleisch, Henri 1956 | L’arabe classique: esquisse d’une structure linguistique [Classical Arabic: Sketch of a Linguistic Structure]. Beirut: Imprimerie Catholique. |
Fleming 1968 | Fleming, Harold C. 1968 | “Ethiopic Language History: Hypotheses in an Archeological and Documentary Context”, Ethnohistory XV.4:353—387. |
Fleming 1969 | Fleming, Harold C. 1969 | “Asas and Aramanik: Cushitic Hunters in Masai-Land”, Ethnology VIII.1:1—36. |
Fleming 1973 | Fleming, Harold C. 1973 | “Sub-classification in Hamito-Semitic”, in: Isidore Dyen (ed.), Lexicostatistics in Genetic Linguistics: Proceedings of the Yale Conference, Yale University, April 3—4, 1971. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 85—88. |
Fleming 1974a | Fleming, Harold C. 1974a | “Omotic as an Afroasiatic Family”, Studies in African Linguistics, Supplement 5, pp. 81—94. |
Fleming 1974b | Fleming, Harold C. 1974b | “Recent Research in Omotic-Speaking Areas”, in: Harold G. Marcus (ed.), Proceedings of the First United States Conference on Ethiopian Studies, 1973. East Lansing, MI: African Studies Center, Michigan State University, pp. 261—278. |
Fleming 1976a | Fleming, Harold C. 1976a | “Omotic Overview”, in: M. Lionel Bender (ed.), The Non-Semitic Languages of Ethiopia. East Lansing, MI: African Studies Center, Michigan State University, pp. 299—323. |
Fleming 1976b | Fleming, Harold C. 1976b | “Kefa (Gonga) Languages”, in: M. Lionel Bender (ed.), The Non-Semitic Languages of Ethiopia. East Lansing, MI: African Studies Center, Michigan State University, pp. 351—376. |
Fleming 1983a | Fleming, Harold C. 1983a | Review of Christopher Ehret, The Historical Reconstruction of Southern Cushitic Phonology and Vocabulary, Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 5:93—97. |
Fleming 1983b | Fleming, Harold C. 1983b | “Chadic External Relations”, in: Ekkehard Wolff and Hilke Meyer-Bahlburg (eds.), Studies in Chadic and Afroasiatic Linguistics. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag, pp. 17—31. |
Fleming 1983c | Fleming, Harold C. 1983c | “Kuliak External Relations: Step One”, in: Rainer Vossen and Marianne Bechhaus-Gerst (eds.), Nilotic Studies. Proceedings of the International Symposium on Languages and History of the Nilotic Peoples, Cologne, January 4—6, 1982. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag, pp. 525—555. |
Fleming 1987 | Fleming, Harold C. 1987 | “Toward a Definitive Classification of the World’s Languages”. Review of Merritt Ruhlen, A Guide to the Languages of the World, Diachronica 4.1/2:159—223. (Reprinted in Mother Tongue 20:4—30 [1993].) |
Fleming 1990 | Fleming, Harold C. 1990 | “A Grammatical Sketch of Dime (Dim-Af) of the Lower Omo”, in: Richard J. Hayward (ed.), Omotic Language Studies. London: University of London, School of Oriental and African Studies, pp. 494—583. |
Fleming 2000 | Fleming, Harold C. 2000 | “Glottalization in Eastern Armenian”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 28.1/2:155—196. |
Fleming 2002a | Fleming, Harold C. 2002a | “Shabo: A New African Phylum or a Special Relic of Old Nilo-Saharan?”, Mother Tongue VII:1—37. |
Fleming 2002b | Fleming, Harold C. 2002b | “Ongota Lexicon: English-Ongota”, Mother Tongue VII:39—63. |
Foley 1977 | Foley, James 1977 | Foundations of Theoretical Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Foley 1966 | Foley, William A. 1966 | The Papuan Languages of New Guinea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Forest 1965 | Forest, R. A. D. 1965 | The Chinese Language. 2nd edition. London: Faber and Faber. |
Fortescue 1984 | Fortescue, Michael 1984 | West Greenlandic. Dover, NH: Coon Helm. |
Fortescue 2005 | Fortescue, Michael 2005 | Comparative Chukotko-Kamchatkan Dictionary. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Fortescue—Jacobson—Kaplan 1994 | Fortescue, Michael, Steven Jacobson, and Lawrence Kaplan 1994 | Comparative Eskimo Dictionary. Fairbanks, AK: Alaska Native Language Center. |
Fortson—IV 2004 | Fortson, Benjamin W., IV 2004 | Indo-European Language and Culture: An Introduction. Oxford: Blackwell. |
Fox 2003 | Fox, Joshua 2003 | Semitic Noun Patterns. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns. |
Fraenkel 1962—1965 | Fraenkel, Ernst 1962—1965 | Litauisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Lithuanian Etymological Dictionary]. 2 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Francis 1992 | Francis, E. D. 1992 | “The Impact of non-Indo-European Languages on Greek and Mycenaean”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 469—506. |
Franzaroli 1975 | Franzaroli, P. 1975 | “On the Common Semitic Lexicon and its Ecological and Cultural Background”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 43—53. |
Frawley 2003 | Frawley, William J. (ed.) 2003 | International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. 4 vols. 2nd edition. New York, NY, and Oxford: Oxford University Press. (First edition edited by William Bright [1992].) |
Friedman 1993 | Friedman, Victor A. 1993 | “Macedonian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 249—305. |
Friedrich 1923 | Friedrich, Johannes 1923 | “Einige hethitische Etymologien” [Some Hittite Etymologies], Indogermanische Forschungen 41:369—376. |
Friedrich 1952 | Friedrich, Johannes 1952 | Hethitisches Wörterbuch [Hittite Dictionary]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Friedrich 1960 | Friedrich, Johannes 1960 | Hethitisches Elementarbuch [Hittite Primer]. Vol. I. 2nd edition. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Friedrich 1969a | Friedrich, Johannes 1969a | “Churritisch” [Hurrian], in: B. Spuler (ed.), Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 1—30. |
Friedrich 1969b | Friedrich, Johannes 1969b | “Urartäisch” [Urartian], in: B. Spuler (ed.), Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 31—53. |
Friedrich 1991 | Friedrich, Johannes 1991 | Kurzgefaßtes Hethitisches Wörterbuch [Short Hittite Dictionary]. Reprint of the 1952 edition along with the supplements. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Friedrich 1975— | Friedrich, Johannes and Annelies Kammenhuber 1975— | Hethitisches Wörterbuch [Hittite Dictionary]. 2nd edition. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Friedrich—Röllig—Amadasi Guzzo—Mayer 1999 | pc907 | Friedrich, J., W. Röllig, M. G. Amadasi Guzzo, and W. R. Mayer 1999 |
Friedrich 1970 | Friedrich, Paul 1970 | Proto-Indo-European Trees. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Friedrich 1975 | Friedrich, Paul 1975 | Proto-Indo-European Syntax. Butte, MT: Journal of Indo-European Studies. |
Frisk 1970—1973 | Frisk, Hjalmar 1970—1973 | Griechisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Greek Etymological Dictionary]. 3 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Fromkin 1978 | Fromkin, Victoria (ed.) 1978 | Tone: A Linguistic Survey. New York, NY: Academic Press. |
Fromkin—Rodman 1983 | Fromkin, Victoria, and Robert Rodman 1983 | An Introduction to Language. 3rd edition. New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc. |
Fuchs—Lopatin—Menges—Sinor 1968 | Fuchs, W., Ivan A. Lopatin, Karl H. Menges, and Denis Sinor 1968 | Tungusologie [Tungus Studies]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Fulk 1986 | Fulk, R. D. 1986 | The Origins of Indo-European Quantitative Ablaut. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Fulk 1988 | Fulk, R. D. 1988 | “PIE *ə in Germanic Unstressed Syllables”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekon-struktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 153—177. |
Futaky 1988 | Futaky, István 1988 | “Uralisch und Tungusisch” [Uralic and Tungus], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 781—791. |
von Gabain et al. (eds.) 1982 | Gabain, Annemarie Von, Omeljan Pritsak, Nikolaus Poppe, J. Benzing, Karl H. Menges, Ahmet Temir, Zeki Velidi Togan, Franz Taeschner, O. Spies, Ahmed Caferoğlu, Abdullah Battal-Taymas 1982 | Turkologie [Turkic Studies]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Gamkrelidze 1966 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1966 | “A Typology of Common Kartvelian”, Language 42:69—83. |
Gamkrelidze 1967 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1967 | “Kartvelian and Indo-European: A Typological Comparison of Reconstructed Linguistic Systems”, in: To Honor Roman Jakobson. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 707—717. |
Gamkrelidze 1968 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1968 | “Hittite and the Laryngeal Theory”, in: J. C. Heesterman, G. H. Schokker, and V. I. Subramoniam (eds.), Pratidānam: Indian, Iranian and Indo-European Studies Presented to Franciscus Bernardus Kuipers on his Sixtieth Birthday. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 89—97. |
Gamkrelidze 1970 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1970 | “‘Anatolian Languages’ and the Problem of Indo-European Migrations”, in: Roman Jakobson and Shigeo Kawamoto (eds.), Studies in General and Oriental Linguistics Presented to Shirô Hattori on the Occasion of His Sixtieth Birthday. Tokyo: TEC Company, Ltd, pp. 138—143. |
Gamkrelidze 1973 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1973 | “Über der Wechselbeziehung zwischen Verschluß- und Reibelauten in Phonemsystem: Zum Probleme der Markiertheit in der Phonologie” [On the Correlation of Stops and Fricatives in a Phonological System: Concerning the Problem of Markedness in Phonology], Phonetica 27:213—218. |
Gamkrelidze 1974a | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1974a | “Order of ‘Rewrite Rules’ in Diachronic Phonology”, Linguistics 126:25—31. |
Gamkrelidze 1974b | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1974b | “The Problem of ‘l’arbitraire du signe’,” Language 50.1:102—110. |
Gamkrelidze 1976 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1976 | “Linguistic Typology and Indo-European Reconstruction”, in: Alphonse Juilland (ed.), Linguistic Studies Offered to Joseph Greenberg. Saratoga, CA: Anma Libri, vol. 2, pp. 399—406. |
Gamkrelidze 1978 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1978 | “On the Correlation of Stops and Fricatives in a Phonological System”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language, vol. 2, Phonology. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 9—46. |
Gamkrelidze 1979 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1979 | “Hierarchical Relationships of Dominance as Phonological Universals and their Implications for Indo-European Reconstruction”, in: Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 283—290. |
Gamkrelidze 1981 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1981 | “Language Typology and Language Universals and Their Implications for the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Stop System”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 571—609. |
Gamkrelidze 1982 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1982 | “Problems of Consonantism of the Cuneiform Hittite Language”, in: J. N. Postgate (ed.), Societies and Languages of the Ancient Near East: Studies in Honor of I. M. Diakonoff. Warminster: Aris and Phillips, pp. 76—80. |
Gamkrelidze 1987 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1987 | “The Indo-European Glottalic Theory: A New Paradigm in I.E. Comparative Linguistics”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:47—59. |
Gamkrelidze 1989 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1989 | “Language Typology and Indo-European Reconstruction”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 117—121. |
Gamkrelidze 1990 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1990 | “The Problem of an Asiatic Original Homeland of the Proto-Indo-Europeans”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 5—14. |
Gamkrelidze 1992 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1992 | “Comparative Reconstruction and Typological Verification: The Case of Indo-European”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 63—71. |
Gamkrelidze 1994 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1994 | “Proto-Indo-European as a Language of Stative-Active Typology”, in: Roland Bielmeier and Reinhard Stempel (with the collaboration of René Lanszweert) (eds.), Indogermanica et Caucasica: Festschrift für Karl Horst Schmidt zum 65. Geburtstag [Indo-European and Caucasian: Commemorative Volume for Karl Horst Schmidt on his 65th Birthday]. Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter, pp. 25—34. |
Gamkrelidze 1999 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 1999 | “Typology and Reconstruction: New Trends in Comparative Historical and Diachronic Linguistics”, in: Sheila Embleton, John E. Joseph, and Hans-Josef Niederehe (eds.), The Emergence of the Modern Language Sciences: Studies on the Transition from Historical-Comparative to Structural Linguistics in Honour of E. F. K. Koerner. Vol. 2: Metholodo-logical Perspectives and Applications. Philadelphia, PA, and Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 109—114. |
Gamkrelidze 2001a | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 2001a | “André Martinet et la ‘théorie glottalique indo-europénne’” [André Martinet and the ‘Indo-European Glottalic Theory’], La Linguistique 37:81—88. |
Gamkrelidze 2001b | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 2001b | “Anatolian in Light of the Glottalic Theory”, in: Otto Carruba and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Anatolisch und Indogermanisch / Anatolico e Indoeuropeo. Akten des Kolloquiums der Indogermanischen Gesellschaft, Pavia, 22—25. September 1998 [Anatolian and Indo-European. Acts of the Colloquium of the Indo-European Society, Pavia, 22—25 September 1998]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft, pp. 119—127. |
Gamkrelidze 2003 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 2003 | “Indo-European and the Glottalic Theory. In Defense of Ejectives for Proto-Indo-European”, in: Mary Ruth Wise, Thomas N. Headland, and Ruth M. Brend (eds.), Language and Life: Essays in Memory of Kenneth L. Pike. Dallas, TX: SIL International, pp. 513—531. |
Gamkrelidze 2006 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V. 2006 | Selected Writings: Linguistic Sign, Typology, and Language Reconstruction. Edited by Ivo Hajnal, with an Introduction by Rüdiger Schmidt. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprach-wissenschaft. |
Gamkrelidze—Ivanov 1972 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V., and Vjačeslav V. Ivanov 1972 | “Лингвистическая типология и реконструкция системы индоевропейских смычных” [Linguistic Typology and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Occlusives], in: Конференция по сравнительно-исторической грамматике иодоевропейских языков (12—14 декабра) [Working Papers of the Conference on the Comparative-Historical Grammar of the Indo-European Languages (12—14 December 1972)]. Moscow: Nauka, pp. 15—18. |
Gamkrelidze—Ivanov 1973 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V., and Vjačeslav V. Ivanov 1973 | “Sprachtypologie und die Rekonstruktion der gemeinindogermanischen Verschlüsse” [Linguistic Typology and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Occlusives], Phonetica 27:150—156. |
Gamkrelidze—Ivanov 1984 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V., and Vjačeslav V. Ivanov 1984 | Индоевропейский язык и индоевропейцы: Реконструкция и историко-типологический анализ праязыка и прото-культуры [Indo-European and the Indo-Europeans: A Reconstruction and Historical Typological Analysis of a Protolanguage and a Proto-Culture]. 2 vols. Tbilisi: Publishing House of the Tbilisi State University. |
Gamkrelidze—Ivanov 1985a | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V., and Vjačeslav V. Ivanov 1985a | “The Ancient Near East and the Indo-European Question: Temporal and Territorial Characteristics of Proto-Indo-European based on Linguistic and Historico-Cultural Data”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 13.1/2:3—48. |
Gamkrelidze—Ivanov 1985b | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V., and Vjačeslav V. Ivanov 1985b | “The Migration of Tribes Speaking Indo-European Dialects from the Original Homeland in the Near East to their Historical Habitations in Eurasia”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 13.1/2:49—91. |
Gamkrelidze—Ivanov 1995 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V., and Vjačeslav V. Ivanov 1995 | Indo-European and the Indo-Europeans: A Reconstruction and Historical Typological Analysis of a Protolanguage and a Proto-Culture. 2 vols. English translation by Johanna Nichols. Berlin, New York, NY, and Amsterdam: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Gamkrelidze—Mačavariani 1982 | Gamkrelidze, Thomas V., and Givi Mačavariani 1982 | Sonantsystem und Ablaut in den Kartwelsprachen. Eine Typologie der Struktur des Gemeinkartwelischen [The System of Resonants and Ablaut in the Kartvelian Languages. A Typology of the Structure of Common Kartvelian]. German translation by Winfried Boeder. Tübingen: Gunter Narr Verlag. |
Garbell 1965 | Garbell, Irene 1965 | The Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Persian Azerbaijan. The Hague: Mouton. |
Garbini 1972 | Garbini, Giovanni 1972 | Le lingue semitiche [The Semitic Languages]. Naples: Istituto Orientale di Napoli. |
Gardiner 1957 | Gardiner, Alan 1957 | Egyptian Grammar. 3rd edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Gelb 1957 | Gelb, Ignace J. 1957 | Glossary of Old Akkadian. Reprinted 1973. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Gelb 1961 | Gelb, Ignace J. 1961 | Old Akkadian Writing and Grammar. 2nd edition. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Gelb 1969 | Gelb, Ignace J. 1969 | A Sequential Reconstruction of Proto-Akkadian. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Gelb 1980 | Gelb, Ignace J. 1980 | Computer-Aided Analysis of Amorite. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Gendre 1987—1994 | Gendre, Renato (ed.) 1987—1994 | Scritti scelti di Giuliano Bonfante [Selected Writings of Giuliano Bonfante]. 4 volumes. Alessandria: Edizioni dell’ Orso. |
Georg 2003a | Georg, Stefan 2003a | “Ordos”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 193—209. |
Georg 2003b | Georg, Stefan 2003b | “Mongghul”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 286—306. |
Georg 2004 | Georg, Stefan 2004 | Review of Sergej Starostin, Anna Dybo, and Oleg Mudrak, Etymological Dictionary of the Altaic Languages, Diachronica XXI.2:445—450. |
Georg—Vovin 2003 | Georg, Stefan, and Alexander Vovin 2003 | “From Mass Comparison to Mess Comparison: Greenberg’s Indo-European and Its Closest Relatives” (Volume 1: Grammar), Diachronica XX.2:331—362. |
Georg—Vovin 2005 | Georg, Stefan, and Alexander Vovin 2005 | Review of Joseph H. Greenberg, Indo-European and Its Closest Relatives: The Eurasiatic Language Family. Volume 2: Lexicon, Diachronica XXII. 1:184—190. |
Georgiev 1964 | Georgiev, Vladimir 1964 | “On the Present State of Indo-European Linguistics”, in: Horace G. Lunt (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 738—742. |
Georgiev 1966 | Georgiev, Vladimir 1966 | Introduzione alla storia delle lingue indeuropee [Introduction to the History of the Indo-European Languages]. 2nd edition. Rome: Edizioni dell’Ateneo. |
Georgiev 1979 | Georgiev, Vladimir 1979 | La lingua e l’origine degli etruschi [The Language and the Origin of the Etruscans]. Rome: Nagard. |
Georgiev 1981 | Georgiev, Vladimir 1981 | Introduction to the History of the Indo-European Languages. 3rd edition. Sofia: Publishing House of the Bulgarian Academy of Sciences. |
Georgiev 1984 | Georgiev, Vladimir 1984 | “Die drei Hauptperioden des Indoeuropäischen” [The Three Main Periods of Indo-European], Diachronica 1.1:65—78. |
Gérard 2005 | Gérard, Raphaël 2005 | Phonétique et morphologie de la langue lydienne [Phonetics and Morphology of the Lydian Language]. Louvain-la-Neuve: Peeters. |
Ghatage 1962 | Ghatage, A. M. 1962 | Historical Linguistics and Indo-Aryan Languages. Bombay: University of Bombay Press. |
Giacomelli 1993 | Giacomelli, Roberto 1993 | Storia della lingua latina [History of the Latin Language]. Roma: Jouvence. |
Giakumakis 1970 | Giakumakis, George 1970 | The Akkadian of Alalaḫ. The Hague: Mouton. |
Gimbutas 1970 | Gimbutas, Marija 1970 | “Proto-Indo-European Culture: The Kurgan Culture during the Fifth, Fourth, and Third Millennia B. C.”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 155—197. |
Gimbutas 1973a | Gimbutas, Marija 1973a | “Old Europe c. 7000—3500 B.C.: The Earliest European Civilization before the Infiltration of the Indo-European Peoples”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.1:1—20. |
Gimbutas 1973b | Gimbutas, Marija 1973b | “The Beginning of the Bronze Age in Europe and the Indo-Europeans: 3500—2500 B.C”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.2:163—214. |
Gimbutas 1974 | Gimbutas, Marija 1974 | “An Archaeologist’s View of PIE In 1975”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.3:289—307. |
Gimbutas 1977 | Gimbutas, Marija 1977 | “The First Wave of Eurasian Steppe Pastoralists into Copper Age Europe”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.4:277—338. |
Gimbutas 1980 | Gimbutas, Marija 1980 | “The Kurgan Wave #2 (c. 3400—3200 B.C.) into Europe and the Following Transformation of Culture”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 8.3/4:273—315. |
Gimbutas 1982 | Gimbutas, Marija 1982 | “Old Europe in the Fifth Millennium B.C.: The European Situation on the Arrival of the Indo-Europeans”, in: Edgar C. Polomé (ed.), The Indo-Europeans in the Fourth and Third Millennia. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 1—60. |
Gimbutas 1985 | Gimbutas, Marija 1985 | “Primary and Secondary Homeland of the Indo-Europeans: Comments on the Gamkrelidze—Ivanov Articles”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 13.1/2:185—202. |
Gimbutas 1989 | Gimbutas, Marija 1989 | “The Social Structure of Old Europe”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 17.3/4:197—214. |
Gimbutas 1990 | Gimbutas, Marija 1990 | “The Social Structure of Old Europe: Part 2—4”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.3/4:225—284. |
Gimbutas 1991 | Gimbutas, Marija 1991 | The Civilization of the Goddess. San Francisco, CA: Harper Collins. |
Gimbutas 1993 | Gimbutas, Marija 1993 | “The Indo-Europeanization of Europe: The Intrusion of Steppe Patoralists from South Russia and the Transformation of Old Europe”, Word 44:205—222. |
Gimbutas 1994 | Gimbutas, Marija 1994 | Das Ende Alteuropas: Der Einfall von Steppennomaden aus Südrußland und die Indogermanisierung Mitteleuropas [The End of Old Europe: The Invasion of Steppe Nomads from South Russia and the Indo-Europeanization of Middle Europe]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Kulturwissenschaft. |
Gleason—Jr. 1961 | Gleason, H. A., Jr. 1961 | An Introduction to Descriptive Linguistics. Revised edition. New York, NY: Hold, Rinehart and Winston, Inc. |
Gluhak 1977 | Gluhak, Alemko 1977 | “Nostratica”, Suvremena Lingvistika 15.16:49—56. |
Gluhak 1978a | Gluhak, Alemko 1978a | “Etruscan malena ‘mirror’,” Linguistica XVII:23—24. |
Gluhak 1978b | Gluhak, Alemko 1978b | “Etruscan Numerals”, Linguistica XVII:25—92. |
Gluhak 1978c | Gluhak, Alemko 1978c | “Is Sino-Tibetan Related to Nostratian?”, General Linguistics 18.3:123—127. |
Gluhak 1979a | Gluhak, Alemko 1979a | “Slavenske etimologije” [Slavic Etymologies], Linguistics XVIII:47—50. |
Gluhak 1979b | Gluhak, Alemko 1979b | “Etruscan Vocalism”, Živa Antika XXIX:213—222. |
Gluhak 1979c | Gluhak, Alemko 1979c | “O jednoj indoevropsko-uralskoj paraleli” [On an Indo-European/Uralic Parallel], Zbornik za Filologiju I Lingvistiku 21.1:219. |
Gluhak 1980a | Gluhak, Alemko 1980a | “Etruscan θuplθa”, Revue Roumaine de Linguistique XXV.6:651—652. |
Gluhak 1980b | Gluhak, Alemko 1980b | “Nostratica. (1. Etruscan Optative-Jussive. 2. Hittite akk- ‘to die’)”, Revue Roumaine de Linguistique XXV.3:261—263. |
Gluhak 1982 | Gluhak, Alemko 1982 | “Etr. Kurpu”, Živa Antika 32:35—37. |
Gluhak 1984 | Gluhak, Alemko 1984 | “Two Nostratic Etymologies”, Linguistica XXIV:449—453. |
Godel 1975 | Godel, Robert 1975 | An Introduction to the Study of Classical Armenian. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert Verlag. |
Goetze 1938 | Goetze, Albrecht 1938 | The Hittite Ritual of Tunnawi. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Golden 1992 | Golden, Peter B. 1992 | An Introduction to the History of the Turkic Peoples. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Golden 1998 | Golden, Peter B. 1998 | “The Turkic Peoples: A Historical Sketch”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 16—29. |
Gonda 1956 | Gonda, Jan 1956 | The Character of the Indo-European Moods. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Gonda 1966 | Gonda, Jan 1966 | A Concise Elementary Grammar of the Sanskrit Language. English translation by Gordon B. Ford, Jr. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. |
Gonda 1971 | Gonda, Jan 1971 | Old Indian. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Gonda 1975 | Gonda, Jan 1975 | Selected Writings. Vols. I, II, III. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Goodenough 1970 | Goodenough, Ward H. 1970 | “The Evolution of Pastoralism and Indo-European Origins”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 253—265. |
Gordeziani 1985 | Gordeziani, Rismag V. 1985 | “Etruskisch-vorgriechisch-kartwelische Etymologien” [Etruscan/ Pre-Greek/Kartvelian Etymologies], Georgica 8:10—23. |
Gordon 1965 | Gordon, Cyrus 1965 | Ugaritic Textbook. 3 vols. Reprinted 1967. Rome: Ponitificium Institutum Biblicum. |
Gordon 1971 | Gordon, Cyrus 1971 | “Egypto-Semitica”, Revista degli Studi Orientalni 32:269—271. |
Gordon 1997 | Gordon, Cyrus 1997 | “Amorite and Eblaite”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 100—113. |
Gordon 2000 | Gordon, Cyrus 2000 | “Father’s Sons and Mother’s Daughters: The Problem of Indo-European/ Semitic Relationships”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 77—84. |
Goshen-Gottstein 1970 | Goshen-Gottstein, M. H. 1970 | A Syriac-English Glossary with Etymological Notes. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Gostony 1975 | Gostony, Colman-Gabriel 1975 | Dictionnaire d’étymologie sumérienne et grammaire comparée [Dictionary of Sumerian Etymology and Comparative Grammar]. Paris: Boccard. |
Gould 1989 | Gould, Stephan Jay 1989 | “Grimm’s Greatest Tale”, Natural History February 1989.2. |
Gragg 1997 | Gragg, Gene 1997 | “Ge‘ez (Ethiopic)”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 242—260. |
Gragg 2004 | Gragg, Gene 2004 | “Ge’ez (Aksum)”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 427—453. |
Grammont 1933 | Grammont, Maurice 1933 | Traité de phonétique [Treatise of Phonology]. 8th edition. Reprinted 1965. Paris: Librairie Delagrave. |
Grammont 1948 | Grammont, Maurice 1948 | Phonétique du grec ancien [Phonology of Ancient Greek]. Paris: IAC. |
Gray 1902 | Gray, Louis H. 1902 | Indo-Iranian Phonology. Reprinted 1965. New York, NY: AMS Press. |
Gray 1934 | Gray, Louis H. 1934 | An Introduction to Semitic Comparative Linguistics. Reprinted 1971. Amsterdam: Philo Press. |
Gray 1939 | Gray, Louis H. 1939 | Foundations of Language. New York, NY: Macmillan. |
Gray [1955] | Gray, Louis H. [1955] | [2nd edition.] |
Green 1987a | Green, John N. 1987a | “Romance Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 203—209. |
Green 1987b | Green, John N. 1987b | “Spanish”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 236—259. |
Green 1988a | Green, John N. 1988a | “Spanish”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 79—130. |
Green 1988b | Green, John N. 1988b | “Romance Creoles”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 420—473. |
Greenberg 1950 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1950 | “The Patterning of Root Morphemes in Semitic”, Word 6:162—181. |
Greenberg 1952 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1952 | “The Afro-Asiatic (Hamito-Semitic) Present”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 72.1:1—9. |
Greenberg 1955 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1955 | Studies in African Language Classifications. New Haven, CT: Compass. |
Greenberg 1957 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1957 | Essays in Linguistics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Greenberg 1958 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1958 | “The Labial Consonants of Proto-Afro-Asiatic”, Word 14:295—302. |
Greenberg 1960 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1960 | “An Afro-Asiatic Pattern of Gender and Number Agreement”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 80.4:364—378. |
Greenberg 1965 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1965 | “The Evidence for */mb/ as a Proto-Afro-Asiatic Phoneme”, in: Adam Heinz, Mieczysław Karas, et al. (eds.), Symbolae Linguisticae in Honorem Georgie Kuryłowicz [Linguistic Contributions in Honor of Jerzy Kuryłowicz]. Wrocław, Warszawa, and Kraków: Polish Academy of Sciences, pp. 88—92. |
Greenberg 1966a | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1966a | Language Universals. The Hague: Mouton. |
Greenberg 1966b | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1966b | The Languages of Africa. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Greenberg 1969 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1969 | “Some Methods of Dynamic Comparison in Linguistics”, in: Jaan Puhvel (ed.), Substance and Structure of Language. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 147—203. |
Greenberg 1970 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1970 | “Some Generalizations Concerning Glottalic Consonants”, International Journal of American Linguistics 36:123—145. |
Greenberg 1971 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1971 | Language, Culture, and Communications. Stanford, CA: University of California Press. |
Greenberg 1974 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1974 | Language Typology: A Historical and Analytical Overview. The Hague: Mouton. |
Greenberg 1978 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1978 | “Diachrony, Synchrony, and Language Universals”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, vol. I, pp. 61—91. |
Greenberg 1987 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1987 | Language in the Americas. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Greenberg 1990a | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1990a | “The Prehistory of the Indo-European Vowel System in Comparative and Typological Perspective”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Proto-Languages and Proto-Cultures. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 77—136. |
Greenberg 1990b | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1990b | On Language: Selected Writings of Joseph H. Greenberg. Edited by Keith Denning and Susan Kemmer. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Greenberg 1991 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1991 | “Some Problems of Indo-European in Historical Perspective”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (ed.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 125—140. |
Greenberg 1998 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 1998 | “The Convergence of Eurasiatic and Nostratic”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 51—60. |
Greenberg 2000—2002 | Greenberg, Joseph H. 2000—2002 | Indo-European and Its Closest Relatives: The Eurasiatic Language Family. 2 vols. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Greenberg 1966 | Greenberg, Joseph H. (ed.) 1966 | Universals of Language. 2nd edition. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
Greenberg 1978 | Greenberg, Joseph H. (ed.) 1978 | Universals of Human Language. 4 vols. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Greenspahn 2003 | Greenspahn, Frederick E. 2003 | An Introduction to Aramaic. 2nd edition. Atlanta, GA: Society of Biblical Literature. |
Greppin 1981 | Greppin, John A. C. 1981 | “Concerning the Reply of Kerns and Schwartz to Austin”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 119—126. |
Greppin 1988 | Greppin, John A. C. 1988 | “Laryngeal Residue in Armenian: Genetic and Loan Evidence”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 179—193. |
Greppin 2000 | Greppin, John A. C. 2000 | “Armenian and the Kartvelian Languages”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 85—91. |
Gribble 1968 | Gribble, Charles E. (ed.) 1968 | Studies Presented to Roman Jakobson by His Students. Cambridge, MA: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
Griffen 1985 | Griffen, Toby D. 1985 | Aspects of Dynamic Phonology. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Griffen 1988 | Griffen, Toby D. 1988 | Germano-European: Breaking the Sound Law. Carbondale, IL: Southern Illinois University Press. |
Griffen 1989 | Griffen, Toby D. 1989 | “Nostratic and Germano-European”, General Linguistics 29.3:139—149. |
Griffen 1994 | Griffen, Toby D. 1994 | “Altaic, Germano-European, and Nostratic: The Evidence of Phonetics and Phonological Systems”, Mother Tongue May 1994, pp. 38—49. |
Grillot-Susini 1987 | Grillot-Susini, Françoise 1987 | Éléments de grammaire élamite [Elements of Elamite Grammar]. Paris: Éditions Recherche sur les Civilizations. |
Grønbech—Krueger 1976 | Grønbech, Kaare, and John R. Krueger 1976 | An Introduction to Classical (Literary) Mongolian. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Grønbech—Krueger [1993] | Grønbech, Kaare, and John R. Krueger [1993] | [Third, corrected edition.] |
Gruzdeva 1998 | Gruzdeva, Ekaterina 1998 | Nivkh. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Gschwantler—Rédei—Reichert 1984 | Gschwantler, Otto, Károly Rédei, and Hermann Reichert (eds.) 1984 | Linguistica et Philologica. Gedenkschrift für Björn Collinder (1894—1983) [Linguistics and Philology. Memorial Volume for Björn Collinder (1894—1983)]. Vienna: Wilhelm Braumüller. |
Gudjedjiani—Palmaitis 1985 | Gudjedjiani, Chato, and Mykolas Palmaitis 1985 | Svan-English Dictionary. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books. |
Gudjedjiani—Palmaitis 1986 | Gudjedjiani, Chato, and Mykolas Palmaitis 1986 | Upper Svan: Grammar and Texts. Vilnius: Mokslas Publishers. |
Guilaine 1989 | Guilaine, Jean (ed.) 1989 | La préhistoire d’un continent à l’autre [Prehistory from One Continent to the Other]. Paris: Larousse. |
Gurney 1990 | Gurney, O[liver] R[obert] 1990 | The Hittites. Second edition, reprinted with revisions. London: Penguin Books. |
Gusmani 1964 | Gusmani, Roberto 1964 | Lydisches Wörterbuch [Lydian Dictionary]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Gusmani [1980—1982] | Gusmani, Roberto [1980—1982] | [2nd edition.] |
Gusmani 1965 | Gusmani, Roberto 1965 | “Contributi allo studio comparativo delle lingue anatoliche” [Contributions to the Comparative Study of the Anatolian Languages], Istituto Orientali di Napoli, Annali VI:69—87. |
Gusmani 1972 | Gusmani, Roberto 1972 | “Keilhethitische Nominalableitungen auf -(a)šḫa-” [Cuneiform Hittite Nominal Derivatives in -(a)šḫa-], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 86.2:255—266. |
Gusmani 1975a | Gusmani, Roberto 1975a | “Lydiaka”, Oriens Antiquus XIV:265—274. |
Gusmani 1975b | Gusmani, Roberto 1975b | “Kleinasiatische Graffiti aus ‘Alt-Smyrna’” [Near Eastern Graffiti from ‘Old Smyrna’], Kadmos XIV.2:149—253. |
Gusmani 1976 | Gusmani, Roberto 1976 | “Greco πέπᾱμαι” [Greek πέπᾱμαι], Incontri Linguistici 3.2:167—168. |
Gusmani 1979a | Gusmani, Roberto 1979a | “Semantica ed etimologia del gotica and” [Semantics and Etymology of Gothic and], Archivio Glottologico Italiano LXIV.1/2:28—41. |
Gusmani 1979b | Gusmani, Roberto 1979b | “Su due termini trilingue di Xanthos” [On Two Terms of the Xanthos Trilingual], in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Studia Mediterranea Piero Meriggi dicata [Mediterranean Studies Dedicated to Piero Meriggi]. Pavia: University of Pavia, pp. 225—234. |
Gusmani 1979c | Gusmani, Roberto 1979c | “Ittito, teoria laringalistica e recostruzione” [Hittite, Laryngeal Theory, and Reconstruction], in Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 63—71. |
Güterbock—Hoffner 1980— | Güterbock, Hans, and Harry A. Hoffner (eds.) 1980— | The Hittite Dictionary of the University of Chicago. Chicago, IL: The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago. |
Gutt 1997 | Gutt, Ernst-August 1997 | “The Silte Group (East Gurage)”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 509—534. |
Gyármathi 1983 | Gyármathi, Sámuel 1983 | Grammatical Proof of the Affinity of the Hungarian Language with the Languages of Fennic Origin. English translation by Victor E. Hanzeli. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Gzella 2004 | Gzella, Holger 2004 | Tempus, Aspekt und Modalität im Reichsaramäischen [Tense, Aspect, and Mood in Imperial Aramaic]. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. |
Haarmann 1994 | Haarmann, Harald 1994 | “Contact Linguistics, Archaeology and Ethnogenetics: An Inter-disciplinary Approach to the Indo-European Homeland Problem”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 22.3/4:265—288. |
Haarmann 1998 | Haarmann, Harald 1998 | “On the Problem of Primary and Secondary Diffusion of Indo-Europeans and Their Languages”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 26.3/4:391—419. |
Haas 1969 | Haas, Mary R. 1969 | The Prehistory of Language. The Hague: Mouton. |
Haas 1978 | Haas, Mary R. 1978 | Language, Culture, and History. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Haberland 1994 | Haberland, Hartmut 1994 | “Danish”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 313—348. |
Hackett 2004 | Hackett, Jo Ann 2004 | “Phoenician and Punic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 365—385. |
Hage 2003 | Hage, Per 2003 | “On the Reconstruction of the Proto-Nostratic Kinship System”, Zeitschrift für Ethnologie 128:311—325. |
Hahn 1953 | Hahn, E. Adelaide 1953 | Subjunctive and Optative: Their Origin as Futures. New York, NY: American Philological Association. |
Hahn 1969 | Hahn, E. Adelaide 1969 | Naming-Constructions in Some Indo-European Languages. Ann Arbor, MI: American Philological Association. |
Hahn 1998a | Hahn, Reinhard F. 1998a | “Uyghur”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 379—396. |
Hahn 1998b | Hahn, Reinhard F. 1998b | “Yellow Uyghur and Salar”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 397—402. |
Haiman 1988 | Haiman, John 1988 | “Rhaeto-Romance”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 351—390. |
Hajdú 1968 | Hajdú, Péter 1968 | The Samoyed Peoples and Languages. (= Indiana University Publications, Uralic and Altaic Studies, vol. 14.) 2nd edition. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Hajdú 1972 | Hajdú, Péter 1972 | “The Origins of Hungarian”, in: Loránd Benkő and Samu Imre (eds.), The Hungarian Language. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 15—48. |
Hajdú 1975 | Hajdú, Péter 1975 | Finno-Ugrian Languages and Peoples. Translated and adapted by G. F. Cushing. London: Andre Deutsch. |
Hajdú 1979 | Hajdú, Péter 1979 | “Language Contacts in North-West Siberia”, Fenno-Ugrica Suecana 2:19—31. |
Hajdú 1988 | Hajdú, Péter 1988 | “Die samojedischen Sprachen” [The Samoyed Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 3—40. |
Hakola 1997 | Hakola, Hannu Panu Aukusti 1997 | Duraljan Vocabulary: Lexical Similarities in the Major Agglutinative Languages. Kuopio: Kuopio University Printing Office. |
Hakola 2000 | Hakola, Hannu Panu Aukusti 2000 | 1000 Duraljan Etyma: An Extended Study in the Lexical Similarities in the Major Agglutinative Languages. Kuopio: Kuopio University Printing Office. |
Hakola 2006 | Hakola, Hannu Panu Aukusti 2006 | Duraljan Hypothesis: Towards the Mother Tongue of Man. Six Articles and Some Reviews around the Duraljan Hypothesis. Kuopio: Kuopio University Printing Office. |
Hale 2004a | Hale, Mark 2004a | “Avestan”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 742—763. |
Hale 2004b | Hale, Mark 2004b | “Pahlavi”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 764—776. |
Halla-aho 2006 | Halla-aho, Jussi 2006 | Problems of Proto-Slavic Historical Nominal Morphology on the Basis of Old Church Slavic. Helsinki: University of Helsinki. |
Halle—Kiparsky 1977 | Halle, Morris, and Paul Kiparsky 1977 | “Towards a Reconstruction of the Indo-European Accent”, in: Larry M. Hyman (ed.), Southern California Occasional Papers in Linguistics 4. Los Angeles, CA: University of Southern California Press, pp. 209—238. |
Halle—Kiparsky 1981 | Halle, Morris, and Paul Kiparsky 1981 | Review of Paul Garde, Histoire de l’accentuation slave [History of Slavic Accentuation], Language 57:150—181. |
Haltod—Hangin—Kassatkin—Lessing 1960 | Haltod, Mattai, John Gombojab Hangin, Serge Kassatkin, and Ferdinand D. Lessing (eds.) 1960 | Mongolian-English Dictionary. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Haltod—Hangin—Kassatkin—Lessing [1995] | Haltod, Mattai, John Gombojab Hangin, Serge Kassatkin, and Ferdinand D. Lessing (eds.) [1995] | [3rd reprinting with minor corrections. Bloomington, IN: The Mongolia Society, Indiana University.] |
Hammerich 1948 | Hammerich, Louis 1948 | Laryngeal before Sonant. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. |
Hammerich 1951 | Hammerich, Louis 1951 | “Can Eskimo be Related to Indo-European?”, International Journal of American Linguistics 17:217—223. |
Hammerich 1967 | Hammerich, Louis 1967 | “Ketzereien eines alten Indogermanisten” [Heretical Views of an Old Indo-Europeanist], in: To Honor Roman Jakobson. The Hague: Mouton, vol. II, pp. 839—840. |
Hamp 1965a | Hamp, Eric P. 1965a | “Evidence in Albanian”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 123—141. |
Hamp 1965b | Hamp, Eric P. 1965b | “Evidence in Keltic”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 224—235. |
Hamp 1966 | Hamp, Eric P. 1966 | “The Position of Albanian”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 97—121. |
Hamp 1973a | Hamp, Eric P. 1973a | “Another Lesson from Frost”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.2:215—223. |
Hamp 1973b | Hamp, Eric P. 1973b | “Fish”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.4:507—511. |
Hamp 1974 | Hamp, Eric P. 1974 | “‘Ivy’ in Italic and Celtic”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.1:87—93. |
Hamp 1976 | Hamp, Eric P. 1976 | “On Eskimo-Aleut and Luoravetlan”, in: Eric P. Hamp (ed.), Papers on Eskimo and Aleut Linguistics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press, pp. 81—92. |
Hamp 1978a | Hamp, Eric P. 1978a | “On Greek Prothetic Vowels”, Münchener Studien zur Sprachwissenschaft 37:59—64 |
Hamp 1978b | Hamp, Eric P. 1978b | “Hittite ekt- ‘(hunting) net’,” Indogermanische Forschungen 83:119—120. |
Hamp 1987 | Hamp, Eric P. 1987 | “The Pig in Ancient Northern Europe”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 185—190. |
Hamp 1988a | Hamp, Eric P. 1988a | “sor- ‘woman’ and ‘Indo-Hittite’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 16. 1/2:121—122. |
Hamp 1988b | Hamp, Eric P. 1988b | “Lengthened ā in Latin Compounds”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 195—197. |
Hamp 1989 | Hamp, Eric P. 1989 | “The Indo-European Obstruent Features and Phonotactic Constraints”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 209—214. |
Hamp 1990a | Hamp, Eric P. 1990a | “The Indo-European Horse”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 211—226. |
Hamp 1990b | Hamp, Eric P. 1990b | “The Pre-Indo-European Language of Northern (Central) Europe”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 291—309. |
Hamp 1998 | Hamp, Eric P. 1998 | “Some Draft Principles for Classification”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 13—15. |
Hamp 2000 | Hamp, Eric P. 2000 | “Indo-European *ḪaHs- with Reflections on Hittite ‘hearth’ and ‘star’,” in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 93—94. |
Hangin 1986 | Hangin, Gombojab 1986 | A Modern Mongolian-English Dictionary. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Research Institute for Inner Asian Studies. |
Harms 1977 | Harms, Robert T. 1977 | “The Uralo-Yukaghir Focus System: A Problem in Remote Genetic Relationship”, in: Paul J. Hopper (ed.), Studies in Descriptive and Historical Linguistics: Festschrift for Winfred P. Lehmann. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 301—316. |
Harrell 1962 | Harrell, Richard S. 1962 | A Short Reference Grammar of Moroccan Arabic. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Harrell—Sobelmann 1966 | Harrell, Richard S., and Harvey Sobelmann (eds.) 1966 | A Dictionary of Moroccan Arabic: Moroccan-English and English-Moroccan. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Harris 1990 | Harris, Alice C. 1990 | “Kartvelian Contacts with Indo-European”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 67—100. |
Harris—Campbell 1995 | Harris, Alice, and Lyle Campbell 1995 | Historical Syntax in Cross-Linguistic Perspective. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Harris 1987 | Harris, Martin 1987 | “French”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 210—235. |
Harris 1988 | Harris, Martin 1988 | “French”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 209—245. |
Harris—Vincent 1988 | Harris, Martin, and Nigel Vincent (eds.) 1988 | The Romance Languages. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Harris—Vincent [1997] | Harris, Martin, and Nigel Vincent (eds.) [1997] | [Reprinted by Routledge.] |
Harris 1936 | Harris, Zelig 1936 | A Grammar of the Phoenician Language. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Hart 1980 | Hart, Gillian R. 1980 | “The Ablaut of Present and Preterite in Hittite Radical Verbs”, in: Anatolian Studies XXX (1980): Journal of the British Institute of Archaeology at Ankara. Special Number in Honour of the Seventieth Birthday of Professor O. R. Gurney, 28th January, 1981. London: The British Institute of Archaeology at Ankara, pp. 51—61. |
Hattori 1951 | Hattori, Shiro 1951 | “Phoneme Structure of Moghol (Chakhar Dialect)”, Journal of the Linguistic Society of Japan 19/20:68—102. |
Haudry 1978 | Haudry, Jean 1978 | L’emploi des cas en védique. Introduction à l’étude des cas en indo-européen [The Use of Cases in Vedic. Introduction to the Study of Cases in Indo-European]. Lille: Service de Reproduction des Thèses, Université de Lille III. |
Haudry 1979 | Haudry, Jean 1979 | L’indo-européen [Indo-European]. Paris: Presses Universi-taires de France. |
Haudry 1981 | Haudry, Jean 1981 | Les indo-européens [The Indo-Europeans]. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France. |
Haudry 1982 | Haudry, Jean 1982 | Préhistoire de la flexion nominale indo-européenne [Prehistory of Indo-European Noun Inflection]. Lyon: Institut d’Études Indo-Européennes de l’Université Jean Moulin (Lyon III). |
Haugen 1972 | Haugen, Einar 1972 | The Ecology of Language. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Haugen 1976 | Haugen, Einar 1976 | The Scandinavian Languages. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Haugen 1982 | Haugen, Einar 1982 | Scandinavian Language Structures: A Comparative-Historical Survey. Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press. |
Haugen 1987 | Haugen, Einar 1987 | “Danish, Norwegian and Swedish”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 157—179. |
Hausenberg 1998 | Hausenberg, Anu-Reet 1998 | “Komi”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 305—326. |
Hawkes 1987 | Hawkes, Christopher 1987 | “Archaeologists and Indo-Europeanists: Can They Mate? Hindrances and Hopes”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 203—215. |
Hawkes 1974 | Hawkes, Jacquetta 1974 | Atlas of Ancient Archaeology. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill. |
Hawkins 1983 | Hawkins, John A. 1983 | Word Order Universals. New York, NY: Academic Press. |
Hawkins 1987a | Hawkins, John A. 1987a | “Germanic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 68—76. |
Hawkins 1987b | Hawkins, John A. 1987b | “German”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 110—138. |
Hawkins—Morpurgo-Davies—Neumann 1974 | Hawkins, J. D., Anna Morpurgo-Davies, and Günter Neumann 1974 | Hittite Hieroglyphs and Luwian: New Evidence for the Connection. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Hayes 1997 | Hayes, John 1997 | Sumerian. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Hayward 1982 | Hayward, Richard J. 1982 | “Notes on the Koyra Language”, Afrika und Übersee 65.2:211—268. |
Hayward 1984 | Hayward, Richard J. 1984 | The Arbore Language: A First Investigation (Including a Vocabulary). Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Hayward 1990a | Hayward, Richard J. 1990a | “Notes on the Zayse Language”, in: Richard J. Hayward (ed.), Omotic Language Studies. London: University of London, School of Oriental and African Studies, pp. 210—355. |
Hayward 1990b | Hayward, Richard J. 1990b | “Notes on the Aari Language”, in: Richard J. Hayward (ed.), Omotic Language Studies. London: University of London, School of Oriental and African Studies, pp. 425—493. |
Hayward 1990 | Hayward, Richard J. (ed.) 1990 | Omotic Language Studies. London: University of London, School of Oriental and African Studies. |
Haywood—Nahmad 1962 | Haywood, J. A., and H. M. Nahmad 1962 | A New Arabic Grammar. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Healey 1998 | Healey, John F. 1998 | “The Early Alphabet”, in: J. T. Hooker (ed.), Reading the Past: Ancient Writing from Cuneiform to the Alphabet. New York, NY: Barnes & Noble Books, pp. 197—257. |
Heesterman—Schokker—Subramoniam (eds.) 1968 | Heesterman, J.H., G. H. Schokker, and V. I. Subramoniam (eds.) 1968 | Pratidānam: Indian, Iranian and Indo-European Studies Presented to Franciscus Bernardus Kuipers on his Sixtieth Birthday. The Hague: Mouton. |
Heffner 1950 | Heffner, R-M. S. 1950 | General Phonetics. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. |
Hegedűs 1988 | Hegedűs, Irén 1988 | “Morphologische Übereinstimmungen in den uralischen, altäischen und einigen paläosibirischen Sprachen” [Morphological Correspondences in the Uralic, Altaic, and Several Paleosiberian Languages], Specimina Sibirica 1:71—86. |
Hegedűs 1992a | Hegedűs, Irén 1992a | Bibliographia Nostratica 1960—1990 (A List of Publications on, or Relevant for Nostratic Studies). Szombathely: Seminar für uralische Philologie der Berzsenyi-Hochschule. |
Hegedűs 1992b | Hegedűs, Irén 1992b | “Reconstructing Nostratic Morphology: Derivational Elements”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Nostratic, Dene-Caucasian, Austric and Amerind. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 34—47. |
Hegedűs 1997 | Hegedűs, Irén 1997 | “On Grammaticalization in Nostratic”, in: Irén Hegedűs, Peter A. Michalove, and Alexis Manaster Ramer (eds.), Indo-European, Nostratic, and Beyond: Festschrift for Vitalij V. Shevoroshkin. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 106—115. |
Hegedűs 1999 | Hegedűs, Irén 1999 | “Linguistic Palaeontology: For and Against”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 257—267. |
Hegedűs 2004 | Hegedűs, Irén 2004 | “The Status of the Proto-Nostratic Postvelar *–”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 121—133. |
Hegedűs—Michalove—Manaster Ramer 1997 | Hegedűs, Irén, Peter A. Michalove, and Alexis Manaster Ramer (eds.) 1997 | Indo-European, Nostratic, and Beyond: Festschrift for Vitalij V. Shevoroshkin. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Hegedűs—Sidwell 2004 | Hegedűs, Irén, and Paul Sidwell (eds.) 2004 | Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group. |
Heine 1978 | Heine, Bernd 1978 | The Sam Languages: A History of Rendille, Boni, and Somali. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics 6.2.) Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Held—Schmalstieg 1969 | Held, Warren, and William R. Schmalstieg 1969 | “Some Comments on the Hittite Phonetic System”, General Linguistics 9.2:93—100. |
Held—Schmalstieg—Gertz 1988 | Held, Warren, William R. Schmalstieg, and Janet E. Gertz 1988 | Beginning Hittite. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
Helimskij 1986 | Helimskij, Eugene A. 1986 | “Решение дилемм пратюрской реконструкции и ностратика” [Solution to Dilemmas in Proto-Turkic Reconstruction and Nostratics], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1986.5:67—78. |
Helimskij 1987 | Helimskij, Eugene A. 1987 | “A ‘New Approach’ to Nostratic Comparison”. Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, Journal of the American Oriental Society 107.1:97—100. |
Helimskij 1998a | Helimskij, Eugene A. 1998a | “Nganasan”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 480—515. |
Helimskij 1998b | Helimskij, Eugene A. 1998b | “Selkup”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 548—579. |
Hempel 1966 | Hempel, Heinrich 1966 | Gotisches Elementarbuch [Gothic Primer]. 4th edition. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Henriksen—Auwera 1994 | Henriksen, Carol, and Johan van der Auwera 1994 | “The Germanic Languages”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 1—18. |
Henry 1992 | Henry, Donald O. 1992 | From Foraging to Agriculture: The Levant at the End of the Ice Age. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press. |
Hetzron 1975 | Hetzron, Robert 1975 | “Genetic Classification and Ethiopian Semitic”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 103—127. |
Hetzron 1976 | Hetzron, Robert 1976 | The Agaw Languages. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics 3.3.) Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Hetzron 1987a | Hetzron, Robert 1987a | “Afroasiatic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 645—653. |
Hetzron 1987b | Hetzron, Robert 1987b | “Semitic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 654—663. |
Hetzron 1987c | Hetzron, Robert 1987c | “Hebrew”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 686—794. |
Hetzron 1990 | Hetzron, Robert 1990 | “Afroasiatic Languages”, in: Grolier Illustrated Encyclopedia. The Software Toolworks CD-ROM Series. |
Hetzron 1997 | Hetzron, Robert 1997 | “Outer South Ethiopic”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 535—549. |
Hetzron 1997 | Hetzron, Robert (ed.) 1997 | The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Heubeck 1969 | Heubeck, Alfred 1969 | “Lydisch” [Lydian], in: B. Spuler (ed.), Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 397—427. |
Hewitt 1995 | Hewitt, B[rian] G[eorge] 1995 | Georgian. A Structural Reference Grammar. Amsterdam and New York, NY: John Benjamins. |
Hewitt 2004 | Hewitt, B[rian] G[eorge] 2004 | Introduction to the Study of the Languages of the Caucasus. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Hewitt 1989 | Hewitt, B. George (ed.) 1989 | The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books. |
Hewitt—Khiba 1975 | Hewitt, B. G., and Z. K. Khiba 1975 | Abkhaz. Amsterdam: North-Holland Publishing Company. |
Hewson 1984 | Hewson, John 1984 | “Resonant and High Vowel in Proto-Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 12.3/4:375—380. |
Hewson—Bubenik 1997 | Hewson, John, and Vit Bubenik (eds.) 1997 | Tense and Aspect in Indo-European: Theory, Typology, Diachrony. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Hiersche 1964 | Hiersche, Rolf 1964 | Untersuchungen zur Frage des Tenues Aspiratae im Indogermanischen [Investigations into the Question of the Voiceless Aspirates in Indo-European]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Hiersche 1986— | Hiersche, Rolf 1986— | Deutsches etymologisches Wörterbuch [German Etymological Dictionary]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Hinz 1944—1955 | Hinz, John 1944—1955 | Grammar and Vocabulary of the Eskimo Language as Spoken by the Kuskokwim and Southwest Coast Eskimos of Alaska. Bethlehem, PA: The Moravian Church, The Society of United Brethren for Propagating the Gospel among the Heathen. |
Hinz—Koch 1987 | Hinz, Walther, and Heidemarie Koch 1987 | Elamisches Wörterbuch [Elamite Dictionary]. 2 vols. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag. |
Hirt 1895 | Hirt, Hermann 1895 | Die indogermanische Akzent. Ein Handbuch [The Indo-European Accent: A Manual]. Straßburg: Karl J. Trübner. |
Hirt 1900 | Hirt, Hermann 1900 | Die indogermanische Ablaut, vornehmlich in seinem Verhältnis zur Betonung [The Indo-European Ablaut, Especially in its Relationship to Tone]. Straßburg: Karl J. Trübner. |
Hirt 1905—1907 | Hirt, Hermann 1905—1907 | Die Indogermanen, ihre Verbreitung, ihre Urheimat, und ihre Kultur [The Indo-Europeans, their Distribution, their Homeland, and their Culture]. Straßburg: Karl J. Trübner. |
Hirt 1921 | Hirt, Hermann 1921 | Indogermanische Grammatik II: Der indogermanische Vokalismus [Indo-European Grammar II: Indo-European Vocalism]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Hirt 1921—1927 | Hirt, Hermann 1921—1927 | Indogermanische Grammatik [Indo-European Grammar]. 7 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Hirt 1931—1934 | Hirt, Hermann 1931—1934 | Handbuch des Urgermanischen [Handbook of Proto-Germanic]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Hjelmslev 1961 | Hjelmslev, Louis 1961 | Prolegomena to a Theory of Language. English translation by Francis J. Whitfield. Revised English edition reprinted 1969. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. |
Hjelmslev 1970 | Hjelmslev, Louis 1970 | Language: An Introduction. English translation by Francis J. Whitfield. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. |
Hoad 1986 | Hoad, T. F. (ed.) 1986 | The Concise Oxford Dictionary of English Etymology. New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Hock 1975 | Hock, Hans Henrich 1975 | “Substratum Influence on (Rig-Vedic) Sanskrit?”, Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 5.2:76—125. |
Hock 1983 | Hock, Hans Henrich 1983 | “Language-death Phenomena in Sanskrit: Grammatical Evidence for Attrition in Contemporary Spoken Sanskrit”, Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 13.2:21—35. |
Hock 1984 | Hock, Hans Henrich 1984 | “(Pre-)Rig-Vedic Convergence of Indo-Aryan with Dravidian? Another Look at the Evidence”, Studies in the Linguistic Sciences 14.1:89—107. |
Hock 1986 | Hock, Hans Henrich 1986 | Principles of Historical Linguistics. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Hock [1991] | Hock, Hans Henrich [1991] | [2nd edition, revised and updated.] |
Hock 1991b | Hock, Hans Henrich 1991b | “On the Origin and Early Development of the Sacred Sanskrit Syllable OM”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 89—110. |
Hock—Joseph 1996 | Hock, Hans Henrich, and Brian Joseph 1996 | Language History, Language Change, and Language Relationship: An Introduction to Historical and Comparative Linguistics. Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter. |
Hockett 1955 | Hockett, Charles F. 1955 | A Manual of Phonology. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Hockett 1958 | Hockett, Charles F. 1958 | A Course in Modern Linguistics. 12th printing 1967. New York, NY: Macmillan Company. |
Hodge 1947 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1947 | An Outline of Hausa Grammar. (= Language Dissertation #41.) Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America. |
Hodge 1966 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1966 | “Hausa-English Establishment”, Anthropological Linguistics 8.1:40—57. |
Hodge 1968 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1968 | “Some Afroasiatic Etymologies”, Anthropological Linguistics 10.2:19—29. |
Hodge 1969 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1969 | “Egyptian ğ amid Afroasiatic Languages”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), American Oriental Society Middle Western Branch, Semicentennial Volume. Bloomington, IN: University of Indiana Press, pp. 104—110. |
Hodge 1971 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1971 | “Afro-Asiatic: An Overview”, in: Carleton T. Hodge (ed.), Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 9—26. |
Hodge 1975 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1975 | “A Set of Postulates for Comparative Linguistics”, in: Adam Makkai and Valerie Becker Makkai (eds.), The First LACUS Forum, 1974. Columbia, SC: Hornbeam Press, pp. 209—216. |
Hodge 1977 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1977 | Review of John B. Callender, Middle Egyptian, Language 53.4:930—940. |
Hodge 1981a | Hodge, Carleton T. 1981a | “Indo-Europeans in the Near East”, Anthropological Linguistics 23.6:227—244. |
Hodge 1981b | Hodge, Carleton T. 1981b | “Lislakh Labials”, Anthropological Linguistics 23.8:368—382. |
Hodge 1981c | Hodge, Carleton T. 1981c | “Coptic Double Consonants”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 659—665. |
Hodge 1981d | Hodge, Carleton T. 1981d | “Comparative Evidence for Egyptian Phonology”, in: Dwight W. Young (ed.), Studies Presented to Hans Jakob Polotsky. East Gloucester: Pirtle and Polson, pp. 401—413. |
Hodge 1981e | Hodge, Carleton T. 1981e | Review of Robert J. Jeffers and Ilse Lehiste, Principles and Methods for Historical Linguistics, Forum Linguisticum 5:262—273. |
Hodge 1982a | Hodge, Carleton T. 1982a | “The Hausa Relative”, in: H. Jungraithmayr (ed.), The Chad Languages in the Hamitosemitic-Nigritic Border Area. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag, pp. 254—259. |
Hodge 1982b | Hodge, Carleton T. 1982b | Review of Charles F. Hockett, The View From Language: Selected Essays, 1949—1974, Language 58.3:686—690. |
Hodge 1982c | Hodge, Carleton T. 1982c | Review of Bernard Comrie, Language Universals and Linguistic Typology, American Anthropologist 84:952—953. |
Hodge 1983 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1983 | “Afroasiatic: The Horizon and Beyond”, The Jewish Quarterly Review LXXIV.2:137—158. |
Hodge 1984 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1984 | “Lislakh: Progress and Prospects”, in: James Bynon (ed.), Current Progress in Afro-Asiatic Linguistics: Papers from the Third International Hamito-Semitic Congress. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 413—421. |
Hodge 1987a | Hodge, Carleton T. 1987a | “The Status of Lisramic (Hamito-Semitic) Sound Correspondences”, in: Hermann Jungraithmayr and Walter W. Mueller (eds.), Proceedings of the 4th International Hamito-Semitic Congress. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 11—24. |
Hodge 1987b | Hodge, Carleton T. 1987b | Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 9:63—65. |
Hodge 1991 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1991 | “Indo-European and Afroasiatic”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (ed.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 141—165. |
Hodge 1993 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1993 | “Indo-Europeans in the Near East”, Anthropological Linguistics 35.1/4:90—108. Special issue: A Retrospective of the Journal Anthropological Linguistics: Selected Papers, 1959—1985. Bloomington, IN: Department of Anthropology / American Indian Studies Research Institute, Indiana University. |
Hodge 1998 | Hodge, Carleton T. 1998 | “The Implications of Lislakh for Nostratic”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 237—256. |
Hodge 2004 | Hodge, Carleton T. 2004 | Afroasiatic Linguistics, Semitics, and Egyptology: Selected Writings of Carleton T. Hodge. Edited by Scott Noegel and Alan S. Kaye. Bethesda, MD: CDL Press. |
Hodge 1971 | Hodge, Carleton T. (ed.) 1971 | Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton. |
Hoekstra—Tiersma 1994 | Hoekstra, Jarich, and Peter Meijes Tiersma 1994 | “Frisian”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 505—531. |
Hoenigswald 1960 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1960 | Language Change and Linguistic Reconstruction. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Hoenigswald 1964 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1964 | “Allophones, Allomorphs, and Conditioned Change”, in: Horace G. Lunt (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 645—649. |
Hoenigswald 1965 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1965 | “Indo-Iranian Evidence”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 93—99. |
Hoenigswald 1966 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1966 | “Criteria for the Subgrouping of Languages”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 1—12. |
Hoenigswald 1973a | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1973a | “Indo-European *p in Celtic and the Claim for Relative Chronologies”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.3:324—329. |
Hoenigswald 1973b | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1973b | Studies in Formal Historical Linguistics. Dordrecht: Reidel. |
Hoenigswald 1980 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1980 | “Notes on Reconstruction, Word-Order, and Stress”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 69—87. |
Hoenigswald 1988 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1988 | “A Note on Semivowel Behavior and its Implications for the Laryngeals”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngal-theorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 59—105. |
Hoenigswald 1992 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1992 | “Comparative Method, Internal Reconstruction, Typology”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 199—211. |
Hoenigswald 1998 | Hoenigswald, Henry M. 1998 | “Greek”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 228—260. |
Hoenigswald—Woodard—Clackson 2004 | Hoenigswald, Henry M., Roger D. Woodard, and James P. T. Clackson 2004 | “Indo-European”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 534—550. |
Hoffmann 1967 | Hoffmann, Karl 1967 | Der Injunktiv im Veda. Eine synchronische Funktionsuntersuchung [The Injunctive in the Veda. An Investigation into its Function from a Synchronic Perspective]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Hoffner—Jr. 1967 | Hoffner, Harry A., Jr. 1967 | An English-Hittite Dictionary. (= Revue Hittite et Asianique XXV.) Paris: Klincksieck. |
Hoffner—Jr. 1974 | Hoffner, Harry A., Jr. 1974 | Alimenta Hethaeorum. Food Production in Hittite Asia Minor. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Hoffner—Jr. 1992 | Hoffner, Harry A., Jr. 1992 | “Studies in the Hittite Particles, II: On Some Use of -kan”, in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 137—151. |
Hofmann 1966 | Hofmann, J. B. 1966 | Etymologisches Wörterbuch des Griechischen [Etymological Dictionary of Greek Online]. Munich: R. Oldenbourg Verlag. |
Holladay 1971 | Holladay, William I. (ed.) 1971 | A Concise Hebrew and Aramaic Lexicon of the Old Testament. Based upon the first, second, and third editions of the Koehler—Baumgartner Lexicon in Veteris Testamenti Libros [Lexicon of the Books of the Old Testament]. Reprinted October 1982. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company. |
Holtzmann 1977 | Holtzmann, Adolf 1977 | Über den Umlaut: Über der Ablaut [On Umlaut: On Ablaut]. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Hombert 1976 | Hombert, J. 1976 | “Phonetic Motivations for the Development of Tones from Postvocalic [h] and [ʔ]: Evidence from Contour Tone Perception”, Report of the Phonology Laboratory, Berkeley 1:30—47. |
Honti 1988 | Honti, László 1988 | “Die ob-urischen Sprachen” [The Ob-Ugrian Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 147—196. |
Honti 1998 | Honti, László 1998 | “ObUgrian”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 327—357. |
Hooker 1998 | Hooker, J. T. (ed.) 1998 | Reading the Past: Ancient Writing from Cuneiform to the Alphabet. New York, NY: Barnes & Noble Books.: |
Hooper 1976 | Hooper, Joan B. 1976 | An Introduction to Natural Generative Phonology. New York, NY: Academic Press. |
Hopper 1973 | Hopper, Paul J. 1973 | “Glottalized and Murmured Occlusives in Indo-European”, Glossa 7:141—166. |
Hopper 1975 | Hopper, Paul J. 1975 | The Syntax of the Simple Sentence in Proto-Germanic. The Hague: Mouton. |
Hopper 1977a | Hopper, Paul J. 1977a | “The Typology of the Proto-Indo-European Segmental Inventory”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.1:41—53. |
Hopper 1977b | Hopper, Paul J. 1977b | “Indo-European Consonantism and the ‘New Look’,” Orbis XXVI.1:57—72. |
Hopper 1981 | Hopper, Paul J. 1981 | “‘Decem’ and ‘Taihun’ Languages: An Indo-European Isogloss”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 133—142. |
Hopper 1982 | Hopper, Paul J. 1982 | “Areal Typology and the Early Indo-European Consonant System”, in: Edgar C. Polomé (ed.), The Indo-Europeans in the Fourth and Third Millennia. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 121—139. |
Hopper 1992 | Hopper, Paul J. 1992 | “A Discourse Perspective on Syntactic Change: Text-Building Strategies in Early Germanic”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 217—238. |
Hopper 1977 | Hopper, Paul J. (ed.) 1977 | Studies in Descriptive and Historical Linguistics: Festschrift for Winfred P. Lehmann. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Hopper—Traugott 1993 | Hopper, Paul J., and Elizabeth Closs Traugott 1993 | Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Horowitz 1974 | Horowitz, Franklin Eugene 1974 | Sievers’ Law and the Evidence of the Rigveda. The Hague: Mouton. |
Houben 1977 | Houben, Jeffrey 1977 | “Word Order Change and Subordination in Homeric Greek”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.1:1—18. |
Howe 1996 | Howe, Stephen 1996 | The Personal Pronouns in the Germanic Languages. Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter. |
Hübner—Reizammer 1985—1986 | Hübner, Barbara, and Albert Reizammer 1985—1986 | Inim Kiengi II. Sumerisch-deutsches Glossar [Inim Kiengi II. Sumerian-German Glossary]. 2 vols. Marktredwitz: Selbstverlag Dipl.-Ing. Univ. Albert Reizammer. |
Hübschmann 1885 | Hübschmann, Heinrich 1885 | Die indogermanische Vocalsystem [The Indo-European Vowel System]. Reprinted 1975. Amsterdam: Oriental Press. |
Hübschmann 1897 | Hübschmann, Heinrich 1897 | Armenische Grammatik. Erster Teil: Armenische Etymologie [Armenian Grammar. First Part: Armenian Etymology]. Reprinted 1962. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Hudson 1976 | Hudson, Grover 1976 | “Highland East Cushitic”, in: M. Lionel Bender (ed.), The Non-Semitic Languages of Ethiopia. East Lansing, MI: African Studies Center, Michigan State University, pp. 232—277. |
Hudson 1989 | Hudson, Grover 1989 | Highland East Cushitic Dictionary. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Hudson 1997 | Hudson, Grover 1997 | “Amharic and Argobba”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 457—485. |
Hudson-Williams T. 1925 | Hudson-Williams T. 1925 | A Short Introduction to the Study of Comparative Grammar (Indo-European). Reprinted 1966. Cardiff: University of Wales Press Board. |
Hudson-Williams T. 1936 | Hudson-Williams T. 1936 | A Short Grammar of Old Persian. Reprinted 1963. Cardiff: University of Wales Press Board. |
Huehnergard 1997 | Huehnergard, John 1997 | A Grammar of Akkadian. Atlanta, GA: Scholars Press. |
Huehnergard 2004 | Huehnergard, John 2004 | “Afro-Asiatic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 138—159. |
Huehnergard—Woods 2004 | Huehnergard, John, and Christopher Woods 2004 | “Akkadian and Eblaite”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 218—287. |
Hugjiltu 2003 | Hugjiltu, Wu 2003 | “Bonan”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 325—345. |
Huld 1984 | Huld, Martin E. 1984 | Basic Albanian Etymologies. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
Huld 1986 | Huld, Martin E. 1986 | “On the Unacceptability of the Indo-European Voiced Stops as Ejectives”, Indogermanische Forschungen 91:67—74. |
Huld 1990 | Huld, Martin E. 1990 | “The Linguistic Typology of the Old European Substrate in North Central Europe”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.3/4:389—423. |
Huld 1995 | Huld, Martin E. 1995 | “Grassmann’s Law in Messapic”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 23. 1/2:147—155. |
Huld 1996 | Huld, Martin E. 1996 | “Meillet’s Northwest Indo-European Revisited”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 109—125. |
Huntley 1993 | Huntley, David 1993 | “Old Church Slavonic”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 125—187. |
Hutter 2000 | Hutter, Manfred 2000 | “Tiere als materia magica im Ritual der Zuwi (CTH 412)” [Animals as materia magica in the Ritual of Zuwi (CTH 412)], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 95—106. |
Hutterer 1975 | Hutterer, Claus Jürgen 1975 | Die germanischen Sprachen [The Germanic Languages]. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó. |
Hyllested—Jørgensen—Larsson—Olander 2004 | Hyllested, Adam, Anders Richardt Jørgensen, Jenny Helena Larsson, and Thomas Olander (eds.) 2004 | Per Aspera Ad Asteriscos: Studia Indogermanica in Honorem Jens Elmegård Rasmussen Sexagenarii Idibus Martiis Anno MMIV [Through Hardship to the Stars: Indo-European Studies in Honor of Jens Elmegård Rasmussen on His Sixtieth Birthday, the Ides of March 2004]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Hyman 1975 | Hyman, Larry 1975 | Phonology: Theory and Analysis. New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. |
Hymes 1960 | Hymes, Dell 1960 | “Lexicostatistics so far”, Current Anthropology 1:3—44 and 340—345. |
Hymes 1971 | Hymes, Dell (ed.) 1971 | Pidginization and Creolization of Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Iatsemirsky | Iatsemirsky, S. A. No date | “Etruscan Numerals: Problems and Results of Research”. Manuscript. |
Illič-Svityč 1963 | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1963 | “Алтайские дентальные: *t, *d, *δ” [Altaic Dentals: *t, *d, *δ], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1963.6:37—56. |
Illič-Svityč 1964a | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1964a | “Caucasica”, Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1964:334—337. |
Illič-Svityč 1964b | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1964b | “Алтайские гуттуральные: *k‘, *k, *g” [Altaic Gutturals: *k‘, *k, *g], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1964:338—343. |
Illič-Svityč 1965 | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1965 | “Материалы к сравнительному словарю ностратических языков (индоевропейский, алтайский, уральский, дравидский, картвельский, семитохамитский)” [Materials for a Comparative Dictionary of the Nostratic Languages (Indo-European, Altaic, Uralic, Dravidian, Kartvelian, Hamito-Semitic)], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1965:321—373. |
Illič-Svityč 1966a | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1966a | “Из истории чадского консонантизма: лабиальные смычные [Concerning the History of Chadic Consonantism], in: B. A. Uspenski (ed.), Языки Африки [The Languages of Africa]. Moscow: Nauka, pp. 9—34. |
Illič-Svityč 1966b | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1966b | “Соответствия смычных в ностратических языках” [Correspondences of Stops in the Nostratic Languages], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1966:304—355 and 401—404 (additions and corrections). |
Illič-Svityč 1971— | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1971— | Опыт сравнения ностратических языков (семито-хамитский, картвельский, индоевропейский, уральский, дравидийский, алтайский) [An Attempt at a Comparison of the Nostratic Languages (Hamito-Semitic, Kartvelian, Indo-European, Uralic, Dravidian, Altaic)]. 3 vols. Moscow: Nauka. |
Illič-Svityč 1979 | Illič-Svityč, V[ladislav] M[arkovič] 1979 | Nominal Accentuation in Baltic and Slavic. English translation by Richard L. Leed and Ronald F. Feldstein. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
Imre 1988 | Imre, Samu 1988 | “Die Geschichte der ungarischen Sprache” [The History of the Hungarian Language], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 413—447. |
Ingemann—Yadav 1978 | Ingemann, Frances, and Ramawatar Yadav 1978 | “Voiced Aspirated Consonants”, in: Donald M. Lance and Daniel E. Gulstad (eds.), Papers from the 1977 Mid-American Linguistics Conference. Columbia, MO: University of Missouri Press, pp. 337—344. |
Ingram 1978 | Ingram, David 1978 | “Typology and Universals of Personal Pronouns”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language. Volume 3: Word Structure. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 213—247. |
Isbaert 1994 | Isbaert, Lambert 1994 | “Le tokharien” [Tocharian], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 85—100. |
Isserlin 1975 | Isserlin, B. S. J. 1975 | “Some Aspects of the Present State of Hamito-Semitic Studies”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 479—486. |
Ivanov 1965 | Ivanov, Vjačeslav V. 1965 | Общеиндоевропейская, праславянская и анатолийская языковые системы [The Common Indo-European, Proto-Slavic, and Anatolian Linguistic Systems]. Moscow: Nauka. |
Ivanov 1967 | Ivanov, Vjačeslav V. 1967 | “Использование для этимологических исследований сочетаний однокоренных слов в поэзии на древних индоевропейских языках” [One-root Words in the Poetry of Old Indo-European Languages and their Use for Etymological Research], Этимология (Ėtimologija) 1967:40—56. |
Ivanov 1979 | Ivanov, Vjačeslav V. 1979 | “Syntactical Archaisms of Old Hittite”, in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissen-schaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 73—78. |
Ivanov 1981 | Ivanov, Vjačeslav V. 1981 | Славянский, балтийский и раннебалканский глогол. Индоевропейские истоки [The Slavic, Baltic, and Early Balkan Verb. The Indo-European Sources]. Moscow: Nauka. |
Ivanov 2001 | Ivanov, Vjačeslav V. 2001 | “Southern Anatolian and Northern Anatolian as Separate Indo-European Dialects and Anatolian as a Late Linguistic Zone”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 131—183. |
Ivanov—Sudnik—Helimskij 1990 | Ivanov, Vjačeslav, T. M. Sudnik, and Eugene A. Helimskij (eds.) 1990 | Uralo-Indogermanica. 2 vols. Moscow: Nauka. |
Ivanov—Vine 1999 | Ivanov, Vjačeslav, and Brent Vine (eds.) 1999 | UCLA Indo-European Studies I. Los Angeles, CA: University of California, Program in Indo-European Studies. |
Iverson—Salmons 1992 | Iverson, Gregory K., and Joseph C. Salmons 1992 | “The Phonology of the Proto-Indo-European Root Structure Constraints”, Lingua 87:293—320. |
Izre’el 2002 | Izre’el, Shlomo (ed.) 2002 | Semitic Linguistics: The State of the Art at the Turn of the 21st Century. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns. |
Jackson 1893 | Jackson, A. V. Williams 1893 | Avesta Reader. Reprinted 1975. New York, NY: AMS Press. |
Jackson 1968 | Jackson, A. V. Williams 1968 | An Avesta Grammar in Comparison with Sanskrit. 3rd edition. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft. |
Jacobs 2005 | Jacobs, Neil G. 2005 | Yiddish: A Linguistic Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Jacobs—Prince van der Auwera—1994 | Jacobs, Neil G., Ellen F. Prince, and Johan van der Auwera 1994 | “Yiddish”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 388—419. |
Jacobsohn 1980 | Jacobsohn, Hermann 1980 | Arier und Ugrofinnen [Aryans and Finno-Ugrians]. Reprint of the 1922 edition with an index of Finno-Ugrian words and forms and a bibliography and afterword edited by Wolfgang Veenker. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Jakobson 1971(1937) | Jakobson, Roman 1971(1937) | “On Ancient Greek Prosody”, in: Roman Jakobson, Selected Writings. 2nd edition. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 262—271. (Written in Brno, Czechoslovakia, April 1937, and published in Polish in: Studies Presented to Kazimierz Woycicki, Z zaganien poetyki, VI [Wilno, 1937].) |
Jakobson 1971(1949) | Jakobson, Roman 1971(1949) | “Principes de phonologie historique” [Principles of Historical Phonology], in: Roman Jakobson, Selected Writings. 2nd edition. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 202—220. (Presented at the International Phonological Meeting in Prague, 20 December 1930; published in German in: Travaux du Cercle Linguistique de Prague [Works of the Prague Linguistic Circle] IV:247—267 [1931]; revised for the Appendices to Principes de phonologie [Principles of Phonology] of N. S. Trubetzkoy, translated into French by Jean Cantineau [Paris, 1949]; English version in Baldi—Werth 1978:103—120 [translated by Allan R. Keiler].) |
Jakobson 1971(1956) | Jakobson, Roman 1971(1956) | “Mufaxxama: The ‘Emphatic’ Phonemes in Arabic”, in: Roman Jakobson, Selected Writings. 2nd edition. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 510—522. (Written in Cambridge, MA, in 1956 and published in: Studies Presented to Joshua Whatmough [The Hague: Mouton, 1957].) |
Jakobson 1971(1957) | Jakobson, Roman 1971(1957) | “Typological Studies and their Contribution to Historical Comparative Linguistics”, in: Roman Jakobson, Selected Writings. 2nd edition. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 523—532. (Originally presented as a report at the first plenary session of the Eighth International Congress of Linguists, Oslo, August 1957.) |
Jakobson 1971(1960) | Jakobson, Roman 1971(1960) | “Why ‘Mama’ and ‘Papa’,” in: Roman Jakobson, Selected Writings. 2nd edition. The Hague: Mouton, vol. I, pp. 538—545. (Written in Stanford, CA, 1959 for: Perspectives in Psychological Theory, Dedicated to Heinz Werner [New York, NY, 1960].) |
Jakobson 1972 | Jakobson, Roman 1972 | Child Language, Aphasia and Phonological Universals. English translation by Allan R. Keiler. The Hague: Mouton. |
Jakobson 1978 | Jakobson, Roman 1978 | Six Lectures in Sound and Meaning. English translation by John Mepham. Hancocks: The Harvester Press. |
Jakobson 1990 | Jakobson, Roman 1990 | On Language / Roman Jakobson. Edited by Linda Waugh and Monique Monville-Burston. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Jakobson—Kawamoto 1970 | Jakobson, Roman, and Shigeo Kawamoto (eds.) 1970 | Studies in General and Oriental Linguistics Presented to Shiro Hattori on the Occasion of his Sixtieth Birthday. Tokyo: TEC Company, Ltd. |
Jakobson—Waugh 1979 | Jakobson, Roman, and Linda Waugh 1979 | The Sound Shape of Language. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Jamison 1988 | Jamison, Stephanie W. 1988 | “The Quantity and Outcome of Vocalized Laryngeals in Indic”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 213—226. |
Jamison 2004a | Jamison, Stephanie W. 2004a | “Sanskrit”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 673—699. |
Jamison 2004b | Jamison, Stephanie W. 2004b | “Middle Indic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 700—716. |
Janhunen 1977a | Janhunen, Juha 1977a | “Samoyed-Altaic Contacts”, Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 158:123—129. |
Janhunen 1977b | Janhunen, Juha 1977b | Samojedischer Wortschatz. Gemeinsamojedische Etymologien [Samoyed Vocabulary. Common Samoyed Etymologies]. Helsinki: Castrenianumin toimitteita 17. |
Janhunen 1983 | Janhunen, Juha 1983 | “On Early Indo-European/Samoyed Contacts”, Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 185:115—127. |
Janhunen 1992 | Janhunen, Juha 1992 | “Uralic Languages”, in: William Bright (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. New York, NY, and Oxford: Oxford University Press, vol. 4, pp. 205—210. |
Janhunen 1998 | Janhunen, Juha 1998 | “Samoyedic”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 457—479. |
Janhunen 2003a | Janhunen, Juha 2003a | “Proto-Mongolic”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 1—29. |
Janhunen 2003b | Janhunen, Juha 2003b | “Written Mongol”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 30—56. |
Janhunen 2003c | Janhunen, Juha 2003c | “Khamnigan Mongol”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 83—101. |
Janhunen 2003d | Janhunen, Juha 2003d | “Mongol Dialects”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 177—192. |
Janhunen 2003e | Janhunen, Juha 2003e | “Para-Mongolic”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 391—402. |
Janhunen 2005 | Janhunen, Juha 2005 | Khamnigan Mongol. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Janhunen 2003 | Janhunen, Juha (ed.) 2003 | The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Janhunen—Kho 1982 | Janhunen, Juha, and Song Moo Kho 1982 | “Is Korean Related to Altaic?”, Hangeul 177:179—190. |
Jankauskas—Butrimas 1996 | Jankauskas, Rimantas, and Adomas Butrimas 1996 | “Changes of Population Biological Status during the Indo-Europeanization in Lithuania”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 306—322. |
Jannaris 1897 | Jannaris, Antonius N. 1897 | An Historical Greek Grammar. Reprinted 1987. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Jarceva 1992 | Jarceva, Viktorija N. 1992 | “A Syntactic Typology of Proto-Indo-European Languages (with Reference to Celtic, Baltic, and Germanic Languages)”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 185—216. |
Jasanoff 1978a | Jasanoff, Jay H. 1978a | “Observations on the Germanic Verschärfung”, Münchener Studien zur Sprachwissenschaft 27:77—90. |
Jasanoff 1978b | Jasanoff, Jay H. 1978b | Stative and Middle in Indo-European. (= Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft, 23.) Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck. |
Jasanoff 1979 | Jasanoff, Jay H. 1979 | “The Position of the ḫi-Conjugation”, in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 79—90. |
Jasanoff 1988 | Jasanoff, Jay H. 1988 | “PIE *ĝnē- ‘recognize, know’”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 227—239. |
Jasanoff 1992 | Jasanoff, Jay H. 1992 | “Reconstructing Morphology: The Role of o-Grade in Hittite and Tocharian Verb Inflection”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 129—155. |
Jasanoff 1994 | Jasanoff, Jay H. 1994 | “Germanic”, in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 251—280. |
Jasanoff 2003 | Jasanoff, Jay H. 2003 | Hittite and the Indo-European Verb. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Jasanoff 2004 | Jasanoff, Jay H. 2004 | “Gothic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 881—906. |
Jastrow 1971 | Jastrow, Marcus 1971 | A Dictionary of the Targumim, The Talmud Bibli and Yerushalmi, and the Midrashic Literature. Reprinted 1982. New York, NY: The Judaica Press, Inc. |
Jastrow 1997 | Jastrow, Otto 1997 | “The Neo-Aramaic Languages”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 334—377. |
Jean—Hoftijzer 1965 | Jean, Charles F., and Jacob Hoftijzer 1965 | Dictionnaire des inscriptions sémitiques de l’ouest [Dictionary of the Semitic Inscriptions of the West]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Jeffers 1973 | Jeffers, Robert J. 1973 | “Problems in the Reconstruction of Proto-Italic”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.3:330—344. |
Jeffers 1975 | Jeffers, Robert J. 1975 | “Remarks on Indo-European Infinitives”, Language 51.1:33—48. |
Jeffers—Lehiste 1979 | Jeffers, Robert J., and Ilse Lehiste 1979 | Principles and Methods for Historical Linguistics. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
Jenniges—Swiggers 2000 | Jenniges, Wolfgang, and Pierre Swiggers 2000 | “The Lycian Shift ã > u and its Implications for the Study of Epigraphic Materials”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 107—121. |
Jespersen 1964 | Jespersen, Otto 1964 | Essentials of English Grammar. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. |
Job 1982 | Job, D. M[ichael] 1982 | “Semantic Change and Etymologies”, in: Anders Ahlqvist (ed.), Papers from the 5th International Conference on Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 163—170. |
Job 1989 | Job, D. M[ichael] 1989 | “Sound Change Typology and the ‘Ejective Model’,” in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 123—136. |
Johanson 1998a | Johanson, Lars 1998a | “The Structure of Turkic”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 30—66. |
Johanson 1998b | Johanson, Lars 1998b | “The History of Turkic”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 81—125. |
Johanson—Csató 1998 | Johanson, Lars, and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.) 1998 | The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Johnson 1917 | Johnson, Edwin Lee 1917 | Historical Grammar of the Ancient Persian Language. New York, NY: American Book Company. |
Johnstone 1975 | Johnstone, T. M. 1975 | The Modern South Arabian Languages. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics 1.5.) Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Johnstone 1977 | Johnstone, T. M. 1977 | Ḥarsūsi Lexicon. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Johnstone 1981 | Johnstone, T. M. 1981 | Jibbāli Lexicon. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Johnstone 1987 | Johnstone, T. M. 1987 | Mehri Lexicon and English-Mehri Word-List. London: School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London. |
Joki 1963 | Joki, Aulis J. 1963 | “Uralte Lehnwörter oder Zufälle?” [Ancient Loan Words or Accidents?], in: Congressus Internationalis Fenno-Ugristarum [International Finno-Ugrian Congress]. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó, pp. 105—107. |
Joki 1964 | Joki, Aulis J. 1964 | “Die wandernde Apfel” [The Wandering Apple], Studia Orientalia, 28:3—19. |
Joki 1972 | Joki, Aulis J. 1972 | “Sur la parenté des langues” [On the Relationship of Languages], in: Mélanges offerts à Aurélien Sauvageot pour son soixante-quinzième anniversaire [Miscellanea Offered to Aurélien Sauvageot on his Seventy-fifth Birthday]. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó, pp. 117—124. |
Joki 1973 | Joki, Aulis J. 1973 | Uralier und Indogermanen: Die älteren Berührungen zwischen den uralischen und indogermanischen Sprachen [Uralians and Indo-Europeans: The Older Contacts between the Uralic and Indo-European Languages]. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura. |
Joki 1977 | Joki, Aulis J. 1977 | “Die Tungusen und ihre Kontakte mit anderen Völkern” [The Tungus and their Contacts with other Peoples], Studia Orientalia 4:109—118. |
Joki 1980 | Joki, Aulis J. 1980 | “Die altäische Einwirkung auf die uralische Naturterminologie” [The Altaic Influence on the Uralic Nature Terminology], Journal of Turkic Studies 4:57—60. |
Joki 1988 | Joki, Aulis J. 1988 | “Zur Geschichte der uralischen Sprachgemeinschaft unter besonderer Berücksichtigung des Ostseefinischen” [On the History of the Uralic Speech Community Especially Regarding the Baltic-Finnic (Speakers)], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 575—595. |
Jones 1992 | Jones, Alex I. 1992 | “Language and Archaeology: Evaluating Competing Explanations of the Origins of the Indo-European Languages”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 20.1/2:31—44. |
Jones 1972 | Jones, Charles 1972 | An Introduction to Middle English. New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston, Inc. |
Jones 1960 | Jones, Daniel 1960 | An Outline of English Phonetics. Reprinted 1969. Cambridge: W. Heffer and Sons, Ltd. |
Jones 1967 | Jones, Daniel 1967 | The Phoneme. 3rd edition. Cambridge: W. Heffer and Sons, Ltd. |
Jones 1988 | Jones, Michael 1988 | “Sardinian”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 314—350. |
Jones-Bley—Zdanovich 2002 | Jones-Bley, Karlene, and D. G. Zdanovich (eds.) 2002 | Complex Societies of Central Eurasia from the 3rd to the 1st Millennium B.C. 2 vols. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Jones-Bley—Huld 1996 | Jones-Bley, Karlene, and Martin E. Huld (eds.) 1996 | The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Jones-Bley—Huld—della Volpe—Robbins Dexter 2002 | Jones-Bley, Karlene, Martin E. Huld, Angela della Volpe, and Miriam Robbins Dexter (eds.) 2002 | Proceedings of the Thirteenth Annual UCLA Indo-European Conference: Los Angeles, November 9—10, 2001. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Jones-Bley—Huld—della Volpe—Robbins Dexter | pc1399 | Jones-Bley, Karlene, Martin E. Huld, Angela della Volpe, and Miriam Robbins Dexter (eds.) 2003 |
Jones-Bley—Huld—della Volpe—Robbins Dexter | pc1400 | Jones-Bley, Karlene, Martin E. Huld, Angela della Volpe, and Miriam Robbins Dexter (eds.) 2005 |
Jonsson 1978 | Jonsson, Hans 1978 | The Laryngeal Theory: A Critical Survey. Lund: Gleerup. |
Joseph 1987 | Joseph, Brian D. 1987 | “Greek”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 410—439. |
Joseph 2000 | Joseph, Brian D. 2000 | “Hittite andurza ‘inside, indoors’ and the Indo-Hittite Hypothesis”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 123—131. |
Joseph No date | Joseph, Brian D. No date | “Macrorelationships and Microrelationships and their Relationship”. Manuscript. |
Joseph—Janda 2003 | Joseph, Brian D., and Richard D. Janda (eds.) 2003 | The Handbook of Historical Linguistics. Oxford: Blackwell. |
Joseph—Salmons 1998 | Joseph, Brian D., and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.) 1998 | Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and New York, NY: John Benjamins. |
Joseph—Wallace 1994 | Joseph, Brian D., and Rex E. Wallace 1994 | “Proto-Indo-European Voiced Aspirates in Italic: A Test of the Glottalic Theory”, Historische Sprachforschung 107:244—261. |
Josephson 1979 | Josephson, Folke 1979 | “Assibilation in Anatolian”, in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 91—103. |
Jucquois 1981 | Jucquois, Guy 1981 | “L’imaginaire en linguistique” [The Imaginary in Linguistics], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 159—178. |
Juilland 1967—1969 | Juilland, Alphonse (ed.) 1967—1969 | Linguistic Studies Presented to André Martinet. 3 vols. New York, NY: Linguistic Circle of New York/International Linguistic Association. |
Juilland 1976 | Juilland, Alphonse (ed.) 1976 | Linguistic Studies Offered to Joseph Greenberg. 3 vols. Saratoga, CA: Anma Libri. |
Jungraithmayr 1982 | Jungraithmayr, Hermann (ed.) 1982 | The Chad Languages in the Hamitosemitic-Nigritic Border Area. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer. |
Jungraithmayr—Ibriszimow 1994 | Jungraithmayr, Hermann, and Dymitr Ibriszimow 1994 | Chadic Lexical Roots. 2 vols. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag. |
Jungraithmayr—Mueller 1987 | Jungraithmayr, Hermann, and Walter W. Mueller (eds.) 1987 | Proceedings of the Fourth International Hamito-Semitic Congress. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 44.) Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Jungraithmayr—Shimizu 1981 | Jungraithmayr, Hermann, and Kiyoshi Shimizu 1981 | Chadic Lexical Roots. Vol. II: Tentative Reconstruction, Grading and Distribution. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer. |
Justus 1980 | Justus, Carol F. 1980 | “Typological Symmetries and Asymmetries in Hittite and IE Complementation”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 183—206. |
Justus 1983 | Justus, Carol F. 1983 | “Indo-Europeanization of Myth and Syntax in Anatolian Hittite: Dating of Texts as an Index”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 11.1/2:59—103. |
Justus 1988 | Justus, Carol F. 1988 | “Indo-European Numerals and Numeral Systems”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), A Linguistic Happening in Memory of Benjamin Schwartz: Studies in Anatolian, Italic, and Other Indo-European Languages. Louvain: Peeters, pp. 521—541. |
Justus 1992 | Justus, Carol F. 1992 | “The Impact of non-Indo-European Languages on Anatolian”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 443—467. |
Kachru—Lees—Malkiel—Pietrangela—Saporta 1973 | Kachru, Braj, Robert B. Lees, Yakov Malkiel, Angelina Pietrangela, and Sol Saporta (eds.) 1973 | Issues in Linguistics: Papers in Honor of Henry and Renée Kahane. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press. |
Kachru 1987 | Kachru, Yamuna 1987 | “Hindi-Urdu”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 470—489. |
Kaiser 1988 | Kaiser, Mark 1988 | “The Nostratic Reconstructions of Illič-Svityč”, Mother Tongue 5:27—57. |
Kaiser 1989 | Kaiser, Mark 1989 | “V. M. Illič-Svityč’s Early Reconstructions of Nostratic”, in Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Buchum: Brockmeyer, pp. 125—176. |
Kaiser—Shevoroshkin 1985 | Kaiser, Mark, and Vitalij Shevoroshkin 1985 | “On Indo-European Laryngeals and Vowels”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 13.3/4:377—413. |
Kaiser—Shevoroshkin 1986 | Kaiser, Mark, and Vitalij Shevoroshkin 1986 | “Inheritance versus Borrowing in Indo-European, Kartvelian and Semitic”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 14.3/4:365—378. |
Kaiser—Shevoroshkin 1987 | Kaiser, Mark, and Vitalij Shevoroshkin 1987 | “On Recent Comparison between Language Families: The Case of Indo-European and Afroasiatic”, General Linguistics 27.1:34—46. |
Kaiser—Shevoroshkin 1988 | Kaiser, Mark, and Vitalij Shevoroshkin 1988 | “Nostratic”, Annual Review of Anthropology 17:309—329. |
Kálmán 1988 | Kálmán, Béla 1988 | “The History of the Ob-Ugric Languages”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 395—412. |
Kammenhuber 1969a | Kammenhuber, Annelies 1969a | “Hethitisch, Paläisch, Luwisch und Hieroglyphenluwisch” [Hittite, Palaic, Luwian, and Hieroglyphic Luwian], in: B. Spuler (ed.), Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 119—357. |
Kammenhuber 1969b | Kammenhuber, Annelies 1969b | “Das Hattische” [Hattic], in: B. Spuler (ed.), Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 428—546. |
Kammenhuber 1979 | Kammenhuber, Annelies 1979 | “Direktiv, Terminativ und/oder Lokativ im Hethitischen” [Directive, Terminative, and/or Locative in Hittite], in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 115—142. |
Kammenhuber 1993 | Kammenhuber, Annelies 1993 | Kleine Schriften zum Altanatolischen und Indogermanischen [Minor Writings on Old Anatolian and Indo-European]. 2 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Kangasmaa-Minn 1998 | Kangasmaa-Minn, Eeva 1998 | “Mari”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 219—248. |
Kara 1959 | Kara, G[yörgy]. 1959 | “Notes sur les dialectes oïrat de la Mongolie Occidentale” [Notes on the Oirat Dialects of Western Mongolia], Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientarum Hungaricae 8.2:111—168. |
Kara 1998 | Kara, G[yörgy]. 1998 | Review of Alexander Vovin, A Reconstruction of Proto-Ainu, Eurasian Studies Yearbook 70:201—202. |
Kara 2006 | Kara, G[yörgy]. 2006 | Review of Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages, Anthropological Linguistics 48.1:99—106. |
Karahashi 2004 | Karahashi, Fumi 2004 | Review of Dietz Otto Edzard, Sumerian Grammar, Journal of the American Oriental Society 124.3:602—606. |
Katičić 1976 | Katičić, Radoslav 1976 | Ancient Languages of the Balkans. 2 vols. The Hague: Mouton. |
Katona 2000 | Katona, A. L. 2000 | “Proto-Greeks and the Kurgan Theory”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 28.1/2:65—100. |
Katre 1968 | Katre, Sumitra Mangesh 1968 | Problems of Reconstruction in Indo-Aryan. Simla: Indian Institute of Advanced Study. |
Kaufman 1997 | Kaufman, Stephen A. 1997 | “Aramaic”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 114—130. |
Kautzsch 1910 | Kautzsch, E. (ed.) 1910 | Gesenius’ Hebrew Grammar. 2nd English Edition revised by A. E. Crowley. 14th Impression 1978. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Kaye 1985 | Kaye, Alan S. 1985 | Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, Language 61:57—60. |
Kaye 1986 | Kaye, Alan S. 1986 | “Remarks on Proto-Semitic Phonology”, Language Sciences 8.1:37—48. |
Kaye 1987 | Kaye, Alan S. 1987 | “Arabic”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 664—685. |
Kaye 1999 | Kaye, Alan S. 1999 | “The Current State of Nostratic Linguistics”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 327—358. |
Kaye 1991—1992 | Kaye, Alan S. (ed.) 1991—1992 | Semitic Studies in Honor of Wolf Leslau on the Occasion of his Eighty-fifth Birthday, November 14, 1991. 2 vols. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Kaye—Rosenhouse 1997 | Kaye, Alan S., and Judith Rosenhouse 1997 | “Arabic Dialects and Maltese”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 263—311. |
Kazár 1974 | Kazár, Lajos 1974 | Uralic-Japanese Linguistic Relations: A Preliminary Investigation. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Kazár 1976 | Kazár, Lajos 1976 | “Uralic-Japanese Language Comparison”, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 48:127—150. |
Kazár 1980 | Kazár, Lajos 1980 | Japanese-Uralic Language Comparison: Locating Japanese Origins with the Help of Samoyed, Finnish, Hungarian, etc.: An Attempt. Hamburg: Tsurusaki Books. |
Kazár 1981 | Kazár, Lajos 1981 | “Japanese-Uralic Morphological Parallels”, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 53:88—104. |
Keiler 1970 | Keiler, Allan R. 1970 | A Phonological Study of the Indo-European Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton. |
Kellens 1990 | Kellens, Jean (ed.) 1990 | La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”. |
Keller 1978 | Keller, R. E. 1978 | The German Language. London: Faber and Faber. |
Kent 1945 | Kent, Roland G. 1945 | The Sounds of Latin. Baltimore: Linguistic Society of America. |
Kent 1946 | Kent, Roland G. 1946 | The Forms of Latin. Baltimore: Linguistic Society of America. |
Kent 1953 | Kent, Roland G. 1953 | Old Persian. 2nd edition. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Keresztes 1998 | Keresztes, László 1998 | “Mansi”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 387—427. |
Kerns 1937 | Kerns, J. Alexander 1937 | “ē2 and eu in Germanic Strong Preterites of Class VII”, Language 13.1:11—17. |
Kerns 1939 | Kerns, J. Alexander 1939 | “The Imperfect in Armenian and Irish”, Language 15.1:20—33. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1937 | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1937 | “Structural Types of the IE Medio-Passive Endings: r and t Semes”, Language 13.4:263—278. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1940 | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1940 | “The Laryngeal Hypothesis and Indo-Hittite, Indo-European Vocalism”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 60:181—192. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1942 | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1942 | “On the Placing of Armenian”, Language 18:226—228. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1946 | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1946 | “Multiple Stem Conjugation: An Indo-Hittite Isogloss?”, Language 22.2:57—67. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1963a | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1963a | “Initial Laryngeals in Tocharian”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 83.2:361—362. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1963b | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1963b | “Chronology of Athematics and Thematics in Proto-Indo-European”, Language 44:717—719. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1972 | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1972 | A Sketch of the Indo-European Finite Verb. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1975 | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1975 | “Typological Contrasts for the Identification of PIE”, in: Luigi Heilmann (ed.), Proceedings of the Eleventh International Congress of Linguists. Bologna: Società Editrice il Mulino, pp. 455—459. |
Kerns—Schwartz 1981 | Kerns, J. Alexander, and Benjamin Schwartz 1981 | “On the Indo-European Tense System”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 3—13. |
Kerns 1967 | Kerns, John C. 1967 | Eurasiatic Pronouns and the Indo-Uralic Question. Fairborn, OH. |
Kerns 1985 | Kerns, John C. 1985 | Indo-European Prehistory. Cambridge: Heffer and Sons. |
Kerns 1988 | Kerns, John C. 1988 | “Proto-Indo-European Archeology and Linguistics”, review of Susan Necev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas, Diachronica 5.1/2:181—205. |
Kerns 1990 | Kerns, John C. 1990 | Review of Colin Renfrew, Archeology and Language: The Puzzle of Indo-European Origins, Mother Tongue 10. |
Kerslake 1998 | Kerslake, Celia 1998 | “Ottoman Turkish”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 179—202. |
Kessler 2001 | Kessler, Brett 2001 | The Significance of Word Lists. Stanford, CA: Center for the Study of Language and Information. |
Khačikjan 1998 | Khačikjan, Margaret 1998 | The Elamite Language. Rome: Consiglio Nazionale delle Ricerche, Istituto per gli Studi Micenei ed Egeo-anatolici. |
Kho 1977 | Kho, Song Moo 1977 | “On the Contacts between Korean and Turkic Languages”, Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 159:139—192. |
Kießling 2002 | Kießling, Roland 2002 | Die Rekonstruktion der südkuschitischen Sprachen (West-Rift) [The Reconstruction of the Southern Cushitic Languages (West-Rift)]. Köln: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag. |
Kim 1970 | Kim, C.-W. 1970 | “A Theory of Aspiration”, Phonetica 21:107—116. |
Kim 2005 | Kim, Ronald I. 2005 | Review of Jay H. Jasanoff, Hittite and the Indo-European Verb, Diachronica XXII.1:191—200. |
Kim 2003 | Kim, Stephen S. 2003 | “Santa”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 346—363. |
Kimball 1988 | Kimball, Sara E. 1988 | “Analogy, Secondary Ablaut and *OHø in Common Greek”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 241—256. |
Kimball 1992 | Kimball, Sara E. 1992 | “Comparative Method”, in: William Bright (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. New York, NY, and Oxford: Oxford University Press, vol. 1, pp. 274—279. |
Kimball 1999 | Kimball, Sara E. 1999 | Hittite Historical Phonology. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Kimball 2000 | Kimball, Sara E. 2000 | “Hittite ariya-: ‘Consult an Oracle’?”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 133—149. |
King 1901 | King, L. W. 1901 | Assyrian Language: Easy Lessons in the Cuneiform Inscriptions. Reprinted 1976. New York, NY: AMS Press. |
King 1969 | King, Robert D. 1969 | Historical Linguistics and Generative Grammar. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc. |
Kingdon 1993 | Kingdon, Jonathan 1993 | Self-Made Man: Human Evolution from Eden to Extinction? New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. |
Kiparsky 1973 | Kiparsky, Paul 1973 | “The Inflectional Accent in Indo-European”, Language 49:794—849. |
Kiparsky 1979 | Kiparsky, Paul 1979 | Pāṇini as a Variationist. Poona: Poona University Press. |
Kiparsky 1983 | Kiparsky, Paul 1983 | Explanation in Phonology. Dordrecht: Foris Publications. |
Kiparsky 1973 | Kiparsky, Valentin 1973 | “Indogermanisch und Uralisch — die erste Synthese” [Indo-European and Uralic — the first Synthesis], Finnisch-Ugrische Forschungen 41:176—180. |
Kirchner 1998a | Kirchner, Mark 1998a | “Kazakh and Karakalpak”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 318—332. |
Kirchner 1998b | Kirchner, Mark 1998b | “Kirghiz”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 344—356. |
Kirk 1923 | Kirk, Arthur 1923 | An Introduction to the Historical Study of New High German. Reprinted 1966. Manchester: Manchester University Press. |
Kissling 1960 | Kissling, Hans Joachim 1960 | Osmanlisch-Türkische Grammatik [Osmanli Turkish Grammar]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Klaiman 1987 | Klaiman, M. H. 1987 | “Bengali”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 490—513. |
Klein 1971 | Klein, Ernest David 1971 | A Comprehensive Etymological Dictionary of the English Language. Amsterdam, London, New York, NY: Elsevier. |
Klein 1987 | Klein, Ernest David 1987 | A Comprehensive Etymological Dictionary of the Hebrew Language for Readers of English. New York, NY: Macmillan. |
Klein 1988 | Klein, Jared S. 1988 | “Proto-Indo-European *gwiH3- ‘live’ and Related Problems of Laryngeals in Greek”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 257—279. |
Klein 2005 | Klein, Jared S. 2005 | Review of Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages, Journal of the American Oriental Society 125.1:91—97. |
Klesment—Künnap—Soosaar—Taagepera 2003 | Klesment, Piret, Ago Künnap, Sven-Erik Soosaar, and Rein Taagepera 2003 | “Common Phonetic and Grammatical Features of the Uralic Languages and Other Languages in Northern Eurasia”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 32.3/4:363—389. |
Klimov 1964 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1964 | Этимологический словарь картвельских языков [Etymological Dictionary of the Kartvelian Languages]. Moscow: Nauka. |
Klimov 1969 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1969 | Die kaukasischen Sprachen [The Caucasian Languages]. German translation by Winfried Boeder. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Klimov 1974 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1974 | “On the Character of Languages of Active Typology”, Linguistics 131:11—25. |
Klimov 1977 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1977 | Типология языков активного строя [The Typology of Languages of Active Formation]. Moscow: Nauka. |
Klimov 1985 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1985 | “Zu den ältesten indogermanisch/semitisch/kartwelischen Kontakten im Vorderen Asien” [On the Oldest Indo-European/Semitic/Kartvelian Contacts in the Near East], in: Hermann M. Ölberg and Gernot Schmidt (eds.), Sprachwissen-schaftliche Forschungen: Festschrift für Johann Knobloch [Linguistic Investigations: Commemorative Volume for Johann Knobloch]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität, pp. 205—220. |
Klimov 1986 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1986 | “On the Notion of Language Type”, in: Winfred P. Lehmann (ed.), Language Typology 1985. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 105—110. |
Klimov 1989 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1989 | “Рефлекс индоевропейского ларингального картвельских языках?” [A Reflex of an Indo-European Laryngeal in Kartvelian Languages?], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1989.6:23—28. |
Klimov 1991 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1991 | “Some Thoughts on Indo-European/Kartvelian Relations”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 19.3/4:323—341. |
Klimov 1994a | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1994a | Древнейшие индоевропеизмы картвельских языков [Ancient Indo-European and Kartvelian Languages]. Moscow: Publications of the Linguistic Institute of the Russian Academy of Sciences. |
Klimov 1994b | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1994b | Einführung in die kaukasische Sprachwissenschaft [Introduc-tion to Caucasian Linguistics]. Translated by J. Gippert. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Klimov 1998 | Klimov, G[eorgij] V. 1998 | Etymological Dictionary of the Kartvelian Languages. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Klimov—Khalilov 2003 | Klimov, G. A., and M. Sh. Khalilov 2003 | Словарь кавказских языков: сопоставление основной лексики [Dictionary of the Caucasian Languages: A Comparison of the Basic Lexicon]. Moscow: Vostochnaja Literatura RAN. |
Klinger 2000 | Klinger, Jörg 2000 | “So weit und breit wie das Meer — das Meer in Texten hattischer Provenienz” [As Wide and as Broad as the Sea — the Sea in Texts of Hattic Origin], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 151—172. |
Kluge—Mitzka 1967 | Kluge, Friedrich, and Walther Mitzka 1967 | Etymologisches Wörterbuch der deutschen Sprache [Etymological Dictionary of the German Language]. 20th edition. Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter. |
Kluge—Seebold 1989 | Kluge, Friedrich, and Elmar Seebold 1989 | Etymologisches Wörterbuch der deutschen Sprache [Etymological Dictionary of the German Language]. 22nd edition. Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter. |
Knobloch 1965 | Knobloch, Johann 1965 | “Concetto storico di protolingua e possibilità e limiti de applicazione ad esso dei principi strutturalisti” [The Concept of Proto-Language and the Possibility and Limits of the Application to it of Structuralist Principles], in: “Le Proto-lingue”: Atti del IVo Covegno Internazionale de Linguisti, 2—6 Settembre 1963 [“The Proto-Language”: Proceedings of the 4th International Congress of Linguists, 2—6 September 1963]. Milano: Sodalizio Glottologico Milanese, pp. 141—163. |
Kobayashi 2004 | Kobayashi, Masato 2004 | Historical Phonology of Old Indo-Aryan Consonants. (= Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa Monograph Series, no. 42.) Tokyo: Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies. |
Koehler—Baumgartner 1958 | Koehler, Ludwig, and Walter Baumgartner 1958 | Lexicon in Veteris Testimenti Libros [Lexicon of the Books of the Old Testament]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Koerner 1982 | Koerner, Konrad 1982 | “Observations on the Sources, Transmission, and Meaning of ‘Indo-European’ and Related Terms in the Development of Linguistics”, in: J. Peter Maher, Allan R. Bomhard, and Konrad Koerner (eds.), Papers from the 3rd International Conference on Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 153—180. |
Koerner 1989 | Koerner, Konrad 1989 | “Comments on Reconstruction in Historical Linguistics”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 3—15. |
Koerner 1983 | Koerner, Konrad (ed.) 1983 | Linguistics and Evolutionary Theory. Three Essays by August Schleicher, Ernest Haeckal, and Wilhelm Bleeck. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Kogan 1997 | Kogan, Leonid E. 1997 | “Tigrinya”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 424—445. |
Kogan—Korotayev 1997 | Kogan, Leonid E., and Andrey V. Korotayev 1997 | “Sayhadic (Epigraphic South Arabian)”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 220—241. |
Koivulehto 1988 | Koivulehto, Jorma 1988 | “Idg. Laryngale und die finnisch-ugrische Evidenz” [Indo-European Laryngeals and the Finno-Ugrian Evidence], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 281—297. |
Koivulehto 1992 | Koivulehto, Jorma 1992 | Uralic Evidence for the Laryngeal Theory. Vienna: Publishing House of the Austrian Academy of Sciences. |
Koivulehto 2002 | Koivulehto, Jorma 2002 | “The Earliest Contacts between Indo-European and Uralic Speakers in Light of Lexical Loans”, in: Christian Carpelan, Asko Parpola, and Petteri Koskikallio (eds.), Early Contacts between Indo-European and Uralic: Linguistic and Archaeological Considerations. Helsinki: Finno-Ugrian Society, pp. 235—263. |
König 1994 | König, Ekkehard 1994 | “English”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 532—565. |
König—Van Der Auwera 1994 | König, Ekkehard, and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.) 1994 | The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Kooij 1987 | Kooij, Jan G. 1987 | “Dutch”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 139—156. |
Korenchy 1975 | Korenchy, Éva 1975 | “On the Nostratic Language Family Hypothesis”, Nyelvtu-dományi Közlemények 77:109—115. |
Korenchy 1988 | Korenchy, Éva 1988 | “Iranischer Einfluß in den finnisch-ugrischen Sprachen” [Iranian Influence in the Finno-Ugrian Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 665—681. |
Korhonen 1988a | Korhonen, Mikko 1988a | “The Lapp Language”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 41—57. |
Korhonen 1988b | Korhonen, Mikko 1988b | “The History of the Lapp Language”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 264—287. |
Kornfilt 1987 | Kornfilt, Jaklin 1987 | “Turkish and the Turkic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 618—644. |
Kortlandt 1978a | Kortlandt, Frederik 1978a | “Notes on Armenian Historical Phonology II (the Second Consonant Shift)”, Studia Caucasica 4:9—16. |
Kortlandt 1978b | Kortlandt, Frederik 1978b | “Proto-Indo-European Obstruents”, Indogermanische Forschungen 83:107—118. |
Kortlandt 1978c | Kortlandt, Frederik 1978c | “Comments on W. Winter’s Paper”, in: Jacek Fisiak (ed.), Recent Developments in Historical Phonology. The Hague: Mouton, p. 447. |
Kortlandt 1978d | Kortlandt, Frederik 1978d | “I.-E. Palatovelars before Resonants in Balto-Slavic”, in: Jacek Fisiak (ed.), Recent Developments in Historical Phonology. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 237—243. |
Kortlandt 1979 | Kortlandt, Frederik 1979 | “On the History of Slavic Nasal Vowels”, Indogermanische Forschungen 84:259—272. |
Kortlandt 1980a | Kortlandt, Frederik 1980a | “On the Relative Chronology of Armenian Sound Changes”, in: John A. C. Greppin (ed.), First International Conference on Armenian Linguistics: Proceedings. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books, pp. 97—106. |
Kortlandt 1980b | Kortlandt, Frederik 1980b | “Albanian and Armenian”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 94:243—250. |
Kortlandt 1980c | Kortlandt, Frederik 1980c | “H2o and oH2”, Lingua Posnaniensis XXIII:127—128. |
Kortlandt 1981a | Kortlandt, Frederik 1981a | “More Evidence for Italo-Celtic”, ERIU XXXII:1—22. |
Kortlandt 1981b | Kortlandt, Frederik 1981b | “On the Armenian Personal Endings”, Annual of Armenian Linguistics 2:29—34. |
Kortlandt 1983a | Kortlandt, Frederik 1983a | “Greek Numerals and PIE Glottalic Consonants”, Münchener Studien zur Sprachwissenschaft 42:97—104. |
Kortlandt 1983b | Kortlandt, Frederik 1983b | “Proto-Indo-European Verbal Syntax”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 11.3/4:307—324. |
Kortlandt 1983c | Kortlandt, Frederik 1983c | “On Final Syllables in Slavic”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 11.1/2:167—185. |
Kortlandt 1986 | Kortlandt, Frederik 1986 | “Proto-Indo-European Tones?”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 14.1/2:153—160. |
Kortlandt 1988 | Kortlandt, Frederik 1988 | “The Laryngeal Theory and Slavic Accentuation”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruk-tion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 299—311. |
Kortlandt 1989a | Kortlandt, Frederik 1989a | “Eight Indo-Uralic Verbs?”, Münchener Studien zur Sprachwissenschaft 50:79—85. |
Kortlandt 1989b | Kortlandt, Frederik 1989b | “Lachmann’s Law”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 103—105. |
Kortlandt 1990 | Kortlandt, Frederik 1990 | “The Spread of the Indo-Europeans”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.1/2:131—140. |
Kortlandt 1994 | Kortlandt, Frederik 1994 | “From Proto-Indo-European to Slavic”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 22.1/2:91—112. |
Kortlandt 2001 | Kortlandt, Frederik 2001 | The Indo-Uralic Verb. Manuscript. |
Kortlandt 2004 | Kortlandt, Frederik 2004 | “Nivkh as a Uralo-Siberian Language”, in: Adam Hyllested, Anders Richardt Jørgensen, Jenny Helena Larsson, and Thomas Olander (eds.), Per Aspera ad Asteriscos. Studia Indogermanica in honorem Jens Elmegård Rasmussen sexagenarii Idibus Martiis anno MMIV [Through Hardship to the Stars: Indo-European Studies in Honor of Jens Elmegård Rasmussen on His Sixtieth Birthday, the Ides of March 2004]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft, pp. 285—289. |
Koskinen 1980 | Koskinen, Kalevi E. 1980 | Nilal: Über die Urverwandtschaft des Hamito-Semitischen, Indogermanischen, Uralischen und Altäischen [Nilal: Concerning the Relationship of Hamito-Semitic, Indo-European, Uralic, and Altaic]. Helsinki: Akateeminen Kirja-kauppa. |
Kośko 1990 | Kośko, Alexander 1990 | “The Migration of Steppe and Forest-steppe Communities into Central Europe”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.3/4:309—329. |
Kośko 1991 | Kośko, Alexander 1991 | “The Vistula-Oder Basins and the North Pontic Region”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 19.3/4:235—257. |
Kośko 1996 | Kośko, Alexander 1996 | “The ‘Vistula-Dnieper Community’ of the Sub-Neolithic Cultures”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 78—88. |
Kossian 1997 | Kossian, Aram V. 1997 | “On Anatolian-Urartian Linguistic Contacts”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 25.1/2:27—34. |
Kotwicz 1953 | Kotwicz, W. 1953 | “La langue mongole parlée par les ouïgours jaunes près de Kantcheou” [The Mongolian Language Spoken by the Yellow Uighurs near Gānsù], Rocznik Orientalistyczny 16:435—465. |
Krahe 1948 | Krahe, Hans 1948 | Historische Laut- und Formenlehre des Gotischen [Historical Phonology and Inflections of Gothic]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Krahe [1967] | Krahe, Hans [1967] | [2nd edition revised by Elmar Seebold.] |
Krahe 1966—1969 | Krahe, Hans 1966—1969 | Indogermanische Sprachwissenschaft [Indo-European Linguistics]. 5th edition. 2 vols. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Krahe—Meid 1966—1967 | Krahe, Hans, and Wolfgang Meid 1966—1967 | Germanische Sprachwissenschaft [Germanic Linguistics]. 6th edition. 3 vols. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Krahmalkov 2000 | Krahmalkov, Charles R. 2000 | Phoenician-Punic Dictionary. Leuven: Peeters. |
Krahmalkov 2001 | Krahmalkov, Charles R. 2001 | A Phoenician-Punic Grammar. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Krantz 1988 | Krantz, Grover S. 1988 | Geographical Development of European Languages. New York, NY: Peter Lang. |
Krause 1952 | Krause, Wolfgang 1952 | Westtocharische Grammatik [West Tocharian Grammar]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Krause 1955 | Krause, Wolfgang 1955 | Tocharisch [Tocharian]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Krause 1968 | Krause, Wolfgang 1968 | Handbuch des Gotischen [Manual of Gothic]. 3rd edition. Munich: C. H. Beck. |
Krause 1971 | Krause, Wolfgang 1971 | Die Sprache der urnordischen Runeninschriften [The Language of the Proto-Norse Runic Inscriptions]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Krause—Thomas 1960—1964 | Krause, Wolfgang, and Werner Thomas 1960—1964 | Tocharisches Elementarbuch [Tocharian Primer]. 2 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Krauss 1985 | Krauss, Michael E. 1985 | “A Survey of Major Alaskan Language Types”, in: Winfred P. Lehmann (ed.), Language Typology 1985. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 169—185. |
Krippes 1990a | Krippes, Karl A. 1990a | “The Altaic Component of a Nostratic Dictionary”, Mother Tongue 11. |
Krippes 1990b | Krippes, Karl A. 1990b | “A New Contribution to Japanese-Korean Phonological Comparison”, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 62:138—140. |
Krippes 1994 | Krippes, Karl A. 1994 | Review of Sergej A. Starostin, Алтайская проблема и происхождение японского языка [The Altaic Problem and the Origin of the Japanese Language], Diachronica XI.2:272—278. |
Krishnamurti 1998 | Krishnamurti, Bhadriraju 1998 | “Telugu”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 202—240. |
Krishnamurti 2001 | Krishnamurti, Bhadriraju 2001 | Comparative Dravidian Linguistics: Current Perspectives. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Krishnamurti 2003 | Krishnamurti, Bhadriraju 2003 | The Dravidian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Krishnamurti—Benham 1998 | Krishnamurti, Bhadriraju, and Brett A. Benham 1998 | “Koṇḍa”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 241—269. |
Kronasser 1948 | Kronasser, Heinz 1948 | Zur Verwandtschaft zwischen Finnisch-Ugrischen und Indogermanisch. Frühgeschichte und Sprachwissenschaft [On the Relationship between Finno-Ugrian and Indo-European. Prehistory and Linguistics]. Wien: Gerold and Co. |
Kronasser 1956 | Kronasser, Heinz 1956 | Vergleichende Laut- und Formenlehre des Hethitischen [Comparative Phonology and Morphology of Hittite]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Kronasser 1966 | Kronasser, Heinz 1966 | Etymologie der hethitischen Sprache [Etymology of the Hittite Language]. Vol. 1. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Krueger 1962 | Krueger, John R. 1962 | Chuvash Manual. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 7.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications. |
Krueger 1963 | Krueger, John R. 1963 | Yakut Manual. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 25.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications. |
Krueger—Francis 1968 | Krueger, John R., and E. D. Francis (ed.) 1968 | Cheremis-Chuvash Lexical Relationships. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 94.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications. |
Kudzinowski 1983 | Kudzinowski, Czesław 1983 | “Concerning the Problem of Uralic Affinity with Indo-European”, Lingua Posnaniensis 29:99—104. |
Kufner 1972 | Kufner, Herbert L. 1972 | “The Grouping and Separation of the Germanic Languages”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 71—97. |
Kuipers 1960 | Kuipers, A[ert] H. 1960 | Phoneme and Morpheme in Kabardian. The Hague: Mouton. |
Kuipers 1968 | Kuipers, A[ert] H. 1968 | “Unique Types and Typological Universals”, in: J. C. Heestermann, G. H. Schokker, and V. I. Subramoniam (eds.), Pratidānam: Indian, Iranian and Indo-European Studies Presented to Franciscus Bernardus Jacobus Kuiper on his Sixtieth Birthday. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 68—88. |
Kuipers 1975 | Kuipers, A[ert] H. 1975 | A Dictionary of Proto-Circassian Roots. Lisse: Peter de Ridder Press. |
Kuniholm 2001 | Kuniholm, Peter Ian 2001 | “Dendrochronological Perspectives on Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 28—30. |
Künnap 1984 | Künnap, Ago 1984 | “Entwicklungstendenzen des samojedischen Kasussystems” [The Development Tendencies of the Samoyed Case System], in: Otto Gschwantler, Károly Rédei, and Hermann Reichert (eds.), Linguistica et Philologica. Gedenkschrift für Björn Collinder (1894—1983) [Linguistics and Philology. Memorial Volume for Björn Collinder (1894—1983)]. Vienna: Wilhelm Braumüller, pp. 287—291. |
Künnap 1999a | Künnap, Ago 1999a | Kamass. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Künnap 1999b | Künnap, Ago 1999b | Enets. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Künnap 2000 | Künnap, Ago 2000 | Contact-induced Perspectives in Uralic Linguistics. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Künnap 2002 | Künnap, Ago 2002 | Main Language Shifts in the Uralic Language Group. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Kuno 1973 | Kuno, Susumu 1973 | The Structure of the Japanese Language. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
Kuryłowicz 1935 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1935 | Études indoeuropéennes I [Indo-European Studies I]. Kraków: Polish Academy. |
Kuryłowicz 1956 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1956 | L’apophonie en indo-européen [Apophony in Indo-European]. Wrocław: Polish Academy. |
Kuryłowicz 1958 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1958 | L’accentuation des langues indo-européennes [The Accentuation of the Indo-European Languages]. 2nd edition. Wrocław: Polish Academy. |
Kuryłowicz 1962 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1962 | L’apophonie en sémitique [Apophony in Semitic]. Wrocław: Polish Academy. |
Kuryłowicz 1964a | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1964a | The Inflectional Categories of Indo-European. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Kuryłowicz 1964b | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1964b | “On the Methods of Internal Reconstruction”, in: Horace C. Lunt (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 9—36. |
Kuryłowicz 1968 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1968 | Indogermanische Grammatik. Band II: Akzent/Ablaut [Indo-European Grammar. Volume II: Accentuation/Ablaut]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Kuryłowicz 1969 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1969 | Review of Robert Schmitt-Brandt, Die Entwicklung des indogermanischen Vokalsystems [The Development of the Indo-European Vowel System], Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique 63:41—49. |
Kuryłowicz 1970 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1970 | “The Quantitative Meter of Indo-European”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 421—430. |
Kuryłowicz 1973 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1973 | Studies in Semitic Grammar and Metrics. London: Curzon Press. |
Kuryłowicz 1973—1975 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1973—1975 | Esquisses linguistiques [Linguistic Sketches]. 2 vols. Munich: Wilhelm Fink Verlag. |
Kuryłowicz 1979 | Kuryłowicz, Jerzy 1979 | “Die hethitische ḫi-Konjugation” [The Hittite ḫi-Conjugation], in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 143—146. |
Kurzová 1993 | Kurzová, Helena 1993 | From Indo-European to Latin: The Evolution of a Morphosyntactic Type. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Labov 1994 | Labov, William 1994 | Principles of Linguistic Change: Internal Factors. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Publishers. |
Ladd 1964 | Ladd, Charles A. 1964 | “The Nature of Sound Change”, in: Horace G. Lunt (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 650—657. |
Ladefoged 1971 | Ladefoged, Peter 1971 | Preliminaries to Linguistic Phonetics. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Ladefoged 1982 | Ladefoged, Peter 1982 | A Course in Phonetics. 2nd edition. New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace, Jovanovich. |
Ladefoged 2001 | Ladefoged, Peter 2001 | Vowels and Consonants: An Introduction to the Sounds of Languages. Oxford and Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers, Ltd. |
Ladefoged [2004] | Ladefoged, Peter [2004] | [Second edition.] |
Ladefoged 2003 | Ladefoged, Peter 2003 | Phonetic Data Analysis. Oxford and Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers, Ltd. |
Ladefoged—Maddieson 1995 | Ladefoged, Peter, and Ian Maddieson 1995 | The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Oxford and Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Publishers, Ltd. |
Lamb—Mitchell 1991 | Lamb, Sydney M., and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.) 1991 | Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Lambdin 1971 | Lambdin, Thomas O. 1971 | Introduction to Biblical Hebrew. New York, NY: Charles Scribner’s Sons. |
Lambdin 1978 | Lambdin, Thomas O. 1978 | Introduction to Classical Ethiopian. Missoula, MT: Scholars Press. |
Lambdin 1982 | Lambdin, Thomas O. 1982 | Introduction to Sahidic Coptic. Macon, GA: Mercer University Press. |
Lambert 1994 | Lambert, Pierre-Yves 1994 | La langue gauloise. Description linguistique, commentaire d’inscriptions choisies [The Gaulish Language. Linguistic Description, Commentary on Selected Inscriptions]. Paris: Éditions Errance. |
Lamprecht 1978 | Lamprecht, Arnošt 1978 | “Indoevropské okluzívy a nostratická teorie (se zřenim k situaci v germánských jazycích, latině, a řečtině)” [The Indo-European Occlusives and the Nostratic Theory], Slovo a Slovesnost 39:304—307. (Summary in German: “Die indoeuropäische Verschlußlaute und die nostratische Theorie” [The Indo-European Occlusives and the Nostratic Theory], p. 307.) |
Landsberg 1986 | Landsberg, Marge 1986 | Materials for a Bibliography of Translinguistic Studies. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Linguistics Club. |
Lane 1952 | Lane, George S. 1952 | Studies in Kuchean Grammar I: Declension of Nouns, Adjectives and Pronouns. Baltimore, MD: American Oriental Society. |
Lane 1966 | Lane, George S. 1966 | “On the Interrelationships of the Tocharian Dialects”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 213—233. |
Lane 1970 | Lane, George S. 1970 | “Tocharian: Indo-European and Non-Indo-European Relationships”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 73—88. |
Lange 1987 | Lange, Wolfgang 1987 | Kleines Wörterbuch: Georgisch—Deutsch, Deutsch—Georgisch [A Short Dictionary: Georgian—German, German—Georgian]. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Laroche 1959 | Laroche, Emmanuel 1959 | Dictionnaire de la langue louvite [Dictionary of the Luwian Language]. Paris: Adrien-Maisonneuve. |
Laroche 1960 | Laroche, Emmanuel 1960 | Les hiéroglyphes hittites [The Hittite Hieroglyphs]. Vol. I. Paris: Centre International de la Recherche Scientifique. |
Laroche 1979 | Laroche, Emmanuel 1979 | “Anaphore et deixis en anatolian” [Anaphora and Deixis in Anatolian], in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 147—152. |
Lass 1984 | Lass, Roger 1984 | Phonology: An Introduction to Basic Concepts. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Lass 1994 | Lass, Roger 1994 | Old English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Lass 1997 | Lass, Roger 1997 | Historical Linguistics and Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Lass—Anderson 1975 | Lass, Roger, and John M. Anderson 1975 | Old English Phonology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Laver 1994 | Laver, John 1994 | Principles of Phonetics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Lazzeroni 1998 | Lazzeroni, Romano 1998 | “Sanskrit”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 98—124. |
Lecarme—Lowenstamm—Shlonsky 2002 | Lecarme, Jacqueline, Jean Lowenstamm, and Ur Shlonsky (eds.) 2002 | Research in Afroasiatic Grammar. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Ledo-Lemos 2002 | Ledo-Lemos, Francisco José 2002 | La palabra “mujer” en indoeuropeo [The Word for “Woman” in Indo-European]. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Ledo-Lemos 2003 | Ledo-Lemos, Francisco José 2003 | Femininum Genus: A Study on the Origins of the Indo-European Feminine Grammatical Gender. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Lee 1998 | Lee, Duck-Young 1998 | Korean Phonology: A Principle-Based Approach. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Lees 1961 | Lees, R. B. 1961 | The Phonology of Modern Standard Turkish. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 6.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Lehiste 1970 | Lehiste, Ilse 1970 | Suprasegmentals. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
Lehmann 1980 | Lehmann, Christian 1980 | “Der indogermanische *kwi-/*kwo- Relativsatz im typologischen Vergleich” [The Indo-European *kwi-/*kwo- Relative Clause in Typological Comparison], in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indoger-manische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 155—159. |
Lehmann—Lehmann 1975 | Lehmann, Ruth P. M., and Winfred P. Lehmann 1975 | An Introduction to Old Irish. New York, NY: The Modern Language Association of America. |
Lehmann 1998 | Lehmann, Thomas 1998 | “Old Tamil”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 75—99. |
Lehmann 1952 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1952 | Proto-Indo-European Phonology. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press. |
Lehmann 1964 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1964 | “Types of Sound Change”, in: Horace G. Lunt (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 658—662. |
Lehmann 1965 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1965 | “Germanic Evidence”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 212—223. |
Lehmann 1966 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1966 | “The Grouping of the Germanic Languages”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 13—27. |
Lehmann 1970 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1970 | “Linguistic Structure as Diacritic Evidence on Proto-Indo-European Culture”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 1—10. |
Lehmann 1972 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1972 | “Proto-Germanic Syntax”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 239—285. |
Lehmann 1973 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1973 | Historical Linguistics: An Introduction. 2nd edition. New York, NY: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. |
Lehmann [1992] | Lehmann, Winfred P. [1992] | [3rd edition. London, Boston, Melbourne, and Henley: Routledge.] |
Lehmann 1975 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1975 | Proto-Indo-European Syntax. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press. |
Lehmann 1976 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1976 | Descriptive Linguistics: An Introduction. 2nd edition. New York, NY: Random House. |
Lehmann 1980 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1980 | “The Reconstruction of the Non-Simple Sentences in Proto-Indo-European”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indoger-manische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 113—144. |
Lehmann 1982 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1982 | “From Phonetic Facts to Syntactic Paradigms: The Noun in Early PIE”, in: Edgar C. Polomé (ed.), The Indo-Europeans in the Fourth and Third Millennia. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, Inc. pp. 140—155. |
Lehmann 1986 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1986 | A Gothic Etymological Dictionary. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Lehmann 1987a | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1987a | “Theoretical Views Affecting Successive Reconstructions of the Phonological System of Proto-Indo-European”, in: George Cardona and Norman H. Zide (eds.), Festschrift for Henry Hoenigswald. Tübingen: Gunter Narr Verlag, pp. 225—235. |
Lehmann 1987b | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1987b | “Agreement with the Available Material”, in: A. M. Simon-Vandenbergen (ed.), Studies in Honor of René Derolez. Uitgever: Seminarie voor Engelse en Oud-Germaanse Taalkunde, pp. 299—304. |
Lehmann 1987c | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1987c | Review of Vitalij Shevoroshkin and Thomas Markey, Typology, Relationship, and Time, Slavic and East European Journal 31.1:127—129. |
Lehmann 1987d | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1987d | “Bloomfield as an Indo-Europeanist”, Historiographia Linguistica XIV. 1/2:163—172. |
Lehmann 1987e | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1987e | Review of Warren Cowgill and Manfred Mayrhofer, Indogermanische Grammatik: Band I. 1. Halbband: Einleitung, 2. Halbband: Lautlehre [Indo-European Grammar: Volume 1. 1st Half: Introduction, 2nd Half: Phonology], General Linguistics 27.1:47—58. |
Lehmann 1987f | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1987f | “Linguistic and Archaeological Data for Handbooks of Proto-Languages”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 72—87. |
Lehmann 1988a | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1988a | Review of Heinrich Hettich, Untersuchungen zur Hypotaxe im Vedischen [Investigations into Hypotaxis in Vedic], Diachronica V.1/2:207—217. |
Lehmann 1988b | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1988b | Review of Samuel E. Martin, The Japanese Language Through Time, General Linguistics 28.4:289—291. |
Lehmann 1989a | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1989a | Review of Manfred Mayrhofer, Etymologisches Wörterbuch des Alt-indoarischen [Etymological Dictionary of Old Indo-Aryan], General Linguistics 29.3:206—251. |
Lehmann 1989b | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1989b | “Problems in Proto-Indo-European Grammar: Residues from Pre-Indo-European Active Structure”, General Linguistics 29.4:228—246. |
Lehmann 1989c | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1989c | “Earlier Stages of Proto-Indo-European”, in: Karin Heller, Oswald Panagi, and Johann Tischler (eds.), Indogermanica Europea: Festschrift für Wolfgang Meid zum 60. Geburtstag am 12.11.1989 [Indo-European Europe: Commemorative Volume for Wolfgang Meid on his 60th Birthday, 12 November 1989]. (= Grazer Linguistischer Monographien 4.) Graz: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Graz, pp. 109—131. |
Lehmann 1990a | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1990a | Review of James P. Mallory, In Search of the Indo-Europeans: Language, Archaeology and Myth, Diachronica VII.1:101—116. |
Lehmann 1990b | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1990b | “The Current Thrust of Indo-European Studies”, General Linguistics 30.1:1—52. |
Lehmann 1991a | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1991a | “The Process of Linguistics”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 11—22. |
Lehmann 1991b | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1991b | “Determination of Relative Chronology and its Implications in Linguistics”, Incontri Linguistici 14:49—59. |
Lehmann 1991c | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1991c | Review of and Friedrich Kluge and Elmar Seebold, Etymologisches Wörterbuch der deutschen Sprache [Etymological Dictionary of the German Language] (22nd edition, 1989), General Linguistics 31.2:109—117. |
Lehmann 1991d | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1991d | Review of Wolfgang Pfeifer (ed.), Etymologisches Wörterbuch des Deutschen [Etymological Dictionary of German], General Linguistics 31. 3/4:213—217. |
Lehmann 1992a | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1992a | “swbs: From the Middle to Pronominal Reflexive Markers”, in: Claudia Blank (ed.), with the assistance of Teresa Kirschner, Donald Gutch, and Judith Gilbert, Language and Civilization: A Concerted Profusion of Essays and Studies in Honour of Otto Hietsch. Frankfort-on-Main, Berne, New York, Paris: Peter Lang Publishers, pp. 139—146. |
Lehmann 1992b | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1992b | Review of Julius Pokorny, Indogermanisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Indo-European Etymological Dictionary] (2nd edition), Diachronica IX.1:115—118. |
Lehmann 1992c | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1992c | “Comparative Linguistics”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 5—21. |
Lehmann 1993 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1993 | Theoretical Bases of Indo-European Linguistics. London, Boston, MA, Melbourne, and Henley: Routledge. |
Lehmann 1994a | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1994a | “Person Marking in Indo-European”, Historische Sprachforschung 107.1:1—11. |
Lehmann 1994b | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1994b | “Gothic and the Reconstruction of Proto-Germanic”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 19—37. |
Lehmann 1995 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1995 | Residues of Pre-Indo-European Active Structure and their Implications for the Relationships among the Dialects. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Lehmann 1999 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 1999 | “Towards a History of Early Indo-European”, Diachronica XVI.1:67—95. |
Lehmann 2002 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 2002 | Pre-Indo-European. (= Journal of Indo-European Studies Monograph no. 41.) Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Lehmann 2004 | Lehmann, Winfred P. 2004 | “Derivational Morphology of the Early Indo-European Verb”, in: Philip Baldi and Pietro U. Dini (eds.), Studies in Baltic and Indo-European Linguistics in Honor of William R. Schmalstieg. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 113—124. |
Lehmann—Rinaldi 2003 | Lehmann, Winfred P., and Cristina Rinaldi 2003 | “Human Language and the Functioning of the Brain”, Logos and Language IV.1:17—33.: |
Lehmann 1978 | Lehmann, Winfred P. (ed.) 1978 | Syntactic Typology. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press. |
Lehmann 1986 | Lehmann, Winfred P. (ed.) 1986 | Language Typology 1985. Papers from the Linguistic Typology Symposium, Moscow, 9—13 December 1985. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 47.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Lehmann—Malkiel 1968 | Lehmann, Winfred P., and Yakov Malkiel (eds.) 1968 | Directions for Historical Linguistics. Reprinted 1971. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press. |
Lehmann—Malkiel 1982 | Lehmann, Winfred P., and Yakov Malkiel (eds.) 1982 | Perspectives on Historical Linguistics. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 24.). Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Lehnert 1969 | Lehnert, Martin 1969 | Altenglisches Elementarbuch [Old English Primer]. 7th edition. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Lehrman 1996 | Lehrman, Alexander 1996 | “Indo-Hittite Revisited”, Indogermanische Forschungen 101: 73—88. |
Lehrman 1997 | Lehrman, Alexander 1997 | “Hittite ga-ne-eš-+ and the Laryngeal Theory”, Indoger-manische Forschungen 102:151—155. |
Lehrman 2001 | Lehrman, Alexander 2001 | “Reconstructing Proto-Indo-Hittite”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 106—130. |
Lejeune 1972 | Lejeune, Michel 1972 | Phonétique historique du mycénien et du grec ancien [Historical Phonology of Mycenaean and Ancient Greek]. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Lejeune 1974 | Lejeune, Michel 1974 | Manuel de la langue vénète [Manual of the Venetic Language]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Leskien 1969 | Leskien, A. 1969 | Handbuch der altbulgarischen (altkirchenslavischen) Sprache: Grammatik — Texte — Glossar [Manual of the Old Bulgarian (Old Church Slavic) Language: Grammar — Texts — Glossary]. 9th edition. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Leslau 1938 | Leslau, Wolf 1938 | Lexique socotri [Soqosri Lexicon]. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Leslau 1956 | Leslau, Wolf 1956 | Étude descriptive et comparative du gafat [Descriptive and Comparative Study of Gafat]. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Leslau 1962 | Leslau, Wolf 1962 | “Southwest Semitic Cognates to the Akkadian Vocabulary I”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 82:1—3. |
Leslau 1963 | Leslau, Wolf 1963 | Etymological Dictionary of Harari. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Leslau 1964 | Leslau, Wolf 1964 | “Southwest Semitic Cognates to the Akkadian Vocabulary II”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 84:115—118. |
Leslau 1968 | Leslau, Wolf 1968 | Amharic Textbook. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Leslau 1969a | Leslau, Wolf 1969a | “Southwest Semitic Cognates to the Akkadian Vocabulary III”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 89:18—22. |
Leslau 1969b | Leslau, Wolf 1969b | Hebrew Cognates in Amharic. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Leslau 1976 | Leslau, Wolf 1976 | Concise Amharic Dictionary. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Leslau 1979 | Leslau, Wolf 1979 | Etymological Dictionary of Gurage (Ethiopic). Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Leslau 1987 | Leslau, Wolf 1987 | Comparative Dictionary of Ge’ez. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Leslau 1988 | Leslau, Wolf 1988 | Fifty Years of Research: Selection of Articles on Semitic, Ethiopian Semitic, and Cushitic. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Leslau 2000 | Leslau, Wolf 2000 | Introductory Grammar of Amharic. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Leumann 1963—1965 | Leumann, Manu 1963—1965 | Lateinische Grammatik [Latin Grammar]. 2nd edition. 2 vols. Munich: C. H. Beck. |
Levin 1971 | Levin, Saul 1971 | The Indo-European and Semitic Languages. Albany, NY: State University of New York. |
Levin 1975 | Levin, Saul 1975 | “The Indo-European and Semitic Languages: A Reply to Oswald Szemerényi”, General Linguistics 15:197—205. |
Levin 1984 | Levin, Saul 1984 | “Indo-European Descriptive Adjectives with ‘oxytone’ Accent and Semitic Stative Verbs”, General Linguistics 24.2:83—110. |
Levin 1985 | Levin, Saul 1985 | Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, Diachronica 2.1:97—104. |
Levin 1991 | Levin, Saul 1991 | “Full and Other Key Words Shared by Indo-European and Semitic”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (ed.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 166—177. |
Levin 1995 | Levin, Saul 1995 | Semitic and Indo-European: The Principle Etymologies. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Levin 2002 | Levin, Saul 2002 | Semitic and Indo-European: Comparative Morphology, Syntax and Phonetics. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Levine—Renfrew—Boyle 2003 | Levine, Marsha, Colin Renfrew, and Katie Boyle (eds.) 2003 | Prehistoric Steppe Adaptation and the Horse. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research. |
Levitt 1998 | Levitt, Stephan Hillyer 1998 | “Is there a Genetic Relationship between Indo-European and Dravidian?”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 26.1/2:131—159. |
Levitt 2000 | Levitt, Stephan Hillyer 2000 | “Some More Possible Relationships between Indo-European and Dravidian”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 28.3/4:407—438. |
Lewis—Short 1879 | Lewis, Charlton T., and Charles Short 1879 | A Latin Dictionary. Impression of 1975. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Lewis—Pedersen 1937 | Lewis, Henry, and Holger Pedersen 1937 | A Concise Comparative Celtic Grammar. Reprinted with corrections and a supplement, 1961. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Liddell—Scott 1889 | Liddell, Henry George, and Robert Scott 1889 | An Intermediate Greek-English Dictionary. Based upon the 7th edition of Henry George Liddell and Robert Scott, A Greek-English Lexicon. Reprinted 1975. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Liddell—Scott 1940 | Liddell, Henry George, and Robert Scott 1940 | A Greek-English Lexicon. 9th edition revised and augmented by Henry Stuart Jones. Reprinted 1968. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Liebert 1957 | Liebert, Gösta 1957 | Die indoeuropäischen Personalpronomina und die Laryngaltheorie [The Indo-European Personal Pronouns and the Laryngeal Theory]. Lund: C. W. K. Gleerup. |
Ligeti 1969 | Ligeti, Lajos 1969 | “A Lexicostatistical Appraisal of the Altaic Theory”, Central Asiatic Journal XIII:1—23. |
Lightfoot 1979 | Lightfoot, David W. 1979 | Principles of Diachronic Syntax. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Lightfoot 1980 | Lightfoot, David W. 1980 | “On Reconstructing Proto-Syntax”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 27—45. |
Lindau 1978 | Lindau, Mona 1978 | “Vowel Features”, Language 54:541—563. |
Lindeman 1964 | Lindeman, Frederik Otto 1964 | Les origines indo-européennes de la “Verschärfung” germanique [The Indo-European Origins of the Germanic “Verschärfung”]. Otto: Universitetsforlaget. |
Lindeman 1970 | Lindeman, Frederik Otto 1970 | Einführung in die Laryngaltheorie [Introduction to the Laryngeal Theory]. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Lindeman 1979 | Lindeman, Frederik Otto 1979 | “Remarques sur la flexion des verbes du type de teḫḫi en Hittite” [Remarks on the Inflection of Verbs of the Type teḫḫi in Hittite], in Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 153—157. |
Lindeman 1987 | Lindeman, Frederik Otto 1987 | Introduction to the “Laryngeal Theory”. Oslo: Norwegian University Press. |
Lindeman [1997] | Lindeman, Frederik Otto [1997] | [Revised edition. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck.] |
Lindeman 1996 | Lindeman, Frederik Otto 1996 | Studies in Comparative Indo-European Linguistics: Presented on the Occasion of his Sixtieth Birthday, March 3, 1996. Edited by Helge Lødrup and Inge Moen. Oslo: Novus Forlag. |
Lindsay 1894 | Lindsay, W. M. 1894 | The Latin Language. Reprinted 1963. New York, NY: Hafner. |
Linell 1979 | Linell, Per 1979 | Psychological Reality in Phonology: A Theoretical Study. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Lipiński 1997 | Lipiński, Edward 1997 | Semitic Languages: Outline of a Comparative Grammar. Leuven: Peeters. |
Littleton 1970 | Littleton, C. Scott 1970 | “Is the ‘Kingship in Heaven’ Theme Indo-European?”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 383—404. |
Littmann—Höfner 1962 | Littmann, Enno, and Maria Höfner 1962 | Wörterbuch der Tigrē-Sprache [Dictionary of the Tigre Language]. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner Verlag. |
Lockwood 1969 | Lockwood, W. B. 1969 | Indo-European Philology. London: Hutchinson University Library. |
Lockwood 1970 | Lockwood, W. B. 1970 | A Panorama of Indo-European Languages. London: Hutchinson University Library. |
Lockwood 1975 | Lockwood, W. B. 1975 | Languages of the British Isles Past and Present. London: Andre Deutsch. |
Longobardi 1980 | Longobardi, Giuseppe 1980 | “Les relatives nominales indoeuropéennes” [The Indo-European Nominal Relatives], in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 171—182. |
Loprieno 1995 | Loprieno, Antonio 1995 | Ancient Egyptian: A Linguistic Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Loprieno 2004 | Loprieno, Antonio 2004 | “Ancient Egyptian and Coptic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 160—217. |
Lord 1966 | Lord, Robert 1966 | Comparative Linguistics. London: The English Universities Press, Ltd. |
Lotz 1939 | Lotz, John 1939 | Das ungarischen Sprachsystem [The Hungarian Language System]. Reprinted 1988. Bloomington, IN: Eurolingua. |
Lowe—Jr. 1972 | Lowe, Pardee, Jr. 1972 | “Germanic Word Formation”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 211—237. |
Lowman 1932 | Lowman, G. S. 1932 | “The Phonetics of Albanian”, Language 8.4:271—293. |
Lubotsky 1988 | Lubotsky, A[lexamder] M. 1988 | The System of Nominal Accentuation in Sanskrit and Proto-Indo-European. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Lubotsky 1989 | Lubotsky, A[lexamder] M. 1989 | “Against a Proto-Indo-European Phoneme *a”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 53—66. |
Lubotsky 1990 | Lubotsky, A[lexamder] M. 1990 | “La loi de Brugmann et *H3e-” [Brugmann’s Law and *H3e-], in: Jean Kellens (ed.), La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”, pp. 129—136. |
Lugton—Saltzer 1970 | Lugton, Robert C., and Milton G. Saltzer (eds.) 1970 | Studies in Honor of J. Alexander Kerns. The Hague: Mouton. |
Lunt 1974 | Lunt, Horace G. 1974 | Old Church Slavic Grammar. 6th edition. The Hague: Mouton. |
Lunt 1964 | Lunt, Horace G. (ed.) 1964 | Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton. |
Luraghi 1987 | Luraghi, Silvia 1987 | “Reconstructing Proto-Indo-European as an Ergative Language: A Test”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.3/4:359—379. |
Luraghi 1990 | Luraghi, Silvia 1990 | Old Hittite Sentence Structure. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Luraghi 1992 | Luraghi, Silvia 1992 | “I verbi derivati in -nu e il loro valore causativo” [The Derivative Verbs in -nu and their Causative Value], in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 153—180. |
Luraghi 1997 | Luraghi, Silvia 1997 | Hittite. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Luraghi 1998 | Luraghi, Silvia 1998 | “The Anatolian Languages”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 169—196. |
Luraghi—Pompei—Skopeteas 2004 | Luraghi, Silvia, Anna Pompei, and Stavros Skopeteas 2004 | Ancient Greek. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Lydall 1976 | Lydall, Jean 1976 | “Hamer”, in: M. Lionel Bender (ed.), The Non-Semitic Languages of Ethiopia. East Lansing, MI: African Studies Center, Michigan State University, pp. 393—438. |
Lyons 1968 | Lyons, John 1968 | Introduction to Theoretical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Lyons 1981 | Lyons, John 1981 | Language and Linguistics: An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
MacAulay 1992 | MacAulay, Donald (ed.) 1992 | The Celtic Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
MacDonald 2004 | MacDonald, M. C. A. 2004 | “Ancient North Arabian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 488—533. |
MacDonell 1916 | MacDonell, Arthur Anthony 1916 | A Vedic Grammar for Students. Reprinted 1962. Bombay, Calcutta, Madras: Oxford University Press. |
MacDonell 1917 | MacDonell, Arthur Anthony 1917 | A Vedic Reader for Students. Reprinted 1970. Madras: Oxford University Press. |
MacKenzie 1987 | MacKenzie, D. N. 1987 | “Pashto”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 547—565. |
Maddieson 1978 | Maddieson, Ian 1978 | “Universals of Tone”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, vol. 2, pp. 335—365. |
Maddieson 1981 | Maddieson, Ian 1981 | UPSID: UCLA Phonological Segment Inventory Database. (= UCLA WWP 53.) Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Maddieson 1984 | Maddieson, Ian 1984 | Patterns of Sound. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Magner—Schmalstieg 1970 | Magner, Thomas F., and William R. Schmalstieg (eds.) 1970 | Baltic Linguistics. University Park, PA: The Pennsylvania State University Press. |
Maher 1977 | Maher, J. Peter 1977 | Papers on Language Theory and History. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 3.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Maher—Bomhard—Koerner 1982 | Maher, J. Peter, Allan R. Bomhard, and Konrad Koerner (eds.) 1982 | Papers from the 3rd International Conference on Historical Linguistics. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 13.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Mair 1995 | Mair, Victor H. 1995 | “Prehistoric Caucasoid Corpses in the Tarim Basin”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 23.3/4:281—307. |
Mair 1998 | Mair, Victor H. (ed.) 1998 | The Bronze Age and Early Iron Age Peoples of Eastern Central Asia. 2 vols. Washington, DC/Philadelphia, PA: Institute for the Study of Man/ University of Pennsylvania. |
Maisels 1993 | Maisels, Charles Keith 1993 | The Near East: Archaeology in the ‘Cradle of Civilization’. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Malchukov 1995 | Malchukov, Andrei L. 1995 | Even. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Makkay 1985 | Makkay, János 1985 | Az indoeurópai népek őstörténete és a vonaldíszes kerámia [The Ancient History of the Indo-European Peoples and Linear Pottery]. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, Budapest. |
Makkay 1987 | Makkay, János 1987 | “The Linear Pottery and the Early Indo-Europeans”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 165—184. |
Makkay 1992 | Makkay, János 1992 | “A Neolithic Model of Indo-European Prehistory”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 20.3/4:193—238. |
Makkay 2004 | Makkay, János 2004 | “Before Indo-European and Uralic”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 143—164. |
Malkiel 1982 | Malkiel, Yakov 1982 | “Between Monogenesis and Polygenesis”, in: J. Peter Maher, Allan R. Bomhard, and Konrad Koerner (eds.), Papers from the 3rd International Conference on Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 235—272. |
Malkiel 1992 | Malkiel, Yakov 1992 | “Old and New Thoughts about the Configuration of the Romance Language Family”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 73—90. |
Mallinson 1987 | Mallinson, Graham 1987 | “Rumanian”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 303—321. |
Mallinson 1988 | Mallinson, Graham 1988 | “Rumanian”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 391—419. |
Mallory 1973 | Mallory, James P. 1973 | “A Short History of the Indo-European Problem”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.1:21—65. |
Mallory 1976 | Mallory, James P. 1976 | “The Chronology of the Early Kurgan Tradition”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 4.4:257—294. |
Mallory 1977 | Mallory, James P. 1977 | “The Chronology of the Early Kurgan Tradition (Part Two)”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.4:339—368. |
Mallory 1989 | Mallory, James P. 1989 | In Search of the Indo-Europeans: Language, Archaeology and Myth. London: Thames and Hudson. |
Mallory 1990 | Mallory, James P. 1990 | “Social Structure in the Pontic-Caspian Eneolithic: A Preliminary Review”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.1/2:15—57. |
Mallory 1991 | Mallory, James P. 1991 | “Kurgan and Indo-European Fauna III: Birds”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 19.3/4:223—234. |
Mallory 1996 | Mallory, James P. 1996 | “The Indo-European Homeland Problem: A Matter of Time”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 1—22. |
Mallory 1997 | Mallory, James P. 1997 | “The Homelands of the Indo-Europeans”, in: Roger Blench and Matthew Spriggs (ed.), Archaeoology and Language I: Theoretical and Methodological Orientations. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 93—121. |
Mallory 1998 | Mallory, James P. 1998 | “A European Perspective on Indo-Europeans in Asia”, in: Victor H. Mair (ed.), The Bronze Age and Early Iron Age Peoples of Eastern Central Asia. Washington, DC: The Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 175—201. |
Mallory—Adams 2006 | Mallory, James P., and Douglas Q. Adams 2006 | The Oxford Introduction to Proto-Indo-European and the Proto-Indo-European World. Oxford and New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Mallory—Adams 1997 | Mallory, James P., and Douglas Q. Adams (eds.) 1997 | Encyclopedia of Indo-European Culture. London and Chicago, IL: Fitzroy Dearborn Publishers. |
Mallory—Mair 2000 | Mallory, J. P., and Victor H. Mair 2000 | The Tarim Mummies. London: Thames & Hudson, Ltd. |
Malmberg 1963 | Malmberg, Bertil 1963 | Phonetics. New York, NY: Dover. |
Malmberg 1991 | Malmberg, Bertil 1991 | Histoire de la linguistique de Sumer à Saussure [History of Linguistics from Sumer to Saussure]. Paris: Presses Univer-sitaires de France. |
Manaster Ramer 1993 | Manaster Ramer, Alexis 1993 | “On Illič-Svityč’s Nostratic Theory”, Studies in Language 17:205—250. |
Manaster Ramer 1994 | Manaster Ramer, Alexis 1994 | “Clusters or Affricates in Kartvelian and Nostratic?”, Diachronica XI.2:157—170. |
Manaster Ramer 1995 | Manaster Ramer, Alexis 1995 | “On ‘Some Thoughts on Indo-European-Kartvelian Relations’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 23.3/4:195—208. |
Manaster Ramer 1996 | Manaster Ramer, Alexis 1996 | “Armenian -k‘ < PIE *-(e)s”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 24.3/4:361—398. |
Manaster Ramer 1997 | Manaster Ramer, Alexis 1997 | “Nostratic from a Typological Point of View”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 25.1/2:79—104. |
Manaster Ramer—Michalove—Baertsch—Adams 1998 | Manaster Ramer, Alexis, Peter Michalove, Karen Baertsch, and Karen Adams 1998 | “Exploring the Nostratic Hypothesis”, in: Joseph C. Salmons and Brian D. Joseph (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 61—84. |
Mańczak 1979 | Mańczak, Witold 1979 | “L’apophonie e/o en grec”, in: Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 529—535. |
Mandelbaum 1949 | Mandelbaum, David G. (ed.) 1949 | Selected Writings of Edward Sapir in Language, Culture, and Personality. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Mann 1957 | Mann, Stuart E. 1957 | Czech Historical Grammar. London: University of London. |
Mann 1968 | Mann, Stuart E. 1968 | An Armenian Historical Grammar in Latin Characters. London: Luzac and Co. |
Mann 1977 | Mann, Stuart E. 1977 | An Albanian Historical Grammar. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Mann 1984—1987 | Mann, Stuart E. 1984—1987 | An Indo-European Comparative Dictionary. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Marangozis 2003 | Marangozis, John 2003 | A Short Grammar of Hieroglyphic Luwian. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Marangozis 2007 | Marangozis, John 2007 | An Introduction to Minoan Linear A. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Marcantonio 2002 | Marcantonio, Angela 2002 | The Uralic Language Family: Facts, Myths and Statistics. Oxford and Boston, MA: The Philological Society. |
Marchand 1973 | Marchand, James W. 1973 | The Sounds of Wulfila’s Gothic. The Hague: Mouton. |
Markey 1984 | Markey, Thomas L. 1984 | “The Grammaticalization and Institutionalization of Indo-European Hand”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 12.3/4:261—292. |
Markey 1988 | Markey, Thomas L. 1988 | “The Laryngeal Theory and Aspects of Germanic Phonology”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 313—326. |
Markey—Greppin 1990 | Markey, Thomas L., and John A. C. Greppin (eds.) 1990 | When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers. |
Marlow 1974 | Marlow, Elli Johanna Pudas 1974 | More on the Uralo-Dravidian Relationship: A Comparison of the Uralic and Dravidian Etymological Vocabularies. Ph.D. dissertation, University of Texas at Austin. |
Marlow 1980 | Marlow, Elli Johanna Pudas 1980 | “Uralic-Dravidian Hypothesis: What Evidence?”, in: Congressus Quintus Internationalis Fenno-Ugristarum [Fifth International Finno-Ugrian Congress]. Tarku: Suomen Kielen Seura, part 2, pp. 245—250. |
Martin 1966 | Martin, Samuel 1966 | “Lexical Evidence Relating Korean to Japanese”, Language 42.2:185—251. |
Martin 1975 | Martin, Samuel 1975 | “Problems in Establishing the Prehistoric Relationship of Korean and Japanese”, in: Proceedings of the International Symposium Commemorating the 30th Anniversary of Korean Liberation. Seoul: National Academy of Sciences, pp. 149—172. |
Martin 1987 | Martin, Samuel 1987 | The Japanese Language through Time. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. |
Martin 1991 | Martin, Samuel 1991 | “Recent Research on the Relationship of Japanese and Korean”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (ed.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 269—292. |
Martin 1996 | Martin, Samuel 1996 | Consonant Lenition in Korean and the Macro-Altaic Question. Honolulu, HI: University of Hawaii, Center for Korean Studies. |
Martinet 1964 | Martinet, André 1964 | Elements of General Linguistics. English translation by Elizabeth Palmer. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Martinet 1970 | Martinet, André 1970 | Économie des changements phonétiques [Economy of Phonetic Changes]. 3rd edition. Bern: Francke Verlag. |
Martinet 1975 | Martinet, André 1975 | Évolution des langues et reconstruction [Evolution of Languages and Reconstruction]. Vendôme: Presses Universitaires de France. |
Martinet 1975(1953) | Martinet, André 1975(1953) | “Remarques sur le consonantisme sémitique” [Remarks on Semitic Consonantism], in: André Martinet, Évolution des langues et reconstruction [Evolution of Languages and Reconstruction]. Vendôme: Presses Universitaires de France, pp. 248—261. (Originally published in: Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique 49 [1953].) |
Martinet 1975(1959) | Martinet, André 1975(1959) | “La palatalisation ‘spontanée’ de g en arabe” [The “Spontaneous” Palatalization of g in Arabic], in: André Martinet, Évolution des langues et reconstruction [Evolution of Languages and Reconstruction]. Vendôme: Presses Universitaires de France, pp. 233—247. (Originally published in: Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique 54 [1959].) |
Martinet 1975(1967) | Martinet, André 1975(1967) | “Les laryngales” [The Laryngeals], in: André Martinet, Évolution des langues et reconstruction [Evolution of Languages and Reconstruction]. Vendôme: Presses Universitaires de France, pp. 114—168. (Originally published in: Phonetica I [1967].) |
Martinet 1975(1972) | Martinet, André 1975(1972) | “Reflexion sur le vocalisme de l’indo-européen commun” [Thoughts on the Vocalism of Common Indo-European], in: André Martinet, Évolution des langues et reconstruction [Evolution of Languages and Reconstruction]. Vendôme: Presses Universitaires de France, pp. 108—113. (Originally published in: Homenaje a Antonio Tovar [Homage to Antonio Tovar], Madrid: Gredos [1972].) |
Martinet 1986 | Martinet, André 1986 | Des steppes aux océans: l’indo-européen et les “indo-européens” [From the Steppes to the Oceans: Indo-European and the “Indo-Europeans”]. Paris: Payot. |
Martinet 1968 | Martinet, André (ed.) 1968 | Le langage [Language]. Bruges: Éditions Gallimard. |
Martínez—Vaan 2001 | Martínez, Javier, and Michiel De Vaan 2001 | Introducción al avestico [Introduction to Avestan]. Madrid: Ediciones Clásicas. |
Masica 1991 | Masica, Colin P. 1991 | The Indo-Aryan Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Masica 2005 | Masica, Colin P. 2005 | Review of George Cardona and Dhanesh Jain (eds.), The Indo-Aryan Languages, Journal of the American Oriental Society 125.1:79—89. |
Maslova 2003 | Maslova, Elena 2003 | Tundra Yukaghir. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Matasović 2004 | Matasović, Ranko 2004 | Gender in Indo-European. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Matisoff 1990 | Matisoff, James A. 1990 | “On Megalocomparison”, Language 66.1:106—120. |
Matras 2002 | Matras, Yaron 2002 | Romani: A Linguistic Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Matsumoto 1993 | Matsumoto, Katsumi 1993 | “Problem of Ergativity in Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 21.2/4:303—330. |
Matteson—Wheeler—Jackson—Waltz—Christian 1972 | Matteson, Esther, Alva Wheeler, Frances L. Jackson, Nathan E. Waltz, and Diana R. Christian 1972 | Comparative Studies in Amerindian Languages. The Hague: Mouton. |
Matthews 1972 | Matthews, Peter H. 1972 | Inflectional Morphology: A Theoretical Study Based on Aspects of Latin. Reprinted 1981. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Matthews 1974 | Matthews, Peter H. 1974 | Morphology: An Introduction to the Theory of Word Structure. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Matthews [1991] | Matthews, Peter H. [1991] | [2nd edition.] |
Matthews 1981 | Matthews, Peter H. 1981 | Syntax. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Matthews 2003 | Matthews, Peter H. 2003 | Linguistics: A Very Short Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Matthews 2003 | Matthews, Roger 2003 | The Archaeology of Mesopotamia: Theories and Approaches. London: Routledge. |
Mattison 2003 | Mattison, Johanna 2003 | Dependent-Head Synthesis in Nivkh: A Contribution to a Typology of Polysynthesis. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Mattoso—Jr. 1972 | Mattoso, Camara J., Jr. 1972 | The Portuguese Language. Translated by Anthony J. Naro. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Mayer 2000 | Mayer, Harvey E. 2000 | “Two Contemplations to Nostratic”, Eurasian Studies Yearbook 72:149—158. |
Mayer 2001 | Mayer, Harvey E. 2001 | “Basic Nostratic: A Second Look”, Eurasian Studies Yearbook 73:25—34. |
Mayer 2002 | Mayer, Harvey E. 2002 | “The Proto-Nostratic Phonemic Inventory: Large or Small?”, Eurasian Studies Yearbook 74:25—31. |
Mayer 2004 | Mayer, Harvey E. 2004 | “Proto-Nostratic, a Lingua Franca”, Eurasian Studies Yearbook 76:53—63. |
Mayo 1993 | Mayo, Peter 1993 | “Belorussian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 887—947. |
Mayrhofer 1956—1980 | Mayrhofer, Manfred 1956—1980 | Kurzegefaßtes etymologisches Wörterbuch des Altindischen [Short Etymological Dictionary of Old Indic]. 4 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Mayrhofer 1972 | Mayrhofer, Manfred 1972 | A Sanskrit Grammar. English translation by Gordon B. Ford, Jr. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. |
Mayrhofer 1983 | Mayrhofer, Manfred 1983 | Sanskrit und die Sprachen Alteuropas: Zwei Jahrhunderte des Widerspiels von Entdeckungen und Irrtumern [Sanskrit and the Languages of Ancient Europe: Two Hundred Years of Contradictions of Discoveries and Misunderstandings]. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Mayrhofer 1988 | Mayrhofer, Manfred 1988 | “Die Laryngaltheorie im phonologischen Halbband der ‘Indogermanischen Grammatik’” [The Laryngeal Theory in the Phonological Half of the “Indo-European Grammar”], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 327—332. |
Mayrhofer 1994 | Mayrhofer, Manfred 1994 | “L’indo-iranien” [Indo-Iranian], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 101—120. |
Mayrhofer 2004 | Mayrhofer, Manfred 2004 | Die Hauptprobleme der indogermanischen Lautlehre seit Bechtel [The Major Issues in Indo-European Phonology Since Bechtel]. Vienna: Österreichische Akadamie der Wissen-schaften. |
McAlpin 1974a | McAlpin, David W. 1974a | “Toward Proto-Elamo-Dravidian”, Language 50:89—101. |
McAlpin 1974b | McAlpin, David W. 1974b | “Elamite and Dravidian: The Morphological Evidence”, International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 3:343—358. |
McAlpin 1975 | McAlpin, David W. 1975 | “Elamite and Dravidian: Further Evidence of the Relationship”, Current Anthropology 16:105—115. |
McAlpin 1975 | McAlpin, David W. 1975 | “Linguistic Prehistory: The Dravidian Situation”, in: Madhav M. Deshpande and Peter Edwin Hook (eds.), Aryan and Non-Aryan in India. Ann Arbor, MI: Center for South and Southeast Asian Studies, The University of Michigan, pp. 174—189. |
McAlpin 1981 | McAlpin, David W. 1981 | Proto-Elamo-Dravidian: The Evidence and Its Implications. Philadelphia, PA: American Philosophical Society. |
McAlpin 2003 | McAlpin, David W. 2003 | “Velars, Uvulars, and the North Dravidian Hypothesis”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 123.4:521—546. |
McCall 1998 | McCall, Daniel F. 1998 | “The Afroasiatic Language Phylum: African in Origin or Asian?”, Current Anthropology 39.1:139—144. |
McCarter—Jr. 2004 | McCarter, P. Kyle, Jr. 2004 | “Hebrew”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 319—364. |
McIntosh 2002 | McIntosh, Jane R. 2002 | A Peaceful Realm: The Rise and Fall of the Indus Civilization. Boulder, CO: Westview Press. |
McMahon 1994 | McMahon, April M. S. 1994 | Understanding Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
McMahon—Lohr—McMahon 1999 | McMahon, April, Marisa Lohr, and Robert McMahon 1999 | “Family Trees and Favourite Daughters”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 269—285. |
Meid 1971 | Meid, Wolfgang 1971 | Das germanische Präteritum [The Germanic Preterite]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck. |
Meid 1979 | Meid, Wolfgang 1979 | “Der Archaismus des Hethitischen” [The Archaic Nature of Hittite], in Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 159—176. |
Meid 1988 | Meid, Wolfgang 1988 | “Einige persönliche und sachliche Bemerkungen zur Laryngaltheorie” [Some Personal and Pertinent Remarks on the Laryngeal Theory], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 333—353. |
Meier-Brügger 2003 | Meier-Brügger, Michael 2003 | Indo-European Linguistics. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Meillet 1925 | Meillet, Antoine 1925 | La méthode comparative en linguistique historique [The Comparative Method in Historical Linguistics]. Reprinted 1966. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Meillet 1931 | Meillet, Antoine 1931 | “Caractère secondaire du type thématique en indo-européen” [Secondary Nature of the Thematic Type in Indo-European], Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique 32:194—203. |
Meillet 1936 | Meillet, Antoine 1936 | Esquisse d’une grammaire comparée de l’arménien classique [Sketch of a Comparative Grammar of Classical Armenian]. 2nd edition. Vienna: Imprimérie des Pp. Mekhitharistes. |
Meillet 1961 | Meillet, Antoine 1961 | Études sur l’étymologie du vieux slave [Studies on the Etymology of Old Slavic]. 2nd part. 2nd edition. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Meillet 1964 | Meillet, Antoine 1964 | Introduction à l’étude comparative des langues indo-européennes [Introduction to the Comparative Study of the Indo-European Languages]. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. Reprint of 8th edition (1937). |
Meillet 1965a | Meillet, Antoine 1965a | Le slave commun [Common Slavic]. 2nd edition revised and enlarged by André Vaillant. Paris: Librairie Honoré Champion. |
Meillet 1965b | Meillet, Antoine 1965b | Aperçu d’une histoire de la langue grecque [Outline of a History of the Greek Language]. 7th edition. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Meillet 1966 | Meillet, Antoine 1966 | Esquisse d’une histoire de la langue latine [Sketch of a History of the Latin Language]. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Meillet 1967a | Meillet, Antoine 1967a | The Indo-European Dialects. English translation by N. Rosenberg. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. |
Meillet 1967b | Meillet, Antoine 1967b | The Comparative Method in Historical Linguistics. English translation by Gordon B. Ford, Jr. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Meillet 1970 | Meillet, Antoine 1970 | General Characteristics of the Germanic Languages. English translation by William P. Dismukes. Coral Gables, FL: University of Florida Press. |
Meillet 1984 | Meillet, Antoine 1984 | Les dialectes indo-européens [The Indo-European Dialects]. Reprint of 2nd edition (1922). Geneva: Éditions Slatkine. |
Meillet—Cohen 1952 | Meillet, Antoine, and Marcel Cohen (eds.) 1952 | Les langues du monde [The Languages of the World]. 2nd edition. 2 vols. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Meillet—Vendryès 1968 | Meillet, Antoine, and Joseph Vendryès 1968 | Traité de grammaire comparée des langues classiques [Treatise on the Comparative Grammar of the Classical Languages]. 4th revised edition. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Meissner—Oberhuber 1967 | Meissner, Bruno, and Karl Oberhuber 1967 | Die Keilschrift [Cuneiform]. 3rd edition. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Melchert 1973 | Melchert, H. Craig 1973 | “Hittite ḫašša-, ḫanzašša-”, Revue Hittite et Asianique 31:57—70. |
Melchert 1980 | Melchert, H. Craig 1980 | “The Hittite Word for ‘son’,” Indogermanische Forschungen 85:90—95. |
Melchert 1984 | Melchert, H. Craig 1984 | Studies in Hittite Historical Phonology. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Melchert 1987 | Melchert, H. Craig 1987 | “PIE Velars in Luvian”, in: Calvert Watkins (ed.), Studies in Memory of Warren Cowgill. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 182—204. |
Melchert 1989 | Melchert, H. Craig 1989 | Lycian Lexicon. Chapel Hill, NC: The Author. |
Melchert [1993] | Melchert, H. Craig [1993] | [2nd fully revised edition.] |
Melchert 1991 | Melchert, H. Craig 1991 | “Death and the Hittite King”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 182—188. |
Melchert 1992a | Melchert, H. Craig 1992a | “The Third Person Present in Lydian”, Indogermanische Forschungen 97:31—54. |
Melchert 1992b | Melchert, H. Craig 1992b | “The Middle Voice in Lycian”, Historische Sprachforschung 105.2:189—199. |
Melchert 1992c | Melchert, H. Craig 1992c | “Historical Phonology of Anatolian”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 21.3/4:237—257. |
Melchert 1992d | Melchert, H. Craig 1992d | “Hittite Vocalism”, in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 181—196. |
Melchert 1993b | Melchert, H. Craig 1993b | Cuneiform Luvian Lexicon. Chapel Hill, NC: The Author. |
Melchert 1994a | Melchert, H. Craig 1994a | Anatolian Historical Phonology. Amsterdam and Atlanta, GA: Editions Rodopi B.V. |
Melchert 1994b | Melchert, H. Craig 1994b | “Anatolian”, in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-europénnes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 121—136. |
Melchert 2000 | Melchert, H. Craig 2000 | “Aspects of Cuneiform Luvian Nominal Inflection”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 173—183. |
Melchert 2001 | Melchert, H. Craig 2001 | “Critical Response to the Last Four Papers”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 229—235. |
Melchert 2004a | Melchert, H. Craig 2004a | “Luvian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 576—584. |
Melchert 2004b | Melchert, H. Craig 2004b | “Palaic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 585—590. |
Melchert 2004c | Melchert, H. Craig 2004c | “Lycian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 591—600. |
Melchert 2004d | Melchert, H. Craig 2004d | “Lydian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 601—608. |
Melchert 2004e | Melchert, H. Craig 2004e | “Carian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 609—613. |
Melchert 2003 | Melchert, H. Craig (ed.) 2003 | The Luwians. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Melikišvili 1971 | Melikišvili, G. A. 1971 | Die urartäische Sprache [The Urartian Language]. Rome: Biblical Institute Press. |
Melikišvili 1977 | Melikišvili, G. A. 1977 | “Перфект в общекартвельском и общеиндоевропейском” [The Perfect in Common Kartvelian and Common Indo-European], in: V. V. Ivanov, R. Bulatova, V. A. Dybo, and E. A. Helimskij (eds.), Ностратическое языки и ностратическое языкознания (конференция) Тезисы докладов [Reports of the Papers of the Conference on Nostratic Languages and Nostratic Linguistics]. Moscow: Nauka, p. 24. |
Mellaart 1981 | Mellaart, James 1981 | “Anatolia and the Indo-Europeans”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 9.1/2:135—149. |
Mendeloff 1969 | Mendeloff, Henry 1969 | A Manual of Comparative Romance Linguistics: Phonology and Morphology. Washington, DC: The Catholic University of America Press. |
Menges 1960 | Menges, Karl H. 1960 | Morphologische Probleme: Zum Genetiv und Akkusativ [Morphological Problems: On the Genetive and Accusative]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Menges 1961 | Menges, Karl H. 1961 | “Altäische Studien” [Altaic Studies], Islam 1961:1—23. |
Menges 1963 | Menges, Karl H. 1963 | “Zum ural-altäischen -u-/-w- des Medio-Passivs Aspekts im Türkischen” [On Ural-Altaic -u-/-w- of the Medio-Passive Aspect in Turkish], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 35:422—424. |
Menges 1964a | Menges, Karl H. 1964a | “Altäjisch und Drāviḍisch” [Altaic and Dravidian], Orbis 13:66—103. |
Menges 1964b | Menges, Karl H. 1964b | “Etymologika”, Studia Orientalia 28:3—32. |
Menges 1965 | Menges, Karl H. 1965 | “West-östliche Wortbeziehungen” [West-eastern Word Connections], Byzantion 35:495—503. |
Menges 1968 | Menges, Karl H. 1968 | The Turkic Languages and Peoples. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Menges [1995] | Menges, Karl H. [1995] | [2nd revised edition.] |
Menges 1969 | Menges, Karl H. 1969 | “The Dravido-Altaic Relationship”, Journal of Tamil Studies 1:35—39. |
Menges 1971 | Menges, Karl H. 1971 | “Zu einigen jenisejischen und samojedischen Wörtern” [On Several Yenisei and Samoyed Words], Orbis 20:470—471. |
Menges 1974 | Menges, Karl H. 1974 | “Weitere Bemerkungen zu einigen jenisejischen und samojedischen Wörtern” [Further Remarks on Several Yenisei and Samoyed Words], Orbis 23:159—169. |
Menges 1975 | Menges, Karl H. 1975 | “Dravidian and Altaic”, Central Asiatic Journal 19:202—205. |
Menges 1977 | Menges, Karl H. 1977 | “Dravidian and Altaic”, Anthropos 72:129—179. |
Menges 1978 | Menges, Karl H. 1978 | “Problems of Tungus Linguistics”, Anthropos 73:367—400. |
Menges 1982 | Menges, Karl H. 1982 | “Etymologika”, Central Asiatic Journal 26:105—118. |
Menges 1983 | Menges, Karl H. 1983 | “Etymologika zu den altäjischen Beziehungen von Metallen, Haustieren und Gewächsen” [Etymological Notes on the Altaic Correspondences of Metals, Domestic Animals, and Plants], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher (N.F.) 3:102—165. |
Menges 1984 | Menges, Karl H. 1984 | “Korean and Altaic”, Central Asiatic Journal 28:234—283. |
Menges 1989 | Menges, Karl H. 1989 | “Nostratic Linguistics. The First International Symposium”, Anthropos 84:569—573. |
Menges 1990 | Menges, Karl H. 1990 | “Altaic and East Nostratic”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Proto-Languages and Proto-Cultures. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 26—32. |
Merpert 1987 | Merpert, Nikolai Ja. 1987 | “Ethnocultural Change in the Balkans on the Border between the Eneolithic and the Early Bronze Age”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 122—135. |
Mercer 1990 | Mercer, Roger J. 1990 | “The Inception of Farming in the British Isles and the Emergence of Indo-European Languages in NW Europe”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 101—114. |
Mercer 1961a | Mercer, Samuel A. B. 1961a | An Egyptian Grammar. New York, NY: Ungar. |
Mercer 1961b | Mercer, Samuel A. B. 1961b | Assyrian Grammar. New York, NY: Ungar. |
Meriggi 1962 | Meriggi, Piero 1962 | Hieroglyphisch-Hethitisch Glossar [Hieroglyphic Hittite Glossary]. 2nd edition. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Meriggi 1966—1975 | Meriggi, Piero 1966—1975 | Manuale de eteo geroglifico [Manual of Hieroglyphic Hittite]. 4 vols. Rome: Edizioni dell’Ateneo. |
Meriggi 1980 | Meriggi, Piero 1980 | Schizzo grammaticale dell’anatolico [Grammatical Sketch of Anatolian]. Rome: Accademia Nazionale dei Lincei. |
Meyer 1891 | Meyer, Gustav 1891 | Etymologisches Wörterbuch der albanischen Sprache [Etymological Dictionary of the Albanian Language]. Reprinted 1962. Leipzig: Zentralantiquariat der DDR. |
Michalove 2002a | Michalove, Peter A. 2002a | “The Nostratic ‘Accusative’ in *-mA: An Altaic Perspective”, Anthropological Linguistics 44.1:85—95. |
Michalove 2002b | Michalove, Peter A. 2002b | “The Role of Morphology in Nostratic Studies”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 13—17. |
Michalove 2004 | Michalove, Peter A. 2004 | “Vowel Harmony and Other Forms of Vocalic Assimilation in Mongolic”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 165—174. |
Michalove 2005 | Michalove, Peter A. 2005 | Review of Keith W. Slater, A Grammar of Mangghuer: A Mongolic Language of China’s Qinghai-Gansu Sprachbund, Diachronica XXII.1:213. |
Michalove—Ramer 1999 | Michalove, Peter A., and Alexis Manaster Ramer 1999 | “The Use of Reconstructed Forms in Nostratic Studies”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 231—242. |
Michalowski 1992 | Michalowski, Piotr 1992 | “Sumerian”, in: William Bright (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. New York, NY, and Oxford: Oxford University Press, vol. 4, pp. 94—97. |
Michalowski [2003] | Michalowski, Piotr [2003] | [2nd edition, edited by William J. Frawley, vol. 4, pp. 177—180.] |
Michalowski 2004 | Michalowski, Piotr 2004 | “Sumerian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 19—59. |
Migliorini 1984 | Migliorini, Bruno 1984 | The Italian Language. Abridged and recast by T. Gwynfor Griffith. Revised edition. London: Faber and Faber. |
Mikola 1988 | Mikola, Tibor 1988 | “Geschichte der samojedischen Sprachen” [History of the Samoyed Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 219—263. |
Milizia 2004 | Milizia, Paolo 2004 | “Proto-Indo-European Nasal Infixation Rule”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 32.3/4:337—359. |
Miller 1977a | Miller, D. Gary 1977a | “Some Theoretical and Typological Implications of an Indo-European Root Constraint”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.1:31—40. |
Miller 1977b | Miller, D. Gary 1977b | “Bartholomae’s Law and an IE Root Structure Constraint”, in: Paul J. Hopper (ed.), Studies in Descriptive and Historical Linguistics: Festschrift for Winfred P. Lehmann. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 365—392. |
Miller 1967 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1967 | The Japanese Language. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Miller 1971 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1971 | Japanese and the Other Altaic Languages. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Miller 1976 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1976 | “The Relevance of Historical Linguistics for Japanese Studies”, Journal of Japanese Studies 2.2:376—378. |
Miller 1977 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1977 | “The Altaic Accusatives in Light of Old and Middle Korean”, Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 158:157—169. |
Miller 1979a | Miller, Roy Andrew 1979a | “Japanese, Altaic and Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 7:307—313. |
Miller 1979b | Miller, Roy Andrew 1979b | “Old Korean and Altaic”, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 51:1—54. |
Miller 1980 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1980 | Origins of the Japanese Language. Seattle, WA: University of Washington Press. |
Miller 1981 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1981 | “Altaic Origins of the Japanese Verb Classes”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 845—880. |
Miller 1985 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1985 | “Altaic Connections of the Old Japanese Negatives”, Central Asiatic Journal 29:35—84. |
Miller 1986 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1986 | “Tamil and Japanese?”, Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 49.3:557—560. |
Miller 1987 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1987 | “Proto-Altaic *x-”, Central Asiatic Journal 31:19—63. |
Miller 1991 | Miller, Roy Andrew 1991 | “Genetic Connections among Altaic Languages”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 293—327. |
Miranda 1975 | Miranda, Rocky 1975 | “Indo-European Gender: A Study in Semantic and Syntactic Change”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 3.3:199—215. |
Mithun 1999 | Mithun, Marianne 1999 | The Languages of Native North America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Mithun—Campbell 1982 | Mithun, Marianne, and Lyle Campbell 1982 | “On Comparative Syntax”, in: J. Peter Maher, Allan R. Bomhard, and Konrad Koerner (eds.), Papers from the 3rd International Conference on Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 273—291. |
Miyake 2003 | Miyake, Marc Hideo 2003 | Old Japanese: A Phonetic Reconstruction. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Möller 1906 | Möller, Hermann 1906 | Semitisch und Indogermanisch [Semitic and Indo-European]. Reprinted 1978. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Möller 1911 | Möller, Hermann 1911 | Vergleichendes indogermanisch-semitisches Wörterbuch [Comparative Indo-European-Semitic Dictionary]. Reprinted 1970. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Möller 1917 | Möller, Hermann 1917 | Die semitisch-vorindogermanisch laryngalen Konsonanten [The Semitic/ Pre-Indo-European Laryngeal Consonants]. Copenhagen: Andr. Fred. Host and Son. |
Monier-Williams 1899 | Monier-Williams, Monier 1899 | A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Reprinted 1964. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Moore 1951 | Moore, Samuel 1951 | Historical Outlines of English Sounds and Inflections. Revised by Albert H. Marckwardt. Reprinted 1965. Ann Arbor, MI: George Wahr Publishing Co. |
Moore—Knott 1930 | Moore, Samuel, and Thomas A. Knott 1930 | The Elements of Old English. 6th edition. Ann Arbor, MI: George Wahr Publishing Co. |
Morpurgo-Davies 1979 | Morpurgo-Davies, Anna 1979 | “The Luwian Language and the Hittite -ḫi Conjugation”, in: Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 577—610. |
Morris Jones 1913 | Morris Jones, John 1913 | A Welsh Grammar: Historical and Comparative. Reprinted 1955. Oxford: Clarendon Press. |
Moscati 1964 | Moscati, Sabatino (ed.) 1964 | An Introduction to the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Moseley 2002 | Moseley, Christopher 2002 | Livonian. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Mossé 1950 | Mossé, Fernand 1950 | Manuel de l’anglais du moyen âge. I. Vieil anglais [Manual of English of the Middle Ages: I. Old English]. Paris: Aubier-Montaigne. |
Mossé 1952 | Mossé, Fernand 1952 | A Handbook of Middle English. English translation by James A. Walker. Baltimore, MD: The Johns Hopkins University Press. |
Mossé 1956 | Mossé, Fernand 1956 | Manuel de la langue gotique [Manual of the Gothic Language]. 2nd edition. Paris: Éditions Montaigne. |
Mostaert 1931 | Mostaert, A. 1931 | “The Mongols of Kansu and their Language”, Bulletin of the Catholic University of Peking 8:75—89. |
Moulton 1967 | Moulton, William G. 1967 | “Types of Phonemic Change”, in: To Honor Roman Jakobson. The Hague: Mouton, part II, pp. 1393—1407. |
Moulton 1972 | Moulton, William G. 1972 | “The Proto-Germanic Non-Syllabics (Consonants)”, in: Franz van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 141—173. |
Mous—Qorro—Kießling 2002 | Mous, Maarten, Martha Qorro, and Roland Kießling 2002 | Iraqw-English Dictionary. Köln: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag. |
Mudrak 1989a | Mudrak, Oleg 1989a | “Eskaleutian Roots”, in Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Buchum: Brockmeyer, pp. 112—124. |
Mudrak 1989b | Mudrak, Oleg 1989b | “Kamchukchee Roots”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Explorations in Language Macrofamilies. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 90—110. |
Mudrak 2000 | Mudrak, Oleg 2000 | Этимологический словарь чукотско-камчатских языков [Etymological Dictionary of the Chukchi-Kamchatkan Languages]. Moskow: Языки русской культуры (Jazyki russkoj kulÎtury), Studia Philologica. |
Müller 1855 | Müller, F. Max 1855 | A Survey of Languages: Semitic, Arian, and Turanian. Reprinted 1976. Delhi: NAG Publishers. |
Müller 1975 | Müller, Walter W. 1975 | “Beiträge zur hamito-semitischen Wortvergleichung” [Contributions to Hamito-Semitic Word Comparison], in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (ed.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 63—74. |
Murpurgo-Davies 1980 | Murpurgo-Davies, Anna 1980 | “Analogy and the -an Datives of Hieroglyphic Luwian”, in: Anatolian Studies XXX (1980): Journal of the British Institute of Archaeology at Ankara. Special Number in Honour of the Seventieth Birthday of Professor O. R. Gurney, 28th January, 1981. London: The British Institute of Archaeology at Ankara, pp. 123—137. |
Murtonen 1966 | Murtonen, A. 1966 | “The Semitic Sibilants”, Journal of Semitic Studies 11:135—150. |
Murtonen 1967 | Murtonen, A. 1967 | Early Semitic: A Diachronical Inquiry into the Relationship of Ethiopic to the Other So-Called South-East Semitic Languages. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Murtonen 1989 | Murtonen, A. 1989 | Hebrew in its West Semitic Setting. A Comparative Survey of Non-Masoretic Hebrew Dialects and Traditions. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Murtonen 1990 | Murtonen, A. 1990 | Comments on the Afroasiatic material in Allan R. Bomhard’s “Lexical Parallels between Proto-Indo-European and Other Languages” (Supplement to Mother Tongue 9). Mother Tongue 11. |
Musset 1965 | Musset, Lucien 1965 | Introduction à la runologie [Introduction to Runic Studies]. Paris: Aubier-Montaigne. |
Naert 1958 | Naert, Pierre 1958 | La situation linguistique de l’aïnou: aïnou et indoeuropéen [The Linguistic Situtation of Ainu: Ainu and Indo-European]. Lund: Gleerup. |
Naert 1962 | Naert, Pierre 1962 | “Contacts lexicaux aïnou-gilyak” [Ainu-Gilyak Lexical Contacts], Orbis 11:199—229. |
Nafiqoff | Nafiqoff, Shamil n.d. | “Syntactic Relationship Areas in Some Languages of Europe, Central and North Asia: A Comparative Typological Sketch.” Manuscript. |
Nafiqoff 2003 | Nafiqoff, Shamil 2003 | Бореальные элементы в башкирском языке [Nostratic Vestiges in the Bashkir Language]. Ufa: Publishing House “Gilem”. |
Nagy 1970 | Nagy, Gregory 1970 | Greek Dialects and the Transformation of an Indo-European Process. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Nakhleh—Ringe—Warnow 2005 | Nakhleh, Luay, Don Ringe, and Tandy Warnow 2005 | “Perfect Phylogenetic Networks: A New Methodology for Reconstructing the Evolutionary History of Natural Languages”, Language 81.2:382—420. |
Nandriş—Auty 1959—1960 | Nandriş, Grigore, and R. Auty 1959—1960 | Handbook of Old Church Slavonic. 2 vols. London: University of London. |
Napoli 1978 | Napoli, Donna Jo (ed.) 1978 | Elements of Tone, Stress, and Intonation. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Napolskikh 1995 | Napolskikh, Vladimir V. 1995 | Uralic Original Home: History of Studies. A Preliminary View. Izhevsk: Udmurt Institute for History, Language, and Literature. |
Narten 1964 | Narten, Johanna 1964 | Die sigmatischen Aoriste im Veda [The Sigmatic Aorist in the Veda]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Nebes—Stein 2004 | Nebes, Norbert, and Peter Stein 2004 | “Ancient South Arabian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 454—487. |
Nemeskéri—Száthmáry 1987 | Nemeskéri, Janos, and László Száthmáry 1987 | “An Anthropological Evaluation of the Indo-European Problem: An Anthropological and Demigraphic Transition in the Danube Basin”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 88—121. |
Neroznak 1992 | Neroznak, Vladimir P. 1992 | “Phrygian”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 271—278. |
Nettle 1999 | Nettle, Daniel 1999 | “Towards a Future History of Macrofamily Research”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 403—419. |
Neu 1979 | Neu, Erich 1979 | “Einige Überlegungen zu den hethitischen Kasusendungen” [Some Thoughts on the Hittite Case Endings], in Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 177—196. |
Neu 1981 | Neu, Erich 1981 | “Noch einmal hethitisch ḫeu- ‘Regen’” [Once Again Hittite ḫeu- ‘Rain’], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 203—212. |
Neu 1992 | Neu, Erich 1992 | “Zum Kollektivum im Hethitischen” [On the Collective in Hittite], in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 197—212. |
Neu 1982 | Neu, Erich (ed.) 1982 | Investigationes Philologicae et Comparativae: Gedenkschrift für Heinz Kronasser [Philological and Comparative Investigations: Memorial Volume for Heinz Kronasser]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Neu—Meid 1979 | Neu, Erich, and Wolfgang Meid (eds.) 1979 | Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck. |
Neumann 1969 | Neumann, Günter 1969 | “Lykisch” [Lycian], in: B. Spuler (ed.), Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 358—359. |
Neumann 1988 | Neumann, Günter 1988 | Phrygisch und Griechisch [Phrygian and Greek]. Vienna: Österreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften. |
Newman 1977 | Newman, Paul 1977 | Chadic Classification and Reconstruction. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics 5.1.) Malibu, CA: Undena Publications.: |
Newman 1980 | Newman, Paul 1980 | The Classification of Chadic within Afroasiatic. Leiden: Universitaire Pers Leiden. |
Newman 1987 | Newman, Paul 1987 | “Hausa and the Chadic Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 705—723. |
Newman 2000 | Newman, Paul 2000 | The Hausa Language: An Encyclopedic Reference Grammar. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. |
Newman—Newman 1977 | Newman, Paul, and Roxana Ma Newman 1977 | Modern Hausa-English Dictionary. Ibadan: Oxford University Press. |
Newmark—Hubbard—Prifti 1982 | Newmark, Leonard, Philip Hubbard, and Peter Prifti 1982 | Standard Albanian: A Reference Grammar for Students. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Nichols 1990 | Nichols, Johanna 1990 | “Linguistic Diversity and the First Settlement of the New World”, Language 66.3:475—521. |
Nichols 1992 | Nichols, Johanna 1992 | Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago, IL: The University of Chicago Press. |
Nichols 1993 | Nichols, Johanna 1993 | “The Origin and Dispersal of Indo-European”. Manuscript. |
Nichols 1997 | Nichols, Johanna 1997 | “The Epicentre of Indo-European Linguistic Spread”, in: Roger Blench and Matthew Spriggs (eds.), Archaeology and Language I: Theoretical and Methodological Orientations. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 122—148. |
Nida 1949 | Nida, Eugene A. 1949 | Morphology: The Descriptive Analysis of Words. 2nd edition. Reprinted 1966. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press. |
Nida 1975 | Nida, Eugene A. 1975 | Language Structure and Translation. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Niepokuj 1997 | Niepokuj, Mary 1997 | The Development of Verbal Reduplication in Indo-European. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Nikolaeva 2006 | Nikolaeva, Irina 2006 | A Historical Dictionary of Yukaghir. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Nissen 1988 | Nissen, Hans J. 1988 | The Early History of the Ancient Near East, 9000 — 2000 B.C. Translated from the German by Elizabeth Lutzeier, with Kenneth J. Northcott. Chicago, IL, and London: University of Chicago Press. |
Noreen 1970 | Noreen, Adolf 1970 | Altnordische Grammatik I [Old Norse Grammar I]. University, AL: University of Alabama Press. |
Norman 1978 | Norman, Jerry 1978 | A Concise Manchu-English Dictionary. Seattle, WA: University of Washington Press. |
Norman 1987 | Norman, Jerry 1987 | Chinese. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Normier 1977 | Normier, Rudolf 1977 | “Idg. Konsonantismus germ. ‘Lautverschiebung’ und Vernersches Gesetz” [Indo-European Consonantism, Germanic “Sound Shift” and Verner’s Law], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 91:171—218. |
Nugteren 2003 | Nugteren, Hans 2003 | “Shira Yughur”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 265—285. |
Nussbaum 1986 | Nussbaum, Alan J. 1986 | Head and Horn in Indo-European. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
O’Connor 1989 | O’Connor, Michael 1989 | “Semitic *mgn and its Supposed Sanskrit Origin”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 109.1:25—32. |
O’Leary 1923 | O’Leary, De Lacy 1923 | Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages. Reprinted 1969. Amsterdam: Philo Press. |
Oates 2003 | Oates, Joan 2003 | “Early Evidence for Horse and the Riding of Equid in Western Asia”, in: Marsha Levine, Colin Renfrew, and Katie Boyle (eds.), Prehistoric Steppe Adaptation and the Horse. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 115—125. |
Oettinger 1988 | Oettinger, Norbert 1988 | “Der indogermanische Nominativ Dual aus laryngalistische Sicht” [The Indo-European Nominative Dual from a Laryngeal Point of View], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 355—359. |
Oettinger 1992 | Oettinger, Norbert 1992 | “Die hethitischen Verbalstämme” [The Hittite Verbal Stems], in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 213—252. |
Oettinger 2000 | Oettinger, Norbert 2000 | “Hethitisch sēr ‘auf’” [Hittite sēr ‘above, over, on, upon, on top of’], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 185—188. |
Ohno 1970 | Ohno, Susumu 1970 | The Origin of the Japanese Language. Tokyo: Japan Cultural Society. |
Ohno 1980 | Ohno, Susumu 1980 | Sound Correspondences between Tamil and Japanese. Tokyo: Gakushuin University. |
Ohno 1983 | Ohno, Susumu 1983 | “A Study of the Relationship between Tamil and Japanese”, International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 12:366—396. |
Ölberg—Schmidt—Bothien 1985 | Ölberg, Hermann M., Gernot Schmidt, and Heinz Bothien (eds.) 1985 | Sprachwissenschaftliche Forschungen: Festschrift für Johann Knobloch [Linguistic Investigations: Commemorative Volume for Johann Knobloch]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck. |
Onions 1966 | Onions, C. T. (ed.) 1966 | The Oxford Dictionary of English Etymology. Oxford: Clarendon Press. |
Oppenheim—Reiner—Rowton 1956— | Oppenheim, A. Leo, Erika Reiner, and Michael B. Rowton (eds.) 1956— | The Assyrian Dictionary of the Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago. Chicago, IL: The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago. |
Orël 1997 | Orël, Vladimir 1997 | The Language of the Phrygians. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books. |
Orël 1998 | Orël, Vladimir 1998 | Albanian Etymological Dictionary. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Orël 2000 | Orël, Vladimir 2000 | A Concise Historical Grammar of the Albanian Language. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Orël 1990 | Orël, Vladimir and Sergej Starostin 1990 | “Etruscan as an East Caucasian Language”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Proto-Languages and Proto-Cultures. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 60—66. |
Orël—Stolbova 1988 | Orël, Vladimir E., and Olga V. Stolbova 1988 | “К реконструкции праафразийского вокализма 1-2” [Toward the Reconstruction of Proto-Afrasian Vocalism 1-2], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1988.5:66—83. |
Orël—Stolbova 1990 | Orël, Vladimir E., and Olga V. Stolbova 1990 | “К реконструкции праафразийского вокализма 3-4” [Toward the Reconstruction of Proto-Afrasian Vocalism 3-4], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1990.2:75—90. |
Orël—Stolbova 1995 | Orël, Vladimir E., and Olga V. Stolbova 1995 | Hamito-Semitic Etymological Dictionary: Materials for a Reconstruction. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Oshiro 2000 | Oshiro, Terumasa 2000 | “Hieroglyphic Luwian tuwati and u(n)zati”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 189—193. |
Osthoff—Brugmann 1878—1910 | Osthoff, Hermann, and Karl Brugmann 1878—1910 | Morphologische Untersuchungen auf dem Gebiete der indogermanischen Sprachen [Morphological Investigations in the Domain of the Indo-European Languages]. 3 vols. Reprinted 1974—1975. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Oswalt 1991 | Oswalt, Robert L. 1991 | “A Method for Assessing Distant Linguistic Relationship”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (ed.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 389—404. |
Oswalt 1998 | Oswalt, Robert L. 1998 | “A Probabilistic Evaluation of North Eurasiatic Nostratic”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 199—216. |
Packard 1974 | Packard, David W. 1974 | Minoan Linear A. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Paliga 1989 | Paliga, Sorin 1989 | “Proto-Indo-European, Pre-Indo-European, Old European Archaeological Evidence and Linguistic Investigation”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 17.3/4:309—334. |
Palmaitis 1974 | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1974 | “Asmeniani ivardziai ir borealiniu kalbu proto-sistemos rekonstravimas (remiantis vakariniu tarmiu medziago)” [Personal pronouns in Reconstructing the Grammatical Proto-System of Borealic], Baltistica 10.1:53—62. |
Palmaitis 1977 | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1977 | “Parent Language — Genetic or Contact Relationship?”, Indogermanische Forschungen 82:50—60. |
Palmaitis 1978 | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1978 | “Опыт реконструкции общебореальной (ностратической) морфологии в уральско-индоевропейско-афразийском аспекте. Вопрос ‘эргатива’” [An Attempt at the Reconstruction of Common Boreal (Nostratic) Morphology in a Uralic/Indo-European/Afrasian Aspect. The Question of the “Ergative”], Lingua Posnaniensis 21:9—24. |
Palmaitis 1979 | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1979 | “Proto-Indo-European Vocalism and the Development of the Indo-European Declensional Models”, Indogermanische Forschungen 94:17—48. |
Palmaitis 1980 | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1980 | “Indo-European Vowel Gradation and the Development of Declensional Models in the Aspect of Diachronic Typology”, Baltistica 16.1:93—94. |
Palmaitis 1981a | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1981a | “On the Origin of the Semitic Marker of the Feminine”, Archív Orientální 49.3:263—269. |
Palmaitis 1981b | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1981b | “The New Look of Indo-European Declension (Thematic Stems)”, Indogermanische Forschungen 86:71—95. |
Palmaitis 1984 | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1984 | “Indo-European Masdar as the 3rd Person and yrá in Baltic”, Baltistica 20.2:126—135. |
Palmaitis 1986a | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1986a | “Kartwelologische Miszellen II” [Kartvelian Miscellanea II], Georgica 9:13—20. |
Palmaitis 1986b | Palmaitis, Mykolas L. 1986b | “New Contributions to ‘Proto-Nostratic’.” Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, Indogermanische Forschungen 91:305—317. |
Palmer 1971 | Palmer, F. R. 1971 | “Cushitic”, in: Carleton T. Hodge (ed.), Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 80—95. |
Palmer 1954 | Palmer, Leonard R. 1954 | The Latin Language. London: Faber and Faber. |
Palmer 1972 | Palmer, Leonard R. 1972 | Descriptive and Comparative Linguistics: A Critical Introduction. New York, NY: Crane, Russak and Company. |
Palmer 1980 | Palmer, Leonard R. 1980 | The Greek Language. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities Press. |
Paper 1955 | Paper, Herbert H. 1955 | The Phonology and Morphology of Royal Achaemenid Elamite. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press. |
Paper 1978 | Paper, Herbert H. 1978 | Jewish Languages: Theme and Variations. Cambridge, MA: Association for Jewish Studies. |
Pardee 1997 | Pardee, Dennis 1997 | “Ugaritic”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 131—144. |
Pardee 2004a | Pardee, Dennis 2004a | “Ugaritic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 288—318. |
Pardee 2004b | Pardee, Dennis 2004b | “Canaanite Dialects”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 386—426. |
Parkinson 1989 | Parkinson, Jim 1989 | “A Nostratic Word List: Reconstructions by V. Illich-Svitych”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Explorations in Language Macrofamilies. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 128—162. |
Parkinson 1987 | Parkinson, Stephen 1987 | “Portuguese”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 260—278. |
Parkinson 1988 | Parkinson, Stephen 1988 | “Portuguese”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 131—169. |
Parpola 1994 | Parpola, Asko 1994 | Deciphering the Indus Valley Script. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Parpola 2002 | Parpola, Asko 2002 | “Πανδαιν and Sītā: On the Historical Background of the Sanskrit Epics”, in: Joel P. Brereton and Stephanie Jamison (eds.), Indic and Iranian Studies in Honor of Stanley Insler on His Sixty-fifth Birthday. (= Journal of the American Oriental Society, 122.2.) Ann Arbor, MI: American Oriental Society, pp. 361—373. |
Parsons 1975 | Parsons, F. W. 1975 | “Hausa and Chadic”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 421—458. |
Patrie 1981 | Patrie, James 1981 | “A Comparative Analysis of the Numeral Systems of Ainu, Korean and Japanese”, The Bulletin of the International Institute for Linguistic Sciences (Kyoto: Sangyō University) 4:243—251. |
Patrie 1982 | Patrie, James 1982 | The Genetic Relationship of the Ainu Language. Honolulu, HI: The University Press of Hawaii. |
Payne 1981 | Payne, J. R. 1981 | “Iranian Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The Languages of the Soviet Union. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 158—179. |
Payne 1987 | Payne, J. R. 1987 | “Iranian Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 514—522. |
Payne Smith 1903 | Payne Smith, R. 1903 | A Compendious Syriac Dictionary. Edited by J. Payne Smith. Reprinted 1976. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Pearson 1991—1992 | Pearson, Roger (ed.) 1991—1992 | Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Studies in Honor of Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man.: |
Pedersen 1893a | Pedersen, Holger 1893a | “r-n-stämme. Studien über den Stammwechsel in der Declination der idg. Nomina” [r-n-Stems. Studies on the Stem Alternation in the Declension of the Indo-European Nouns], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 32:240—272. |
Pedersen 1893b | Pedersen, Holger 1893b | “Das Präsensinfix n” [The Present Infix n], Indogermanische Forschungen 2:285—332. |
Pedersen 1900 | Pedersen, Holger 1900 | “Wie viel Laute gab es im Indogermanischen?” [How Many Sounds Were There in Indo-European?], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 36:74—110. |
Pedersen 1905 | Pedersen, Holger 1905 | Les pronoms démonstratifs de l’ancien arménien. Avec un appendice sur les alternances vocaliques indo-europénnes [The Demonstrative Pronouns of Ancient Armenian. With an Appendix on the Indo-European Vowel Alternations]. Copenhagen: Levin and Munksgaard. |
Pedersen 1907/1908 | Pedersen, Holger 1907/1908 | “Die indogermanisch-semitische Hypothese und die indoger-manische Lautlehre” [The Indo-European/Semitic Hypothesis and Indo-European Phonology], Indogermanische Forschungen 22:341—365. |
Pedersen 1909—1913 | Pedersen, Holger 1909—1913 | Vergleichende Grammatik der keltischen Sprachen [Comparative Grammar of the Celtic Languages]. 2 vols. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck and Ruprecht. |
Pedersen 1926 | Pedersen, Holger 1926 | La cinquième déclinaison latine [The Latin Fifth Declension]. Copenhagen: Levin and Munksgaard. |
Pedersen 1931 | Pedersen, Holger 1931 | The Discovery of Language: Linguistic Science in the Nineteenth Century. English translation by John Webster Spargo. Midland book edition 1962. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Pedersen 1938 | Pedersen, Holger 1938 | Hittitisch und die anderen indoeuropäischen Sprachen [Hittite and the Other Indo-European Languages]. Copenhagen: Levin and Munksgaard. |
Pedersen 1945 | Pedersen, Holger 1945 | Lykisch und Hittitisch [Lycian and Hittite]. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. |
Pedersen 1951 | Pedersen, Holger 1951 | Die gemeinindoeuropäischen und vorindoeuropäischen Verschlußlaute [The Common Indo-European and the Pre-Indo-European Occlusives]. Copenhagen: Munksgaard. |
Pedersen 1982 | Pedersen, Holger 1982 | Kleine Schriften zum Armenischen [Brief Writings on Armenian]. Edited by Rüdiger Schmitt. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Pedersen 1983 | Pedersen, Holger 1983 | A Glance at the History of Linguistics, with Particular Regard to the Historical Study of Phonology. English translation by Caroline C. Henriksen. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Pejros—Shnirelman 1988 | Pejros, Ilja I., and Viktor A. Shnirelman 1988 | “In Search of the Dravidian Homeland”. Paper presented at the symposium “Language and Prehistory”, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, November 7—12, 1988. Abstract, “Toward an Understanding of Proto-Dravidian Prehistory”, published in: Vitaly Shevoroshin (ed.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Bochum: Brockmeyer, pp. 70—71. |
Penchoen 1973 | Penchoen, Thomas G. 1973 | Tamazight of Ayt Ndhir. Malibu, CA: Undena. |
Penney 1988 | Penney, J. H. W. 1988 | “Laryngeals and the Indo-European Root”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruk-tion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 361—372. |
Penney 2004 | Penney, J. H. W. (ed.) 2004 | Indo-European Perspectives: Studies in Honour of Anna Murpurgo-Davies. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Penzl 1972 | Penzl, Herbert 1972 | “Methods of Comparative Germanic Linguistics”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 1—42. |
Penzl 1975 | Penzl, Herbert 1975 | Von Urgermanischen zum Neuhochdeutschen: Eine historische Verschlußlaute [From Proto-Germanic to New High German: An Historical Phonology]. Berlin: Erich Schmidt Verlag. |
Perniola 1997 | Perniola, Vito 1997 | Pali Grammar. Oxford: Pali Text Society. |
Perrot 1988 | Perrot, Jean (ed.) 1988 | Les langues dans le monde ancien et moderne. Part III: Les langues chamito-sémitiques [Languages in the Ancient and Modern World. Part III: The Hamito-Semitic Languages], by David Cohen with the collaboration of Felice Israël, Michel Masson, Maxime Rodinson, Ogo Kapeliuk, Pascal Vernu, Lionel Galand, and Robert Hetzron. Paris: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique. |
Perrotin 1999 | Perrotin, Damien Erwan 1999 | “Towards a Peri-Indo-European Interpretation of the Etruscan Language”, The Mankind Quarterly 40.1:57—78. |
Peters 1980 | Peters, Martin 1980 | Untersuchungen zur Vertretung der indogermanischen Laryngale im Griechischen [Investigations into the Treatment of the Indo-European Laryngeals in Greek]. Vienna: Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften. |
Peters 1988 | Peters, Martin 1988 | “Zur Frage strukturell uneinheitlicher Laryngalreflexe in idg. Einzelsprachen” [On the Question of Structurally Irregular Laryngeal Reflexes in Individual Indo-European Languages], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 373—381. |
Petersen 1932 | Petersen, Walter 1932 | “The Personal Endings of the Hittite Verb”, American Journal of Philology 53:193—212. |
Petersen 1933 | Petersen, Walter 1933 | “Hittite and Tocharian”, Language 9:12—34. |
Petersen 1934 | Petersen, Walter 1934 | “The Origin of Hittite ḫ”, Language 10:307—322. |
Petersen 1939 | Petersen, Walter 1939 | “Hittite ḫ and Saussure’s Doctrine of the Long Vowels”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 59:175—199. |
Petráček 1975 | Petráček, Karel 1975 | “Le dynamisme du système phonologique proto-sémitique et les problèmes de la phonologie chamito-sémitique” [The Dynamism of the Proto-Semitic Phonological System and the Problems of Hamito-Semitic Phonology], in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 161—168. |
Petráček 1976 | Petráček, Karel 1976 | “K problematice nostratické teorie (z hlediska fonologie semitohamitských jazyků)” [On the Problems of the Nostratic Theory (from the Viewpoint of the Hamito-Semitic Languages)], Slovo a Slovesnost 37:60—61. |
Petráček 1981 | Petráček, Karel 1981 | “K teorie laryngál” [On the Laryngeal Theory], Slovo a Slovesnost 42:262—268. |
Petráček 1982 | Petráček, Karel 1982 | “La racine en indoeuropéen et en chamito-sémitique et leurs perspectives comparatives” [The Root in Indo-European and Hamito-Semitic and their Comparative Perspectives], Istituto Orientale di Napoli, Annali 42:381—402. |
Petráček 1983 | Petráček, Karel 1983 | “Semitohamitské jazyky a nostratická hypotéza” [The Hamito-Semitic Languages and the Nostratic Hypothesis], Slovo a Slovesnost 44:57—63. |
Petráček 1988a | Petráček, Karel 1988a | Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, Archív Orientální 56:65—69. |
Petráček 1988b | Petráček, Karel 1988b | Altägyptisch, Hamitosemitisch und ihre Beziehungen zu einigen Sprachfamilien in Afrika und Asien: Vergleichende Studien [Old Egyptian, Hamito-Semitic, and their Relationship to Several Language Families in Africa and Asia: Comparative Studies]. Prague: Univerzita Karlova. |
Petráček 1989 | Petráček, Karel 1989 | Úvod do hamitosemitské (afroasijské) jazykovédy [Introduction to Hamito-Semitic (Afroasiatic) Linguistics]. Prague: Univerzita Karlova. |
Peust 1999 | Peust, Carsten 1999 | Egyptian Phonology: The Introduction to the Phonology of a Dead Language. Göttingen: Peust and Gutschmidt Verlag. |
Pfiffig 1969 | Pfiffig, Ambros Josef 1969 | Die Etruskische Sprache [The Etruscan Language]. Graz: Akademische Druck- und Verlaganstalt. |
Pharr 1959 | Pharr, Clyde 1959 | Homeric Greek. Norman, OK: University of Oklahoma Press. |
Phillips 2004 | Phillips, John D. 2004 | Manx. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Pia 1965 | Pia, John Joseph 1965 | Somali Sounds and Inflections. Ph.D. Dissertation, Indiana University. |
Picard 1994 | Picard, Marc 1994 | Principles and Methods in Historical Phonology: From Proto-Algonkian to Arapaho. Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press. |
Picard 1995 | Picard, Marc 1995 | “Issues in the Glottalic Theory of Indo-European: The Comparative Method, Typology and Naturalness”, Word 46: 225—235. |
Piesarskas—Sviecevičius 1969 | Piesarskas, B., and B. Sviecevičius 1969 | Lietuvių-Anglų Kalbų Žodynas [Lithuanian-English Dictionary]. JAV. |
Pike 1947 | Pike, Kenneth 1947 | Phonemics. Ann Arbor, MI: The University of Michigan Press. |
Pike 1972 | Pike, Kenneth 1972 | Selected Writings. Edited by Ruth M. Brend. The Hague: Mouton. |
Pirart 1990 | Pirart, Eric 1990 | “Le traitement des laryngales finales en védique ancien” [The Treatment of Final Laryngeals in Ancient Vedic], in: Jean Kellens (ed.), La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”, pp. 137—147. |
Pisani 1961 | Pisani, Vittore 1961 | Glottologia indeuropea [Indo-European Linguistics]. 3rd edition. Torino: Rosenberg and Sellier. |
Pisani 1967 | Pisani, Vittore 1967 | “La questione indouralica e la parentela linguistica” [The Indo-Uralic Question and Linguistic Relationship], Paideia 22:121—125. |
Pisani 1971 | Pisani, Vittore 1971 | “Parentela fra le grandi famiglie linguistiche” [Relationship Among the Great Language Families], Paideia 26:317—326. |
Pisani 1972 | Pisani, Vittore 1972 | Review of V[ladislav] M[arkovič] Illič-Svityč, Опыт сравнения ностратических языков (семитохамитский, картвельский, индоевропейский, уральский, дравидийский, алтайский) [An Attempt at a Comparison of the Nostratic Languages (Hamito-Semitic, Kartvelian, Indo-European, Uralic, Dravidian, Altaic)], vol. 1, Archivo Glottologico Italiano 57:69—92. |
Pisani 1974 | Pisani, Vittore 1974 | Crestomazia indeuropea [Indo-European Chrestomathy]. Torino: Rosenberg and Sellier. |
Pischel 1900 | Pischel, Richard 1900 | Grammatik der Prakrit-Sprachen [Grammar of the Prakrit Languages]. Reprinted 1973. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Plank 1979 | Plank, Frans (ed.) 1979 | Ergativity: Toward a Theory of Grammatical Relations. New York, NY, and London: Academic Press. |
Plöchl 2003 | Plöchl, Reinhold 2003 | Einführung ins Hieroglyphen-Luwische [Introduction to Hieroglyphic Luwian]. Dresden: Verlag der TU Dresden. |
Poetto 1974 | Poetto, Massimo 1974 | “Hittite šarap- and Connected Questions”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.4:435—438. |
Pohl 1994 | Pohl, Heinz-Dieter 1994 | “Le balte et le slave” [Baltic and Slavic], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 233—250. |
Pokorny 1959—1969 | Pokorny, Julius 1959—1969 | Indogermanisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Indo-European Etymological Dictionary]. 2 vols. Bern: Francke Verlag. |
Pokorny 1969 | Pokorny, Julius 1969 | Altirische Grammatik [Old Irish Grammar]. 2nd edition. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Polański 1993 | Polański, Kazimierz 1993 | “Polabian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 795—824. |
Poljakov 1995 | Poljakov, Oleg 1995 | Das Problem der balto-slawischen Sprachgemeinschaft [The Problem of the Balto-Slavic Speech Community]. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang. |
Polomé 1949 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1949 | “A West Germanic Reflex of the ‘Verschärfung’,” Language 24:182—189. |
Polomé 1950 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1950 | “Reflexes de laryngales en arménien” [Reflexes of Laryngeals in Armenian], Annuaire de l’Institut de Philologie et d’Histoire Orientales et Slaves 10:539—569. |
Polomé 1952 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1952 | “On the Origin of Hittite ḫ”, Language 28:444—446. |
Polomé 1965 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1965 | “The Laryngeal Theory So Far”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 9—78. |
Polomé 1966 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1966 | “The Position of Illyrian and Venetic”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 59—76. |
Polomé 1968 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1968 | “The Indo-European Numeral for ‘five’ and Hittite panku- ‘all’,” in: J. C. Heesterman, G. H. Schokker, and V. I. Subramoniam (eds.), Pratidānam: Indian, Iranian and Indo-European Studies Presented to Franciscus Bernardus Kuipers on his Sixtieth Birthday. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 98—101. |
Polomé 1970 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1970 | “Germanic and Regional Indo-European (Lexicography and Culture)”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 55—72. |
Polomé 1971 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1971 | “Reflexes of Laryngeals in Indo-Iranian with Special Reference to the Problem of the Voiceless Aspirates”, in: J. Weinstock (ed.), Saga og Språk: Studies in Language and Literature in Honor of Lee Hollander. Austin, TX: Pemberton Press, pp. 233—250. |
Polomé 1972 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1972 | “Germanic and the Other Indo-European Languages”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 43—69. |
Polomé 1980 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1980 | “Armenian and the Proto-Indo-European Laryngeals”, in: John A. C. Greppin (ed.), First International Conference on Armenian Linguistics, Proceedings. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books, pp. 17—33. |
Polomé 1982a | Polomé, Edgar C. 1982a | “Indo-European Culture with Special Attention to Religion”, in: Edgar C. Polomé (ed.), The Indo-Europeans in the Fourth and Third Millennia. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publications, pp. 156—172. |
Polomé 1982b | Polomé, Edgar C. 1982b | “Germanic as an Archaic Indo-European Language”, in: Kurt R. Jankowsky and Ernst S. Dick (eds.), Festschrift für Karl Schneider. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 51—59. |
Polomé 1987a | Polomé, Edgar C. 1987a | “Recent Developments in the Laryngeal Theory”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:159—167. |
Polomé 1987b | Polomé, Edgar C. 1987b | “Who Are the Germanic People?”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 216—244. |
Polomé 1988 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1988 | “Are There Traces of Laryngeals in Germanic?”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formen-systems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 383—414. |
Polomé 1990a | Polomé, Edgar C. 1990a | “The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: The Linguistic Evidence”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.3/4:331—338. |
Polomé 1990b | Polomé, Edgar C. 1990b | “Types of Linguistic Evidence for Early Contact: Indo-Europeans and Non-Indo-Europeans”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When World’s Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 267—289. |
Polomé 1992 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1992 | Comparative Linguistics and the Reconstruction of Indo-European Culture”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 369—390. |
Polomé 1994 | Polomé, Edgar C. 1994 | “Isoglosses and the Reconstruction of the IE Dialectal Split”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 22.3/4:289—305. |
Polomé 1982 | Polomé, Edgar C. (ed.) 1982 | Indo-Europeans in the Fourth and Third Millennia. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers. |
Polomé—Winter 1992 | Polomé, Edgar C., and Werner Winter (eds.) 1992 | Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Polotsky 1971 | Polotsky, H. J. 1971 | “Coptic”, in: Carleton T. Hodge (ed.), Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 67—79. |
Poppe 1934 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1934 | “Über die Sprache der Daguren” [On the Language of the Dagurs], Asia Major 10:1—32, 183—210. |
Poppe 1951 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1951 | Khalkha-mongolische Grammatik [Khalkha-Mongolian Gram-mar]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Poppe 1953 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1953 | “Remarks on the Salar Language”, Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 16.2/4:438—477. |
Poppe 1955 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1955 | Introduction to Mongolian Comparative Studies. Reprinted 1987. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura. |
Poppe 1960 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1960 | Vergleichende Grammatik der altäischen Sprachen [Comparative Grammar of the Altaic Languages]. Teil I: Vergleichende Lautlehre. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Poppe 1962 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1962 | Buriat Grammar. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 2.) Bloomington, IN: University of Indiana Publications. |
Poppe 1963 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1963 | Tatar Manual. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 20.) Bloomington, IN: University of Indiana Publications. |
Poppe 1965 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1965 | Introduction to Altaic Linguistics. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz. |
Poppe 1972 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1972 | “Ein vergleichendes Wörterbuch der nostratischen Sprachen” [A Comparative Dictionary of the Nostratic Languages]. Review of V[ladislav] M[arkovič] Illič-Svityč, Опыт сравнения ностратических языков (семито-хамитский, картвельский, индоевропейский, уральский, дравидийский, алтайский) [An Attempt at a Comparison of the Nostratic Languages (Hamito-Semitic, Kartvelian, Indo-European, Uralic, Dravidian, Altaic)], vol. 1, Finnisch-ugrischen Forschungen XXXIX: 365—369. |
Poppe 1974 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1974 | Grammar of Written Mongolian. Third Printing. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Poppe 1975 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1975 | Review of Gyula Décsy, Die linguistische Struktur Europas: Vergangenheit, Gegenwart, Zukunft [The Linguistic Sturcture of Europe: Past, Present, Future], Finnisch-ugrischen Forschungen XLI:212—217. |
Poppe 1977a | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1977a | “The Problem of Uralic and Altaic Affinity”, in: Altaica: Proceedings of the 19th Annual Meeting of the Permanent International Altaistic Conference, Helsinki, 7—11 June 1976. (= Mémoires de la Société Finno-ougrienne, 158.) Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura, pp. 221—225. |
Poppe 1977b | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1977b | “The Altaic Plural Suffix *-t”, Studia Orientalia 47:166—174. |
Poppe 1979 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1979 | “Comparative Dictionary of the Nostratic Languages”. Review of V[ladislav] M[arkovič] Illič-Svityč, Опыт сравнения ностратических языков (семито-хамитский, картвельский, индоевро-пейский, уральский, дравидийский, алтайский) [An Attempt at a Comparison of the Nostratic Languages (Hamito-Semitic, Kartvelian, Indo-European, Uralic, Dravidian, Altaic)], vol. 2, Finnisch-ugrischen Forschungen XLII:222—225. |
Poppe 1983 | Poppe, Nicholas [Nikolaus] 1983 | “The Ural-Altaic Affinity”, in: Symposium Saeculare Societas Fenno-Ugricae. (= Mémoires de la Société Finno-ougrienne, 185.) Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura, pp. 189—199. |
Poppe—Dosch—Doerfer—Aalto—Schröder—Pritsak—Heissig 1964 | Poppe, Nikolaus, Udo Dosch, Gerhard Doerfer, Pentti Aalto, Dominik Schröder, Omeljan Pritsak, and Walter Heissig (eds.) 1964 | Mongolistik [Mongolian Studies]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Porxomovsky 1987 | Porxomovsky, J. Ja. (ed.) 1987 | Африканское историческое языкознание: проблемы реконструкции [African Historical Linguistics: Problems of Reconstruction]. Moscow: Nauka. |
Poser—Campbell 1992 | Poser, William J., and Lyle Campbell 1992 | “Indo-European Practice and Historical Methodology”. BLS talk, 16 February 1992 (corrected version). |
Posner 1996 | Posner, Rebecca 1996 | The Romance Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Possehl 2002 | Possehl, Gregory L. 2002 | The Indus Civilization: A Contemporary Perspective. Walnut Creek, CA: Altamira Press. |
Poultney 1959 | Poultney, James Wilson 1959 | The Bronze Tablets of Iguvium. Baltimore, MD: American Philological Society. |
Praetorius 1893 | Praetorius, Franz 1893 | Zur Grammatik der Gallasprache [On the Grammar of the Galla Language]. Reprinted 1978. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Prasse 1975 | Prasse, Karl-G. 1975 | “The Reconstruction of Proto-Berber Short Vowels”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 215—232. |
Praust 1998 | Praust, Karl 1998 | Studien zu den indogermanischen Nasalpräsentien [Studies on the Indo-European Nasal Presents]. Ph.D. dissertation. |
Preobrazhensky 1951 | Preobrazhensky, A. G. 1951 | Etymological Dictionary of the Russian Language. Reprinted 1964. New York, NY: Columbia University Press. |
Press 2004a | Press, Ian 2004a | Standard Breton. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Press 2004b | Press, Ian 2004b | Standard Lithuanian. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Priebsch—Collinson 1966 | Priebsch, R., and W. E. Collinson 1966 | The German Language. 6th edition. Reprinted 1968. London: Faber and Faber. |
Priestly 1993 | Priestly, T. M. S. 1993 | “Slovene”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 388—451. |
Pritsak 1964 | Pritsak, O. 1964 | “Das Mogholoische” [Moghol], Handbuch der Orientalistik 5.2:159—184. |
Pröhle 1978 | Pröhle, Wilhelm 1978 | Vergleichende Syntax der ural-altäischen (turanischen) Sprachen [Comparative Syntax of the Ural-Altaic (Turanian) Languages]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Prokosch 1938 | Prokosch, Eduard 1938 | A Comparative Germanic Grammar. Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America. |
Puhvel 1960 | Puhvel, Jaan 1960 | Laryngeals and the Indo-European Verb. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Puhvel 1965 | Puhvel, Jaan 1965 | “Evidence in Anatolian”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 79—92. |
Puhvel 1966 | Puhvel, Jaan 1966 | “Dialectal Aspects of the Anatolian Branch of Indo-European”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 235—247. |
Puhvel 1970 | Puhvel, Jaan 1970 | “Mythological Reflections of Indo-European Medicine”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 369—384. |
Puhvel 1974 | Puhvel, Jaan 1974 | “On Labiovelars in Hittite”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 94:291—295. |
Puhvel 1981 | Puhvel, Jaan 1981 | “‘Spider’ and ‘Mole’ in Hittite”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 237—242. |
Puhvel 1984— | Puhvel, Jaan 1984— | Hittite Etymological Dictionary. Berlin, New York, Amsterdam: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Puhvel 1987 | Puhvel, Jaan 1987 | “All our ‘Yesterdays’,” in: George Cardona and Norman H. Zide (eds.), Festschrift for Henry Hoenigswald. Tübingen: Gunter Narr, pp. 315—318. |
Puhvel 1991 | Puhvel, Jaan 1991 | Homer and Hittite. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Puhvel 1992 | Puhvel, Jaan 1992 | “Philology and Etymology, with Focus on Anatolian”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 261—270. |
Puhvel 1994 | Puhvel, Jaan 1994 | “Anatolian: Autochthon or Interloper?”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 22.3/4:251—263. |
Puhvel 1969 | Puhvel, Jaan (ed.) 1969 | Substance and Structure of Language. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Pulgram 1959 | Pulgram, Ernst 1959 | “Proto-Indo-European Reality and Reconstruction”, Language 35.3:421—426. |
Pulgram 1961 | Pulgram, Ernst 1961 | “The Nature and Use of Proto-Languages”, Lingua X.1:18—37. |
Pulgram 1964 | Pulgram, Ernst 1964 | “Proto-Languages as Proto-Diasystems: Proto-Romance”, Word 20.3:373—383. |
Pulju 1995 | Pulju, Timothy James 1995 | Problems in the Reconstruction of Indo-European Stop Consonants. Ph.D. dissertation, Rice University, Houston, TX. |
Pulleyblank 1965a | Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1965a | “The IE Vowel System and Qualitative Ablaut”, Word 21:86—101. |
Pulleyblank 1965b | Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1965b | “Close/Open Ablaut in Sino-Tibetan”, Lingua 14:230—240. |
Pulleyblank 1984 | Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1984 | Middle Chinese: A Study in Historical Phonology. Vancouver, BC: University of British Columbia Press. |
Pulleyblank 1993 | Pulleyblank, Edwin G. 1993 | “The Typology of Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 21.1/2:63—118. |
Pullum—Ladusaw 1996 | Pullum, Geoffrey K., and William A. Ladusaw 1996 | Phonetic Symbol Guide. 2nd edition. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Quirk—Wrenn 1957 | Quirk, Randolph, and C. L. Wrenn 1957 | An Old English Grammar. 2nd edition. Reprinted 1965. London: Methuen and Co., Ltd. |
Radford 1981 | Radford, Andrew 1981 | Transformational Syntax. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Rădulescu 1994 | Rădulescu, Mircea-Mihai 1994 | “The Indo-European Position of Messapic”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 22.3/4:329—344. |
Ramanarasimham 1998 | Ramanarasimham, P. 1998 | “Old Telugu”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 181—201. |
Ramat—Carruba—Bernini 1987 | Ramat, Anna Giacalone, Onofrio Carruba, and Giuliano Bernini (eds.) 1987 | Papers from the 7th International Conference on Historical Linguistics. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 48.) Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Ramat—Ramat 1998 | Ramat, Anna Giacalone, and Paolo Ramat (eds.) 1998 | The Indo-European Languages. Translated from Le Lingue Indoeuropee [The Indo-European Languages] (1993). London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Ramat 1976 | Ramat, Paolo 1976 | “Linguistic Reconstruction and Typology”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 4.3:189—206. |
Ramat 1998 | Ramat, Paolo 1998 | “The Germanic Languages”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 380—415. |
Ramat 1980 | Ramat, Paolo (ed.) 1980 | Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 19.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Ramsey 1978a | Ramsey, S. Robert 1978a | “Are the Korean and Japanese Languages Related? The Current State of Theorizing”, Korean Studies Forum 4:23—33. |
Ramsey 1978b | Ramsey, S. Robert 1978b | Accent and Morphology in Korean Dialects. Seoul: Thap Chwulphansa. |
Ramsey 1987 | Ramsey, S. Robert 1987 | The Languages of China. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
Ramsey 1991 | Ramsey, S. Robert 1991 | “Proto-Korean and the Origin of the Korean Accent”, in: William G. Boltz and Michael C. Shapiro (eds.), Studies in the Historical Phonology of Asian Languages. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 213—238. |
Ramsey 1993 | Ramsey, S. Robert 1993 | “Some Remarks on Reconstructing Earlier Korean”, Ehak yenkwu (Language Research) 29.4:433—442. |
Ramstedt 1928 | Ramstedt, G[ustav] J[ohn] 1928 | “Remarks on the Korean Language”, Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 58:441—443. |
Ramstedt 1952—1957 | Ramstedt, G[ustav] J[ohn] 1952—1957 | Einführung in die altäische Sprachwissenschaft [Introduction to Altaic Linguistics]. 2 vols. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura. |
Ranke—Hofmann 1967 | Ranke, Friedrich, and Dietrich Hofmann 1967 | Altnordisches Elementarbuch [Old Norse Primer]. 3rd edition. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Rask 1843 | Rask, Rasmus 1843 | A Grammar of the Icelandic or Old Norse Tongue. English translation by George Webbe Dasent. Reprinted 1976. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Rasmussen 1987 | Rasmussen, Jens Elmegård 1987 | “The Make-Up of Indo-European Morphology”, Diachronica IV.1/2:107—122. |
Rasmussen 1989a | Rasmussen, Jens Elmegård 1989a | Studien zur Morphophonemik der indogermanischen Grund-sprache [Studies on the Morphophonology of the Indo-European Parent Language]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Rasmussen 1989b | Rasmussen, Jens Elmegård 1989b | “Die Tenues Aspiratae: Dreiteilung oder Vierteilung des indogermanischen Plosivsystems und die Konsequenzen dieser Frage für die Chronologie einer Glottalreihe” [The Voiceless Aspirates: Three Divisions or Four Divisions of the Indo-European Stop System and the Consequences of this Question for the Chronology of the Glottalic Series], in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 153—176. |
Rasmussen—Nielsen 1995 | Rasmussen, Jens Elmegård, and Benedicte Nielsen (eds.) 1995 | In honorem Holger Pedersen: Kolloquium der Indoger-manischen Gesellschaft, Kopenhagen [In Honor of Holger Pedersen: Colloquium of the Indo-European Society, Copen-hagen]. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert Verlag. |
Rauch 1976 | Rauch, Irmengard 1976 | The Old High German Diphthongization. The Hague: Mouton. |
Raun 1988a | Raun, Alo 1988a | “The Mordvin Language”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 96—110. |
Raun 1988b | Raun, Alo 1988b | “Proto-Uralic Comparative-Historical Morphosyntax”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 555—571. |
Raun—Saareste 1965 | Raun, Alo, and Andrus Saareste 1965 | Introduction to Estonian Linguistics. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Raz 1997 | Raz, Shlomo 1997 | “Tigré”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 446—456. |
Rédei 1983 | Rédei, Károly 1983 | “Die ältesten idg. Lehnwörter der uralischen Sprachen” [The Oldest Indo-European Loan Words in the Uralic Languages], Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 185:201—233. |
Rédei 1998a | Rédei, Károly 1998a | “Die syrjänische Sprache” [The Zyrian Language], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages: Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 111—130. |
Rédei 1988b | Rédei, Károly 1988b | “Geschichte der permischen Sprachen” [History of the Permian Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages: Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 351—394. |
Rédei 1988c | Rédei, Károly 1988c | “Die ältesten indogermanischen Lehnwörter der uralischen Sprachen” [The Oldest Indo-European Loan Words in the Uralic Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 638—664. |
Rédei 1986—1988 | Rédei, Károly (ed.) 1986—1988 | Uralisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Uralic Etymological Dictionary]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Reichler-Beguelin 1994 | Reichler-Beguelin, Marie-José 1994 | “La méthode comparative: Problèmes épistémologiques en diachronie linguistique” [The Comparative Method: Epistemological Problems in Diachronic Linguistics], in: Françoise Bader (ed.), Langues indo-européennes [Indo-European Languages]. Paris: CNRS Éditions, pp. 65—83. |
Reiner 1969 | Reiner, Erica 1969 | “The Elamite Language”, in: B. Spuler (ed.), Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 54—118. |
Reklaitis 1982 | Reklaitis, Janine 1982 | “The PIE Word Order Controversy and Word Order in Lithuanian”, in: J. Peter Maher, Allan R. Bomhard, and Konrad Koerner (eds.), Papers from the 3rd International Conference on Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 369—385. |
Renfrew 1987 | Renfrew, Colin 1987 | Archaeology and Language: The Puzzle of Indo-European Origins. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Renfrew 1989 | Renfrew, Colin 1989 | “Models of Change in Language and Archaeology”, Transactions of the Philological Society 87.2:103—155. |
Renfrew 1990 | Renfrew, Colin 1990 | “Archaeology and Linguistics: Some Preliminary Issues”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 15—24. |
Renfrew 1991 | Renfrew, Colin 1991 | “Before Babel: Speculations on the Origins of Human Diversity”, Cambridge Archaeological Journal 1.1:3—23. |
Renfrew 1992 | Renfrew, Colin 1992 | “Archaeology, Genetics and Linguistic Diversity”, Man 27.3:445—478. |
Renfrew 1999 | Renfrew, Colin 1999 | “Nostratic as a Linguistic Macrofamily”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeo-logical Research, pp. 3—18. |
Renfrew 2001 | Renfrew, Colin 2001 | “The Anatolian Origins of Proto-Indo-Hittite and the Autochthony of the Hittites”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 36—63. |
Renfrew—Bahn 1991 | Renfrew, Colin, and Paul Bahn 1991 | Archaeology: Theories, Methods, and Practice. New York, NY: Thames and Hudson, Inc. |
Renfrew—Nettle 1999 | Renfrew, Colin, and Daniel Nettle (eds.) 1999 | Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research. |
Renou 1952 | Renou, Louis 1952 | Grammaire de la langue védique [Grammar of the Vedic Language]. Lyon: I.A.C. |
Reynolds—West—Coleman 2000 | Reynolds, Elinor, Paula West, and John Coleman 2000 | “Proto-Indo-European ‘Laryngeals’ were Vocalic”, Diachronica XVII.2:351—387. |
Rice—Sa’id 1979 | Rice, Frank A., and Majed F. Sa’id 1979 | Eastern Arabic. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Riemschneider 1974 | Riemschneider, K. 1974 | An Akkadian Grammar. English translation by Thomas A. Caldwell, John N. Oswalt, and John F. X. Sheehan. Reprinted 1978. Milwaukee, WI: Marquette University Press. |
Riese 1998 | Riese, Timothy 1998 | “Permian”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 249—275. |
Riese 2001 | Riese, Timothy 2001 | Vogul. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Ringe 1988 | Ringe, Donald 1988 | “Laryngeal Isoglosses in the Western Indo-European Languages”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 415—441. |
Ringe 1995a | Ringe, Donald 1995a | “‘Nostratic’ and the Factor of Chance”, Diachronica XII.1:55—74. |
Ringe 1995b | Ringe, Donald 1995b | “Tocharians in Xinjiang: The Linguistic Evidence”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 23.3/4:439—444. |
Ringe 1996 | Ringe, Donald 1996 | On the Chronology of Sound Changes in Tocharian. Vol. 1. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Ringe 1998 | Ringe, Donald 1998 | “A Probabilistic Evaluation of Indo-Uralic”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 153—197. |
Ringe 1999 | Ringe, Donald 1999 | “How Hard is it to Match CVC-Roots?”, Transactions of the Philological Society 97:213—244. |
Ringe 2004 | Ringe, Donald 2004 | “Reconstructed Ancient Languages”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 1112—1128. |
Ringe—Warnow—Taylor—Michailov—Levison 1998 | Ringe, Donald, Tandy Warnow, Ann Taylor, Alexander Michailov, and Libby Levison 1998 | “Computational Cladistics and the Position of Tocharian”, in: Victor H. Mair (ed.), The Bronze Age and Early Iron Age Peoples of Eastern Central Asia. Washington, DC/Philadelphia, PA: Institute for the Study of Man/University of Pennsylvania, vol. I, pp. 391—414. |
Rix 1992 | Rix, Helmut 1992 | Historische Grammatik des Griechischen: Laut- und Formenlehre [Historical Grammar of Greek: Phonology and Morphology]. 2nd edition. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft. |
Rix 1998a | Rix, Helmut 1998a | Lexikon der indogermanischen Verben [Lexicon of Indo-European Verbs]. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert Verlag. |
Rix 1998b | Rix, Helmut 1998b | Rätisch und Etruskisch [Rhaetic and Etruscan]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck. |
Rix 2004 | Rix, Helmut 2004 | “Etruscan”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 943—966. |
Rix 1991 | Rix, Helmut (ed.) 1991 | Etruskische Texte [Etruscan Texts]. 2 vols. Tübingen: Gunter Narr. |
Roaf 1990 | Roaf, Michael 1990 | Cultural Atlas of Mesopotamia and the Ancient Near East. Oxford and New York, NY: Facts on File (Equinox Ltd.). |
Robbeets 2005 | Robbeets, Martine Irma 2005 | Is Japanese Related to Korean, Tungusic, Mongolic, and Turkic? Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Robinson 1975 | Robinson, Ian 1975 | The New Grammarians Funeral. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Roller 2000 | Roller, Lynn E. 2000 | “The Origin of Non-Greek Letters in the Phrygian Alphabet: The Evidence from Gordion”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 195—204. |
Romaine 1994 | Romaine, Suzanne 1994 | “Germanic Creoles”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 566—603. |
Róna-Tas 1960 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] 1960 | “Remarks on the Phonology of the Monguor Language”, Acta Orientalia Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae 10.3:63—67. |
Róna-Tas 1974 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] 1974 | “Общее наследие или заимствование? (К проблеме родства алтайских языков)” [Common Inheritance or Borrowing? (On the Problem of the Relationship of the Altaic Languages)], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1974.2:31—45. |
Róna-Tas 1983 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] 1983 | “De Hypothesi Uralo-Altaica” [On the Ural-Altaic Hypothesis], Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 195:235—251. |
Róna-Tas 1988 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] 1988 | “Turkic Influence on the Uralic Languages”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 742—780. |
Róna-Tas 1990 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] 1990 | “Алтайский и индоевропейский. (Заметки на полях книги Т. В. Гамкрелидзе и В. В. Иванова)” [Altaic and Indo-European. (Marginal Notes on the Book by T. V. Gamkrelidze and V. V. Ivanov)], Вопросы Языкознания (Voprosy Jazykoznanija) 1990.1:26—37. |
Róna-Tas 1991 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] 1991 | An Introduction to Turkology. Szeged: Attila József University. |
Róna-Tas 1998 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] 1998 | “The Reconstruction of Proto-Turkic and the Genetic Question”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 67—80. |
Róna-Tas 1982 | Róna-Tas, A[ndrás] (ed.) 1982 | Chuvash Studies. Budapest: Akadémiai Kiadó. |
Rose 2006 | Rose, Sarah R. 2006 | The Hittite -ḫi/-mi Conjugations: Evidence for an Early Indo-European Voice Opposition. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Rosen 1987 | Rosen, Haiim B. 1987 | “Some More Noteworthy Features of ‘Primitive’ Indo-European Syntax”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2: 61—75. |
Rosenkranz 1953 | Rosenkranz, Bernhard 1953 | “Die hethitische ḫi-Konjugation” [The Hittite ḫi-Conjugation], Jahrbuch für kleinasiatische Forschung 2:239—249. |
Rosenkranz 1966 | Rosenkranz, Bernhard 1966 | “Zur indo-uralischen Frage” [On the Indo-Uralic Question], Istituto Orientale di Napoli, Annali 7:155—179. |
Rosenkranz 1971 | Rosenkranz, Bernhard 1971 | “Zur Genealogie des Elamischen” [On the Genetic Affiliation of Elamite], Anthropos 66:202—216. |
Rosenkranz 1978 | Rosenkranz, Bernhard 1978 | Vergleichende Untersuchungen der altanatolischen Sprachen [Comparative Investigations on the Old Anatolian Languages]. The Hague: Mouton. |
Rosenkranz 1979 | Rosenkranz, Bernhard 1979 | “Archaismen im Hethitischen” [Archaic Features in Hittite], in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 219—229. |
Rössler 1952 | Rössler, Otto 1952 | “Der semitische Charakter der libyschen Sprachen” [The Semitic Character of the Libyan Languages], Zeitschrift für Assyriologie und verwandte Gebiete 16:121—150. |
Rössler 1964 | Rössler, Otto 1964 | “Libysch-Hamitisch-Semitisch” [Libyan-Hamitic-Semitic], Oriens 17:199—216. |
Rössler 1971 | Rössler, Otto 1971 | “Das Ägyptisch als semitische Sprache” [Egyptian as a Semitic Language], in: Franz Altheim and Ruth Stiehl (eds.), Christentum am Roten Meer [Christianity in the Vicinity of the Red Sea]. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, part I, pp. 263—326. |
Rössler 1981 | Rössler, Otto 1981 | “The Structure and Inflexion of the Verb in the Semito-Hamitic Languages: Preliminary Studies for a Comparative Semito-Hamitic Grammar] (translated by Yoël L. Arbeitman) in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 679—748. |
Rot 1988 | Rot, Sándor 1988 | “Germanic Influence on the Uralic Languages”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 682—705. |
Rothstein 1993 | Rothstein, Robert A. 1993 | “Polish”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 686—758. |
Rousseau 1990 | Rousseau, André 1990 | “L’alternance *k-/ø- à l’initiale des mots en indo-européen: essai d’interprétation sémantique” [The *k-/ø- Alternation at the Beginning of Words in Indo-European: An Attempt at Semantic Interpretation], in: Jean Kellens (ed.), La reconstruction des laryngales [The Reconstruction of the Laryngeals]. Paris: Société d’Édition “Les Belles Lettres”, pp. 149—180. |
Rowlett 1987 | Rowlett, Ralph M. 1987 | “Grave Wealth in the Horodenka Group of Sub-Carpathian Corded Ware”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 191—202. |
Rubio 1999 | Rubio, Gonzalo 1999 | “On the Alleged ‘Pre-Sumerian Substratum’,” Journal of Cuneiform Studies 51:1—16. |
Ruhlen 1975 | Ruhlen, Merritt 1975 | A Guide to the Languages of the World. Stanford, CA: Language Universals Project, Stanford University. |
Ruhlen 1987 | Ruhlen, Merritt 1987 | A Guide to the World’s Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Ruhlen 1989 | Ruhlen, Merritt 1989 | “Nostratic-Amerind Cognates”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Bochum: Brock-meyer, pp. 75—83. |
Ruhlen 1990 | Ruhlen, Merritt 1990 | “Phylogenetic Relations of Native American Languages”, in: Prehistoric Mongoloid Dispersals (Special Issue 1990), 7:85—96. |
Ruhlen 1991 | Ruhlen, Merritt 1991 | “The Amerind Phylum and the Prehistory of the New World”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 328—350. |
Ruhlen 1994a | Ruhlen, Merritt 1994a | The Origin of Language: Tracing the Evolution of the Mother Tongue. New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons. |
Ruhlen 1994b | Ruhlen, Merritt 1994b | On the Origin of Languages: Studies in Linguistic Taxonomy. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Ruijgh 1988 | Ruijgh, C. J. 1988 | “Observations sur les traitements des laryngales en grec préhistorique” [Observations on the Treatments of Laryngeals in Prehistoric Greek], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 443—469. |
Rutter 2001 | Rutter, Jeremy 2001 | “Critical Response to the First Four Papers”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 64—73. |
Rybatzki 2003a | Rybatzki, Volker 2003a | “Middle Mongol”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 57—82. |
Rybatzki 2003b | Rybatzki, Volker 2003b | “Intra-Mongolic Taxonomy”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 364—390. |
Sadovsky 1973 | Sadovsky, Otto J. 1973 | “The Reconstruction of IE *pisko- and the Extension of its Semantic Sphere”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.1:81—100. |
Saeed 1982 | Saeed, John I. 1982 | Central Somali: A Grammatical Guide. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics, 8.2.) Malibu, CA: Undena. |
Saeed 2003 | Saeed, John I. 2003 | Semantics. 2nd edition. Oxford and Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers, Ltd. |
Sáenz-Badillos 1993 | Sáenz-Badillos, Angel 1993 | A History of the Hebrew Language. Translated by John Elwolde. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Safarewicz 1974 | Safarewicz, Jan 1974 | Linguistic Studies. The Hague: Mouton. |
Salminen 1998 | Salminen, Tapani 1998 | “Nenets”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 516—547. |
Salmons 1984 | Salmons, Joseph C. 1984 | The Extent of Language Contact Change: Germanic and Celtic. Ph.D. dissertation, University of Texas, Austin. |
Salmons 1990 | Salmons, Joseph C. 1990 | “Stress and Syllabification in Early Germanic”, American Journal of Germanic Linguistics and Literatures 2.2:137—138. |
Salmons 1992a | Salmons, Joseph C. 1992a | “Northwest Indo-European Vocabulary and Substrate Phonology”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 2, pp. 265—279. |
Salmons 1992b | Salmons, Joseph C. 1992b | “Diachronic Typology and Tone-to-Stress Shift”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 20.3/4:269—281. |
Salmons 1992c | Salmons, Joseph C. 1992c | “A Look at the Data for a Global Etymology: *tik ‘finger’,” in: Gary W. Davis and Gregory K. Iverson (ed.), Explanation in Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 207—228. |
Salmons 1992d | Salmons, Joseph C. 1992d | Accentual Change and Language Contact. Comparative Survey and a Case Study of Early Northern Europe. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Salmons 1993 | Salmons, Joseph C. 1993 | The Glottalic Theory: Survey and Synthesis. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Salmons—Joseph 1998 | Salmons, Joseph C., and Brian D. Joseph (eds.) 1998 | Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Sammallahti 1988 | Sammallahti, Pekka 1988 | “Historical Phonology of the Uralic Languages”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 478—554. |
Sammallahti 1998 | Sammallahti, Pekka 1998 | “Saamic”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 43—95. |
Sampson 1980 | Sampson, Geoffrey 1980 | Schools of Linguistics. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
Samuels 1972 | Samuels, M. L. 1972 | Linguistic Evolution, with Special Reference to English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Sapir 1921 | Sapir, Edward 1921 | Language: An Introduction to the Study of Speech. New York, NY: Harcourt, Brace and World, Inc. |
Sapir 1938 | Sapir, Edward 1938 | “Glottalized Continuants in Navaho, Nootka, and Kwakiutl (with a Note on Indo-European)”, Language 14:248—274. |
Sapir 1949 | Sapir, Edward 1949 | Selected Writings of Edward Sapir in Language, Culture, and Personality. Edited by David G. Mandelbaum. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Sarianidi 1992 | Sarianidi, V. 1992 | “Food-Producing and Other Neolithic Communities in Khorasan and Transoxania: Eastern Iran, Soviet Central Asia and Afghanistan”, in: A. H. Dani and V. M. Masson (eds.), History of Civilizations of Central Asia. Vol. I: The Dawn of Civilization: Earliest Times to 700 B.C. Paris: UNESCO, pp. 109—126. |
Sárközi 2004 | Sárközi, Alice 2004 | Classical Mongolian. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Sasse 1979 | Sasse, Hans-Jürgen 1979 | The Consonant Phonemes of Proto-East Cushitic (PEC): A First Approximation. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics 7.1.) Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Sasse 1982 | Sasse, Hans-Jürgen 1982 | An Etymological Dictionary of Burji. Hamburg: Helmut Buske Verlag. |
Sathasivam 1964 | Sathasivam, Arumugam 1964 | “The Current Status of Dravidian Historical and Comparative Studies”, in: Horace C. Lunt (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 570—573. |
Sathasivam 1965 | Sathasivam, Arumugam 1965 | Sumerian: A Dravidian Language. Unpublished manuscript. |
Sausverde 1996 | Sausverde, Ērika 1996 | “‘Seewörter’ and Substratum in Germanic, Baltic and Baltic Finno-Ugrian Languages”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 133—147. |
Sauvageot 1930 | Sauvageot, Aurélien 1930 | Recherches sur le vocabulaire des langues ouralo-altäiques [Investigations into the Vocabulary of the Ural-Altaic Languages]. Paris: Honoré Champion. |
Sauvageot 1963 | Sauvageot, Aurélien 1963 | “L’appartenance du youkaguir” [The Genetic Affiliation of Yukaghir], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 41:344—359. |
Sauvageot 1969 | Sauvageot, Aurélien 1969 | “La position du youkaguir” [The Position of Yukaghir], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 41:344—359. |
Scatton 1993 | Scatton, Ernest A. 1993 | “Bulgarian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 188—248. |
Schane 1973 | Schane, Sanford A. 1973 | Generative Phonology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
Schenker 1993 | Schenker, Alexander M. 1993 | “Proto-Slavonic”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 60—121. |
Schiffman—Eastman 1975 | Schiffman, Harold E., and Carol M. Eastman (eds.) 1975 | Dravidian Phonological Systems. Seattle, WA: University of Washington Press. |
Schindler 1972 | Schindler, Jochem 1972 | “L’apophonie des noms-racines” [The Apophony of Root-Nouns], Bulletin de la Société Linguistique 67:31—38. |
Schindler 1975 | Schindler, Jochem 1975 | “L’apophonie des thèmes indo-européennes en -r/n-” [The Apophony of Indo-European Stems in -r/n-], Bulletin de la Société Linguistique 70:1—10. |
Schleicher 1850 | Schleicher, August 1850 | Die Sprachen Europas in systematische Übersicht [The Languages of Europe in Systematic Overview]. New edition (1983) with an introductory article by Konrad Koerner. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Schleicher 1876 | Schleicher, August 1876 | Compendium der vergleichenden Grammatik der indogermanischen Sprachen [Compendium of the Comparative Grammar of the Indo-European Languages]. 4th edition. Reprinted 1974. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Schlerath 1987 | Schlerath, Bernfried 1987 | “On the Reality and Status of a Reconstructed Language”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:41—46. |
Schmalstieg 1963 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1963 | “The Baltic Thematic Vowel Reconsidered”, Lingua 12.2:217—219. |
Schmalstieg 1965 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1965 | “Again the Lithuanian Preterite in -ė”, Istituto Orientale di Napoli, Annali VI:123—126. |
Schmalstieg 1966 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1966 | “Neutralization of /a/ and /e/ in Hittite and Baltic”, Istituto Orientale di Napoli, Annali VII:53—59. |
Schmalstieg 1968a | Schmalstieg, William R. 1968a | “Primitive Baltic *ē”, Word 24:427—432. |
Schmalstieg 1968b | Schmalstieg, William R. 1968b | “Slavic Morpheme Alternants ē/ę and a/y”, The Slavic and East European Journal XII.1:44—52. |
Schmalstieg 1968c | Schmalstieg, William R. 1968c | Review of Christian S. Stang, Vergleichende Grammatik der baltischen Sprachen [Comparative Grammar of the Baltic Languages], Language 44.2:388—398. |
Schmalstieg 1971 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1971 | “The Slavic First Person Singular”, in: Symbolae in Honorem Georgii Y. Shevelov [Contributions in Honor of George Y. Shevelov]. Munich: Monachii, pp. 375—376. |
Schmalstieg 1973a | Schmalstieg, William R. 1973a | “A Balto-Slavic and Indo-Iranian Parallel: The Non-Existence of Shwa Indogermanicum (or Laryngeal) in the So-Called Long Sonants”, Baltistica IX.1:7—13. |
Schmalstieg 1973b | Schmalstieg, William R. 1973b | “New Thoughts on Indo-European Phonology”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 87:99—157. |
Schmalstieg 1974a | Schmalstieg, William R. 1974a | An Old Prussian Grammar: The Phonology and Morphology of the Three Catechisms. University Park, PA, and London: The Pennsylvania State University Press. |
Schmalstieg 1974b | Schmalstieg, William R. 1974b | “Some Methodological Implications of the Indo-European Passage of *oN to *-ō”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 88.2:187—198. |
Schmalstieg 1975 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1975 | “Lithuanian a and the Evolution of the Indo-European Vocalic System”, Baltistica XI.1:7—19. |
Schmalstieg 1976a | Schmalstieg, William R. 1976a | An Introduction to Old Church Slavic. Cambridge, MA: Slavica Publishers, Inc. |
Schmalstieg 1976b | Schmalstieg, William R. 1976b | “Speculations on the Indo-European Active and Middle Voices”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 90.1/2:23—36. |
Schmalstieg 1976c | Schmalstieg, William R. 1976c | Studies in Old Prussian. University Park, PA: The Pennsylvania State University Press. |
Schmalstieg 1980 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1980 | Indo-European Linguistics: A New Synthesis. University Park, PA, and London: The Pennsylvania State University Press. |
Schmalstieg 1981 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1981 | “Ergativity in Indo-European”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 243—258. |
Schmalstieg 1988 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1988 | A Lithuanian Historical Syntax. Columbus, OH: Slavica Publishers. |
Schmalstieg 1989 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1989 | “Monophthongizations: More Plausible than Laryngeals!”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 67—73. |
Schmalstieg 1995 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1995 | An Introduction to Old Russian. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Schmalstieg 1998 | Schmalstieg, William R. 1998 | “The Baltic Languages”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 454—479. |
Schmalstieg 2000 | Schmalstieg, William R. 2000 | The Historical Morphology of the Baltic Verb. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Schmid 1979 | Schmid, Wolfgang P. 1979 | “Das Hethitische in einem neuen Verwandtschaftsmodell” [Hittite in a New Relationship Model], in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissens-chaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 231—235. |
Schmid 1987 | Schmid, Wolfgang P. 1987 | “‘Indo-European’ — ‘Old European’ (On the Reexamination of Two Linguistic Terms)”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 322—338. |
Schmidt 1872 | Schmidt, Johannes 1872 | Die Verwandtschaftverhältnisse der indogermanischen Sprachen [The Genetic Affiliation of the Indo-European Languages]. Weimar: Hermann Böhlau. |
Schmidt 1889 | Schmidt, Johannes 1889 | Die Pluralbildung der indogermanischen Neutra [The Plural Formation of the Indo-European Neuter]. Reprinted 1980. Hildesheim: Georg Olms. |
Schmidt 1962 | Schmidt, Karl Horst 1962 | Studien zur Rekonstruktion des Lautstandes der südkaukasischen Grundsprache [Studies on the Reconstruction of the Sound Structure of the South Caucasian Parent Language]. Wiesbaden: Kommissionsverlag Franz Steiner GMBH. |
Schmidt 1979a | Schmidt, Karl Horst 1979a | “Probleme des relativen Chronologie” [Problems of Relative Chronology], Incontri Linguistici 5:55—59. |
Schmidt 1979b | Schmidt, Karl Horst 1979b | “Zur Vorgesichte des indogermanischen Genussystems” [On the Prehistory of the Indo-European Gender System], in: Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 793—800. |
Schmidt 1980 | Schmidt, Karl Horst 1980 | “Zur Typologie des Vorindogermanischen” [On the Typology of Pre-Indo-European], in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax: Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 91—112. |
Schmidt 1990 | Schmidt, Karl Horst 1990 | “The Postulated Pre-Indo-European Substrates in Insular Celtic and Tocharian”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 179—202. |
Schmidt 1992 | Schmidt, Karl Horst 1992 | “Contributions from New Data to the Reconstruction of the Proto-Language’, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 35—62. |
Schmidt 1994 | Schmidt, Karl Horst 1994 | Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic, Kratylos 29:32—36. |
Schmidt 1988 | Schmidt, Klaus T. 1988 | “Stellungsbedingte Konsonantisierung von ə̯2 im Tocharischen?” [Was There a Positionally Conditioned Occlusivization of ə̯2 in Tocharian?], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 471—480. |
Schmitt 1974 | Schmitt, Rüdiger 1974 | “Proto-Indo-European Culture and Archaeology: Some Critical Remarks”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.3:279—287. |
Schmitt 1977 | Schmitt, Rüdiger 1977 | Einführung in die griechischen Dialekte [Introduction to the Greek Dialects]. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesell-schaft. |
Schmitt 1981 | Schmitt, Rüdiger 1981 | Grammatik des Klassisch-Armenischen [Grammar of Classical Armenian]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprach-wissenschaft. |
Schmitt 1988 | Schmitt, Rüdiger 1988 | “Betrachtungen über Pragmatik und Systematik in der Laryngaltheorie” [Reflections on Pragmatics and Systematics in the Laryngeal Theory], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 481—495. |
Schmitt 2004 | Schmitt, Rüdiger 2004 | “Old Persian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 717—741. |
Schmitt-Brandt 1967 | Schmitt-Brandt, Robert 1967 | Die Entwicklung des indogermanischen Vokalsystems [The Development of the Indo-European Vowel System]. Heidelberg: Julius Groos. |
Schmitt-Brandt [1973] | Schmitt-Brandt, Robert [1973] | [2nd edition.] |
Schmitt-Brandt 1987 | Schmitt-Brandt, Robert 1987 | “Aspektkategorien im PIE?”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 15.1/2:81—92. |
Schmitt-Brandt 1998 | Schmitt-Brandt, Robert 1998 | Einführung in die Indogermanistik [Introduction to Indo-European Studies]. Tübingen: Francke Verlag. |
Schmitt-Brandt 1971 | Schmitt-Brandt, Robert (ed.) 1971 | Donum Indogermanicum: Festschrift für Anton Scherer zum 70. Geburtstag [Indo-European Offerings: Commemorative Volume for Anton Scherer on his 70th Birthday]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Schoenig 1998a | Schoenig, Claus 1998a | “Azerbaijanian”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 248—260. |
Schoenig 1998b | Schoenig, Claus 1998b | “Turkmen”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 261—272. |
Schoenig 1998c | Schoenig, Claus 1998c | “South Siberian Turkic”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 403—416. |
Schoenig 2003 | Schoenig, Claus 2003 | “Turko-Mongolic Relations”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 403—419. |
Schrijver 1991 | Schrijver, Peter 1991 | The Reflexes of the Proto-Indo-European Laryngeals in Latin. Amsterdam and Atlanta, GA: Editions Rodopi. |
Schrijver 1995 | Schrijver, Peter 1995 | Studies in British Celtic Historical Phonology. Amsterdam and Atlanta, GA: Editions Rodopi. |
Schrodt 1989 | Schrodt, Richard 1989 | “Neue Forschungen zur germanischen Lautverschiebung — ein Fall von Paradigmenwechsel?” [New Investigations into the Germanic Sound Shift: A Case of Paradigm Shift?], in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 137—152. |
Schuh 1976 | Schuh, Russell G. 1976 | The Chadic Verbal System and its Afroasiatic Nature. (= Afroasiatic Linguistics 3.1.) Malibu, CA: Undena Publications. |
Schuh 1981 | Schuh, Russell G. 1981 | A Dictionary of Ngizim. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Schützeichel 1989 | Schützeichel, Rudolf 1989 | Althochdeutsches Wörterbuch [Old High German Dictionary]. 4th edition. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer Verlag. |
Schwartz 1939 | Schwartz, Benjamin 1939 | “Prakrit cia”, New Indian Antiquary II.6. |
Schwartz 1950a | Schwartz, Benjamin 1950a | “The Particle -kan in Hittite”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 70.1:18—24. |
Schwartz 1950b | Schwartz, Benjamin 1950b | “Hittite -kan”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 70.3:179. |
Schwartz 1959a | Schwartz, Benjamin 1959a | “The Phaistos Disk”, Journal of Near Eastern Studies XVIII.2:105—112. |
Schwartz 1959b | Schwartz, Benjamin 1959b | “The Phaistos Disk II”, Journal of Near Eastern Studies XVIII.3:222—236. |
Schwartz 1959c | Schwartz, Benjamin 1959c | “Notes and Afterthoughts on the Phaistos Disk Solution”, Journal of Near Eastern Studies XVIII.3:227—228. |
Schwartz 1970 | Schwartz, Benjamin 1970 | “Laryngeals: A Brief Sketch of the Current Status of the Theory”, in: Robert C. Lugton and Milton Saltzer (eds.), Studies in Honor of J. Alexander Kerns. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 95—102. |
Schwartz 1981 | Schwartz, Benjamin 1981 | “The Phaistos Disk Again?”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 783—799. |
Schwink 1989 | Schwink, Frederick W. 1989 | “A Reexamination of the Mycenaean Medio-Passive Finite Ending”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 17.1/2:127—154. |
Schwink 1994 | Schwink, Frederick W. 1994 | Linguistic Typology, Universality and the Realism of Reconstruction. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Schwyzer 1953 | Schwyzer, Eduard 1953 | Griechische Grammatik [Greek Grammar]. Vol. I. Munich: C. H. Beck. |
Seebold 1988 | Seebold, Elmar 1988 | “Wissenschaftsgeschichte und Theorieformulierung. Oder: Wie nötig ist die Laryngalhypothese?” [Scientific History and Theoretical Formulation. Or: How Necessary is the Laryngeal Theory?], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 497—525. |
Segert 1984 | Segert, Stanislav 1984 | A Basic Grammar of the Ugaritic Language. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Segert 1997 | Segert, Stanislav 1997 | “Phoenician and the Eastern Canaanite Languages”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 174—186. |
Seiler 1978 | Seiler, Hansjakob (ed.) 1978 | Language Universals. Tübingen: Gunter Narr Verlag. |
Senn 1957—1966 | Senn, Alfred 1957—1966 | Handbuch der litauischen Sprache [Handbook of the Lithuanian Language]. 2 vols. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Senn 1966 | Senn, Alfred 1966 | “The Relationships of Baltic and Slavic”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 139—151. |
Serebrennikov 1986 | Serebrennikov, Boris A. 1986 | “On the So-called ‘Nostratic’ Languages”, in: Vitalij V. Shevoroshkin and Thomas L. Markey (eds.), Typology, Relationship, and Time. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 66—86. |
Sergent 1995 | Sergent, Bernard 1995 | Les indo-européens: histoire, langue, mythes [The Indo-Europeans: History, Language, Myths]. Paris: Éditions Payot et Rivages. |
Shafer 1952 | Shafer, Robert 1952 | “Athapaskan and Sino-Tibetan”, International Journal of American Linguistics 18:12—19. |
Shafer 1963 | Shafer, Robert 1963 | “Eurasial”, Orbis 12:19—44. |
Shafer 1965 | Shafer, Robert 1965 | “The Eurasial Linguistic Superfamily”, Anthropos 60:445—468. |
Sherratt 1980 | Sherratt, Andrew (ed.) 1980 | The Cambridge Encyclopedia of Archaeology. New York, NY: Crown Publishers, Inc./Cambridge University Press. |
Shevelov 1964 | Shevelov, George Y. 1964 | A Prehistory of Slavic: The Historical Phonology of Common Slavic. New York, NY: Columbia University Press. |
Shevelov 1993 | Shevelov, George Y. 1993 | “Ukrainian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 947—998. |
Shevoroshkin 1979 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 1979 | “On the Hittite-Luwian Numerals”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 7.3/4:177—198. |
Shevoroshkin 1987 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 1987 | “Indo-European Homeland and Migrations”, Folia Linguistica Historica 7.2:227—250. |
Shevoroshkin 1988 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 1988 | “On Laryngeals”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 527—546. |
Shevoroshkin 1989 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 1989 | “Methods in Interphyletic Comparison”, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 61:1—26. |
Shevoroshkin 1990 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 1990 | “Uralic Vocalism and Long-Range Comparison”, in: V. V. Ivanov, T. M. Sudnik, and E. A. Helimskij (eds.), Uralo-Indogermanica. Moscow: Nauka, part 2, pp. 85—94. |
Shevoroshkin 1991 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 1991 | “On Carian Language and Writing”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 117—135. |
Shevoroshkin 1999 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 1999 | “Nostratic Languages: Internal and External Relationship”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 75—91. |
Shevoroshkin 2000 | Shevoroshkin, Vitalij [Vitaly] 2000 | “Notes on Lycian and Milyan”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 205—211. |
Shevoroshkin 1989a | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly (ed.) 1989a | Explorations in Language Macrofamilies. Bochum: Universitätsverlag Dr. Norbert Brockmeyer. |
Shevoroshkin 1989b | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly (ed.) 1989b | Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Bochum: Universitätsverlag Dr. Norbert Brockmeyer. |
Shevoroshkin 1990 | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly (ed.) 1990 | Proto-Languages and Proto-Cultures. Bochum: Universitäts-verlag Dr. Norbert Brockmeyer. |
Shevoroshkin 1991 | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly (ed.) 1991 | Dene-Sino-Caucasian Languages. Bochum: Universitätsverlag Dr. Norbert Brockmeyer. |
Shevoroshkin—Ramer 1991 | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly, and Alexis Manaster Ramer 1991 | “Some Recent Work on the Remote Relations of Languages”, in: Sydney M. Lamb and E. Douglas Mitchell (eds.), Sprung from Some Common Source. Investigations into the Prehistory of Languages. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 178—199. |
Shevoroshkin—Markey 1986 | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly, and Thomas L. Markey (eds.) 1986 | Typology, Relationship, and Time. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers. |
Shevoroshkin—Sidwell 1999 | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly, and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.) 1999 | Historical Linguistics and Lexicostatistics. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 3.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language. |
Shevoroshkin—Sidwell 2002 | Shevoroshkin, Vitaly, and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.) 2002 | Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language. |
Shibatani 1990 | Shibatani, Masayoshi 1990 | The Languages of Japan. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Shields 1976 | Shields, Kenneth 1976 | “On the Origin of Normal Reduplication in Indo-European”, Orbis XXV.1:37—43. |
Shields 1977a | Shields, Kenneth 1977a | “Some New Observations Concerning the Origin of the Indo-European Feminine Gender”, Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 91.1:56—71. |
Shields 1977b | Shields, Kenneth 1977b | “Evidence of I.E. *-bhi in Tocharian”, Folia Linguistica XI.3/4:281—286. |
Shields 1978a | Shields, Kenneth 1978a | “A Note on I.E. *tōt”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 6.1/2:133—140. |
Shields 1978b | Shields, Kenneth 1978b | “Some Remarks Concerning Early Indo-European Nominal Inflection”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 6.2/3:185—210. |
Shields 1979a | Shields, Kenneth 1979a | “IE */b/ and the Theory of Lexical Diffusion”, Linguistics 17:709—714. |
Shields 1979b | Shields, Kenneth 1979b | “The Gothic Genitive Plural Ending *-ē”, Leuvense Bijdragen 68:257—268. |
Shields 1979c | Shields, Kenneth 1979c | “The Theory of Gender Change”, Glossa 13.1:27—38. |
Shields 1979d | Shields, Kenneth 1979d | “More on Early Indo-European Nominal Inflection: The Origin of the -r-/-n- Stems”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 7.3/4:213—226. |
Shields 1980a | Shields, Kenneth 1980a | “The Oscan-Umbrian Third Person Plural”, Glossa LVIII.1/2:68—77. |
Shields 1980b | Shields, Kenneth 1980b | “Sociolinguistics and the Reconstruction of Proto-Indo-European”, Anthropological Linguistics 22.5:225—232. |
Shields 1981 | Shields, Kenneth 1981 | “On Indo-European Sigmatic Aorist Formations”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 263—279. |
Shields 1982 | Shields, Kenneth 1982 | Indo-European Noun Inflection. University Park, PA: The Pennsylvania State University Press. |
Shields 1983 | Shields, Kenneth 1983 | “The Hittite First Person Singular Imperative Suffix -lu”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 11.3/4:365—372. |
Shields 1985 | Shields, Kenneth 1985 | “Speculations about the Indo-European Cardinals 5—10”, Diachronica II.2:189—200. |
Shields 1998a | Shields, Kenneth 1998a | “Some Thoughts about the Origin of the Indo-European Optative and Subjunctive”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), A Linguistic Happening in Memory of Ben Schwartz. Louvain-la-Neuve: Peeters, pp. 543—557. |
Shields 1988b | Shields, Kenneth 1988b | “Tense, Linguistic Universals, and the Reconstruction of Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 16.3/4:241—251. |
Shields 1992 | Shields, Kenneth 1992 | A History of Indo-European Verb Morphology. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Shields 1993 | Shields, Kenneth 1993 | “The Origin of the Armenian Locative Plural”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 21.1/2:55—62. |
Shields 1994 | Shields, Kenneth 1994 | “Comments about IE *oi- ‘1’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 22.1/2:177—186. |
Shields 1997 | Shields, Kenneth 1997 | “On the Pronominal Origin of the Indo-European Athematic Verbal Suffixes”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 25.1/2:105—117. |
Shields 1998 | Shields, Kenneth 1998 | “On the Indo-European Reflexive”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 26.1/2:121—129. |
Shields 1999 | Shields, Kenneth 1999 | “On the Indo-European ‘Bare Stem’ Acc. Personal Pronoun”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 27.3/4:409—417. |
Shields 2000 | Shields, Kenneth 2000 | “Some Comments about the Hittite Numeral 3”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 213—219. |
Shields 2001 | Shields, Kenneth 2001 | “Nostratic Theory and ‘New Image’ Morphology: A Study in the Compatibility of Reconstructions”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 29.3/4:367—378. |
Shields 2004 | Shields, Kenneth 2004 | “On the Indo-European Origins of Greek 3rd Pl. Act. Imperative -ντον: ‘New Image’ Morphology and Morpholo-gizations”, in: Philip Baldi and Pietro U. Dini (eds.), Studies in Baltic and Indo-European Linguistics in Honor of William R. Schmalstieg. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 173—184. |
Shnirelman 1997 | Shnirelman, Victor 1997 | “Linguoarchaeology: Goals, Advances, and Limits”, in: Roger Blench and Matthew Spriggs (eds.), Archaeology and Language I: Theoretical and Methodological Orientations. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 158—165. |
Shopen 1985 | Shopen, Timothy (ed.) 1985 | Language Typology and Syntactic Description. 3 vols. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Short 1993a | Short, David 1993a | “Czech”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 455—532. |
Short 1993b | Short, David 1993b | “Slovak”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 533—592. |
Sihler 1973 | Sihler, Andrew L. 1973 | “Proto-Indo-European *smH- ‘Pair’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.1:110—113. |
Sihler 1988 | Sihler, Andrew L. 1988 | “Greek Reflexes of Syllabic Laryngeals with a Postscript on PIE Kinship Terms in *-Høter”, in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruktion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 547—561. |
Sihler 1995 | Sihler, Andrew L. 1995 | New Comparative Grammar of Greek and Latin. New York, NY, and Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Sihler 2000 | Sihler, Andrew L. 2000 | Language History: An Introduction. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins. |
Sihler 2004 | Sihler, Andrew L. 2004 | Review of Winfred P. Lehmann, Pre-Indo-European. Diachronica XXI.1:214—226. |
Silvestri 1998 | Silvestri, Domenico 1998 | “The Italic Languages”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 322—344. |
Simeone-Senelle 1997 | Simeone-Senelle, Marie-Claude 1997 | “The Modern South Arabian Languages”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 378—423. |
Simoncsics 1998 | Simoncsics, Péter 1998 | “Kamassian”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 580—601. |
Simpson 1979 | Simpson, J. M. Y. 1979 | A First Course in Linguistics. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press. |
Sims-Williams 1998 | Sims-Williams, Nicholas 1998 | “The Iranian Languages”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 125—153. |
Sims-Williams 1998 | Sims-Williams, Patrick 1998 | “The Celtic Languages”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 345—379. |
Singer 1981 | Singer, Itamar 1981 | “Hittites and Hattians in Anatolia at the Beginning of the Second Millennium”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 9.1/2:119—134. |
Singer 2000 | Singer, Itamar 2000 | “Semitic dagān and Indo-European *dheĝhom: Related Words?”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 221—232. |
Sinor 1944 | Sinor, Denis 1944 | “Ouralo-altäique-indo-européen” [Ural-Altaic/Indo-European], T’oung Pao 37:226—244. |
Sinor 1948 | Sinor, Denis 1948 | “Le problème de la parenté des langues ouralo-altäiques” [The Problem of the Relationship of the Ural-Altaic Languages], Revue de Géographie Humaine et d’Ethnographie 1.1:65—69. |
Sinor 1952 | Sinor, Denis 1952 | “On Some Ural-Altaic Plural Suffixes”, Asia Minor NS 2:203—230. |
Sinor 1953 | Sinor, Denis 1953 | “Introduction aux études mandjoues” [Introduction to Manchu Studies], T’oung Pao 42.1/2:70—100. |
Sinor 1963 | Sinor, Denis 1963 | Introduction à l’étude de l’eurasie centrale [Introduction to the Study of Central Asia]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Sinor 1968 | Sinor, Denis 1968 | “La langue mandjoue” [The Manchu Language], in: W. Fuchs, Ivan A. Lopatin, Karl H. Menges, and Denis Sinor (eds.), Tungusologie [Tungus Studies]. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 257—280. |
Sinor 1981 | Sinor, Denis 1981 | “The Origin of Turkic balïq ‘town’,” Central Asiatic Journal 25:95—102. |
Sinor 1988 | Sinor, Denis 1988 | “The Problem of the Ural-Altaic Relationship”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages: Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 706—741. |
Sinor 1990 | Sinor, Denis 1990 | Essays in Comparative Altaic Linguistics. Bloomington, IN: Research Institute for Inner Asian Studies. |
Sinor 1990(1963) | Sinor, Denis 1990(1963) | “Observations on a New Comparative Altaic Phonology”, in: Denis Sinor, Essays in Comparative Altaic Linguistics. Bloomington, IN: Research Institute for Inner Asian Studies, pp. 133—144. Originally published in Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 26 (1963). |
Sinor 1999 | Sinor, Denis 1999 | “Some Thoughts on the Nostratic Theory and Its Historical Implications”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 387—400. |
Sinor 1988 | Sinor, Denis (ed.) 1988 | The Uralic Languages: Description, History and Foreign Influences. (= Handbuch des Orientalistik, VIII, Abt., vol. 1.) Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Siptár—Törkenczy 2000 | Siptár, Péter, and Miklós Törkenczy 2000 | The Phonology of Hungarian. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Sivan 1997 | Sivan, Daniel 1997 | A Grammar of the Ugaritic Language. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Sjoberg 1992 | Sjoberg, Andrée F. 1992 | “The Impact of Dravidian on Indo-Aryan: An Overview”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 507—529. |
Skinner 1977 | Skinner, Neil 1977 | “North Bauchi Chadic Languages: Common Roots”, Afroasiatic Linguistics 4.1:1—49. |
Skomal—Polomé 1987 | Skomal, Susan Nacev, and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.) 1987 | Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Skribnik 2003 | Skribnik, Elena 2003 | “Buryat”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 102—128. |
Slater 2003a | Slater, Keith W. 2003a | “Mangghuer”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 307—324. |
Slater 2003b | Slater, Keith W. 2003b | A Grammar of Mangghuer: A Mongolic Language of China’s Qinghai-Gansu Sprachbund. London and New York, NY: Routledge Curzon. |
Sloat—Henderson Taylor—Hoad 1978 | Sloat, Clarence, Sharon Henderson Taylor, and James E. Hoad 1978 | Introduction to Phonology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc. |
Smirnov 1975 | Smirnov, U. A. 1975 | The Lahndi Language. Moscow: Nauka. |
Smith 1972 | Smith, Henry Lee 1972 | “The Morphophoneme in Hittite, Proto-Indo-Hittite, and Proto-Indo-European”, in: M. Estelle Smith (ed.), Studies in Linguistics in Honor of George L. Trager. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 181—219. |
Smith 2004 | Smith, Ian 2004 | Review of Bhadriraju Krishnamurti, The Dravidian Languages, Anthropological Linguistics 46.1:125—128. |
Smith—Wilson 1979 | Smith, Neil, and Deirdre Wilson 1979 | Modern Linguistics: The Results of Chomsky’s Revolution. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
Smith 1983 | Smith, Richard 1983 | A Concise Coptic-English Lexicon. Grand Rapids, MI: William B. Eerdmans Publishing Company. |
Smyth 1956 | Smyth, Henry Weir 1956 | Greek Grammar. Revised by Gordon M. Messing. 11th printing 1980. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Sommerstein 1977 | Sommerstein, Alan H. 1977 | Modern Phonology. London: Edward Arnold, Ltd. |
Sohn 1999 | Sohn, Ho-Min 1999 | The Korean Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Southworth 2005 | Southworth, Franklin C. 2005 | Review of Bhadriraju Krishnamurti, The Dravidian Languages, Language 81.2:534—535. |
Southworth 2006 | Southworth, Franklin C. 2006 | “New Light on Three South Asian Language Families”, Mother Tongue XI:124—159. |
Specht 1944 | Specht, Franz 1944 | Der Ursprung der indogermanischen Deklination [The Origin of Indo-European Declension]. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht. |
Spuler 1969 | Spuler, B. (ed.) 1969 | Altkleinasiatische Sprachen [Ancient Near Eastern Languages]. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Srivastava 1962 | Srivastava, Dayamand 1962 | The Nepali Language: Its History and Development. Calcutta: Calcutta University. |
Stachowski—Menz 1998 | Stachowski, Marek, and Astrid Menz 1998 | “Yakut”, in: Lars Johanson and Éva Ágnes Csató (eds.), The Turkic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 417—433. |
Stang 1958 | Stang, Christian S. 1958 | “Die litauische Konjunktion jeib und der lit.-lett. Optativ” [The Lithuanian Conjunction jeib and the Lithuanian-Latvian Optative], Norsk Tidsskrift for Sprogvidenskap 18:348—356. |
Stang 1965 | Stang, Christian S. 1965 | Slavonic Accentuation. Oslo: Universiteitsforlaget. |
Stang 1966 | Stang, Christian S. 1966 | Vergleichende Grammatik der baltischen Sprachen [Comparative Grammar of the Baltic Languages]. Oslo: Universiteitsforlaget. |
Stang 1970 | Stang, Christian S. 1970 | Opuscula Linguistica [Minor Linguistic Writings]. Oslo: Universiteitsforlaget. |
Starostin 2002 | Starostin, George 2002 | “On the Genetic Affiliation of the Elamite Language”, Mother Tongue VII:147—170. |
Starostin 1991 | Starostin, Sergej A. 1991 | Алтайская проблема и происхождение японского языка [The Altaic Problem and the Origin of the Japanese Language]. Moscow: Nauka. |
Starostin 1997 | Starostin, Sergej A. 1997 | “On the ‘Consonant Splits’ of Japanese”, in: Irén Hegedűs, Peter A. Michalove, and Alexis Manaster Ramer (eds.), Indo-European, Nostratic, and Beyond: Festschrift for Vitalij V. Shevoroshkin. (= Journal of Indo-European Studies, monograph number 22.) Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 326—341. |
Starostin 1999a | Starostin, Sergej A. 1999a | “Subgrouping of Nostratic: Comments on Aharon Dolgopolsky’s The Nostratic Macrofamily and Linguistic Palaeontology”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 137—156. |
Starostin 1999b | Starostin, Sergej A. 1999b | “Historical Linguistics and Lexicostatistics”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Historical Linguistics and Lexicostatistics. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 3.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 3—50. |
Starostin 1999c | Starostin, Sergej A. 1999c | “Methodology of Long-Range Comparison”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Historical Linguistics and Lexicostatistics. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 3.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 61—66. |
Starostin 2002 | Starostin, Sergej A. 2002 | “Methodology of Long-Range Comparison”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 61—66. |
Starostin 2005 | Starostin, Sergej A. 2005 | “Response to Stefan Georg’s Review of the Etymological Dictionary of the Altaic Languages”, Diachronica XXII.2:451—454. |
Starostin—Dybo—Mudrak 2003 | Starostin, Sergej A., Anna Dybo, and Oleg A. Mudrak 2003 | An Etymological Dictionary of Altaic Languages. 3 vols. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Steensland 1973 | Steensland, Lars 1973 | Die Distribution der urindogermanischen sogenannten Gutturale [The Distribution of the Proto-Indo-European So-called “Gutturals”]. Uppsala: Acta Universitatis Upsaliensis. |
Steever 1987 | Steever, Sanford B. 1987 | “Tamil and the Dravidian Languages”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 725—746. |
Steever 1988 | Steever, Sanford B. 1988 | The Serial Verb Formation in the Dravidian Languages. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass. |
Steever 1993 | Steever, Sanford B. 1993 | Analysis to Synthesis: The Development of Complex Verb Morphology in the Dravidian Languages. Oxford and New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Steever 1998a | Steever, Sanford B. 1998a | “Introduction to the Dravidian Languages”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 1—39. |
Steever 1998b | Steever, Sanford B. 1998b | “Kannada”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 129—157. |
Steever 1998c | Steever, Sanford B. 1998c | “Gonḍi”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 270—297. |
Steever 1998d | Steever, Sanford B. 1998d | “Malto”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 359—387. |
Steever 2004a | Steever, Sanford B. 2004a | “Old Tamil”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 1015—1040. |
Steever 2004b | Steever, Sanford B. 2004b | Review of Bhadriraju Krishnamurti, The Dravidian Languages, Journal of the American Oriental Society 124.3:573—574. |
Steever 2006 | Steever, Sanford B. 2006 | Review of Mikhail S. Andronov, A Comparative Grammar of the Dravidian Languages, Language 82.4:936—937. |
Steever 1998 | Steever, Sanford B. (ed.) 1998 | The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Steiner 1981 | Steiner, Gerd 1981 | “The Role of the Hittites in Ancient Anatolia”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 9.1/2:150—173. |
Steiner 1990 | Steiner, Gerd 1990 | “The Immigration of the First Indo-Europeans Into Anatolia Reconsidered”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.1/2:185—214. |
Steiner 1977 | Steiner, Richard C. 1977 | The Case for Fricative-Laterals in Proto-Semitic. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Steiner 1982 | Steiner, Richard C. 1982 | Affricated Ṣade in the Semitic Languages. New York, NY: The American Academy for Jewish Research. |
Steiner 1997 | Steiner, Richard C. 1997 | “Ancient Hebrew”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 145—173. |
Steingass 1884 | Steingass, F. 1884 | Arabic-English Dictionary. Reprinted 1979. Lahore: Sang-E-Meel. |
Steinitz 1944 | Steinitz, W. 1944 | Geschichte des finnisch-ugrischen Vokalismus [History of the Finno-Ugrian Vowels]. Stockholm: University of Stockholm. |
Steinitz 1952 | Steinitz, W. 1952 | Geschichte des finnisch-ugrischen Konsonantismus [History of the Finno-Ugrian Consonants]. Stockholm: University of Stockholm. |
Stempel 1987 | Stempel, Patrizia de Bernardo 1987 | Die Vertretung der indogermanischen liquiden und nasalen Sonanten im Keltischen [The Treatment of the Indo-European Liquid and Nasal Resonants in Celtic]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Stempel 1999 | Stempel, Reinhard 1999 | Abriß einer historischen Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen [Outline of a Historical Grammar of the Semitic Languages]. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang. |
Stepanov 1992 | Stepanov, Jurij S. 1992 | “Lexical Entries in Major Sentence Types of Proto-Indo-European”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 157—183. |
Stevens 1992 | Stevens, Christopher M. 1992 | “The Use and Abuse of Typology in Comparative Linguistics: An Update on the Controversy”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 20.1/2:45—58. |
Stevenson 1970 | Stevenson, C. H. 1970 | The Spanish Language Today. London: Hutchinson University Library. |
Stolbova 1987 | Stolbova, Olga V. 1987 | “Сравнительно-историческая фонетика и словарь западночадских языков” [The Comparative-Historical Phonology and Vocabulary of the West Chadic Languages], in: V. Ya. Porxomovsky (ed.), Африканское историческое языкознание: проблемы реконструкции [African Historical Linguistics: Problems of Reconstruction]. Moscow: Nauka, pp. 30—268. |
Stolbova 2005— | Stolbova, Olga V. 2005— | Chadic Lexical Database. Kaluga: “Poligrafiya”. |
Stolper 2004 | Stolper, Matthew W. 2004 | “Elamite”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 60—94. |
Stone 1987a | Stone, Gerald 1987a | “Polish”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 348—366. |
Stone 1987b | Stone, Gerald 1987b | “Czech and Slovak”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 367—390. |
Stone 1993a | Stone, Gerald 1993a | “Sorbian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 593—685. |
Stone 1993b | Stone, Gerald 1993b | “Cassubian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 759—794. |
Stowasser—Ani 1964 | Stowasser, Karl, and Moukhtar Ani 1964 | A Dictionary of Syrian Arabic: English-Arabic. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Stratmann 1891 | Stratmann, Francis Henry 1891 | A Middle English Dictionary. New edition, rearranged, revised, and enlarged by Henry Bradley. Reprinted 1978. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Streck 2003 | Streck, Michael P. 2003 | Die akkadischen Verbalstämme mit ta-Infix [The Akkadian Verbal Stems with ta-Infix]. Münster: Ugarit-Verlag. |
Street 1962 | Street, John 1962 | Review of Nicholas Poppe, Vergleichende Grammatik der altäischen Sprachen. Teil I. Vergleichende Lautlehre [Comparative Grammar of the Altaic Languages. Part I: Comparative Phonology], Language 38.1:92—99. |
Street 1963 | Street, John 1963 | Khalkha Structure. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 24.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications. |
Street 1973 | Street, John 1973 | Review of Roy Andrew Miller, Japanese and the Other Altaic Languages, Language 49.4:950—954. |
Street 1974 | Street, John 1974 | On the Lexicon of Proto-Altaic: A Partial Index of Reconstructions. Madison, WI: The Author. |
Street 1975—1978 | Street, John 1975—1978 | Altaic Elements in Old Japanese. 2 vols. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. |
Street 1981 | Street, John 1981 | “Remarks on the Phonological Comparison of Japanese with Altaic”, Bulletin of the International Institute for Linguistic Sciences (Kyoto: Sangyō University) 2.4:293—307. |
Street 1985 | Street, John 1985 | “Japanese Reflexes of the Proto-Altaic Lateral”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 105:637—651. |
Streitberg 1963 | Streitberg, Wilhelm 1963 | Urgermanische Grammatik: Einführung in das vergleichende Studium der altgermanischen Dialekte [Proto-Germanic Grammar: Introduction to the Comparative Study of the Old Germanic Dialects]. 3rd edition. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Strunk 1988 | Strunk, Klaus 1988 | “Über Laryngale und einige reduplizierte Verbalstämme” [On Laryngeals and Several Reduplicated Verbal Stems], in: Alfred Bammesberger (ed.), Die Laryngaltheorie und die Rekonstruk-tion des indogermanischen Laut- und Formensystems [The Laryngeal Theory and the Reconstruction of the Indo-European Sound and Form Systems]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter, pp. 563—582. |
Strunk 1994 | Strunk, Klaus 1994 | “Relative Chronology and Indo-European Verb-System: The Case of the Present- and Aorist-Stems”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 22.3/4:417—434. |
Stuart-Smith 2004 | Stuart-Smith, Jane 2004 | Phonetics and Philology: Sound Change in Italic. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Sturtevant 1917 | Sturtevant, Edgar H. 1917 | Language Change: An Introduction to the Historical Study of Language. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Sturtevant 1933 | Sturtevant, Edgar H. 1933 | A Comparative Grammar of the Hittite Language. Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America. |
Sturtevant [1951] | Sturtevant, Edgar H. [1951] | [Revised edition. Vol. I. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.] |
Sturtevant 1936 | Sturtevant, Edgar H. 1936 | A Hittite Glossary. 2nd edition. Philadelphia, PA: Linguistic Society of America. |
Sturtevant 1938 | Sturtevant, Edgar H. 1938 | “Hittite Evidence against Full-Grade o”, Language 14:104—111. |
Sturtevant 1940 | Sturtevant, Edgar H. 1940 | The Pronunciation of Greek and Latin. 2nd edition. Philadelphia, PA: Linguistic Society of America. |
Sturtevant 1941 | Sturtevant, Edgar H. 1941 | “The Indo-European Voiceless Aspirates”, Language 17:1—11. |
Sturtevant—America. | Sturtevant, Edgar H. 1942 | The Indo-Hittite Laryngeals. Baltimore, MD: Linguistic Society of America.: |
Sturtevant—Bechtel 1935 | Sturtevant, Edgar H., and George Bechtel 1935 | A Hittite Chrestomathy. Philadelphia, PA: Linguistic Society of America. |
Suarez 1983 | Suarez, Jorge A. 1983 | The Mesoamerican Indian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Subrahmanyam 1983 | Subrahmanyam, P. S. 1983 | Dravidian Comparative Phonology. Annamalaingar: Annamalai University Press. |
Subrahmanyam 1998 | Subrahmanyam, P. S. 1998 | “Kolami”, in: Stanford B. Steever (ed.), The Dravidian Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 301—327. |
Suhonen 1988a | Suhonen, Seppo 1988a | “Geschichte der ostseefinnischen Sprachen” [History of the Baltic-Finnic Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 288—313. |
Suhonen 1988b | Suhonen, Seppo 1988b | “Die baltischen Lehnwörter der finnisch-ugrischen Sprachen” [The Baltic Loanwords in the Finno-Ugrian Languages], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 596—615. |
Sussex 1993 | Sussex, Roland 1993 | “Slavonic Languages in Emigration”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 999—1036. |
Suzuki 1985a | Suzuki, Seiichi 1985a | “The Glottalic Theory and Dialectal Developments of the PIE Stop System”, Zeitschrift für Vergleichende Sprachforschung 98.2:285—294. |
Suzuki 1985b | Suzuki, Seiichi 1985b | “The Role of Syllable Structure in Old English Poetry”, Lingua 67.2/3:97—119. |
Suzuki 1988a | Suzuki, Seiichi 1988a | “On the 1 sg. Pres. Ind. Ending -u and High Vowel Deletion in Anglian and Other West Germanic Languages”, Indoger-manische Forschungen XCIII:210—224. |
Suzuki 1988b | Suzuki, Seiichi 1988b | “The Indo-European Basis of Germanic Alliterative Verse”, Lingua 75:1—24. |
Suzuki 1991 | Suzuki, Seiichi 1991 | “The Germanic Verschärfung: A Syllabic Perspective”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 19.1/2:163—190. |
Svantesson 2003 | Svantesson, Jan-Olof 2003 | “Khalkha”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 154—176. |
Svantesson—Tsendina—Karlsson—Franzén 2005 | Svantesson, Jan-Olof, Anna Tsendina, Anastasia Karlsson, and Vivian Franzén 2005 | The Phonology of Mongolian. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Sverdrup 2002 | Sverdrup, Harald 2002 | “Exploring Properties of the Rätian (Rhaetic) Language”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 85—114. |
Sverdrup—Guardans 2002 | Sverdrup, Harald, and Ramon Guardans 2002 | “A Study of the Tartessian Script and Language”, in: Vitaly Shevoroshkin and Paul J. Sidwell (eds.), Languages and Their Speakers in Ancient Eurasia. Dedicated to Professor Aharon Dolgopolsky on his 70th Birthday. (= AHL Studies in the Science of History of Language, vol. 5.) Melbourne: Association for the History of Language, pp. 115—141. |
Swadesh 1971 | Swadesh, Morris 1971 | The Origin and Diversity of Language. Chicago, IL: Aldine-Atherton, Inc. |
Sweet 1896 | Sweet, Henry 1896 | A Student’s Dictionary of Anglo-Saxon. Impression of 1967. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Sweet 1953 | Sweet, Henry 1953 | Anglo-Saxon Primer. 9th edition by Norman Davis. Reprinted 1974. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Sweet 1967 | Sweet, Henry 1967 | Anglo-Saxon Reader in Prose and Verse. Revised by Dorothy Whitelock. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Swift 1963 | Swift, L. B. 1963 | A Reference Grammar of Modern Turkish. (= Uralic and Altaic Series 19.) Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications. |
Swiggers 1980 | Swiggers, Pierre 1980 | “Glottalization and Linguistic Universals: A Methodological Remark”, Folia Linguistica 14.3/4:433—436. |
Swiggers 1981 | Swiggers, Pierre 1981 | “A Phonological Analysis of the Áarsūsi Consonants”, Arabica 28:358—361. |
Swiggers 1989a | Swiggers, Pierre 1989a | “On (the Nature of) Proto-Indo-European Laryngeals”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 77—79. |
Swiggers 1989b | Swiggers, Pierre 1989b | “Towards a Characterization of the Proto-Indo-European Sound System”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 177—208. |
Swiggers 1989c | Swiggers, Pierre 1989c | “Latin Phonology and the ‘Glottalic Model’ [Discussion of Baldi—Johnston-Staver’s, Kortlandt’s, and Vennemann’s Papers]”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 217—219. |
Swiggers 1991 | Swiggers, Pierre 1991 | “The Indo-European Origin of the Greek Meters: Antoine Meillet’s Views and their Reception by Émile Benveniste and Nikolai Trubetzkoy”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 199—215. |
Szathmári 1988 | Szathmári, István 1988 | “La langue hongroise” [The Hungarian Language], in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 197—216. |
Szemerényi 1960 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1960 | Studies in the Indo-European System of Numerals. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Szemerényi 1961 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1961 | Trends and Tasks in Comparative Philology. London: University College London. |
Szemerényi 1964a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1964a | “Structuralism and Substratum: Indo-Europeans and Semites in the Ancient Near East”, Lingua 13:1—29. |
Szemerényi 1964b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1964b | Syncope in Greek and Indo-European and the Nature of Indo-European Accent. Naples: Istituto Universitario Orientale di Napoli. |
Szemerényi 1967 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1967 | “The New Look of Indo-European: Reconstruction and Typology”, Phonetica 17:65—99. |
Szemerényi 1970 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1970 | Einführung in die vergleichende Sprachwissenschaft [Introduction to Comparative Linguistics]. Darmstadt: Wissen-schaftliche Buchgesellschaft. |
Szemerényi [1980a] | Szemerényi, Oswald [1980a] | [2nd edition.] |
Szemerényi 1989a] | Szemerényi, Oswald 1989a] | [3rd edition.] |
Szemerényi [1990] | Szemerényi, Oswald [1990] | [4th edition.] |
Szemerényi 1972a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1972a | “Comparative Linguistics”, in: Thomas Sebeok (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics. The Hague: Mouton, vol. 9, part I, pp. 119—195. |
Szemerényi 1972b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1972b | “A New Leaf of the Gothic Bible”, Language 48.1:1—10. |
Szemerényi 1972c | Szemerényi, Oswald 1972c | “Review of William F. Wyatt, Jr., Indo-European /a/, Language 48.1:165—171. |
Szemerényi 1973 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1973 | “La théorie des laryngales de Saussure à Kuryłowicz et à Benveniste” [The Laryngeal Theory from Saussure to Kuryłowicz and Benveniste], Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique LXVIII:1—25. |
Szemerényi 1975 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1975 | Review of Thomas A. Sebeok (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics. Vol. 11: Diachronic, Areal, and Typological Linguistics, Kratylos XX:1—12. |
Szemerényi 1976 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1976 | “Problems in the Formation and Gradation of Latin Adjectives”, in: Anna Morpurgo-Davies and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Studies in Greek, Italic, and Indo-European Linguistics Offered to Leonard R. Palmer on the Occasion of his Seventieth Birthday. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissen-schaft, pp. 401—424. |
Szemerényi 1977a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1977a | “Sprachtypologie, funktionelle Belastung und die Entwicklung indogermanischen Lautsysteme” [Linguistic Typology, Functional Load, and the Development of the Indo-European Sound System], Acta Iranica 7:339—393.: |
Szemerényi 1977b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1977b | “Principles of Etymological Research in the Indo-European Languages”, in: Etymologie. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft, pp. 286—346. |
Szemerényi 1977c | Szemerényi, Oswald 1977c | Studies in the Kinship Terminology of the Indo-European Languages, with Special Reference to Indian, Iranian, Greek, and Latin. (= Acta Iranica 16 [Varia 1977].) Tehran and Liège: Bibliothèque Pahlavi, pp. 1—240. |
Szemerényi 1978a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1978a | Introducción a la lingüística comparativa [Introduction to Comparative Linguistics]. Spanish translation by Adelino Alvarez. Madrid: Gredos. |
Szemerényi 1978b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1978b | “Vedic šam, šaṁ yoḥ, and šaṁ(ča) yošča”, Incontri Linguistici 4.2:159—184. |
Szemerényi 1979a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1979a | “Palaic and the Indo-European Laryngeals”, in: Florilegium Anatolicum: Mélanges offerts à E. Laroche [Anatolian Cullings: Miscellanea Offered to E. Laroche]. Paris: Éditions E. de Boccard, pp. 315—319. |
Szemerényi 1979b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1979b | Direcciones de la lingüística moderna: I. De Saussure a Bloomfield (1916—1950) [Directions of Modern Linguistics: I. From Saussure to Bloomfield (1916—1950)]. Spanish translation by Marcos Martinez Hernandez. Madrid: Gredos. |
Szemerényi 1979c | Szemerényi, Oswald 1979c | “The Consonant Alternation πτ/π in Early Greek”, in: Colloquium Mycenaeum: Actes du sixième colloque international sur les textes mycéniens et égéens tenu à Chaumont sur Neuchâtel du 7 au 13 septembre 1975 [Mycenaean Colloquium: Proceedings of the Sixth International Colloquium on the Mycenaean and Aegean Texts Held at Chaumont sur Neuchâtel from 7 to 13 September 1975]. Neuchâtel: Université de Neuchâtel, pp. 323—340. |
Szemerényi 1979d | Szemerényi, Oswald 1979d | Review of Manfred Mayrhofer, Nachlese altpersischer Inschriften [Supplemental Old Persian Inscriptions], Kratylos XXIV:55—61. |
Szemerényi 1979e | Szemerényi, Oswald 1979e | Review of Ferdinand de Saussure, Saggio sul vocalismo indoeuropeo [An Essay on Indo-European Vocalism], Kratylos XXIV:43—46. |
Szemerényi 1979f | Szemerényi, Oswald 1979f | “Anatolico I (1—7)”, in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Studia Mediterranea Piero Meriggi dicata [Mediterranean Studies Dedicated to Piero Meriggi]. Pavia: University of Pavia, pp. 613—630. |
Szemerényi 1980b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1980b | “Iranica IV (Nos. 71—75)”, Studia Iranica 9.1:23—68. |
Szemerényi 1980c | Szemerényi, Oswald 1980c | “Semitic Influence on the Iranian Lexicon 1”, in: Gary Rendsburg, Ruth Adler, Milton Afra, and Nathan Winter (eds.), The Bible World: Essays in Honor of Cyrus H. Gordon. New York, NY: KTAV Publishing House, Inc., pp. 221—237. |
Szemerényi 1981 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1981 | “Sprachverfall und Sprachtod besonders im Lichte indogermanischen Sprachen” [Language Decay and Language Death especially in Light of the Indo-European Languages], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 281—310. |
Szemerényi 1982 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1982 | “Anatolica II (8—10)”, in: Erich Neu (ed.), Investigationes Philologicae et Comparativae: Gedenkschrift für Heinz Kronasser [Philological and Comparative Investigations: Memorial Volume for Heinz Kronasser]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, pp. 215—234. |
Szemerényi 1983 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1983 | Review of Thomas Burrow, The Problem of Shwa in Sanskrit, Kratylos 28:67—77. |
Szemerényi 1984a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1984a | Review of Mohammed A. Jazayery, Edgar C. Polomé, and Werner Winter (eds.), Linguistic and Literary Studies in Honor of Archibald A. Hill, Kratylos 29:13—17. |
Szemerényi 1984b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1984b | “Benveniste’s Oeuvre: The Psychogram of a Linguist”, in: Jean Taillardat, Gilbert Lazard, and Guy Serbat (eds.), É. Benveniste aujourd’hui [E. Benveniste Today]. Paris: Société pour l’Information Grammaticale, pp. 163—173. |
Szemerényi 1985a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1985a | Introduzione alla linguistica indeuropea [Introduction to Indo-European Linguistics]. Revised and updated edition translated into Italian by G. Boccali, V. Brugnatelli, and M. Negri. Milano: Edizioni Unicopli. |
Szemerényi 1985b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1985b | “Recent Developments in Indo-European Linguistics”, Transactions of the Philological Society 1965:1—71. |
Szemerényi 1985c | Szemerényi, Oswald 1985c | “Strukturelle Probleme der indogermanischen Flexion: Prinzipien und Modellfalle” [Structural Problems of Indo-European Inflection: Principles and Pitfalls], in: Bernfried Schlerath (ed.), Akten VII. Fachtagung der indogermanischen Gesellschaft, Berlin 20.—25. Februar 1983 [Proceedings of the VIIth Conference of the Indo-European Society, Berlin 20—25 February 1983]. Wiesbaden: Dr. Ludwig Reichert Verlag, pp. 516—533. |
Szemerényi 1987a | Szemerényi, Oswald 1987a | “The Origin of Aspect in the Indo-European Languages”, Glotta 65:1—18. |
Szemerényi 1987b | Szemerényi, Oswald 1987b | Scripta Minora: Selected Essays in Indo-European, Greek, and Latin. Edited by P. Considine and J. T. Hooker. 3 vols. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprachwissenschaft. |
Szemerényi 1988 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1988 | “On Contacts between Indo-European and Uralic”, Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 60:169—176. |
Szemerényi 1989 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1989 | Review of Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction, Diachronica VI.2:237—269. |
Szemerényi 1996 | Szemerényi, Oswald 1996 | Introduction to Indo-European Linguistics. Translated from the 4th edition (1990) of Einführung in die vergleichende Sprachwissenschaft [Introduction to Comparative Linguistics] by David Morgan Jones, with additional notes and references. Oxford: Clarendon Press. |
Tailleur 1960a | Tailleur, Olivier G. 1960a | “Les uniques données sur l’omok, langue éteinte de la famille youkaghire” [The Only Data on Omok, An Extinct Language of the Yukaghir Family], Orbis 8:78—108. |
Tailleur 1960b | Tailleur, Olivier G. 1960b | “La place du ghiliak parmi les langues paléosibériennes” [The Place of Gilyak among the Paleosiberian Languages], Lingua 9:113—143. |
Tailleur 1961 | Tailleur, Olivier G. 1961 | “Sur une explication de l’aïnou par l’indo-européen” [On an Explanation of Ainu by Means of Indo-European], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 77:1—30. |
Takács 1996 | Takács, Gábor 1996 | “Egyptian Lexics in an Afrasian Perspective: New Etymologies”, Studia Etymologica Cracoviensia 1:125—171. |
Takács 1997 | Takács, Gábor 1997 | “Note on the Origin of PIE *pes- ‘penis’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 25.3/4:371—382. |
Takács 1998 | Takács, Gábor 1998 | “Afro-Asiatic (Semito-Hamitic) Substratum in the Proto-Indo-European Cultural Lexicon”, Lingua Posnaniensis 40:141—172. |
Takács 1999 | Takács, Gábor 1999 | Development of Afro-Asiatic (Semito-Hamitic) Comparative-Historical Linguistics in Russia and the Former Soviet Union. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Takács 2004 | Takács, Gábor 2004 | “Afrasian and Nostratic: Addenda to the Nostratic Root List of A. B. Dolgopolsky (1991)”, in: Irén Hegedűs and Paul Sidwell (eds.), Nostratic Centennial Conference: The Pécs Papers. Pécs: Lingua Franca Group, pp. 193—227. |
Tanz 1980 | Tanz, Christine 1980 | Studies in the Acquisition of Deictic Terms. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Taracha 2000 | Taracha, Piotr 2000 | “More on the Hattic Sentence-Building: Does the Category of Tense Exist in Hattic?”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman (ed.), The Asia Minor Connection: Studies on the Pre-Greek Languages in Memory of Charles Carter. Leuven and Paris: Peeters, pp. 233—243. |
Telegin—Mallory 1994 | Telegin, D. Ya., and J. P. Mallory 1994 | The Anthropomorphic Stelae of the Ukraine. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man. |
Terry 1971 | Terry, Robert R. 1971 | “Chadic”, in: Carleton T. Hodge (ed.), Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 119—130. |
Thacker 1954 | Thacker, T. W. 1954 | The Relationship of the Semitic and Egyptian Verbal Systems. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Thomas 1970 | Thomas, Homer L. 1970 | “New Evidence for Dating the Indo-European Dispersal in Europe”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 199—215. |
Thomas 1982 | Thomas, Homer L. 1982 | “Archaeological Evidence for the Migrations of the Indo-Europeans”, in: Edgar C. Polomé (ed.), The Indo-Europeans in the Fourth and Third Millennia. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 61—85. |
Thomas 1987 | Thomas, Homer L. 1987 | “The Indo-Europeans — Some Historical and Theoretical Considerations”, in: Susan Nacev Skomal and Edgar C. Polomé (eds.), Proto-Indo-European: The Archaeology of a Linguistic Problem. Studies in Honor of Marija Gimbutas. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 145—164. |
Thomas 1991 | Thomas, Homer L. 1991 | “Indo-European: From the Paleolithic to the Neolithic”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 12—37. |
Thomas 1992 | Thomas, Homer L. 1992 | “Archaeology and Indo-European Comparative Linguistics”, in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 281—315. |
Thomsen 1987 | Thomsen, Marie-Louise 1987 | The Sumerian Language: An Introduction to its History and Grammatical Structure. 2nd edition. Copenhagen: Akademisk Forlag. |
Thráinsson 1994 | Thráinsson, Höskuldur 1994 | “Icelandic”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 142—189. |
Thumb 1958—1959 | Thumb, Albert 1958—1959 | Handbuch des Sanskrit [Handbook of Sanskrit]. 3rd revised edition by Richard Hauschild. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Thurneysen 1946 | Thurneysen, Rudolf 1946 | A Grammar of Old Irish. Dublin: The Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies. |
Tichy 2007 | Tichy, Eva 2007 | A Survey of Proto-Indo-European. Translated by James E. Cathey in collaboration with the author. Bremen: Hempen Verlag. |
Till 1978 | Till, Walter 1978 | Koptische Grammatik [Coptic Grammar]. 5th edition. Leipzig: VEB Verlag Enzyklopädie. |
Timberlake 1993 | Timberlake, Alan 1993 | “Russian”, in: Bernard Comrie and Greville G. Corbett (eds.), The Slavonic Languages. London and New York, NY: Rout-ledge, pp. 827—886. |
Tischler 1976 | Tischler, Johann 1976 | “Zum Wurzelnomen im Indogermanischen” [On Root Nouns in Indo-European], Münchener Studien zur Sprachwissenschaft 35:121—132. |
Tischler 1977— | Tischler, Johann 1977— | Hethitisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Hittite Etymological Dictionary]. Innsbruck: Innsbrucker Beiträge zur Sprach-wissenschaft. |
Tischler 1979 | Tischler, Johann 1979 | “Der indogermanische Anteil am Wortschatz des Hethitischen” [The Indo-European Portion of the Hittite Vocabulary], in: Erich Neu and Wolfgang Meid (eds.), Hethitisch und Indogermanisch [Hittite and Indo-European]. Innsbruck: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität Innsbruck, pp. 257—267. |
Tischler 1981 | Tischler, Johann 1981 | “Schwundstuffige Formen von langvokalischen Verben im Altindischen” [Null-grade Forms of Long Vowel Verbs in Old Indic], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 311—323. |
Tischler 1992 | Tischler, Johann 1992 | “Zum Kentum-Satem-Problem im Anatolischen” [On the Centum-Satəm Problem in Anatolian], in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 253—274. |
Toivonen—Itkonen—Joki—Peltola—Tanner—Cronstedt 1955—1981 | Toivonen, Y. H., E. Itkonen, A. J. Joki, R. Peltola, S. Tanner, and M. Cronstedt 1955—1981 | Suomen Kielen Etymologinen Sanakirja [Etymological Dictionary of the Finnish Language]. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura. |
Tomback 1978 | Tomback, Richard 1978 | A Comparative Semitic Lexicon of the Phoenician Language. Missoula, MT: Scholars Press. |
Toporov 1991 | Toporov, V. N. 1991 | “Indo-European *eg’h-om (*He-g’h-om): *men-, 1 sg. Pron. Pers. In the Light of Glossogenetics”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture and Religion: Festschrift for Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 64—88. |
Tovar 1970 | Tovar, Antonio 1970 | “Basque Language and the Indo-European Spread to the West”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 267—278. |
Trask 1979 | Trask, R. L[arry] 1979 | “On the Origins of Ergativity”, in: Frans Plank (ed.), Ergativity: Toward a Theory of Grammatical Relations. New York, NY, and London: Academic Press, pp. 385—404. |
Trask 1993 | Trask, R. L[arry] 1993 | A Dictionary of Phonetics and Phonology. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Trask 1994 | Trask, R. L[arry] 1994 | Language Change. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Trask 1995 | Trask, R. L[arry] 1995 | Language: The Basics. London: Routledge. |
Trask 1996 | Trask, R. L[arry] 1996 | Historical Linguistics. London: Arnold. |
Trask 1999 | Trask, R. L[arry] 1999 | “Why Should a Language Have Relatives?”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 157—176. |
Trask 2007 | Trask, R. L[arry] 2007 | Language and Linguistics: The Key Concepts. Second edition, ed. by Peter Stockwell. Abingdon, Oxon, and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Traugott—Labrum—Shepherd 1980 | Traugott, Elizabeth Closs, Rebecca Labrum, and Susan Shepherd (eds.) 1980 | Papers from the 4th International Conference on Historical Linguistics. (= Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 14.) Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Tropper 2000 | Tropper, Josef 2000 | Ugaritische Grammatik [Ugaritic Grammar]. Münster: Ugarit-Verlag. |
Trubetzkoy 1922 | Trubetzkoy, N. S. 1922 | “Les consonnes latérales des langues caucasiques-septentrionales” [The Lateral Consonants of the Northeast Caucasian Languages], Bulletin de La Société de Linguistique 23:184—204. |
Trubetzkoy 1930 | Trubetzkoy, N. S. 1930 | “Nordkaukasische Wortgleichungen” [North Caucasian Word Equations], Zeitschrift für die Kunde des Morgenlandes 37:76—92. |
Trubetzkoy 1967 | Trubetzkoy, N. S. 1967 | Principes de phonologie [Principles of Phonology]. French translation by J. Cantineau. Paris: Klincksieck. |
Trubetzkoy 1969 | Trubetzkoy, N. S. 1969 | Principles of Phonology. English translation by Christiane A. Baltaxe. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Trubetzkoy 2001 | Trubetzkoy, N. S. 2001 | Studies in General Linguistics and Language Structure. Edited with an Introduction by Anatoly Liberman. Translated by Marvin Taylor and Anatoly Liberman. Durham, NC, and London: Duke University Press. |
Trudgill 1995 | Trudgill, Peter 1995 | Sociolinguistics. 2nd edition. London: Penguin. |
Tsereteli 1966 | Tsereteli, M. 1966 | “Zur Frage der Verwandtschaft des Georgischen (Kartwelischen)” [On the Question of the Relationship of Georgian (Kartvelian)], Bedi Kartlisa 21—22:128—134. |
Tsintsius (Cincius [Цинциус]) 1975—1977 | Tsintsius (Cincius [Цинциус]), V. I. 1975—1977 | Сравнительный словарь Тунгусо-Маньчжурских языков [Comparative Dictionary of the Manchu-Tungus Languages]. 2 vols. Leningrad: Nauka. |
Tsumagari 2003 | Tsumagari, Toshiro 2003 | “Dagur”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 129—153. |
Tuite 1990/1991 | Tuite, Kevin 1990/1991 | “Das Präfix x- im Frühgeorgischen” [The Prefix x- in Early Georgian], Georgica 13 & 14:34—61. |
Tuite 1992 | Tuite, Kevin 1992 | “The Category of Number in Common Kartvelian”, in: Howard I. Aronson (ed.), The Non-Slavic Languages of the USSR: Linguistic Studies, Second Series. Chicago, IL: Chicago Linguistic Society/University of Chicago, pp. 245—283. |
Tuite 1994 | Tuite, Kevin 1994 | Anthology of Georgian Folk Poetry. Madison, NJ: Fairleigh Dickinson University Press. |
Tuite 1996 | Tuite, Kevin 1996 | “The Caucasus”, in: David Levinson and Melvin Ember (eds.), Encyclopedia of Cultural Anthropology. Lakeville, CT: American Reference Publishing Co., pp. 181—185. |
Tuite 1997 | Tuite, Kevin 1997 | Svan. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Tuite 1998 | Tuite, Kevin 1998 | Kartvelian Morphosyntax: Number Agreement and Morpho-syntax Orientation in the South Caucasian Languages. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Tuite 1999 | Tuite, Kevin 1999 | “The Myth of the Caucasian Sprachbund: The Case of Ergativity”, Lingua 108:1—26. |
Tuite 2000a | Tuite, Kevin 2000a | Review of Georgij Klimov, Etymological Dictionary of the Kartvelian Languages, Anthropological Linguistics 42.4:583—586. |
Tuite 2000b | Tuite, Kevin 2000b | “‘Antimarriage’ in Ancient Georgian Society”, Anthropological Linguistics 42.1:37—60. |
Tuite 2002 | Tuite, Kevin 2002 | “Deponent Verbs in Georgian”, in: Wolfram Boblitz, Manfred von Roncador, and Heinz Vater (eds.), Philologie, Typologie, und Sprachstruktur: Festschrift für Winfried Boeder zum 65. Geburtstag [Philology, Typology, and Language Structure: Commemorative Volume for Winfried Boeder on his 65th Birthday]. Frankfurt am Main: Peter Lang Verlag, pp. 375—389. |
Tuite 2003 | Tuite, Kevin 2003 | “Kartvelian Series Markers”, in: Dee Ann Holisky and Kevin Tuite (eds.), Current Trends in Caucasian, East European, and Inner Asian Linguistics: Papers in Honor of Howard I. Aronson. Amsterdam and New York, NY: John Benjamins, pp. 363—391. |
Tuite 2004 | Tuite, Kevin 2004 | “Early Georgian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 967—987. |
Tuite—Schulze 1998 | Tuite, Kevin, and Wolfgang Schulze 1998 | “A Case of Taboo-Motivated Lexical Replacement in the Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus”, Anthropological Linguistics 40.3:363—383. |
Turner 1966—1969 | Turner, Ralph L. 1966—1969 | A Comparative Dictionary of the Indo-Aryan Languages. 2 vols. Impression of 1973. Indices (1969) compiled by Dorothy Rivers Turner. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Turner 1975 | Turner, Ralph L. 1975 | Collected Papers 1912—1973. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Turunen 1988 | Turunen, Aimo 1988 | “The Baltic-Finnic Languages”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 58—83. |
Tyler 1968 | Tyler, Stephen A. 1968 | “Dravidian and Uralian: The Lexical Outlook”, Language 44.4:798—812. |
Tyler 1986 | Tyler, Stephen A. 1986 | “Proto-Dravido-Uralian”. Unpublished manuscript. |
Tyloch 1975 | Tyloch, Witold 1975 | “The Evidence of the Proto-Lexicon for the Cultural Background of the Semitic Peoples”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 55—61. |
Uesson 1970 | Uesson, Ants-Michael 1970 | On Linguistic Affinity: The Indo-Uralic Problem. Malmö: Estonian Post. |
Uguzzoni 1986 | Uguzzoni, Arianna 1986 | “Nuove ipotesi sul consonantismo protoindoeuropeo” [New Hypotheses on Proto-Indo-European Consonantism], in: Studi orientali e linguistici III (1986): miscellanea in onore di Luigi Heilmann per il 75° compleano [Oriental Studies and Linguistics III (1986): Miscellanea in Honor of Luigi Heilmann on his 75th Birthday]. Bologna: Cooperativa Libraria Universitaria Editrice Bologna, pp. 291—313. |
Uhlenbeck 1901 | Uhlenbeck, C. C. 1901 | “Agens und Patiens im Kasussystem der indogermanischen Sprachen” [Agent and Patient in the Case System of the Indo-European Languages], Indogermanische Forschungen 12: 170—171. |
Ullendorf 1958 | Ullendorf, Edward 1958 | “What is a Semitic Language?”, Orientalia 27:66—75. |
Ullendorf 1971 | Ullendorf, Edward 1971 | “Comparative Semitics”, in: Carleton T. Hodge (ed.), Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 27—39. |
Ullendorf 1977 | Ullendorf, Edward 1977 | Is Biblical Hebrew a Language? Studies in Semitic Languages and Civilizations. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Ultan 1978 | Ultan, Russell 1978 | “The Nature of Future Tenses”, in: Joseph H. Greenberg (ed.), Universals of Human Language. Volume 3: Word Structure. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press, pp. 83—123. |
Unger 1990 | Unger, J. Marshall 1990 | “Summary Report of the Altaic Panel”, in: Philip Baldi (ed.), Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology. Amsterdam and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 479—482. |
Unger 2005 | Unger, J. Marshall 2005 | “Internal Reconstruction in Hungarian”, Diachronica XXII.1:109—154. |
Ungnad—Matouš 1969 | Ungnad, Arthur, and Lubor Matouš 1969 | Grammatik des Akkadischen [Grammar of Akkadian]. Fifth revised edition. Munich: C. H. Beck. |
Vacek 1978 | Vacek, Jaroslav 1978 | “The Problem of the Genetic Relationship of the Mongolian and Dravidian Languages”, Archív Orientální 46:141—151. |
Vacek 1983 | Vacek, Jaroslav 1983 | “Dravido-Altaic: The Mongolian and Dravidian Verbal Bases”, Journal of Tamil Studies 23:1—17. |
Vacek 1987 | Vacek, Jaroslav 1987 | “The Dravido-Altaic Relationship”, Archív Orientální 55:134—149. |
Vaillant 1950—1966 | Vaillant, André 1950—1966 | Grammaire comparée des langues slaves [Comparative Grammar of the Slavic Languages]. 3 vols. Paris: IAC (vols. I and II)/Paris: Klincksieck (vol. III). |
Vajda 2004 | Vajda, Edward J. 2004 | Ket. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Van Coetsem 1972 | Van Coetsem, Frans 1972 | “Proto-Germanic Morphophonemics”, in: Frans van Coetsem and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer, pp. 175—209. |
Van Coetsem 1990 | Van Coetsem, Frans 1990 | Ablaut and Reduplication in the Germanic Verb. Heidelberg: Carl Winter Verlag. |
Van Coetsem 1994 | Van Coetsem, Frans 1994 | The Vocalism of the Germanic Parent Language: Systematic Evolution and Sociohistorical Context. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Van Coetsem—Kufner 1972 | Van Coetsem, Frans, and Herbert L. Kufner (eds.) 1972 | Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic. Tübingen: Max Niemeyer. |
Van den Hout 1992 | Van den Hout, Th. P. J. 1992 | “Remarks on Some Hittite Double Accusative Constructions”, in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 275—304. |
Van der Wal—Quak 1994 | Van der Wal, Marijke J., and Aad Quak 1994 | “Old and Middle Continental West Germanic”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 72—109. |
Van Kemenade 1994 | Van Kemenade, Ans 1994 | “Old and Middle English”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 110—141. |
Van Ness 1994 | Van Ness, Silke 1994 | “Pennsylvania German”, in: Ekkehard König and Johan Van Der Auwera (eds.), The Germanic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 420—438. |
Van Windekens 1944 | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1944 | Morphologie comparée du tokharien [Comparative Morphology of Tocharian]. Louvain: Le Muséon. |
Van Windekens 1975 | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1975 | “Les termes ‘chien’ et ‘cheval’ en indo-européen” [The Terms ‘dog’ and ‘horse’ in Indo-European], Indogermanische Forschungen 80:62—65. |
Van Windekens 1976 | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1976 | “Encore le terme ‘larme’ en indo-européen” [Again the Term ‘tear’ in Indo-European], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Forschung (KZ) 90.1/2:12—17. |
Van Windekens 1976—1982 | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1976—1982 | Le tokharien confronté avec les autres langues indo-européennes [Tocharian Compared with the Other Indo-European Languages]. 3 vols. Louvain: Centre International de Dialectologie Générale. |
Van Windekens 1977a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1977a | “Notes de lexicologie grecque II” [Notes on Greek Lexicology II], Orbis XXVI.1:377—380. |
Van Windekens 1977b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1977b | “Recherches complémentaires sur le vocabulaire tokharien II” [Further Investigations on the Tocharian Vocabulary II], Orbis XXVI.2:388—394. |
Van Windekens 1978a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1978a | “Notes de lexicologie grecque III” [Notes on Greek Lexicology III], Orbis XXVII.1:94—96. |
Van Windekens 1978b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1978b | “Sur quelques mots sanskrits passés en tokharien” [On Several Sanskrit Words Passed into Tocharian], Orbis XXVII.1:160—162. |
Van Windekens 1978c | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1978c | “Hittitica I”, Orbis XXVII.2:317—320. |
Van Windekens 1978d | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1978d | “Recherches complémentaires sur le vocabulaire tokharien III” [Further Investigations on the Tocharian Vocabulary III], Orbis XXVII.2:348—351. |
Van Windekens 1978e | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1978e | “Zur Herkunft von heth. ḫaluga-” [On the Origin of Hittite ḫaluga-], Indogermanische Forschungen 83:121—122. |
Van Windekens 1978f | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1978f | “Nouvelle note sur arménien hariwr” [A New Note on Armenian hariwr], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprach-forschung (KZ) 92.1/2:294—296. |
Van Windekens 1979a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1979a | “Recherches complémentaires sur le vocabulaire tokharien IV” [Further Investigations on the Tocharian Vocabulary IV], Orbis XXVIII.1:168—170. |
Van Windekens 1979b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1979b | “Sur un ‘nouveau’ point de départ pour les études phonétiques et lexicales tokhariennes” [On a “New” Starting Point for Tocharian Phonetic and Lexical Studies], Orbis XXVIII.1:171—187. |
Van Windekens 1979c | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1979c | “Notes de lexicologie grecque IV” [Notes on Greek Lexicology IV], Orbis XXVIII.1:164—165. |
Van Windekens 1979d | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1979d | “Once Again on Greek Initial Zeta”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 7.1/2:129—132. |
Van Windekens 1979e | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1979e | “Contributions à l’interprétation du vocabulaire hittite et indo-européen” [Contributions to the Interpretation of the Hittite and Indo-European Vocabulary], in: Bela Brogyanyí (ed.), Studies in Diachronic, Synchronic and Typological Linguistics: Festschrift for Oswald Szemerényi. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part II, pp. 909—925. |
Van Windekens 1980a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1980a | “Nouveaux arguments en faveur de la thèse pélasgique” [New Arguments in Favor of the Pelasgian Thesis], in: Studia Linguistica in Honorem Vladimir I. Georgiev [Linguistic Studies in Honor of Vladimir I. Georgiev]. Sofia: Academia Litterarum Bulgarica, pp. 146—155. |
Van Windekens 1980b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1980b | “Quelques confrontations lexicales arméno-hittites” [Several Armenian-Hittite Lexical Comparisons], Annual of Armenian Linguistics 1:39—53. |
Van Windekens 1980c | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1980c | “De quelques ‘observations’ de M. Winter” [On Several “Observations” of Winter], Orbis XXIX.1/2:283—311. |
Van Windekens 1981a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1981a | “Recherches complémentaires sur le vocabulaire tokharien VI” [Further Investigations on the Tocharian Vocabulary VI], Orbis XXX.1/2:265—268. |
Van Windekens 1981b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1981b | “Recherches comparatives sur le vocabulaire des langues anatoliennes” [Comparative Investigations in the Vocabulary of the Anatolian Languages], in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 325—344. |
Van Windekens 1982a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1982a | “Arm. jeṙn ‘main’: ancien thème indo-européen en *-ser-/-sen-” [Armenian jeṙn ‘hand’: Ancient Indo-European Stem in *-ser-/ -sen-”], Handes Amsorya XCVI:15—22. |
Van Windekens 1982b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1982b | “Encore les substantifs grecs à suffixe -εύς” [Again the Greek Substantives in -εύς], Glotta LX.1/2:49—52. |
Van Windekens 1982c | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1982c | “Le nom propre grec Μινως: synonyme de Ἕρως” [The Greek Proper Name Μινως: Synonym of Ἕρως], Linguistique Balkanique XXV.3:41—42. |
Van Windekens 1982d | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1982d | “Vieux-prussien lasto ‘lit’ et tokharien B lesto ‘nid, refuge’” [Old Prussian lasto ‘bed’ and Tocharian B lesto ‘nest, refuge’], Lingua Posnaniensis XXV:13—15. |
Van Windekens 1982e | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1982e | “Structure et sens primitif des noms de nombre indo-européens *qßet„or ‘quatre’ et *penqße ‘cinq’” [Structure and Primitive Meaning of the Indo-European Number Words *qßet„or ‘four’ and *penqße ‘five’], Indogermanische Forschungen 87:8—14. |
Van Windekens 1983a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1983a | “Un vieux problème: le vocalisme de lat. canis ‘chien’” [An Old Problem: The Vocalism of Latin canis ‘dog’], in: C. Angelet, L. Mélis, F. J. Mertens, and F. Mussarra (eds.), Études romanes à la mémoire de Hugo Plomteux [Romance Studies in Memory of Hugo Plomteux]. Leuven: Leuven University Press, pp. 455—458. |
Van Windekens 1983b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1983b | “Grec θοός ‘rapide’ et θοός ‘pointu’” [Greek θοός ‘rapid’ and θοός ‘pointed’], Glotta LXI.3/4:164—166. |
Van Windekens 1984a | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1984a | “Encore lat. uxor et i.-e. *ukson-” [Again Latin uxor and Indo-European *ukson-], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprach-forschung (KZ) 97.1:96—98. |
Van Windekens 1984b | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1984b | “De quelques mots iraniens empruntés par le tokharien et par le grec” [On Several Iranian Words Borrowed by Tocharian and Greek], Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesell-schaft 134.1:84—91. |
Van Windekens 1986 | Van Windekens, A[lbert] J[oris] 1986 | Dictionnaire étymologique complémentaire de la langue grecque [Supplemental Etymological Dictionary of the Greek Language]. Leuven: Peeters. |
Veenker 1969 | Veenker, Wolfgang 1969 | “Verwandtschaft zwischen dem Finnougrischen und entfernteren Sprachgruppen?” [Relationship between Finno-Ugrian and Distant Languages Groups?], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 41:360—371. |
Vendryès 1924 | Vendryès, Joseph 1924 | “La théorie japhétique de M. Marr” [The Japhetic Theory of Marr], Revue Celtique 12:291—293. |
Vendryès 1959— | Vendryès, Joseph 1959— | Lexique étymologique de l’irlandais ancien [Etymological Lexicon of Old Irish]. Paris: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique/Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies. |
Vennemann 1984 | Vennemann, Theo 1984 | “Hochgermanisch und Niedergermanisch: Die Verzweiguns-theorie der germanisch-deutschen Lautverschiebung” [High Germanic and Low Germanic: Theory about the Ramifications of the Germanic-German Sound Shift], Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur 106:1—45. |
Vennemann 1989a | Vennemann, Theo 1989a | “Phonological and Morphological Consequences of the ‘Glottalic Theory’”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 107—115. |
Vennemann 1989b | Vennemann, Theo 1989b | “Indo-European Consonant Shifts — Algebra, Arithmetic, or Normal Science”, in: Theo Vennemann (ed.), The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 231—244. |
Vennemann 2003 | Vennemann, Theo 2003 | Europa Vasconica, Europa Semitica [Vasconic Europe, Semitic Europe]. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Vennemann 1989 | Vennemann, Theo (ed.) 1989 | The New Sound of Indo-European: Essays in Phonological Reconstruction. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter. |
Vergote 1945 | Vergote, Joseph 1945 | Phonétique historique de l’égyptien [Historical Phonology of Egyptian]. Louvain: Le Muséon. |
Vergote 1965 | Vergote, Joseph 1965 | De verhouding van het Egyptisch tot de Semietische talen (Le rapport de l’égyptien avec les langues sémitiques) [The Relationship of Egyptian to the Semitic Languages]. Brussels: Med. KVAW Ltr. And SCh. Kst. Belg. |
Vergote 1971 | Vergote, Joseph 1971 | “Egyptian”, in: Carleton T. Hodge (ed.), Afroasiatic: A Survey. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 40—66. |
Vergote 1973 | Vergote, Joseph 1973 | Grammaire copte [Coptic Grammar]. 2 vols. Louvain: Peeters. |
Vergote 1975 | Vergote, Joseph 1975 | “La position intermédiaire de l’ancien égyptien entre l’hébreu et l’arabe” [The Intermediate Position of Ancient Egyptian between Hebrew and Arabic], in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 193—199. |
Viitso 1998a | Viitso, Tiit-Rein 1998a | “Fennic”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 96—114. |
Viitso 1998b | Viitso, Tiit-Rein 1998b | “Estonian”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 115—148. |
Vilborg 1960 | Vilborg, Ebbe 1960 | A Tentative Grammar of Mycenaean Greek. Goteborg: Almqvist and Wiksells. |
Villar 1988 | Villar, Francisco 1988 | “On the 2nd Person Singular Pronoun in Hittite and in Indo-European”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 16.1/2:1—8. |
Villar 1990 | Villar, Francisco 1990 | “Indo-européens et pre-indo-européens dans la péninsule ibérique” [Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans in the Iberian Peninsula], in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 363—394. |
Villar 1991a | Villar, Francisco 1991a | “The Numeral ‘two’ and its Number Marking”, in: Roger Pearson (ed.), Perspectives on Indo-European Language, Culture, and Religion: Studies in Honor of Edgar C. Polomé. McLean, VA: Institute for the Study of Man, vol. 1, pp. 136—154. |
Villar 1991b | Villar, Francisco 1991b | Los indoeuropeos y los orígenes de Europa: Lenguaje e historia [The Indo-Europeans and the Origins of Europe: Language and History]. Madrid: Gredos. |
Villar [1996] | Villar, Francisco [1996] | [2nd edition.] |
Villar 1997 | Villar, Francisco 1997 | “The Celtiberian Language”, Zeitschrift für Celtische Philologie 49/50:898—949. |
Villar 2000 | Villar, Francisco 2000 | Indoeuropeas y no indoeuropeas en la Hispania preromana [Indo-Europeans and Non-Indo-Europeans in Pre-Roman Hispania]. Salamanca: Universidad de Salamanca. |
Villar 2004 | Villar, Francisco 2004 | “The Celtic Language of the Iberian Peninsula”, in: Philip Baldi and Pietro U. Dini (eds.), Studies in Baltic and Indo-European Linguistics in Honor of William R. Schmalstieg. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 243—273. |
Vincent 1980 | Vincent, Nigel 1980 | “Iconic and Symbolic Aspects of Syntax: Prospects for Reconstruction”, in: Paolo Ramat (ed.), Indo-European Reconstruction and Indo-European Syntax. Proceedings of the Colloquium of the “Indogermanische Gesellschaft”, University of Pavia, 6—7 September 1979. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 47—68. |
Vincent 1987 | Vincent, Nigel 1987 | “Italian”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 279—302. |
Vincent 1988a | Vincent, Nigel 1988a | “Latin”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 26—78. |
Vincent 1988b | Vincent, Nigel 1988b | “Italian”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 279—313. |
Vine 1991 | Vine, Brent 1991 | “Indo-European and Nostratic”, Indogermanische Forschungen 96:9—35. |
Vine 1998 | Vine, Brent 1998 | “Indo-European and Nostratic: Some Further Comments”, in: Joseph C. Salmons and Brian D. Joseph (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 85—106. |
Vineis 1998 | Vineis, Edoardo 1998 | “Latin”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 261—321. |
Vogt 1938 | Vogt, Hans 1938 | “Arménien et caucasique du sud” [Armenian and South Caucasian], Nordsk Tidsskrift for Sprogvidenskap 9:321—337. |
Vogt 1939 | Vogt, Hans 1939 | “Alternances vocaliques en géorgien” [Vocalic Alternations in Georgian], Nordsk Tidsskrift for Sprogvidenskap 10:118—135. |
Vogt 1942 | Vogt, Hans 1942 | “La parenté des langues caucasiques” [The Relationship of the Caucasian Languages], Nordsk Tidsskrift for Sprogvidenskap 12:242—257. |
Vogt 1961 | Vogt, Hans 1961 | “Arménien et géorgien” [Armenian and Georgian], Handes Amsorya LXXV:10—12. |
Vogt 1971 | Vogt, Hans 1971 | Grammaire de la langue géorgienne [Grammar of the Georgian Language]. Oslo: Universiteitsforlaget. |
Voigt 1999 | Voigt, Rainer 1999 | “On Semitohamitic Comparison”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 315—325. |
Volkart 1994 | Volkart, Marianne 1994 | Zu Brugmanns Gesetz im Altindischen [On Brugmann’s Law in Old Indic]. Bern: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft der Universität. |
Von Soden 1952 | Von Soden, Wolfram 1952 | Grundriß der akkadischen Grammatik [Elements of Akkadian Grammar]. Rome: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum. |
Von Soden 1965—1981 | Von Soden, Wolfram 1965—1981 | Akkadisches Handwörterbuch [Akkadian Pocket Dictionary]. 3 vols. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz. |
Vovin 1993a | Vovin, Alexander 1993a | A Reconstruction of Proto-Ainu. Leiden: E. J. Brill. |
Vovin 1993b | Vovin, Alexander 1993b | “Towards a New Classification of Tungusic Languages”, Eurasian Studies Yearbook 65:99—114. |
Vovin 1993c | Vovin, Alexander 1993c | “Long Vowels in Proto-Japanese”, Journal of East Asian Linguistics 2:125—134. |
Vovin 1994a | Vovin, Alexander 1994a | “Genetic Affiliation of Japanese and Methodology of Linguistic Comparison”, Journal de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 85:241—256. |
Vovin 1994b | Vovin, Alexander 1994b | “Long-Distance Relationships, Reconstruction Methodology, and the Origins of Japanese”, Diachronica 11.1:95—114. |
Vovin 1994c | Vovin, Alexander 1994c | “Is Japanese Related to Austronesian?”, Oceanic Linguistics 33.2:369—390. |
Vovin 1995a | Vovin, Alexander 1995a | “Once Again on the Accusative Marker in Old Korean”, Diachronica XII.2:223—236. |
Vovin 1995b | Vovin, Alexander 1995b | Review of William Rozycki, Mongol Elements in Manchu, Mongolian Studies XVIII:147—149. |
Vovin 1995c | Vovin, Alexander 1995c | Reply to Karl Krippes Concerning His Review of Sergej Starostin, Алтайская проблема и происхождение японского языка [The Altaic Problem and the Origin of the Japanese Language], Dhumbadji! 2.2:25—32. |
Vovin 1997 | Vovin, Alexander 1997 | “On the Syntactic Typology of Old Japanese Language”, Journal of East Asian Linguistics 6:273—290. |
Vovin 1998 | Vovin, Alexander 1998 | “Nostratic and Altaic”, in: Brian D. Joseph and Joseph C. Salmons (eds.), Nostratic: Sifting the Evidence. Amsterdam and Philadelphia, PA: John Benjamins, pp. 257—270. |
Vovin 1999 | Vovin, Alexander 1999 | “Altaic Evidence for Nostratic”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 367—386. |
Vovin 2001 | Vovin, Alexander 2001 | “North East Asian Historical-Comparative Linguistics on the Threshold of the Third Millennium”, Diachronica XVIII.1:93—137. |
Vovin 2003 | Vovin, Alexander 2003 | Review of Bhadriraju Krishnamurti, Comparative Dravidian Linguistics: Current Perspectives, Language 79.3:638—639. |
Vovin 2004 | Vovin, Alexander 2004 | Review of Heinrich Werner, Vergleichendes Wörterbuch der Jenissej-Sprachen [Comparative Dictionary of the Yenisei Languages], Central Asiatic Journal 48.1:149—160. |
Vovin 2005 | Vovin, Alexander 2005 | “The End of the Altaic Controversy”. Review of Sergej A. Starostin, Anna Dybo, and Oleg A. Mudrak, An Etymological Dictionary of Altaic Languages, Central Asiatic Journal. 49.1:71—132. |
Vovin 2006 | Vovin, Alexander 2006 | Review of Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages, Central Asiatic Journal. 50. |
Vovin To appear/a | Vovin, Alexander To appear/a | “Classical Manchu”, in: Alexander Vovin (ed.), The Tungusic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Vovin To appear/b | Vovin, Alexander To appear/b | “Modern Manchu of Heilongjiang”, in: Alexander Vovin (ed.), The Tungusic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Vovin To appear/c | Vovin, Alexander To appear/c | “Historical Stages”, in: Alexander Vovin (ed.), The Tungusic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Vovin To appear/c | Vovin, Alexander To appear/c | “Internal Classification and External Connections”, in: Alexander Vovin (ed.), The Tungusic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Vovin To appear | Vovin, Alexander (ed.) | To appear: The Tungusic Languagues. London and New York, NY: Routledge. |
Vycichl 1959 | Vycichl, Werner 1959 | “Is Egyptian a Semitic Language?”, Kush 7:27—44. |
Vycichl 1975 | Vycichl, Werner 1975 | “Egyptian and the Other Hamito-Semitic Languages”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 201—212. |
Vycichl 1983 | Vycichl, Werner 1983 | Dictionnaire étymologique de la langue copte [Etymological Dictionary of the Coptic Language]. Louvain: Peeters. |
Vycichl 1984 | Vycichl, Werner 1984 | “Hamitic and Semitic Languages”, in: James Bynon (ed.), Current Progress in Afroasiatic Linguistics: Papers from the Third International Hamito-Semitic Congress. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, pp. 483—488. |
Vycichl 1990 | Vycichl, Werner 1990 | La vocalisation de la langue égyptienne [The Vocalization of the Egyptian Language]. Vol. I: La Phonétique [Vol. I: Phonetics]. Cairo: Institut Français d’Archéologie Orientale du Caire. |
Wagner 1997 | Wagner, Ewald 1997 | “Harari”, in: Robert Hetzron (ed.), The Semitic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 486—508. |
Wagner 1958 | Wagner, Heinrich 1958 | “Indogermanisch-Vorderasiatisch-Mediterranes” [Indo-European /Near Eastern/Mediterranean], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 75.1/2:58—75. |
Wailes 1970 | Wailes, Bernard 1970 | “The Origins of Settled Farming in Temperate Europe”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 279—305. |
Walde 1897 | Walde, Alois 1897 | “Die Verbindungen zweier Dentale und tonendes z im Indogermanischen” [The Connections of two Dentals and Tone-final z in Indo-European], Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (KZ) 34:461—536. |
Walde 1927—1932 | Walde, Alois 1927—1932 | Vergleichendes Wörterbuch der indogermanischen Sprachen [Comparative Dictionary of the Indo-European Languages]. Revised and edited by Julius Pokorny. 3 vols. Reprinted 1973. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter. |
Walde—Hofmann 1965—1972 | Walde, Alois, and Johann Baptist Hofmann 1965—1972 | Lateinisches etymologisches Wörterbuch [Latin Etymological Dictionary]. 3 vols. 5th ed. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Walker 1998 | Walker, C. B. F. 1998 | “Cuneiform”, in: J. T. Hooker (ed.), Reading the Past: Ancient Writing from Cuneiform to the Alphabet. New York, NY: Barnes & Noble Books, pp. 15—73. |
Wallace 2004a | Wallace, Rex E. 2004a | “Sabellian Languages”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 812—839. |
Wallace 2004b | Wallace, Rex E. 2004b | “Venetic”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 840—856. |
Wallace 2007 | Wallace, Rex E. 2007 | The Sabellic Languages of Ancient Italy. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Walshe 1965 | Walshe, M. O’C. 1965 | Introduction to the Scandinavian Languages. London: Andre Deutsch. |
Ward 1970 | Ward, Donald J. 1970 | “An Indo-European Mythological Theme in Germanic Tradition”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 405—420. |
Ward 1952 | Ward, William A. 1952 | “Some Egypto-Semitic Roots”, Orientalia 31.4:397—412. |
Ward 1961 | Ward, William A. 1961 | “Comparative Studies in Egyptian and Ugaritic”, Journal of Near Eastern Studies 20.1:31—40. |
Warder 1974 | Warder, A. K. 1974 | Introduction to Pali. 2nd edition. London: Pali Text Society. |
Waterman 1966 | Waterman, John T. 1966 | A History of the German Language. Seattle, WA: University of Washington Press. |
Waterman 1970 | Waterman, John T. 1970 | Perspectives in Linguistics. 2nd edition. Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press. |
Watkins 1962 | Watkins, Calvert 1962 | Indo-European Origins of the Celtic Verb. I. The Sigmatic Aorist. Dublin: The Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies. |
Watkins 1963 | Watkins, Calvert 1963 | “Preliminaries to a Historical and Comparative Analysis of the Syntax of the Old Irish Verb”, Celtica 6:1—49. |
Watkins 1964 | Watkins, Calvert 1964 | “Preliminaries to the Reconstruction of Indo-European Sentence Structure”, in: Horace G. Lunt (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 1035—1045. |
Watkins 1965a | Watkins, Calvert 1965a | “Evidence in Balto-Slavic”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 116—122. |
Watkins 1965b | Watkins, Calvert 1965b | “Evidence in Italic”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 181—189. |
Watkins 1966 | Watkins, Calvert 1966 | “Italo-Celtic Revisited”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 29—50. |
Watkins 1969 | Watkins, Calvert 1969 | Indogermanische Grammatik. Band III/1: Geschichte der indogermanischen Verbalflexion [Indo-European Grammar. Vol. III/1: History of Indo-European Verbal Inflection]. Heidelberg: Carl Winter. |
Watkins 1970 | Watkins, Calvert 1970 | “Studies in Indo-European Legal Language, Institutions, and Mythology”, in: George Cardona, Henry M. Hoenigswald, and Alfred Senn (eds.), Indo-European and Indo-Europeans: Papers Presented at the Third Indo-European Conference at the University of Pennsylvania. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press, pp. 321—354. |
Watkins 1973 | Watkins, Calvert 1973 | “Latin suppus”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 1.3:394—399. |
Watkins 1975a | Watkins, Calvert 1975a | “Reflexes of Laryngeals in Certain Morphological Categories in the Indo-European Languages of Anatolia”, in: Calvert Watkins (ed.), Indo-European Studies II. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, pp. 1—27. |
Watkins 1975b | Watkins, Calvert 1975b | “The Indo-European Family of Greek –ñ÷éò: Linguistics, Poetics, and Mythology”, in: Calvert Watkins (ed.), Indo-European Studies II. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, pp. 504—539. |
Watkins 1977 | Watkins, Calvert 1977 | “Towards Proto-Indo-European Syntax”: Problems and Pseudo-Problems”, in: Calvert Watkins (ed.), Indo-European Studies III. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, pp. 436—437. |
Watkins 1981 | Watkins, Calvert 1981 | “Hittite ḫarziyalla-”, in: Yoël L. Arbeitman and Allan R. Bomhard (eds.), Bono Homini Donum: Essays in Historical Linguistics in Memory of J. Alexander Kerns. Amsterdam: John Benjamins, part I, pp. 345—348. |
Watkins 1982 | Watkins, Calvert 1982 | “Notes on the Plural Formations of the Hittite Neuters”, in: Erich Neu (ed.), Investigationes Philologicae et Comparativae: Gedenkschrift für Heinz Kronasser [Philological and Comparative Investigations: Memorial Volume for Heinz Kronasser]. Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz, pp. 250—262. |
Watkins 1990 | Watkins, Calvert 1990 | “Etymologies, Equations, and Comparanda: Types and Values, and Criteria for Judgment”, in: Philip Baldi (ed.), Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 289—303. |
Watkins 1992 | Watkins, Calvert 1992 | “Indo-European Languages”, in: William Bright (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, vol. 2, pp. 206—212. |
Watkins [2003] | Watkins, Calvert [2003] | [2nd edition, edited by William J. Frawley, vol. 2, pp. 267—274.] |
Watkins 1995 | Watkins, Calvert 1995 | How to Kill a Dragon: Aspects of Indo-European Poetics. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Watkins 1998 | Watkins, Calvert 1998 | “Proto-Indo-European: Comparison and Reconstruction”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 25—73. |
Watkins 2004 | Watkins, Calvert 2004 | “Hittite”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 551—575. |
Watkins 1972 | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) 1972 | Indo-European Studies I. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Watkins 1975 | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) 1975 | Indo-European Studies II. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Watkins 1977 | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) 1977 | Indo-European Studies III. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Watkins 1981 | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) 1981 | Indo-European Studies IV. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Watkins 1985 | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) 1985 | The American Heritage Dictionary of Indo-European Roots. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin Company. |
Watkins [1992] | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) [1992] | [Revised edition. Included as an Appendix to the 3rd edition of the American Heritage Dictionary of the English Language. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin Co., pp. 2090—2134.] |
Watkins [2000] | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) [2000] | [Second edition.] |
Watkins 1987 | Watkins, Calvert (ed.) 1987 | Studies in Memory of Warren Cowgill (1929—1985). Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter. |
Waugh—Monville-Burston 1990 | Waugh, Linda R., and Monique Monville-Burston (eds.) 1990 | On Language / Roman Jakobson. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Wehr 1966 | Wehr, Hans 1966 | A Dictionary of Modern Written Arabic. English translation by J. M. Cowan. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press. |
Weiers 2003 | Weiers, Michael 2003 | “Moghol”, in: Juha Janhunen (ed.), The Mongolic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 248—264. |
Weil 1887 | Weil, Henri 1887 | The Order of Words in the Ancient Languages Compared with that of the Modern Languages. Translated with notes and additions by Charles W. Super. New edition (1978) with an Introduction by Aldo Scaglione. Amsterdam: John Benjamins. |
Weingreen 1959 | Weingreen, J. 1959 | A Practical Grammar of Classical Hebrew. 2nd edition. Reprinted 1975. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Weitenberg 1992 | Weitenberg, J. J. S. 1992 | “The Use of Asyndesis and Particles in Old Hittite Simple Sentences”, in: Onofrio Carruba (ed.), Per una grammatica ittita / Towards a Hittite Grammar. Pavia: Gianni Iuculano Editore, pp. 305—339. |
Welmers 1973 | Welmers, William E. 1973 | African Language Structures. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press. |
Werner 1991 | Werner, Rudolf 1991 | Kleine Einführung ins Hieroglyphen-Luwische [Brief Introduction to Hieroglyphic Luwian]. Göttingen: Vanden-hoeck and Ruprecht. |
Wescott 1974a | Wescott, Roger W. 1974a | “The Origin of Speech”, in: Roger W. Wescott (ed.), Language Origins. Silver Spring, MD: Linstock Press, pp. 103—123. |
Wescott 1974b | Wescott, Roger W. 1974b | “Types of Apophony in Proto-Speech”, in: Roger W. Wescott (ed.), Language Origins. Silver Spring, MD: Linstock Press, pp. 125—176. |
Wescott 1976 | Wescott, Roger W. 1976 | “Protolinguistics and the Study of Protolanguages as an Aid to Glossogonic Research”, Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences 280:104—116. |
Wescott 1986 | Wescott, Roger W. 1986 | Review of Giuliano Bonfante and Larissa Bonfante, The Etruscan Language: An Introduction, Language Sciences 8.2:194—196. |
Wescott 1974 | Wescott, Roger W. (ed.) 1974 | Language Origins. Silver Spring, MD: Linstock Press. |
Whatmough 1970 | Whatmough, Joshua 1970 | The Dialects of Ancient Gaul. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Wheeler 1988a | Wheeler, Max W. 1988a | “Catalan”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 170—208. |
Wheeler 1988b | Wheeler, Max W. 1988b | “Occitan”, in: Martin Harris and Nigel Vincent (eds.), The Romance Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, pp. 246—278. |
Whitney 1885 | Whitney, William Dwight 1885 | The Roots, Verb-Forms and Primary Derivatives of the Sanskrit Language. Reprinted 1945. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society. |
Whitney 1889 | Whitney, William Dwight 1889 | Sanskrit Grammar. 2nd edition. 13th issue (1973). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
Whitney 1979 | Whitney, William Dwight 1979 | The Life and Growth of Language. New Introduction by Charles F. Hockett. New York, NY: Dover Publications, Inc. |
Whittle 1996 | Whittle, Alasdair 1996 | Europe in the Neolithic: The Creation of New Worlds. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Wickman 1955 | Wickman, Bo 1955 | The Form of the Object in the Uralic Languages. Uppsala: Uppsala Universiteits Årsskrift. |
Wickman 1958 | Wickman, Bo 1958 | “Bemerkungen zur jurakischen Lautlehre” [Remarks on Yurak Phonology], Finnisch-ugrische Forschungen 33:96—130. |
Wickman 1988 | Wickman, Bo 1988 | “The History of Uralic Linguistics”, in: Denis Sinor (ed.), The Uralic Languages. Description, History and Foreign Influences. Leiden: E. J. Brill, pp. 792—818. |
Wilhelm 2004a | Wilhelm, Gernot 2004a | “Hurrian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 95—118. |
Wilhelm 2004b | Wilhelm, Gernot 2004b | “Urartian”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 119—137. |
Windfuhr 1979 | Windfuhr, Gernot L. 1979 | Persian Grammar. History and State of its Study. The Hague: Mouton and Co. |
Windfuhr 1987 | Windfuhr, Gernot L. 1987 | “Persian”, in: Bernard Comrie (ed.), The World’s Major Languages. New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
Winkler 2001 | Winkler, Eberhard 2001 | Udmurt. Munich: Lincom Europa. |
Winn 1974 | Winn, Shan M. M. 1974 | “Thoughts on the Question of Indo-European Movements in Anatolia”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 2.2:117—142. |
Winn 1981 | Winn, Shan M. M. 1981 | “Burial Evidence and the Kurgan Culture in Eastern Anatolia c. 3000 B. C.: An Interpretation”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 9.1/2:113—118. |
Winter 1965a | Winter, Werner 1965a | “Armenian Evidence”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 100—115. |
Winter 1965b | Winter, Werner 1965b | “Tocharian Evidence”, in: Werner Winter (ed.), Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 190—211. |
Winter 1966 | Winter, Werner 1966 | “Traces of Dialectal Diversity in Old Armenian”, in: Henrik Birnbaum and Jaan Puhvel (eds.), Ancient Indo-European Dialects. Berkeley and Los Angeles, CA: University of California Press, pp. 201—211. |
Winter 1977 | Winter, Werner 1977 | “Internal Structure and External Relationship of Two Verbal Paradigms: Tocharian B weñ-, A weñ- ‘say’,” Journal of Indo-European Studies 5.2:133—159. |
Winter 1982 | Winter, Werner 1982 | “Indo-European Words for ‘tongue’ and ‘fish’: A Reappraisal”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 10.1/2:167—186. |
Winter 1991 | Winter, Werner 1991 | “The Mediopassive Present Participles in Tocharian A”, Tocharian and Indo-European Studies 5:45—56. |
Winter 1992 | Winter, Werner 1992 | “Armenian, Tocharian, and the ‘Glottalic Theory’,” in: Edgar C. Polomé and Werner Winter (eds.), Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 111—127. |
Winter 1997 | Winter, Werner 1997 | “Lexical Archaisms in the Tocharian Languages”, in: Hans Henrich Hock (ed.), Historical Indo-European and Lexicographical Studies. A Festschrift for Ladislav Zgusta on the Occasion of his 70th Birthday. Berlin and New York, NY: Mouton de Gruyter, pp. 183—193. |
Winter 1998 | Winter, Werner 1998 | “Tocharian”, in: Anna Giacalone Ramat and Paolo Ramat (eds.), The Indo-European Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 154—168. |
Winter 2003 | Winter, Werner 2003 | Review of Douglas Q. Adams, A Dictionary of Tocharian B, Journal of the American Oriental Society 123.1:202—208. |
Winter 1965 | Winter, Werner (ed.) 1965 | Evidence for Laryngeals. The Hague: Mouton. |
Wise—Headland—Brend 2003 | Wise, Mary Ruth, Thomas N. Headland, and Ruth M. Brend (eds.) 2003 | Language and Life: Essays in Memory of Kenneth L. Pike. Dallas, TX: SIL International. |
Witczak 1996 | Witczak, Krzysztof Tomasz 1996 | “The Pre-Germanic Substrata and Germanic Maritime Vocabulary”, in: Karlene Jones-Bley and Martin E. Huld (eds.), The Indo-Europeanization of Northern Europe: Papers Presented at the International Conference Held at the University of Vilnius, Lithuania, September 1—7, 1994. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 166—180. |
Wolff 2003 | Wolff, H. Ekkehard (ed.) 2003 | Topics in Chadic Linguistics: Papers from the 1st Biennial International Colloquium on Chadic Languages, Leipzig, July 5—8, 2001. Köln: Rüdiger Köppe Verlag. |
Woodard 2004a | Woodard, Roger D. 2004a | “Introduction”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 1—18. |
Woodard 2004b | Woodard, Roger D. 2004b | “Attic Greek”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 614—649. |
Woodard 2004c | Woodard, Roger D. 2004c | “Greek Dialects”, in: Roger D. Woodard (ed.), The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 650—672. |
Woodard 2004 | Woodard, Roger D. (ed.) 2004 | The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the World’s Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
Woodhead—Beene 1967 | Woodhead, D. R., and Wayne Beene 1967 | A Dictionary of Iraqi Arabic: Arabic-English. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press. |
Woodhouse 1932 | Woodhouse, S. C. 1932 | English-Greek Dictionary. 2nd impression (with a Supplement). Reprinted 1971. London: Routledge and Keegan Paul, Ltd. |
Woudhuizen 1991 | Woudhuizen, Fred C. 1991 | “Etruscan & Luwian”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 19.1/2:133—150. |
Woudhuizen 1992a | Woudhuizen, Fred C. 1992a | The Language of the Sea-People. Amsterdam: Najade Press. |
Woudhuizen 1992b | Woudhuizen, Fred C. 1992b | Linguistica Tyrrhenica: A Compendium of Recent Results in Etruscan Linguistics. Amsterdam: Gieben. |
Woudhuizen 1995 | Woudhuizen, Fred C. 1995 | “The Late Hittite Empire in the Light of Recently Discovered Hieroglyphic Luwian Texts”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 23.1/2:53—81. |
Wright 1907 | Wright, Joseph 1907 | Historical German Grammar. Reprinted 1966. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Wright 1954 | Wright, Joseph 1954 | Grammar of the Gothic Language. 2nd edition by O. L. Sayce. Reprinted 1966. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Wright 1955 | Wright, Joseph 1955 | A Middle High German Primer. 5th edition revised by M. O’C. Walshe. Reprinted 1968. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Wright—Wright 1924 | Wright, Joseph, and Elizabeth Mary Wright 1924 | An Elementary Historical New English Grammar. Reprinted 1962. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Wright—Wright 1925 | Wright, Joseph, and Elizabeth Mary Wright 1925 | Old English Grammar. 3rd edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Wright—Wright 1928 | Wright, Joseph, and Elizabeth Mary Wright 1928 | An Elementary Middle English Grammar. 2nd edition. Reprinted 1967. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Wright 1890 | Wright, William 1890 | Lectures on the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages. Reprinted 1966. Amsterdam: Philo Press. |
Wright 1971 | Wright, William 1971 | A Grammar of the Arabic Language. 3rd edition revised by W. R. Smith and M. J. Goeje. London: Cambridge University Press. |
Wüst 1954 | Wüst, W. 1954 | “Ein weitere indogermanisch-finnisch-ugrischen Zusammenhang?” [A Further Indo-European/Finno-Ugrian Connection?], Ural-Altaische Jahrbücher 26.3/4:135—138. |
Wyatt 1970 | Wyatt, William F. Jr. 1970 | Indo-European /a/. Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press. |
Wyatt 1972a | Wyatt, William F. Jr. 1972a | The Greek Prothetic Vowel. American Philological Association. |
Wyatt 1972b | Wyatt, William F. Jr. 1972b | Review of Calvert Watkins, Indogermanische Grammatik. Band III/1. Geschichte der indogermanischen Verbalflexion [Indo-European Grammar. Vol. III/1. History of Indo-European Verbal Inflection], Language 48.3:687—695. |
Yakar 1981 | Yakar, Jak 1981 | “The Indo-Europeans and their Impact on Anatolian Cultural Development”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 9.1/2:94—112. |
Yates 1954 | Yates, Kyle 1954 | The Essentials of Biblical Hebrew. Revised edition by John Joseph Owens. New York, NY: Harper and Row. |
Yoshida 1990 | Yoshida, Kazuhiko 1990 | The Hittite Mediopassive Endings in -ri. Berlin and New York, NY: Walter de Gruyter. |
Yoshida 1991 | Yoshida, Kazuhiko 1991 | “Reconstruction of Anatolian Verbal Endings: The Third Person Plural Preterites”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 19.3/4:357—374. |
Zaborski 1975 | Zaborski, Andrzej 1975 | “Materials for a Comparative Dictionary of Cushitic Languages: Somali-Galla Comparisons”, in: James Bynon and Theodora Bynon (eds.), Hamito-Semitica. The Hague: Mouton, pp. 321—331. |
Zaborski 1990 | Zaborski, Andrzej 1990 | “Preliminary Remarks on Case Morphemes in Omotic”, in: Richard J. Hayward (ed.), Omotic Language Studies. London: University of London, School of Oriental and African Studies, pp. 617—639. |
Zaborski 1992 | Zaborski, Andrzej 1992 | “Afro-Asiatic Languages”, in: William Bright (ed.), International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, vol. 1, pp. 36—37. |
Zaic 1998 | Zaic, Gábor 1998 | “Mordva”, in: Daniel Abondolo (ed.), The Uralic Languages. London and New York, NY: Routledge, pp. 184—218. |
Zakár 1971 | Zakár, Andras 1971 | “Sumerian/Ural-Altaic Affinities”, Current Anthropology 12:215—225. |
Zgusta 1951 | Zgusta, Ladislav 1951 | “La théorie laryngale” [The Laryngeal Theory], Archív Orientální 19:428—472. |
Zide—Zvelebil 1976 | Zide, Arlene R. K., and Kamil V. Zvelebil (eds.) 1976 | The Soviet Decipherment of the Indus Valley Script: Translation and Critique. The Hague: Mouton. |
Zimansky 2001 | Zimansky, Paul 2001 | “Archaeological Inquiries into Ethno-Linguistic Diversity in Urartu”, in: Robert Drews (ed.), Greater Anatolia and the Indo-Hittite Language Family. Papers Presented at a Colloquium Hosted by the University of Richmond, March 18—19, 2000. Washington, DC: Institute for the Study of Man, pp. 15—27. |
Zimmer 1988 | Zimmer, Stefan 1988 | “On Dating Proto-Indo-European: A Call for Honesty”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 16.3/4:371—375. |
Zimmer 1990a | Zimmer, Stefan 1990a | “On Indo-Europeanization”, Journal of Indo-European Studies 18.1/2:141—155. |
Zimmer 1990b | Zimmer, Stefan 1990b | “The Investigation of Proto-Indo-European History: Methods, Problems, Limitations”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 311—344. |
Zimmern 1898 | Zimmern, Heinrich 1898 | Vergleichende Grammatik der semitischen Sprachen [Comparative Grammar of the Semitic Languages]. Berlin: Reuther and Reichard. |
Zoega 1910 | Zoega, Geir T. 1910 | A Concise Dictionary of Old Icelandic. Reprinted 1975. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
Zvelebil 1970 | Zvelebil, Kamil V. 1970 | Comparative Dravidian Phonology. The Hague: Mouton. |
Zvelebil 1974 | Zvelebil, Kamil V. 1974 | “Dravidian and Elamite: A Real Breakthrough?”, Journal of the American Oriental Society 94:364—385. |
Zvelebil 1977 | Zvelebil, Kamil V. 1977 | A Sketch of Comparative Dravidian Morphology. Part I. The Hague: Mouton. |
Zvelebil 1990 | Zvelebil, Kamil V. 1990 | Dravidian Linguistics: An Introduction. Pondicherry: Institute of Linguistics and Culture. |
Zvelebil 1991 | Zvelebil, Kamil V. 1991 | “Long-Range Language Comparison in New Models of Language Development: the Case of Dravidian”, PILC Journal of Dravidic Studies 1:21—31. |
Zvelebil 1999 | Zvelebil, Kamil V. 1999 | “The Dravidian Perspective”, in: Colin Renfrew and Daniel Nettle (eds.), Nostratic: Examining a Linguistic Macrofamily. Cambridge: The McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research, pp. 359—365. |
Zvelebil—Zvelebil 1990 | Zvelebil, Marek, and Kamil V. Zvelebil 1990 | “Agricultural Transition, ‘Indo-European Origins’ and the Spread of Farming”, in: Thomas L. Markey and John A. C. Greppin (eds.), When Worlds Collide: Indo-Europeans and Pre-Indo-Europeans. The Bellagio Papers. Ann Arbor, MI: Karoma Publishers, pp. 237—266. |